NEAX2400 IPX System Operations And Maintenance Manual (IPX U Type) PDF NEC Op Maint Type

IPX System Op and Maint (IPX-U Type)(2430710w) IPX System Op and Maint (IPX-U Type)(2430710w)

NEC IPX System Op and Maint IPX U Type NEC_IPX_System_Op_and_Maint_IPX_U_Type www.TelecomUserGuides.com Access User Guides, Manuals and Brochures

User Manual: PDF T E X T F I L E S

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 724 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Table of Contents
List of Figures
List of Tables
CHAPTER 1 Introduction
- 1. General
- 2. How to Follow the Manual
CHAPTER 2 System Maintenance Outline
CHAPTER 3 System Messages
CHAPTER 4 Unit/Circuit Card Replacement Procedure
CHAPTER 5 Fault Repair Procedures
CHAPTER 6 System Operations
CHAPTER 7 Routine Maintenance Procedure
CHAPTER 8 Maintenance Commands

OCTOBER, 2000

NEC America, Inc.

NDA-24307

Issue 1

STOCK #200789

System Operations and Maintenance Manual

(IPX-U Type)

LIABILITY DISCLAIMER

NEC America, Inc. reserves the right to change the specifications, functions, or

features, at any time, without notice.

NEC America, Inc. has prepared this document for use by its employees and

customers. The information contained herein is the property of NEC America,

Inc. and shall not be reproduced without prior written approval from NEC

America, Inc.

NEAX and Dterm are registered trademarks of NEC Corporation.

NEC America, Inc.

Printed in the U.S.A.

ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4

DATE OCTOBER, 2000 DATE DATE DATE

ISSUE 5 ISSUE 6 ISSUE 7 ISSUE 8

DATE DATE DATE DATE

NEAX2400 IPX

System Operations and Maintenance Manual (IPX-U Type)

Revision Sheet 1/10

NDA-24307

PAGE No. ISSUE No.

12345678

i 1

ii 1

iii 1

iv 1

v 1

vi 1

vii 1

viii 1

ix 1

x 1

xi 1

xii 1

xiii 1

xiv 1

xv 1

xvi 1

1 1

2 1

3 1

4 1

5 1

6 1

7 1

8 1

9 1

10 1

11 1

12 1

13 1

14 1

15 1

16 1

17 1

18 1

19 1

20 1

21 1

22 1

23 1

24 1

25 1

26 1

27 1

28 1

29 1

30 1

31 1

32 1

33 1

34 1

35 1

36 1

37 1

38 1

39 1

40 1

41 1

42 1

43 1

44 1

45 1

46 1

47 1

48 1

49 1

50 1

51 1

52 1

53 1

54 1

55 1

56 1

57 1

58 1

59 1

60 1

PAGE N o. ISSUE No.

12345678

ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4

DATE OCTOBER, 2000 DATE DATE DATE

ISSUE 5 ISSUE 6 ISSUE 7 ISSUE 8

DATE DATE DATE DATE

NEAX2400 IPX

System Operations and Maintenance Manual (IPX-U Type)

Revision Sheet 2/10

NDA-24307

61 1

62 1

63 1

64 1

65 1

66 1

67 1

68 1

69 1

70 1

71 1

72 1

73 1

74 1

75 1

76 1

77 1

78 1

79 1

80 1

81 1

82 1

83 1

84 1

85 1

86 1

87 1

88 1

89 1

90 1

91 1

92 1

93 1

94 1

95 1

96 1

97 1

98 1

PAGE No. ISSUE No.

12345678

99 1

100 1

101 1

102 1

103 1

104 1

105 1

106 1

107 1

108 1

109 1

110 1

111 1

112 1

113 1

114 1

115 1

116 1

117 1

118 1

119 1

120 1

121 1

122 1

123 1

124 1

125 1

126 1

127 1

128 1

129 1

130 1

131 1

132 1

133 1

134 1

135 1

136 1

PAGE No. ISSUE No.

12345678

ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4

DATE OCTOBER, 2000 DATE DATE DATE

ISSUE 5 ISSUE 6 ISSUE 7 ISSUE 8

DATE DATE DATE DATE

NEAX2400 IPX

System Operations and Maintenance Manual (IPX-U Type)

Revision Sheet 3/10

NDA-24307

137 1

138 1

139 1

140 1

141 1

142 1

143 1

144 1

145 1

146 1

147 1

148 1

149 1

150 1

151 1

152 1

153 1

154 1

155 1

156 1

157 1

158 1

159 1

160 1

161 1

162 1

163 1

164 1

165 1

166 1

167 1

168 1

169 1

170 1

171 1

172 1

173 1

174 1

PAGE No. ISSUE No.

12345678

175 1

176 1

177 1

178 1

179 1

180 1

181 1

182 1

183 1

184 1

185 1

186 1

187 1

188 1

189 1

190 1

191 1

192 1

193 1

194 1

195 1

196 1

197 1

198 1

199 1

200 1

201 1

202 1

203 1

204 1

205 1

206 1

207 1

208 1

209 1

210 1

211 1

212 1

PAGE No. ISSUE No.

12345678

ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4

DATE OCTOBER, 2000 DATE DATE DATE

ISSUE 5 ISSUE 6 ISSUE 7 ISSUE 8

DATE DATE DATE DATE

NEAX2400 IPX

System Operations and Maintenance Manual (IPX-U Type)

Revision Sheet 4/10

NDA-24307

213 1

214 1

215 1

216 1

217 1

218 1

219 1

220 1

221 1

222 1

223 1

224 1

225 1

226 1

227 1

228 1

229 1

230 1

231 1

232 1

233 1

234 1

235 1

236 1

237 1

238 1

239 1

240 1

241 1

242 1

243 1

244 1

245 1

246 1

247 1

248 1

249 1

250 1

PAGE No. ISSUE No.

12345678

251 1

252 1

253 1

254 1

255 1

256 1

257 1

258 1

259 1

260 1

261 1

262 1

263 1

264 1

265 1

266 1

267 1

268 1

269 1

270 1

271 1

272 1

273 1

274 1

275 1

276 1

277 1

278 1

279 1

280 1

281 1

282 1

283 1

284 1

285 1

286 1

287 1

288 1

PAGE No. ISSUE No.

12345678

ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4

DATE OCTOBER, 2000 DATE DATE DATE

ISSUE 5 ISSUE 6 ISSUE 7 ISSUE 8

DATE DATE DATE DATE

NEAX2400 IPX

System Operations and Maintenance Manual (IPX-U Type)

Revision Sheet 5/10

NDA-24307

289 1

290 1

291 1

292 1

293 1

294 1

295 1

296 1

297 1

298 1

299 1

300 1

301 1

302 1

303 1

304 1

305 1

306 1

307 1

308 1

309 1

310 1

311 1

312 1

313 1

314 1

315 1

316 1

317 1

318 1

319 1

320 1

321 1

322 1

323 1

324 1

325 1

326 1

PAGE No. ISSUE No.

12345678

327 1

328 1

329 1

330 1

331 1

332 1

333 1

334 1

335 1

336 1

337 1

338 1

339 1

340 1

341 1

342 1

343 1

344 1

345 1

346 1

347 1

348 1

349 1

350 1

351 1

352 1

353 1

354 1

355 1

356 1

357 1

358 1

359 1

360 1

361 1

362 1

363 1

364 1

PAGE No. ISSUE No.

12345678

ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4

DATE OCTOBER, 2000 DATE DATE DATE

ISSUE 5 ISSUE 6 ISSUE 7 ISSUE 8

DATE DATE DATE DATE

NEAX2400 IPX

System Operations and Maintenance Manual (IPX-U Type)

Revision Sheet 6/10

NDA-24307

365 1

366 1

367 1

368 1

369 1

370 1

371 1

372 1

373 1

374 1

375 1

376 1

377 1

378 1

379 1

380 1

381 1

382 1

383 1

384 1

385 1

386 1

387 1

388 1

389 1

390 1

391 1

392 1

393 1

394 1

395 1

396 1

397 1

398 1

399 1

400 1

401 1

402 1

PAGE No. ISSUE No.

12345678

403 1

404 1

405 1

406 1

407 1

408 1

409 1

410 1

411 1

412 1

413 1

414 1

415 1

416 1

417 1

418 1

419 1

420 1

421 1

422 1

423 1

424 1

425 1

426 1

427 1

428 1

429 1

430 1

431 1

432 1

433 1

434 1

435 1

436 1

437 1

438 1

439 1

440 1

PAGE No. ISSUE No.

12345678

ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4

DATE OCTOBER, 2000 DATE DATE DATE

ISSUE 5 ISSUE 6 ISSUE 7 ISSUE 8

DATE DATE DATE DATE

NEAX2400 IPX

System Operations and Maintenance Manual (IPX-U Type)

Revision Sheet 7/10

NDA-24307

441 1

442 1

443 1

444 1

445 1

446 1

447 1

448 1

449 1

450 1

451 1

452 1

453 1

454 1

455 1

456 1

457 1

458 1

459 1

460 1

461 1

462 1

463 1

464 1

465 1

466 1

467 1

468 1

469 1

470 1

471 1

472 1

473 1

474 1

475 1

476 1

477 1

478 1

PAGE No. ISSUE No.

12345678

479 1

480 1

481 1

482 1

483 1

484 1

485 1

486 1

487 1

488 1

489 1

490 1

491 1

492 1

493 1

494 1

495 1

496 1

497 1

498 1

499 1

500 1

501 1

502 1

503 1

504 1

505 1

506 1

507 1

508 1

509 1

510 1

511 1

512 1

513 1

514 1

515 1

516 1

PAGE No. ISSUE No.

12345678

ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4

DATE OCTOBER, 2000 DATE DATE DATE

ISSUE 5 ISSUE 6 ISSUE 7 ISSUE 8

DATE DATE DATE DATE

NEAX2400 IPX

System Operations and Maintenance Manual (IPX-U Type)

Revision Sheet 8/10

NDA-24307

517 1

518 1

519 1

520 1

521 1

522 1

523 1

524 1

525 1

526 1

527 1

528 1

529 1

530 1

531 1

532 1

533 1

534 1

535 1

536 1

537 1

538 1

539 1

540 1

541 1

542 1

543 1

544 1

545 1

546 1

547 1

548 1

549 1

550 1

551 1

552 1

553 1

554 1

PAGE No. ISSUE No.

12345678

555 1

556 1

557 1

558 1

559 1

560 1

561 1

562 1

563 1

564 1

565 1

566 1

567 1

568 1

569 1

570 1

571 1

572 1

573 1

574 1

575 1

576 1

577 1

578 1

579 1

580 1

581 1

582 1

583 1

584 1

585 1

586 1

587 1

588 1

589 1

590 1

591 1

592 1

PAGE No. ISSUE No.

12345678

ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4

DATE OCTOBER, 2000 DATE DATE DATE

ISSUE 5 ISSUE 6 ISSUE 7 ISSUE 8

DATE DATE DATE DATE

NEAX2400 IPX

System Operations and Maintenance Manual (IPX-U Type)

Revision Sheet 9/10

NDA-24307

593 1

594 1

595 1

596 1

597 1

598 1

599 1

600 1

601 1

602 1

603 1

604 1

605 1

606 1

607 1

608 1

609 1

610 1

611 1

612 1

613 1

614 1

615 1

616 1

617 1

618 1

619 1

620 1

621 1

622 1

623 1

624 1

625 1

626 1

627 1

628 1

629 1

630 1

PAGE No. ISSUE No.

12345678

631 1

632 1

633 1

634 1

635 1

636 1

637 1

638 1

639 1

640 1

641 1

642 1

643 1

644 1

645 1

646 1

647 1

648 1

649 1

650 1

651 1

652 1

653 1

654 1

655 1

656 1

657 1

658 1

659 1

660 1

661 1

662 1

663 1

664 1

665 1

666 1

667 1

668 1

PAGE No. ISSUE No.

12345678

ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4

DATE OCTOBER, 2000 DATE DATE DATE

ISSUE 5 ISSUE 6 ISSUE 7 ISSUE 8

DATE DATE DATE DATE

NEAX2400 IPX

System Operations and Maintenance Manual (IPX-U Type)

Revision Sheet 10/10

NDA-24307

669 1

670 1

671 1

672 1

673 1

674 1

675 1

676 1

677 1

678 1

679 1

680 1

681 1

682 1

683 1

684 1

685 1

686 1

687 1

688 1

689 1

690 1

691 1

692 1

693 1

694 1

695 1

696 1

PAGE No. ISSUE No.

12345678 PAG E No. ISSUE No.

12345678

NDA-24307 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page i

Issue 1

NDA-24307

ISSUE 1

OCTOBER, 2000

NEAX2400 IPX

System Operations and Maintenance Manual

(IPX-U Type)

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page

LIST OF FIGURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi

LIST OF TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv

CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

2. HOW TO FOLLOW THE MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

1.1 Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

1.2 Administrative Management Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

1.3 How to Follow This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

2. BASIC KNOWLEDGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

2.1 System Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

2.1.1 Configuration of the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

2.2 Line Equipment Numbers (LENS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

2.2.1 Module Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

2.2.2 Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

2.2.3 Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

2.2.4 Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

2.3 Local Partition (LP) Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

2.4 Assignment of Network Control Node (NCN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

2.5 System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

2.6 Fault Detecting Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

2.7 Range of Faults Specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

2.8 Explanation of Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

3. HOW TO READ PRECAUTIONS, DIAGNOSTIC, AND FAULT REPAIR INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . 41

3.1 Precaution about Diagnostic Procedure/Fault Repair Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

3.2 How to Follow Diagnostic Procedure/Fault Repair Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

4. REPORTING FAULT TO NEC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

4.1 Fault Reporting Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

4.2 Forwarding Faulty Circuit Card Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

0-C Reset Interrupt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

0-D CPU Clock Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

0-E C-Level Infinite Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

0-F Memory Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

TABLE OF CONTENTS NDA-24307

Page ii

Issue 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)

Page

0-G B-Level Infinite Loop (Permanent) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

0-H B-Level Infinite Loop (Temporary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

0-I Mate CPU Failure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

0-J Abnormal Interrupt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

1-A Both TSW Failure (Permanent) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

1-B TSW Failure (Permanent) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

1-C Both TSW Write Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

1-D TSW Write Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

1-E Both TSW Clock Failure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

1-F TSW Clock Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

1-G Both HSW Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

1-H HSW Failure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

1-I Both HSW Write Failure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

1-J HSW Write Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

1-K Both HSW CLK Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

1-L HSW CLK Failure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

1-O Both PLO Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

1-P PLO Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

1-S Module Group Down Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

1-T TSW ACT Change Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

1-U DLKC Data Transfer Failure (Permanent) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

1-V DLKC Data Transfer Failure (Temporary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

1-W PLO Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

1-X LN → ISW CLK/FH Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

1-Y LN → ISW CLK/FH Failure (Both) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

1-Z LN → ISW CLK/FH Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

3-B C-Level Infinite Loop (Permanent) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

3-C C-Level Infinite Loop (Temporary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

3-D Lock-Up Failure (Permanent). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

3-E Lock-Up Failure (Temporary). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

3-F -48V Over Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

3-G Ground Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

3-H Digital Line Warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

3-I Digital Line Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

3-J Digital Line Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

4-C Both TSW Ready Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

4-D TSW Ready Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

4-E Both HSW Ready Failure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

4-F HSW Ready Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

4-Q DLKC Ready Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

4-S MUX Ready Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

4-T Both MUX Ready Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

4-U PCI Card Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

4-V PCI Card Failure Recovered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

6-A System Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

6-B RGU and Howler Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

6-C Line Load Control Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

6-D Line Load Control Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

6-H Bad Call Notification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

NDA-24307 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page iii

Issue 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)

Page

6-I STA-Test Connection Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

6-J Emergency Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

6-L Emergency Control Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

6-M Emergency Control Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

6-N Abnormal Call Duration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

6-O SMDR Output Buffer Overflow Alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

6-P SMDR Output Buffer Overflow Release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

7-A System Initialize With Data Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

7-B System Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

7-C CPU MBR Key Turn ON. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

7-D CPU MBR Key Turn OFF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

7-E TSW MBR Key Turn ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

7-F TSW MBR Key Turn OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

7-I ALMC MB Key Turn ON. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

7-J ALMC MB Key Turn OFF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

7-K PM MB Key Turn ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

7-L PM MB Key Turn OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

7-M NCU MB Key Turn ON. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

7-N NCU MB Key Turn OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

7-O Cyclic Diagnosis Normal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

7-P Cyclic Diagnosis Information (Error Detected). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

7-U PLO MB Key Turn ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

7-V PLO MB Key Turn OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

13-A CCH Clock Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

13-B CCH C-Level Infinite Loop Failure (Permanent) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

13-C CCH C-Level Infinite Loop Failure (Temporary). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

13-D CCH Lock-Up Failure (Permanent) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

13-E CCH Lock-Up Failure (Temporary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

13-F CCH B-Level Infinite Loop Failure (Permanent). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

13-G CCH B-Level Infinite Loop Failure (Temporary). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

13-H CCS Link Failure (Permanent). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

13-I CCS Link Failure (Temporary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

13-J Restoration From CCS Link Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

13-K CCH Reset Interrupt Failure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

13-N Digital Line Warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

13-O Digital Line Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

13-P Digital Line Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

13-Q DAU Battery Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

13-R DAU Line Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

13-Z Power Failure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

15-A VPS Failure (Temporary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

15-B VPS Failure (Permanent) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

15-C VPS Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

16-A Inside Trunk All Busy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

16-B Virtual Tie Line Set Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

16-C Virtual Tie Line Cancel Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

16-E Virtual Tie Line Set Time Out. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

16-F Sender Start Time Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

16-K I/O Port Line OFF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

TABLE OF CONTENTS NDA-24307

Page iv

Issue 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)

Page

16-L I/O Port Line Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

16-M Hard Clock Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

16-N Hard Clock Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

16-T IOC Failure (Temporary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

16-U IOC Failure (Permanent) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

16-X Station Exchanged Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

17-A CCH MBR Key Turn ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

17-B CCH MBR Key Turn OFF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

17-C CCH MB Key Turn ON. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

17-D CCH MB Key Turn OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

17-H Day/Night Change Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

17-O IOC MB Key Turn ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

17-P IOC MB Key Turn OFF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

17-Q IOC MBR Key Turn ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

17-R IOC MBR Key Turn OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

17-Y GATE-HSW MBR Key ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

17-Z GATE-HSW MBR Key OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

23-P Dch Back-Up Automatic Change Start/End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

23-Q Dch Back-Up Manual Change Start/End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

23-Y MUX Clock Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

23-Z Both MUX Clock Failure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

26-N MAT Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

26-R Call Trace. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

26-V LAN Interface Error Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

26-W LAN Interface Release Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

27-E DLMX MBR Key Turn ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

27-F DLMX MBR Key Turn OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

27-G DLMX ACT Change Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

33-A MUX Clock Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

33-B SDT Alarm Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

33-C SDT Alarm Trouble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

33-D SDT Alarm Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

33-E SDT Interface Change Notify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

CHAPTER 4 UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

1. LPM ACCOMMODATING UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

1.1 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

1.2 Circuit Card Mounting Face Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

1.3 Operating Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

1.3.1 CPR Replacement Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

1.3.2 EMA Card Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

1.3.3 IOC Card Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

1.3.4 Power Supply Unit Replacement Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

1.3.5 MISC Card Replacement Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

1.3.6 MMC Card Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

2. TSWM ACCOMMODATING CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

2.1 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

2.2 Circuit Card Mounting Face Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

2.3 Operating Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

NDA-24307 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page v

Issue 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)

Page

2.3.1 GT Card Replacement Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

2.3.2 TSW Card Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

2.3.3 DLKC Card Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

2.3.4 PLO Card Replacement Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

2.3.5 CLK Card Replacement Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

2.3.6 PWR SW Card Replacement Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

2.3.7 MISC Card Replacement Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

3. PIM ACCOMMODATING CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

3.1 Precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

3.2 Circuit Card Mounting Face Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

3.3 Operating Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

3.3.1 LC/TRK Circuit Card Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

3.3.2 MUX Card Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

3.3.3 PWR Card Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

3.3.4 HUB Circuit Card Replacement Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

3.3.5 SDT Card Replacement Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

3.3.6 DLMX Card Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

4. ISWM ACCOMMODATING CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

4.1 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

4.2 Circuit Card Mounting Face Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

4.3 Operating Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

4.3.1 IOGT Card Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

4.3.2 TSW Card Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

4.3.3 HSW Card Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

4.3.4 PLO Card Replacement Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

4.3.5 PWR SW Card Replacement Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

5. FAN UNIT REPLACEMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

6. CPR COOLING FAN REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

7. FUSE REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

CHAPTER 5 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

1. LINE FAULT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

1.1 Check Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

1.2 Line Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

1.3 Line Fault - When Dial Tone (DT) Cannot Be Heard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

1.4 Line Fault - When Dialing Results in a Wrong Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

1.5 Line Fault - When Bell Does Not Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

1.6 When Call Cannot Be Answered and Speech Cannot Be Made . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

1.7 Dterm Fault. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370

2. TRUNK FAULT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

2.1 Check Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

2.2 Trunk Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

2.3 Trunk (ORT, SND, CFT) Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

2.4 Trunk (COT, TLT, DTI) Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

3. ATTCON/DESKCON FAULT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

3.1 Check Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

3.2 ATTCON/DESKCON Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

TABLE OF CONTENTS NDA-24307

Page vi

Issue 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)

Page

3.3 ATTCON/DESKCON Fault. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

4. UNIT FAULT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

4.1 Check Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386

4.2 Unit Fault - Fault Related to Speech . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

4.3 Unit Fault - When Dial Tone (DT) Cannot Be Heard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

4.4 Unit Fault - ACT-Side MUX Card Is Faulty and System Has Changed Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

5. SPEECH PATH (TSW) SYSTEM FAULT (LN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398

5.1 Check Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398

5.2 Speech Path System Fault - Fault Related to Speech. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401

5.3 Speech Path System Fault - When Dial Tone (DT) Cannot Be Heard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

5.4 Speech Path System Fault (LN) - STBY Side Has Become Faulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

6. SPEECH PATH SYSTEM FAULT (WHOLE SYSTEM/ISW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408

6.1 Check Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408

6.2 Speech Path System Fault (Whole System/ISW) - Fault Related to Speech. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

6.3 Speech Path System Fault (Whole System/ISW) - ACT side becomes Faulty Intermittently . . 410

6.4 Speech Path System Fault (Whole System/ISW) - STBY side becomes Faulty Intermittently . 411

6.5 PLO Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

7. CONTROL SYSTEM FAULT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

7.1 Check Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

7.2 Control System Fault - Fault Occurs Intermittently. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414

7.3 Control System Fault - STBY Side is Faulty. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416

8. ALARM INDICATION FAULT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417

8.1 Check Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417

8.2 Fault of Alarm Indicating Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417

8.3 Fault That Cannot Be Detected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

9. POWER SUPPLY FAULT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424

9.1 Check Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424

9.2 Fuse Blown Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430

9.3 Circuit Breaker OFF Fault in PWR Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431

9.4 Fault of Alarm Lamps on PWR Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432

10. FAN UNIT FAULT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433

10.1 Check Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433

10.2 Fan Unit Fault. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434

11. TONE FAULT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436

11.1 Check Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436

11.2 Tone Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437

12. SYSTEM DOWN FAULT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439

12.1 When Cause for Fault Cannot Be Identified. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440

12.2 When Faulty Circuit Cards Can Be Assumed From System Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

13. COMMON CHANNEL INTEROFFICE SIGNALING (CCIS) LINE FAULT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444

13.1 Check Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444

13.2 CCIS Line Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444

13.3 Specific CCH/CCT Card Is Faulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445

13.4 Fault of CCH, DTI and Related Flat Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446

14. INTEGRATED SERVICE DIGITAL NETWORK (ISDN) LINE FAULT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447

14.1 Check Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447

NDA-24307 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page vii

Issue 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)

Page

14.2 ISDN Line Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447

14.3 Specific DCH/PRT Card Is Faulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448

14.4 Fault of DCH, DTI and Related Flat Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449

15. HARD TIME CLOCK FAULT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450

CHAPTER 6 SYSTEM OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451

1. ALARM INDICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452

1.1 Kinds of Alarm Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452

1.2 How to Stop Alarm Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452

1.3 Alarm Indications on TOPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453

1.4 Variable Alarm Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454

2. COLLECTION OF SYSTEM MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455

2.1 Automatic Printout to System Message Dedicated Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455

2.2 Display on MAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455

3. INDICATION OF LOCKOUT STATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456

3.1 Indicating Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456

3.2 Recovery Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456

4. LINE LOAD CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458

4.1 Operating Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458

5. IOC LINE MONITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462

6. LINE MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463

6.1 Make-Busy/Make-Busy Cancel of Station and Data Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463

6.2 Class Change and Number Change of Station and Data Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464

6.3 Make-Busy/Make-Busy Cancel of C.O. Line/Tie Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464

6.4 Line Management Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465

7. STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING SYSTEM (SMDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466

7.1 Transmission Data to SMDR Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466

7.2 IPX Format (Text Format of Centralized Billing - Fusion). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468

7.3 ICS Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476

7.4 Details on Transmission Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479

7.4.1 Calling Party Information/Called Party Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479

7.4.2 Call Start/Call End Time Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480

7.4.3 Called Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481

7.4.4 Account Code/Authorization Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482

7.4.5 Route Advance Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483

7.4.6 Condition B Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483

7.4.7 Call Metering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484

7.4.8 Office Code of Calling (Called) Party and Billing Process Office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484

7.4.9 Text Format of SMDR - TCP/IP Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485

8. TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488

8.1 The Kind of Traffic Measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488

8.2 Operating Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490

8.2.1 Procedure for Set-up and Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490

8.2.2 Data Output - Details on DTFD/DTFDN Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492

8.2.3 Service Conditions (when performing Traffic Measurement via TCP/IP) . . . . . . . . . . . 495

TABLE OF CONTENTS NDA-24307

Page viii

Issue 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)

Page

9. OFFICE DATA MANAGEMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496

9.1 Office Data Stored Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496

9.2 Office Data Preservation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496

9.3 Office Data Management Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497

9.4 Call Forwarding Data/Individual Speed Calling Data Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500

9.5 One-Touch Speed Call Memory Data Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500

9.6 Commands for Data Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500

10. TEST OPERATIONS OF VARIOUS KINDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501

10.1 Designated Connection Test (Station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502

10.2 Designated Connection Test (DESKCON/ATTCON). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512

10.3 Bad Call Notification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514

11. ROUTINE DIAGNOSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515

11.1 Related System Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515

11.2 Routine Diagnosis Result. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517

12. SYSTEM CONTROL PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518

12.1 Changeover/Make-Busy/Make-Busy Cancel of Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518

12.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518

12.1.2 How to Control CPU Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528

12.1.3 Manual System Changeover of CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530

12.1.4 Forced Changeover of CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534

12.1.5 How to Control Switching Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535

12.1.6 Manual System Changeover of Speech Path System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537

12.1.7 Manual System Changeover of PLO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541

12.2 Initialization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543

12.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543

12.2.2 System Initialization by Turning ON the Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544

12.2.3 System Initialization by Key Operations on TOPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546

12.2.4 System Initialization by Keys on CPU Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554

12.2.5 System Initialization by SINZ/SINZ1 Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555

12.2.6 Peripheral Equipment Initialization (Line/Trunk Initialization) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556

12.3 How to Turn ON/OFF Whole System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557

12.3.1 How to Turn ON a LN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558

12.3.2 How to Turn ON the ISW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559

12.4 How to Turn OFF Whole System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560

12.4.1 How to Turn OFF a LN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560

12.5 System Start-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562

12.5.1 System Start-Up Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562

CHAPTER 7 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567

1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567

1.1 Flow of Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567

1.2 Required Test Equipment and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568

2. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569

3. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES-DETAILED EXPLANATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570

3.1 Check of Ambient Conditions in Switch Room. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571

3.2 Alarm Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572

3.3 MAT/Printer Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573

NDA-24307 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page ix

Issue 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)

Page

3.4 Collection of System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574

3.5 Display of Locked-out Station. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575

3.6 Fan Unit Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576

3.7 Alarm Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577

3.8 Main Power System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578

3.9 Trunk RGU Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579

3.10 ATTCON/DESKCON Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580

3.11 System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582

4. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE CHECK LISTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583

CHAPTER 8 MAINTENANCE COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593

ALLC Assignment of Line Load Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596

ALMG Assignment of Alarm Grade Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597

ATRF Assignment of Traffic Measurement Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598

ATRFN Assignment of Traffic Measurement Order for Fusion Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600

BOSD Back Up One-Touch Speed Call Memory Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602

CADSD Continuous Assignment of Station Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603

CATK Continuous Assignment of Trunk Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606

CBCN Control of Broadcasting for NDM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613

CCSE Change of Common Signaling Channel Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614

CDBU Change of Dch Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615

CMOD Change of System Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616

CMODI Change of System Mode for ISW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617

CMWL Control Message Waiting Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618

CMWL_T Control Message Waiting Lamps - Telephone Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619

CPRS Controlled Alternate PRSCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620

CSCL Continuous Change of Station Class. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621

CSTN Continuous Change of Station Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622

DCBD Display of Call Block Entry Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623

DCEN Display of Connection Trunk LENS Data for LDM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625

DCON Display of Connection Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626

DFTD Display of System Message Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627

DISS Display of Program Issue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628

DLEN Display of LENS Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629

DLSL Display of Lock Out Station - LENS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631

DLSS Display of Lockout Station - Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632

DLSS_T Display of Lock Out Station - Number- Telephone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633

DLTEL Display of Telephone Number from LENS for LDM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634

DNTEL Display of Telephone Number from LENS for NDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635

DPKG Display of Setting Port Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636

DPSW Display Package Switch Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637

DSTN Display of Station Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639

DTELN Display of Telephone Number Data for NDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640

DTF101 Display of Terminal Traffic Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641

DTF102 Display of Route Traffic Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .642

DTF103 Display of Station Peg Count Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643

DTF104 Display of Attendant Peg Count Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644

DTF105 Display of Route Peg Count Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645

DTF201 Display of Service Peg Count Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646

TABLE OF CONTENTS NDA-24307

Page x

Issue 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)

Page

DTF301 Display of UCD Route Peg Count Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647

DTF302 Display of UCD Group Peg Count Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648

DTF303 Display of Station Peg Count Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649

DTF501 Display of Attendant Answering Peg Count Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650

DTF601 Display of Connection Route Peg Count Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651

DTF602 Display of Connection Route Traffic Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652

DTF101N Display of Terminal Traffic Data for Fusion Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653

DTF102N Display of Route Traffic Data for Fusion Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654

DTF103N Display of Station Peg Count Data for Fusion Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655

DTF104N Display of Attendant Peg Count Data for Fusion Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656

DTF105N Display of Route Peg Count Data for Fusion Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657

DTF201N Display of Service Peg Count Data for Fusion Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658

DTF301N Display of UCD Route Peg Count Data for Fusion Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659

DTF302N Display of UCD Group Peg Count Data for Fusion Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660

DTF303N Display of Station Peg Count Data for Fusion Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661

DTF501N Display of Attendant Answering Peg Count Data for Fusion Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662

DTF601N Display of Connection Route Peg Count Data for Fusion Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663

DTF602N Display of Connection Route Traffic Data for Fusion Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664

FLINST File Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665

HDD_FDD Data Control Between HDD and FDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666

HDD_MAT Data Control Between HDD and MAT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667

HDD_MAT_N Data Control Between HDD and MAT for NDM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668

HDFP HDD Format of PBX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669

MBCT Make Busy of Connection Trunk for LDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670

MBLE Make Busy of LENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671

MBPM Make Busy of Port Microprocessor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672

MBRT Make Busy of Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .673

MBSM Make Busy of System Message Printout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674

MBST Make Busy of Station. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .675

MBST_T Make Busy of Station - Telephone Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676

MBTC Make Busy of Trunk-Continuous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677

MBTK Make Busy of Trunk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678

MEM_HDD Data Control Between Memory and HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679

MEM_HDD_N Data Control Between Memory and HDD for NDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680

MFCH Make Busy of FCCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681

PMBU Port Microprocessor Back Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682

RALM Release Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683

RALMN Release Alarm for NDM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684

RLST Release Station/Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .685

RLST_T Release Station/Trunk - Telephone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686

SINZ System Initialization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688

SINZI System Initialization for ISW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .689

SPTS Scanning of Port Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .690

SRTS Scanning of Route Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 694

XHFD X-RAY HD or FDD Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695

NDA-24307 LIST OF FIGURES

Page xi

Issue 1

LIST OF FIGURES

Figure Title Page

Figure 2-1 Flow of Administrative Management Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Figure 2-2 NEAX2400 IPX IPX-U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Figure 2-3 System Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Figure 2-4 Details on Inter-node PCM Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Figure 2-5 Details on Ethernet Cable Connections (Establishment of Fusion Link) (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Figure 2-6 Details on Ethernet Cable Connections (Using MAT via Ethernet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Figure 2-7 Face Layout of ISW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Figure 2-8 Face Layout of IMG0 (Local Node) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Figure 2-9 Face Layout of IMG1 (Local Node) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Figure 2-10 Face Layout of IMG2 (Local Node) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Figure 2-11 Face Layout of IMG3 (Local Node) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Figure 2-12 LENS Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Figure 2-13 Module Group Allocations (LN0/1/2/3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Figure 2-14 Unit Number Allocations (LN0/1/2/3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Figure 2-15 Group Number Allocations (LN0/1/2/3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Figure 2-16 Level Number Allocations (LN0/1/2/3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Figure 2-17 LP Number Allocations (LN0/1/2/3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Figure 2-18 Example of NCN Assignment (1/3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Figure 2-19 System Message Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Figure 2-20 Fault Detection General Diagram (via Alarm Lamps on TOPU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Figure 2-21 Fault Detection Block Diagram (via Display of System Messages) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Figure 2-22 Fault Detection Block Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Figure 2-23 General System Block Diagram (1/2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Figure 2-24 CPU Controlling Block Diagram (ISW). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Figure 2-25 CPU Controlling Block Diagram (LN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Figure 2-26 Speech Path Block Diagram (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Figure 2-27 Speech Path Range of Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Figure 2-28 3M® Model 8012 Portable Field Service Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Figure 2-29 How to Hold a Circuit Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Figure 2-30 How to Set the ROM in IC Socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Figure 2-31 How to Clean the Connector Portion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Figure 2-32 How to Clean Gold-Plated Terminal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Figure 2-33 Diagnostic Work Items and Symbols Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Figure 2-34 Recovery Procedure Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Figure 2-35 Circuit Card Version Number, Program Name, and Program Package Version Number . . . . 49

Figure 4-1 Circuit Card Mounting Face Layout of LPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Figure 4-2 CPR Face Layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Figure 4-3 How to Replace the CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Figure 4-4 Removal of Front Panel and Top Cover From CPR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Figure 4-5 Insertion of ISAGT and LANI Cards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Figure 4-6 Reattachment of CPR Top Cover and Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Figure 4-7 Accommodation of New CPR Into LPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Figure 4-8 Insertion of New HFD Into CPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Figure 4-9 Switch Setting on the CPU Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Figure 4-10 Circuit Card Mounting Face Layout of TSWM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Figure 4-11 System Block Diagram (Connections Between GT and CPU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

Figure 4-12 System Block Diagram (TSW and Other Speech Path Echelons). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Figure 4-13 LEDs and Switches for TSW Changeover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

Figure 4-14 Circuit Card Mounting Face Layout of PIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

LIST OF FIGURES NDA-24307

Page xii

Issue 1

LIST OF FIGURES (CONTINUED)

Figure Title Page

Figure 4-15 Circuit Card Mounting Face Layout of ISWM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Figure 4-16 System Block Diagram (IOGT and Other Speech Path Echelons) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

Figure 4-17 FANU Locations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

Figure 4-18 Preparation for FANU Replacement (Fans on TOPU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

Figure 4-19 How to Replace FANU (Fans on TOPU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

Figure 4-20 Preparation for FANU Replacement (Fans in Fan Box). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

Figure 4-21 How to Replace FANU (Fans in Fan Box) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

Figure 4-22 CPR Face Layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

Figure 4-23 Extraction of CPR from LPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

Figure 4-24 Rear View of CPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

Figure 4-25 How to Remove the Cooling Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

Figure 4-26 Kind of Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

Figure 4-27 Fuse After Blown Fault. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

Figure 4-28 Fuse Locations in LPM/PIM/FANU/BASEU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

Figure 4-29 Fuse Location on PWR SW Card (TSWM/ISWM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

Figure 4-30 RGU Fuse Blown Fault Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

Figure 4-31 DC -48V Fuse Blown Fault Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

Figure 5-1 Controlling LC/ELC Circuit Cards and Speech Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

Figure 5-2 Controlling Trunk Circuit Cards and Speech Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

Figure 5-3 ATT Connector Cabling and Connector Leads Accommodation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

Figure 5-4 Range of Units (LN0/1/2/3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

Figure 5-5 Unit Control Block Diagram (Dual Configuration). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386

Figure 5-6 Unit Control Block Diagram (Single Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387

Figure 5-7 MUX Card Locations (LN0/1/2/3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387

Figure 5-8 Speech Path Block Diagram (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

Figure 5-9 System Messages Related to Speech Path System Fault (Whole System/ISW) . . . . . . . . . . 408

Figure 5-10 Cable Routing for Alarm Indications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418

Figure 5-11 Cabling Related to Alarm Indicating Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419

Figure 5-12 Distribution/Collection of Key/Alarm Information within the System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420

Figure 5-13 Alarm Bus Cable Connections Diagram (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421

Figure 5-14 Block Diagram of Power Supply System (ISW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424

Figure 5-15 Block Diagram of Power Supply System (IMG0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425

Figure 5-16 Block Diagram of Power Supply System (IMG1/IMG2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426

Figure 5-17 Block Diagram of Power Supply System (IMG3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427

Figure 5-18 Power Supply to PIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428

Figure 5-19 Power Supply to LPM (LN/ISW). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428

Figure 5-20 Power Supply to TSWM/ISWM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429

Figure 5-21 Circuit Diagram of Fan Unit and Thermal Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435

Figure 5-22 Dial Tone Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436

Figure 5-23 External Hold Tone Supply Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438

Figure 5-24 System Down Fault Repair Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439

Figure 5-25 Controlling CCIS Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444

Figure 5-26 Controlling ISDN Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447

Figure 6-1 System Status Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451

Figure 6-2 Alarm Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452

Figure 6-3 Alarm Indications on TOPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453

Figure 6-4 Automatic Printout to System Message Dedicated Printer Operating Procedure . . . . . . . . . . 455

Figure 6-5 Recovery Procedure From Lockout Station (1/2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456

Figure 6-6 Line Load Control Operations on ATTCON—Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458

NDA-24307 LIST OF FIGURES

Page xiii

Issue 1

LIST OF FIGURES (CONTINUED)

Figure Title Page

Figure 6-7 Line Load Control Operations on ATTCON—Cancelling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459

Figure 6-8 Line Control Indication (ATTCON) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459

Figure 6-9 Line Load Control Key Operations on DESKON—Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460

Figure 6-10 Line Load Control Key Operations on DESKON—Cancelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460

Figure 6-11 Line Load Control Indication (DESKCON) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461

Figure 6-12 Class Change and Number Change of Station and Data Terminal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . 464

Figure 6-13 Make-Busy/Make-Busy Cancel of C.O. Line/Tie Line Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464

Figure 6-14 Message Format for Outgoing Call - IPX Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470

Figure 6-15 Message Format for Incoming Call - IPX Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471

Figure 6-16 Message Format for Station-to-Station Call - IPX Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472

Figure 6-17 Message Format for Incoming Call - ICS Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476

Figure 6-18 Message Format for Outgoing Call - ICS Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477

Figure 6-19 Message Format for Station-to-Station Call - ICS Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478

Figure 6-20 SMDR—TCP/IP Interface Billing Output Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485

Figure 6-21 IPX “MAT Menu” Display Image (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491

Figure 6-22 DTFD Command Display Image (Example). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493

Figure 6-23 “Listup Report” Window when “View Database” Is Selected (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494

Figure 6-24 “Export” Dialog for Traffic Report Text File Saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494

Figure 6-25 Office Data Change Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497

Figure 6-26 Node-Level Commands for Data Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498

Figure 6-27 Network-level Commands for Data Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499

Figure 6-28 Test Operation Method Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501

Figure 6-29 Register Test Procedure/Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503

Figure 6-30 Sender Test Procedure/Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504

Figure 6-31 3-Party Conference Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505

Figure 6-32 3-Party Conference Test Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506

Figure 6-33 Tone Test Procedure/Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507

Figure 6-34 Interrupt Ringing (IR) Test Procedure/Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509

Figure 6-35 Trunk Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510

Figure 6-36 Trunk Test Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511

Figure 6-37 System Block Diagram for ISW Switching Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519

Figure 6-38 System Block Diagram for LN Switching Network (1/2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520

Figure 6-39 How to Check the LEDs and SW Keys for System Changeover (ISW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522

Figure 6-40 How to Check the LEDs and SW Keys for System Changeover (IMG0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523

Figure 6-41 How to Check the LEDs and SW Keys for System Changeover (IMG1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524

Figure 6-42 How to Check LEDs and SW Keys for System Changeover (IMG2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525

Figure 6-43 How to Check LEDs and SW Keys for System Changeover (IMG3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526

Figure 6-44 How to Check STATUS LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527

Figure 6-45 System Block Diagram in LN (Switching Network Between CPU and GT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529

Figure 6-46 CPU in ACT/STBY Mode (ISW). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530

Figure 6-47 CPU Changeover via MBR Key (ISW). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531

Figure 6-48 LED Indications Before and After CPU Changeover (ISW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531

Figure 6-49 CPU in ACT/STBY Mode (LN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532

Figure 6-50 GT in ACT / STBY Mode (LN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532

Figure 6-51 CPU Changeover via MBR Key (LN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533

Figure 6-52 LED Indications Before and After CPU Changeover (LN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533

Figure 6-53 Forced CPU Changeover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534

Figure 6-54 System Block Diagram (Switching Network for Speech Path System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537

Figure 6-55 IOGT/TSW/HSW/DLKC/MUX in ACT Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538

LIST OF FIGURES NDA-24307

Page xiv

Issue 1

LIST OF FIGURES (CONTINUED)

Figure Title Page

Figure 6-56 IOGT/TSW/HSW/DLKC/MUX in STBY Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538

Figure 6-57 Speech Path System Changeover via Active IOGT MBR Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539

Figure 6-58 LED Indications Before and After Speech Path System Changeover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540

Figure 6-59 PLO/CLK in ACT/STBY Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541

Figure 6-60 PLO Changeover via MB Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542

Figure 6-61 LED Indications Before and After PLO/CLK Changeover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542

Figure 6-62 System Initialization by Turning ON the Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544

Figure 6-63 Conceptional Diagram of Initial Program Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547

Figure 6-64 Keys on the TOPU (ISW). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547

Figure 6-65 Keys on the TOPU (LN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547

Figure 6-66 Related Keys and LEDs for System Initialization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548

Figure 6-67 System Initialization by Keys on CPU Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554

Figure 6-68 System Initialization by SINZ Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555

Figure 6-69 How to Turn ON a LN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558

Figure 6-70 How to Turn ON the ISW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559

Figure 6-71 How to Turn OFF a LN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560

Figure 7-1 Flow of Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568

Figure 7-2 Adjusting Time on ATTCON. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580

Figure 7-3 Desk Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581

NDA-24307 LIST OF TABLES

Page xv

Issue 1

LIST OF TABLES

Table Title Page

Table 2-1 How to Follow This Manual Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Table 2-2 Kinds of Circuit Card Front Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Table 3-1 List of System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Table 3-2 Error Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Table 3-3 Error Kind (ERRK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Table 4-1 LPM Unit/Circuit Cards and Reference Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Table 4-2 TSWM Circuit Cards and Reference Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Table 4-3 PIM Circuit Cards and Reference Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315

Table 4-4 ISW Circuit Cards and Reference Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332

Table 5-1 Fault Repair Procedure Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

Table 5-2 Line Fault Situation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

Table 5-3 Trunk Fault Situation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

Table 5-4 Timings for Trunks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

Table 5-5 Timings for Senders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

Table 5-6 Unit Fault Situation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

Table 5-7 Speech Path (TSW) System Fault Situation (LN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398

Table 5-8 Speech Path (TSW) System Fault Situation (LN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408

Table 5-9 Control System Fault Situation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

Table 5-10 Alarm Indication Fault Situation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417

Table 5-11 PIN Location of External Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419

Table 5-12 PWR Supply Fault Situation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424

Table 5-13 CCIS Line Fault Situation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444

Table 5-14 ISDN Line Fault Situation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447

Table 6-1 Description of Alarm Indications on TOPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453

Table 6-2 Message Judgment Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462

Table 6-3 ASCII Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467

Table 6-4 Kind of Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469

Table 6-5 Traffic Measurement Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488

Table 6-6 Designated Connection Test (Station) Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502

Table 6-7 Tone Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508

Table 6-8 Changeover of CPU Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528

Table 6-9 Changeover of Switching Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535

Table 6-10 Lamp Indications on DSP of CPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545

Table 6-11 System Initialization Procedure Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546

Table 6-12 System Initialization Without Loading Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549

Table 6-13 System Initialization With Office Data Loading Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550

Table 6-14 System Initialization with Program Loading Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551

Table 6-15 System Initialization With Office Data And Program Loading Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552

Table 6-16 System Initialization by Phase 1 Restart Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553

Table 6-17 Line/Trunk Initialization Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556

Table 6-18 How to Turn OFF the ISW Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561

Table 6-19 Start-Up Procedure When Basic and Application Software is Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563

Table 6-20 Start-Up Procedure When Basic, Application Software and Office Data is Installed . . . . . . . 565

Table 7-1 Test Equipment and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568

Table 7-2 List of Routine Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569

Table 7-3 List of Routine Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570

Table 8-1 Command List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593

LIST OF TABLES NDA-24307

Page xvi

Issue 1

This page is for your notes.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 1

Page 1

Issue 1

CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION

1. GENERAL

This manual describes routine system maintenance and fault repair procedures. This chapter explains how to

follow the manual and provides precautions pertaining to maintenance jobs as a whole. Be sure to read this chap-

ter thoroughly before starting the required maintenance job.

2. HOW TO FOLLOW THE MANUAL

If technicians engage in a fault repair with a sufficient amount of knowledge of the system (system

configurations, controlling systems, functions, etc.), the time spent repairing the system is minimized. This

manual provides explanations about the system, while placing emphasis on system configurations, controlling

systems, and functions. If faults of all conceivable cases are to be assumed for the explanations, the explanations

may lack reality and be more difficult to understand. Therefore, this manual provides the explanations on the

basis of the following points:

(1) It is very important to judge whether the fault has occurred in the system or at any of the peripheral

equipment.

(2) In case the system is faulty, explanations will be given about the actions to be taken until you identify the

faulty circuit card/cards.

(3) Explanations will be omitted pertaining to the following faults:

• Fault of peripheral equipment (MAT, telephone sets, etc.)

• Fault due to an error in office data assignment

• Fault due to an error in installation procedure (an error in circuit card switch setting, cross-connection,

etc.)

(4) How to Read This Manual

• When a fault is to be repaired for the first time

See Section 3, How to Read Precautions, Diagnostic,

and Fault Repair Information, Chapter 2.

See Section 4, Reporting Fault to NEC,

in Chapter 2.

Go to Chapter 5.

See Section 3, How to Read Precautions, Diagnostic,

and Fault Repair Information, Chapter 2.

Go to Chapter 5.

CHAPTER 1 NDA-24307

Page 2

Issue 1

INTRODUCTION

• When only the contents of a system message needs to be known, or when a fault is to be diagnosed

from a system message

• When the range of faulty conditions has been specified and a faulty circuit card can be assumed

• When investigating the system for the purpose of a fault repair

• When replacing a unit/circuit card with a spare

• When performing routine maintenance

Chapter 5

See Section 4, Reporting Fault to NEC, in Chapter 2.

Chapter 5

See Section 4, Reporting Fault to NEC, in Chapter 2.

Chapter 5

Chapter 4

Chapter 7

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 2

Page 3

Issue 1

CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

1. GENERAL

1.1 Purpose

This chapter explains the outline of fault diagnosis and duties necessary to maintain the PBX.

1.2 Administrative Management Procedures

Figure 2-1 shows the work flow of the administrative management procedures.

Figure 2-1 Flow of Administrative Management Procedures

Administrative

Management Works

Expansion and Change of

Station Users

Management Works

Diagnosis result, system message displays abnormality

(Abnormal

Congestion)

Line fault

Circuit card fault

Terminal

(Tel., etc.) fault

Fault cause not

able to be localized

Administrative Works

(B) (A)

(A)

(B)

Actions on Claims from

Station Users and/or Operators

Office Data Management and Office

Data Protection

Traffic Management

Station Message Detail

Recording System (SMDR)

Routine Diagnosis

System Status Monitor

Routine Maintenance

Alarm Indications

Collection of System Messages

Indication of Lockout Stations

Line Load Control

Fault Analysis/

Test Operation/

Changeover/

Make-Busy/Circuit

Card Change/

Initialization

See Chapter 6 See Chapter 6

See Chapter 6

See Chapter 7

Refer to

Chapter 5

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24307

Page 4

Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

1.3 How to Follow This Manual

Table 2-1 provides a brief description of the contents for each chapter in this manual.

2. BASIC KNOWLEDGE

This section identifies the information necessary for the system operations and maintenance procedures.

2.1 System Configuration

2.2 Line Equipment Numbers (LENS)

2.3 Local Partition (LP) Number

2.4 Assignment of Network Control Node (NCN)

2.5 System Messages

2.6 Fault Detecting Function

2.7 Range of Faults Specification

2.8 Explanation of Terms

Table 2-1 How to Follow This Manual Guide

CHAPTER DESCRIPTION

2See Section 2, Basic Knowledge.

Explains basic knowledge of fault detection and indication, functions and fault range of the system,

etc.

See Section 3, How to Read Precautions, Diagnostic, and Fault Repair Information.

Explains the methods of procedure performance and various symbols used in the description.

See Section 4, Reporting Fault to NEC.

Explains the method of forwarding faulty circuit cards, the method of creating a history record for

future fault repair, and the method of reporting faults to NEC.

3Explains how to read and analyze system messages.

4Explains the method of replacing a unit/circuit card due to a fault.

5Explains repair procedures corresponding to the faults of processors or equipment.

6Explains how to control the system in service management functions and precautions required in the

system control process.

7Explains routine maintenance.

8Explains the commands used in the system administrative management procedure.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 2

Page 5

Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

2.1 System Configuration

Figure 2-2 shows the system configuration of the fully expanded NEAX2400 IPX IPX-U.

Figure 2-2 NEAX2400 IPX IPX-U

......

LN0

ISW

LN1

LN3LN2

FRONT VIEW

ISW: Inter-node Switch

LN: Local Node

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24307

Page 6

Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

2.1.1 Configuration of the System

The NEAX2400 IPX IPX-U system (referred to in the remainder of this manual as “the system”) is

configured by a single Inter-node Switch (ISW) and a maximum of 4 Local Nodes (LNs). Refer to

figures in this section. The ISW and LNs are connected via the Fusion link, with Ethernet and physical

PCM cables connected to each other. Figure 2-3 provides an overall image of system configuration. A

two-module ISW and maximum four Local nodes compose a single network system via the Fusion

link.

Figure 2-3 System Configuration

......

LN0

ISW

LN1

LN3LN2

......

LN0/1/2/3

BASEU BASEU BASEU BASEU

LPM TSWM0 TSWM1 DUMMY

PIM1 PIM1 PIM1 PIM1

PIM0 PIM0 PIM0 PIM0

FANU FANU FANU FANU

PIM2 PIM2 PIM2 PIM2

PIM3 PIM3 PIM3 PIM3

TOPU TOPU TOPU TOPU

LN2 LN3

ISW

LN0 LN1

Ether

PCM Cable

ISW

BASEU

LPM

ISWM

TOPU

IMG0 IMG1 IMG2 IMG3

FRONT VIEWFRONT VIEW

ISW:

Inter-node Switch

LN: Local Node

TOPU: Top Unit

LPM: Local Processor Module

TSWM: Time Division Switch Module

ISWM:

Inter-node Switch Module

PIM:

Port Interface Module

FANU:

Fan Unit

BASEU: Base Unit

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 2

Page 7

Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

Figure 2-4 Details on Inter-node PCM Cable Connections

Note: For actual cable runnings, refer to the Installation Manual.

ISW

BASEU

LPM

ISWM

TOPU

< ISWM Backplane >

For TSWM1

For TSWM0

(17) (16) (15) (14) (07) (06) (05) (04)

LN0

IMG0 IMG1 IMG2 IMG3

BASEU BASEU BASEU BASEU

LPM TSWM0 TSWM1 DUMMY

PIM1 PIM1 PIM1 PIM1

PIM0 PIM0 PIM0 PIM0

FANU FANU FANU FANU

PIM2 PIM2 PIM2 PIM2

PIM3 PIM3 PIM3 PIM3

TOPU TOPU TOPU TOPU

< TSWM0 Backplane >

(19) (18) (17) (16) (15) (14) (13) (12)

TSW

(No. 1 System) TSW

(No. 0 System)

< TSWM1 Backplane >

(19) (18) (17) (16) (15) (14) (13) (12)

TSW

(No. 1 System) TSW

(No. 0 System)

TSW

(No. 1 System)

To MUX

(IMG0/1)

To LN3

TSW

(No. 0 System)

[ Details on PCM Cable Connections between ISW and LN ]

............

LN0

ISW

LN1

LN3LN2

......

................................................

......

................................................

To MUX

(IMG2/3)

To MUX

(IMG2/3)

To MUX

(IMG0/1)

To LN2

To LN1

To LN3

To LN2

To LN1

PCM (ISW-LN TSW-CA-n) Cables

IPX-U

LN: Local Node ISW: Inter-node Switch

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24307

Page 8

Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

Figure 2-5 Details on Ethernet Cable Connections (Establishment of Fusion Link) (1/2)

ISW

CPU1

HUB1

HUB0

PIM0 of LN0, IMG0

10 BASE-T Cables (Straight)

10 BASE-T

Cables

(Cross)

CPU1

LPM

PIM0

CPU0

LANI

HUB0 HUB1

Note Note

IMG0 (LN0)

From ISW

From LN1

From LN2

From LN3

From ISW

From LN1

From LN2

From LN3

LPM

CPU1

CPU0

LANI

ISW / IMG0 (LN1/2/3)

Max. 328 ft (100m)

Note 2

: 10 BASE-T connector

ISW: Inter-node Switch LN: Local Node LI: LANI (PZ-PC19) HUB: PA-M96

Note 1

Note: HUB card can be mounted in any universal slot of PIM.

LN0

CPU1

LN1

CPU1

LN2

CPU1

LN3

CPU1

LN1

CPU1

LN1

CPU1

LN1

CPU1

LN1

CPU1

LN1

CPU1

To HUB1

in LN0

To HUB1

in LN0

Note 1: The connections, shown in this figure, are only an example. Actual cable runnings may vary, depending on your

system configuration. (Refer to the “Installation Manual” for more details)

Note 2: The mutual 10 BASE-T (Ethernet) connections must be within 328 feet (100m) in their distance. If the distance is

longer [e.g. , Fusion Link is provided also with other distant IPX node(s)], use FCH (PA-FCHA) card as a protocol

converter for the Fusion-link data. For more details, refer to the “Fusion Network System Manual.

[Details on Ether Cable Connections]

ISW and each LN can achieve a Fusion link by physically connecting themselves via the 10 BASE-T cables. This figure

shows an example where the CPR-accommodated LANI cards (internal LANI: PCI slot 00) are mutually connected via

HUB0/HUB1 (PA-M96) cards in PIM0 of LN0, IMG0 (HUB0 for CPU0 of all nodes, HUB1 for CPU1 of all nodes.)

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 2

Page 9

Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

Figure 2-5 Details on Ethernet Cable Connections (Establishment of Fusion Link) (2/2)

[ Details on Ether Cable Connections: When Dual LANIs are used for each CPU ]

When dual LANIs are used for each CPU, the whole second LANIs (external LANI: PCI slot 03) must also be

connected in addition to the first LANIs explained on the previous page. This figure shows an example where the

second LANIs are connected to the additional HUB2/HUB3 (PA-M96) cards in PIM0 of LN2, IMG0 (HUB2 for

CPU0 of all nodes, HUB3 for CPU1 of all nodes).

LI LI

ISW

CPU1

LI LI

LN3

CPU1

LI LI

LN2

CPU1

LI LI

LN1

CPU1

LI LI

LN0

CPU1

LI LI

ISW

CPU0

LI LI

LN3

CPU0

LI LI

LN2

CPU0

LI LI

LN1

CPU0

LI LI

LN0

CPU0

HUB1

HUB0

LN0 PIM0 of LN2, IMG0

10 BASE-T Cables (Straight)

10 BASE-T

Cables

(Cross)

HUB3

HUB2

10 BASE-T

Cables

(Cross)

10 BASE-T Cables (Straight)

CPU1

LPM

PIM0

CPU0

HUB0 HUB1

IMG0 (LN0)

From ISW

From LN1

From LN2

From LN3

From ISW

To HUB3

in LN2

To HUB2

in LN2

From LN1

From LN2

From LN3

CPU1

LPM

PIM0

CPU0

HUB2 HUB3

IMG0 (LN2)

From ISW

From LN0

From LN1

From LN3

From ISW

To HUB1

in LN0

To HUB0

in LN0

From LN0

From LN1

From LN3

LPM

CPU1

CPU0

ISW / IMG0 (LN1/3)

To HUB0

in LN0

To HUB1

in LN0

03 To HUB2

in LN2

To HUB3

in LN2

: 10 BASE-T connector

ISW: Inter-node Switch LN: Local Node LI: LANI (PZ-PC19) HUB: PA-M96

Second LANI Second LANI

Second LANI

Max. 328 ft (100m) Note 2

Note 1

Note 1: The above connections are only an example. Actual cable runnings may vary, depending on your system

configuration (Refer to the “Installation Manual” for more details.)

Note 2: The mutual 10 BASE-T (Ethernet) connections must be within 328 ft (100m) in their distance. If dis-

tance is longer (e.g., Fusion link is provided with other distant IPX node(s), use FCH (PA-FCHA) card

as a protocol converter for the Fusion link data. For more details, refer to the “Fusion Network System

Manual.”

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24307

Page 10

Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

Figure 2-6 Details on Ethernet Cable Connections (Using MAT via Ethernet)

Note: The LANI card for MAT connection is mounted in PCI slot No. 01 of each CPR.

[ Details on Ether Cable Connections: When using MAT via Ethernet ]

CPU1

LPM

PIM0

CPU0

HUB

LANI

IMG0 (LN1)

ISW

Fusion Link

Ether for MAT

LN0 LN1 LN2 LN3

LN1

IMG0 IMG1 IMG2 IMG3

MAT

10 BASE-T Cable

(Straight)

10 BASE-T Cable

(Straight)

10 BASE-T Cable

(Cross)

ISW

LANI

HUB

: Inter-node Switch

: Local Node

: LANI (PZ-PC19)

: PA-M96

: 10 BASE-T connector

Note 1 HUB

Note 1

To LANI0 of ISW

To LANI0 of LN0

To LANI0 of LN2

To LANI0 of LN3

Note 2

To LANI1 of ISW

To LANI1 of LN0

To LANI1 of LN2

To LANI1 of LN3

Note 2

The IPX-U system can use both IOC (PH-IO24) card or each CPR-accommodated LANI (PZ-PC19) card as

an interface for the connection to a MAT. This figure shows an example where a MAT is connected via the

LANI card in PCI slot 01 of each LN/ISW.

This figure is an example where a MAT is connected to LN1 via the 10 BASE-T cables

(Ethernet). As seen from this, the MAT, a single terminal connected to the Ether, can control

the whole system status, thus capable of a single-point entry to each LN and ISW.

Note 1: When connecting the MAT by this way, be sure to use dedicated HUB (PA-M96) card(s).

Note 2: Because ISW has no universal slot for external HUB cards, connect the 10 BASE-T ca-

bles (from the ISW) to a MAT-dedicated HUB in any of the LNs (LN0 - LN3). In this ex-

ample, the cables are ISW) to a MAT-dedicated HUB in any of the LNs (LN0 - LN3). In

this example, the cables are connected to HUB in LN1.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 2

Page 11

Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

Figure 2-7 Face Layout of ISW

03 04

IOC (PH-IO24)

EMA (PH-PC40)

13 14

01 02

MMC (PH-M22)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 10 11 16 17 18 1915

PWR0 (PH-PW14)

HSW00 (PU-SW01)

TSW00 (PU-SW00)

IOGT0 (PH-GT10)

PWR1 (PH-PW14)

HSW01 (PU-SW01)

TSW01 (PU-SW00)

TSW02 (PU-SW00)

TSW03 (PU-SW00)

PLO0

PLO1

IOGT1 (PH-GT10)

TSW10 (PU-SW00)

TSW11 (PU-SW00)

TSW12 (PU-SW00)

TSW13 (PU-SW00)

HSW10 (PU-SW01)

HSW11 (PU-SW01)

(PH-CK16-A/17-A)

(RES)

ISW

09 12

BASEU

LPM

ISWM

TOPU

Note

LANI(PZ-PC19)

ISAGT(PZ-GT13)

LANI(PZ-PC19)

LANI(PZ-PC19) LANI(PZ-PC19)

ISAGT(PZ-GT13)

FDD/HDDPWR DSP

Note: The 2nd IOC card (optional) may be mounted in this slot.

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24307

Page 12

Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

Figure 2-8 Face Layout of IMG0 (Local Node)

Note: The 2nd IOC card (optional) may be mounted in this slot.

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

LPM

PIM 0

PIM 1

FANU

PIM 2

PIM 3

TOPU

BASEU

PH-PC40 (EMA)

PH-IO24 (IOC)

PWR1

PWR0

PWR1

PWR0

PWR1

PWR0

PWR1

PH-PC36 (MUX) PH-PC36 (MUX)

PH-PC36 (MUX)

PH-PC36 (MUX) PH-PC36 (MUX)

Note

IMG0 (Local Node)

PH-I-M22 (MMC)

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 2

Page 13

Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

Figure 2-9 Face Layout of IMG1 (Local Node)

Note: No circuit card is mounted in Slot 02 of TSWM0.

05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

22 23

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

TSWM0

PIM 0

PIM 1

FANU

PIM 2

PIM 3

TOPU

MISC

DLKC0

DLKC1

GT0

GT1

TSW00

TSW01

TSW02

TSW03

TSW10

TSW11

TSW12

TSW13

PLO0

PLO1

MISC

PWRSW1

PWRSW0

PWR0

PWR1

PWR0

PWR1

PA-PW55-A (PWR0)

PA-PW54-A (PWR1)

PA-PW55-A (PWR0)

PA-PW54-A (PWR1)

PH-PC36 (MUX) PH-PC36 (MUX)

PH-PC36 (MUX)

PH-PC36 (MUX) PH-PC36 (MUX)

IMG1 (Local Node)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PH-PC36 (MUX)

PWR1

PWR0 PWR0

PWR1

PH-PC36 (MUX)

BASEU

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24307

Page 14

Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

Figure 2-10 Face Layout of IMG2 (Local Node)

Note: No circuit card is mounted in Slot 02 of TSWM1.

05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

22 23

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

TSWM1

PIM 0

PIM 1

FANU

PIM 2

PIM 3

TOPU

MISC

GT0

GT1

TSW00

TSW01

TSW02

TSW03

TSW10

TSW11

TSW12

TSW13

PLO0

PLO1

MISC

PWRSW1

PWRSW0

PWR0

PWR1

PWR0

PWR1

PA-PW55-A (PWR0)

PA-PW54-A (PWR1)

PA-PW55-A (PWR0)

PA-PW54-A (PWR1)

PH-PC36 (MUX) PH-PC36 (MUX)

PH-PC36 (MUX)

PH-PC36 (MUX) PH-PC36 (MUX)

IMG2 (Local Node)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PH-PC36 (MUX)

PWR1

PWR0 PWR0

PWR1

PH-PC36 (MUX)

BASEU

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 2

Page 15

Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

Figure 2-11 Face Layout of IMG3 (Local Node)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

DUMMY

PIM 0

PIM 1

FANU

PIM 2

PIM 3

TOPU

BASEU

PWR1

PWR0

PWR1

PWR0

PWR1

PWR0

PWR1

PWR0

PH-PC36 (MUX) PH-PC36 (MUX)

PH-PC36 (MUX)

PH-PC36 (MUX) PH-PC36 (MUX)

IMG3 (Local Node)

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24307

Page 16

Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

2.2 Line Equipment Numbers (LENS)

The Line Equipment Numbers (LENS) are used to specify the location of a circuit (trunk/port) in any of

the PIM universal slots. Refer to the figures in this section, and confirm the LENS format used in the

system.

As shown in Figure 2-12, the LENs consists of six digits: two digits for MG, one digit for U, two digits

for G, and one digit for Lv.

Figure 2-12 LENS Format

2.2.1 Module Group

Figure 2-13 explains the Module Group (MG). In a fully expanded system, the MG number ranges

from 00 to 07 in each local node.

Figure 2-13 Module Group Allocations (LN0/1/2/3)

LENS = XX X XX X

Lv (Level) : 0 - 7

G (Group) : 00 - 23

U (Unit) : 0 - 3

MG (Module Group) : 00 - 07

Note

Note: In addition to Group No. 00-23, 24-31 can be used as the extended group numbers.

PIM3

PIM2

PIM1

PIM0

FRONT VIEW

TOPU

IMG0

FANU

BASEU

LPM

TOPU

IMG2

FANU

BASEU

TSWM1

TOPU

IMG3

FANU

BASEU

DUMMY

TOPU

IMG1

FANU

BASEU

TSWM0

MG01

MG00

MG05

MG04

MG07

MG06

MG03

MG02

LN0/1/2/3

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 2

Page 17

Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

2.2.2 Unit

Details on Unit (U) numbers are shown in Figure 2-14. The numbers range from 0 to 3, and each unit

represents the PIM universal slots, No. 04-12 (U 0/2) or No. 15-23 (U 1/3).

Figure 2-14 Unit Number Allocations (LN0/1/2/3)

FRONT VIEW

TOPU

IMG0

FANU

BASEU

LPM

U2 U3

U0 U1

U2 U3

U0 U1

MG01

MG00

TOPU

IMG2

FANU

BASEU

TSWM1

U2 U3

U0 U1

U2 U3

U0 U1

MG05

MG04

TOPU

IMG3

FANU

BASEU

DUMMY

U2 U3

U0 U1

U2 U3

U0 U1

MG07

MG06

TOPU

IMG1

FANU

BASEU

TSWM0

U2 U3

U0 U1

U2 U3

U0 U1

MG03

MG02

PIM3

PIM2

PIM1

PIM0

00 02 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

16 16 16 16 16 16 32 32 32 16 16 16 16 16 16 32 32 32

MUX (PH-PC36) 0

MUX (PH-PC36) 1

PWR

Unit Number (U = 0/2) Unit Number (U = 1/3)

Control Control

On each Module Group (MG: #00 - 07), a total of four Units (U0 - U3) can be assigned.

16 16 16 16 16 16

Number

Time Slots

Slots No.

PIM

(16)(16)

192 TS192 TS

LN0/1/2/3

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24307

Page 18

Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

2.2.3 Group

The Group (G) numbers are allocated as shown in Figure 2-15. A total of two Groups are assigned on

each universal slots within the PIM. Slot numbers 10, 11, 12, 21, 22, 23 can contain a total of four

Groups as an exception.

Figure 2-15 Group Number Allocations (LN0/1/2/3)

A total of two or four Groups (G) can be assigned on each PIM universal slot.

G = 15

G = 14

G = 13

G = 12

G = 03

G = 02

16 ports total

32 ports total

Slot No. 05

Slot No. 10

U = 0 / 2 U = 1 / 3

Slot No.

Extended

Group No.

Note

27 29 31

26 28 30

00(25)(24)

27 29 31

26 28 30

Group No. PIM

04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 00 02

TOPU

IMG0

FANU

BASEU

LPM

MG01

MG00

TOPU

IMG2

FANU

BASEU

TSWM1

MG05

MG04

TOPU

IMG3

FANU

BASEU

DUMMY

MG07

MG06

TOPU

IMG1

FANU

BASEU

TSWM0

MG03

MG02

PIM3

PIM2

PIM1

PIM0

00 02 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

MUX (PH-PC36) 1

MUX (PH-PC36) 0

PWR

PIM

FRONT VIEW

Note: In addition to Group No. 00 - 23, the system can use No. 24 - 31 as theoretically valid numbers.

Refer to the Fusion Network System Manual for information on Extended Group No. 26 - 31.

LN0/1/2/3

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 2

Page 19

Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

2.2.4 Level

Figure 2-16 explains the Level (Lv) numbers. There are a total of eight Levels (Lv0 - Lv7) on every

Group number, which ranges from 00 to 31.

Figure 2-16 Level Number Allocations (LN0/1/2/3)

A total of eight Levels (Lv0 - Lv7) can be assigned on each Group.

Group

Level (Lv)

TOPU

IMG0

FANU

BASEU

LPM

MG01

MG00

TOPU

IMG2

FANU

BASEU

DUMMY

MG05

MG04

TOPU

IMG3

FANU

BASEU

DUMMY

MG07

MG06

TOPU

IMG1

FANU

BASEU

TSWM0

MG03

MG02

PIM3

PIM2

PIM1

PIM0

Group

Level (Lv)

00 02 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14

U = 0 / 2 U = 1 / 3

Group No.

PIM

(24) (25)

16-port Slot

32-port Slot

(G = Even No., < 10)

Group

(G = Odd No., < 11)

(G = 15/19/23)

Group

(G = 14/18/22)

Group

(G = 13/17/21)

Group

(G = 12/16/20)

FRONT VIEW

15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

LN0/1/2/3

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24307

Page 20

Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

2.3 Local Partition (LP) Number

The Local Partition (LP) number refers to a logical local processor number, theoretically assigned for each

IMG that consists of four (or less) Port Interface Modules (PIM). Though the local processor does not

actually exist in any of the IMGs, except for IMG0, the system can apply the two-digit LP number to each

IMG (see Figure 2-17) on its data memory program. The LP numbers are used primarily in the following

cases:

•Display of system messages

•Assignment of line load control data (ALLC command)

•Backup for Call Forwarding/Speed Calling data (MEM_HDD command), etc.

Figure 2-17 LP Number Allocations (LN0/1/2/3)

FRONT VIEW

PIM3

PIM2

PIM1

PIM0

PIM3

PIM2

PIM1

PIM0

PIM3

PIM2

PIM1

PIM0

PIM3

PIM2

PIM1

PIM0

TOPU

IMG0

FANU

BASEU

LPM

TOPU

IMG2

FANU

BASEU

TSWM1

TOPU

IMG3

FANU

BASEU

DUMMY

TOPU

IMG1

FANU

BASEU

TSWM0

LP No. = 00 LP No. = 02 LP No. = 04 LP No. = 06

The Local Partition No. (two digits, even number) is assigned on each IMG.

LN0/1/2/3

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 2

Page 21

Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

2.4 Assignment of Network Control Node (NCN)

The IPX-U system can be in service by dialing a Telephone Number assigned for each station at a Network

Control Node (NCN). Because these network-level data (NDM data) can be assigned via the MAT

dedicated to the NCN only, designate any of the following nodes as this network data manager (NCN):

•One of the Local Nodes (LN), excepting for the ISW, within the IPX-U system

•One of the belonging Fusion nodes outside the IPX-U system

For more details, refer to Figure 2-18.

Note 1: Within the IPX-U system, the NCN can be designated only from the Local Nodes (LN0-LN3). The ISW

cannot be assigned as the NCN.

Note 2: On a Fusion network, assign only one NCN. Multiple nodes cannot be assigned as the NCN.

Because the Fusion link can be established either independently within the system (IPX-U) or jointly with

other outside IPX series, the assignment of NCN can differ, depending on the network configuration.

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24307

Page 22

Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

Pattern 1 When the system has a Fusion link independently of other systems

If the system has a Fusion link only within the system (i.e. no Fusion link is established with other IPX

series), an NCN must be assigned from any of the existing Local Nodes, excepting the ISW. In this

example, LN0 is assigned as the NCN.

Figure 2-18 Example of NCN Assignment (1/3)

Note 1: The network-level data (NDM data) can be assigned only at the NCN. However, other node-level

data (LDM data) must also be assigned at each node (including ISW), depending on the

requirements. For more details, refer to the “Installation Manual (IPX-U Type)” or the “Fusion

Network System Manual.”

Note 2: When the system is operated, the function to be performed by the ISW is only to provide the PCM

time slot switching between the Local Nodes. However, an FPC (Fusion Point Code) must be as-

signed also for the ISW together with other Local nodes, by using the ASYDL command.

......

LN0

ISW

LN1

LN3

LN2

......

< IPX-U >

(FPC=15)

(FPC=16)

(FPC=17)

(FPC=19)

(FPC=18)

Note 2

LDM

NDM

Network Data Memory

-System Data

ASYDN, AFMU, ALRTN....

-Number Planning Data

ANPDN, ASPAN....

-Station Numbering

ALGNN, ALGSN....

......

Assignment of NDM Data

via Centralized MAT

NDM

Note 1

Network Control Node

NDM Data Copy

Station B

TELN: 42005

Station D

TELN: 45007

Station C

TELN: 43002

Station A

TELN: 41000

ISW : Inter-node Switch

LN : Local Node

NCN: Network Control Node

DM : Data Memory

LDM: Local Data Memory

NDM: Network Data Memory

FPC : Fusion Point Code

TELN: Telephone Number

MAT : Maintenance Administration Terminal

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 2

Page 23

Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

Pattern 2 When the system has a Fusion link with other IPX series and an NCN exists within the system

If the system has a Fusion link also with other IPX series (i.e. the Fusion nodes exist also outside the

system), an NCN can be assigned from either Local Nodes outside the system or the Local Nodes

inside the system. In this example, LN0 of the IPX-U system is designated as the NCN.

Figure 2-18 Example of NCN Assignment (2/3)

Note 1: The network-level data (NDM data) can be assigned only at the NCN. However, other node-

level data (LDM data) must also be assigned at each node (including ISW), depending on the

requirements. For more details, refer to the “Installation Manual (IPX-U Type)” or the

“Fusion Network System Manual.”

Note 2: When the system is operated, the function to be performed by the ISW is only to provide PCM

time slot switching between the Local Nodes. However, an FPC (Fusion Point Code) must be

assigned also for the ISW together with other Local nodes, by using the ASYDL command.

NDM

ISW : Inter-node Switch

LN : Local Node

NCN: Network Control Node

DM : Data Memory

LDM: Local Data Memory

NDM: Network Data Memory

FPC : Fusion Point Code

TELN: Telephone Number

MAT : Maintenance Administration Terminal

......

LN0

ISW

LN1

LN3

LN2

................................................

......

...... ......

......

(FPC=15)

(FPC=16)

(FPC=17)

(FPC=19)

(FPC=18)

LN-C

(FPC=3)

LN-A

(FPC=1)

Note 2

LDM

NDM

Assignment of NDM Data

via Centralized MAT

NDM

Note 1

Network Control Node

NDM Data Copy

Station B

TELN: 42005

Station D

TELN: 45007

Station E

TELN: 47001

Station G

TELN: 49012

Station C

TELN: 43002

Station A

TELN: 41000

......

................................................

........................

............

IPX-U

System

Station F

TELN: 48003

NDM

LN-B

(FPC=2)

Fusion Link

Network Data Memory

-System Data

ASYDN, AFMU, ALRTN....

-Number Planning Data

ANPDN, ASPAN....

-Station Numbering

ALGNN, ALGSN....

......

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24307

Page 24

Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

Pattern 3 When the system has a Fusion link with other IPX series and an NCN exists outside the system

If the system has a Fusion link also with other IPX series (i.e. the Fusion nodes exist also outside the

system), an NCN can be assigned from either Local Nodes outside the system or the Local Nodes

inside the system. In this example, LN-A (NEAX2400IPX series, 4-IMG type) outside the system is

designated as the NCN.

Figure 2-18 Example of NCN Assignment (3/3)

Note 1: The network-level data (NDM data) can be assigned only at the NCN. However, other node-level

data (LDM data) must also be assigned at each node (including ISW), depending on the

requirements. For more details, refer to the “Installation Manual (IPX-U Type)” or the “Fusion

Network System Manual.”

Note 2: When the system is operated, the function to be performed by the ISW is only to provide the PCM

time slot switching between the Local Nodes. However, a FPC (Fusion Point Code) must be

assigned also for the ISW together with other Local nodes, by using the ASYDL command.

ISW : Inter-node Switch

LN : Local Node

NCN: Network Control Node

DM : Data Memory

LDM: Local Data Memory

NDM: Network Data Memory

FPC : Fusion Point Code

TELN: Telephone Number

MAT : Maintenance Administration Terminal

Station G

TELN: 49012

NDM

......

...................................... ... ..... ..

NDM

............

S ta tion F

TELN: 48003

LN-B

(FPC=2)

LN-C

(FPC=3)

Fusion Link

......

.... ..

......

LN-A

(FPC=1)

LDM

NDM

Assignment of NDM Data

via Centralized MAT

Note 1

Station E

TELN: 47001

Network Control Node

Station B

TELN: 42005

Station A

TELN: 41000

............

ISW

LN1

LN3

LN2

......

...................................... ... ..... ..

(FPC=15)

(FPC=17)

(FPC=19)

(FPC=18)

Note 2

NDM

LN0

...................................... ... ..... ..

(FPC=16)

NDM

Station D

TELN: 45007

TELN: 43002

Station C

...................................... ... ..... ..

IPX-U

System

NDM Data Copy

Network Data Memory

-System Data

ASYDN, AFMU, ALRTN....

-Number Planning Data

ANPDN, ASPAN....

-Station Numbering

ALGNN, ALGSN....

......

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 2

Page 25

Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

2.5 System Messages

System messages display during routine diagnosis, system operation status controlling, and fault

occurrence. Figure 2-19 shows an example of a system message.

Refer to Chapter 3 for details on each message.

Figure 2-19 System Message Example

(1) SYSTEM MESSAGE 3-E SUP LOCK UP FAILURE (TEMPORARY)

(2) NEC TOKYO

(3) LP00-0-ACT

(4)

4:0000 0000 0000 0000 5:0000 0000 0000 0000 6:0000 0000 0000 0000

1:1102 0000 0000 0000 2:0000 0000 0000 0000 3:0000 0000 0000 0000

7:0000 0000 0000 0000 8:0000 0000 0000 0000 9:0000 0000 0000 0000

Meaning:

(1) : SYSTEM MESSAGE 3-E SUP LOCK-UP FAILURE (TEMPORARY)

Meaning of the message

System Message Level

(Indicated by Alarm Lamp) Note 2

System Message Number

(2) : Office Name, Date and Time

(3) : LP00-0-ACT

ACT/STBY indication for dual systems

Faulty processor/Related processor

No.0/No.1 system indication for dual systems

(4) : Message detail data (notation by hexadecimal numbers)

Note 1: The data here indicates the Office Name, uniquely assigned to each node and ISW. This

can be set by using the ASYD (SYS1, Index 96-115) or AOFC command.

Note 2: There are four kinds of alarm information to be indicated by alarm lamps: MN, MJ, SUP,

and NON indications.

JUL 24 09:35

Note 1

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24307

Page 26

Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

2.6 Fault Detecting Function

The system finds a fault by its fault detecting circuit and the fault detecting program. Once a fault occurs,

the system initiates a remedial action such as system changeover, make-busy setting, or restart processing

by the automatic diagnosis function. This action reduces the influence of the fault so that system servicing

may be minimized. The result of the process taken and the fault situation are indicated for equipment con-

cerned.

Among the faults, those related to speech path (noise, one-way speech, speech inability, etc.) are not

detectable. Since these fault reports are to be obtained from a station or operator, periodic trunk tests must

be performed without failure to detect the faults related to speech path.

Figure 2-20 and Figure 2-21 shows an outline of fault detection, and Figure 2-23 shows a block diagram

of fault detection.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 2

Page 27

Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

Figure 2-20 Fault Detection General Diagram (via Alarm Lamps on TOPU)

Indication of Fault Occurrence Information Collection

and Diagnosis Example of Faults

CPU

Fault of line/trunk card

TSW write failure,

Fault of clocks, etc.

Abnormal temperature,

power supply failure,

fuse blowing, etc., within

the equipment frame

CPU

Fault of line/trunk card

TSW write failure,

Fault of clocks, etc.

Abnormal temperature,

power supply failure,

fuse blowing, etc., within

the equipment frame

CPU

Fault of line/trunk card

TSW write failure,

Fault of clocks, etc.

Abnormal temperature,

power supply failure,

fuse blowing, etc., within

the equipment frame

CPU

Fault of line/trunk card

TSW write failure,

Fault of clocks, etc.

Abnormal temperature,

power supply failure,

fuse blowing, etc., within

the equipment frame

CPU

Fault of line/trunk card

TSW write failure,

Fault of clocks, etc.

Abnormal temperature,

power supply failure,

fuse blowing, etc., within

the equipment frame

MMC

Indication of

Alarm Lamps

on TOPU

MMC

Indication of

Alarm Lamps

on TOPU

MMC

Indication of

Alarm Lamps

on TOPU

MMC

Indication of

Alarm Lamps

on TOPU

Indication

of Audible

and Visual Alarm

Indicating Panel

LN0

LN1

ISW

LN2

LN3

MMC

EMA

Note: Alarm Indicating Panel indicates the fault information on both ISW and other Local Nodes (fault notification on a system

basis). Meanwhile, alarm lamps on the TOPU for ISW and Local Nodes (indicated in dotted lines above) provide the fault

indication only related to the belonging node. For more details, refer to CHAPTER 6.

Indication of

Alarm Lamps

on TOPU EMA

NEC

ON OFF

BELL

......

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24307

Page 28

Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

Figure 2-21 Fault Detection Block Diagram (via Display of System Messages)

Indication of Fault Occurrence Information Collection

and Diagnosis Example of Faults

CPU

Fault of line/trunk card

TSW write failure,

Fault of clocks, etc.

Abnormal temperature,

power supply failure,

fuse blowing, etc., within

the equipment frame

CPU

Fault of line/trunk card

TSW write failure,

Fault of clocks, etc.

Abnormal temperature,

power supply failure,

fuse blowing, etc., within

the equipment frame

CPU

Fault of line/trunk card

TSW write failure,

Fault of clocks, etc.

Abnormal temperature,

power supply failure,

fuse blowing, etc., within

the equipment frame

CPU

Fault of line/trunk card

TSW write failure,

Fault of clocks, etc.

Abnormal temperature,

power supply failure,

fuse blowing, etc., within

the equipment frame

CPU

Fault of line/trunk card

TSW write failure,

Fault of clocks, etc.

Abnormal temperature,

power supply failure,

fuse blowing, etc., within

the equipment frame

MMC

LN0

LN1

ISW

LN2

LN3

MMC

EMA

IOC

EMA

Note: In addition to the connection to a port of IOC (PH-IO24) circuit card, a MAT can be connected also to the

Ethernet via LAN Interfaces (PZ-PC19: PCI Slot 01 of each CPR).

...-:;..+..*

Display of

System Messages

LANI

...-:;..+..*

Display of

System Messages

...-:;..+..*

Display of

System Messages

...-:;..+..*

Display of

System Messages

...-:;..+..*

Display of

System Messages

...-:;..+..*

Display of

System Messages

LANI

Ether

- Symbols -

EMA: PH-PC40 MMC: PH-M22 LANI: PZ-PC19 IOC: PH-IO24

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 2

Page 29

Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

Figure 2-22 Fault Detection Block Diagram

PWR

DLKC

PWR

GTGT

DLKC

To/From TSW

of each LN

MJ, MN fault

Power, Fuse blown fault

Temperature, CPU fault

Speech Path System fault (SPE)

RGU, Howler fault

PFT fault

CPU Clock fault

Note:

CPU

EMA

MMC

To MAT,

Printer, etc.

Alarm Lamps on the TOPU

Thermal Reed Relay

RDY

Clock

etc.

Howler

Ringing

Circuit

Fault

Information

Note

PWR Supply

Failure,

Fuse Blown

Firmware

Fault

C-level

monitor

C-level

monitor

TSW/

INT

LC/TRK

MUX

TSWM1

TSW/

INT TSW/

INT

LC/TRK

MUX

TSWM0

RDY

Clock

Write

etc. RDY

Clock

Write

etc.

RDY

Clock

Write

etc.

RDY

Clock

Write

etc.

RDY

Clock

Write

etc.

IOC

LANI

To TSW

of ISWM To TSW

of ISWM

CPU

EMA

MMC

To MAT,

Printer, etc.

Alarm Lamps on the TOPU

Thermal Reed Relay

RDY

Clock

etc.

Howler

Ringing

Circuit

Fault

Information

Note

PWR Supply

Failure,

Fuse Blown

Firmware

Fault

C-level

monitor

C-level

monitor

TSW/

INT

LC/TRK

MUX

TSWM1

TSW/

INT TSW/

INT

LC/TRK

MUX

TSWM0

RDY

Clock

Write

etc. RDY

Clock

Write

etc.

RDY

Clock

Write

etc.

RDY

Clock

Write

etc.

RDY

Clock

Write

etc.

IOC

LANI

To TSW

of ISWM To TSW

of ISWM

CPU

EMA

MMC

To MAT,

Printer, etc.

Alarm Lamps on the TOPU

Thermal Reed Relay

Howler

Ringing

Circuit

Fault

Information

Note

PWR Supply

Failure,

Fuse Blown

C-level

monitor

TSW/

INT

IOGT

HSW

ISWM

RDY

Clock

Write

etc.

RDY

Clock

Write

etc.

IOC

From

other existing

Local Nodes

From

other

nodes

LANI

< LN >

< ISW >

< LN >

To MAT

on the Ethernet

: Circuit Card

: Main faults to be detected

: Speech path

: Flow of fault information

CPU

EMA

MMC

TSW

INT

MUX

HSW

DLKC

PWR

LANI

IOC

IOGT

LC/TRK

MAT

TSWM

ISW

ISWM

:Central Processing Unit

:Emergency Alarm Controller

:Man Machine Controller

:Time Division Switch

:Speech Path Control Interface

:Multiplexer

:Highway Switch

:Data Link Controller

:Power Supply

:Local Area Network Interface

:I/O Controller

:Gate

:Input/Output Gate

:Line/Trunk

:Maintenance Administration Terminal

:Local Node

:Time Division Switch Module

:Inter-node Switch

:Inter-node Switch Module

- Symbols -

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24307

Page 30

Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

(a) Main Faults

Faults that may occur in the system can be generally categorized into Processor System Fault, Speech

Path System Fault, Line/Trunk Fault, etc.

•Processor System Fault

The CPU alarm detecting circuit continuously monitors whether the CPU is working normally. If

a fault is detected, the CPU calls up the diagnostic program, which identifies the cause of the fault

and determines whether the fault is temporary or permanent. When the fault affects system

operations, Active/Standby status of the CPU is changed over (provided that the system has dual

configuration).

•Bus System Fault

The CPU transfers line/trunk card control information to the associated peripheral circuits via IO

Bus. When a parity error is detected in the transfer data or when the required information cannot

be transferred from a circuit card, the CPU identifies the cause of the fault, changes over the CPU

so that system operation is not affected, and executes restart processing.

•Speech Path Fault

The CPU monitors the operating status of the TSW card, the occurrence of errors in writing data

to the switch memory, and the basic clocks supplied to the speech path. Upon detecting a fault, the

CPU identifies the cause of the fault, determines whether the fault is temporary or permanent, and

executes required processing such as changeover of the TSW card.

•Others

The alarm detecting circuit on the EMA card continuously monitors the occurrence of faults in the

PWR supply cards, such as abnormal temperatures within the equipment frame, and lights the

alarm lamp on the TOPU when a fault is detected.

(b) Lamp Indications on the TOPU

When a fault occurs, the corresponding lamp on the TOPU indicates the location of the fault. For the

meaning of each lamp indication, refer to Chapter 6.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 2

Page 31

Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

2.7 Range of Faults Specification

(1) Upon receiving a fault report from a station user or an operator, the technician can assume a faulty card

exists if the range to be affected by the fault can be determined. For the detailed procedure, refer to

Chapter 5. Use the following actions to check the MDF:

(a) Check the LENS of the reporter (Station or ATTCON/DESKCON).

(b) Check other circuits of the circuit card in which the reporter (station line or ATTCON/DESKCON)

is located.

reporter is located.

(d) Check lines in each of the other modules on the basis of plural lines.

(2) If the fault cannot be detected by the system (a fault related to the speech path such as noise during speech,

one-way speech, speech inability), the range of (a) through (d) (itemized above) should be limited.

(3) When a major fault is detected in the dual systems, the CPU or TSW system automatically changes over

if the fault range is (c) and (d). In this case, the whole module involved is placed into make-busy status

even if the fault is partial, and the station lines currently operating normally become faulty status.

Diagnose the fault from the content of the system message displayed and repair the fault as required.

(4) When limiting the range of faults, consider the system circuitry that consists of the control (see Figure 2-

24 and Figure 2-25, where CPU 0 is active) and speech path systems (see Figure 2-26).

(5) As seen from the block diagrams in Figure 2-24 through Figure 2-27, if a fault occurs within the common

portions to be controlled, all other associated portions are affected by that fault occurrence. If the range

of faults is outside PIM fault, CPU/TSW system changeover is executed (only when the fault is detectable

by the system).

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24307

Page 32

Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

Figure 2-23 General System Block Diagram (1/2)

HSW

TSWM0 TSWM1

< ISW (Inter-node Switch) >

ISAGT: PZ-GT13 LANI: PZ-PC19 IOGT: PH-GT10 TSW: PU-SW00

HSW: PU-SW01 PLO: PH-CK16/17-A EMA: PH-PC40 IOC: PH-IO24

< LN (Local Node) >

ISAGT-A: PZ-GT13 ISAGT-B: PZ-GT20 LANI: PZ-PC19 GT: PH-GT09 TSW: PH-SW12 MUX: PH-PC36

DLKC: PH-PC20 PLO: PH-CK16-A CLK: PH-CK18 EMA: PH-PC40 IOC: PH-IO24

MISC

IOC EMA

PLO

MISC

IOC EMA

MISC

IOC EMA

PLO

ISAGT-B

TSW00 TSW01 TSW02 TSW03

IOGT

ISAGT

CPU

LANI

ISAGT-A

CPU

LANI

Fusion Link

ISW

LN0

LN1

To PLO of

LN2/3

DLKC

ISAGT-A

ISAGT-B

CPU

LANI

TSW00 TSW01 TSW02 TSW03

DLKC

PLO CLK

To MUX

(IMG0) To MUX

(IMG1)

To MUX

(IMG0) To MUX

(IMG1) To MUX

(IMG2) To MUX

(IMG3)

To MUX

(IMG2) To MUX

(IMG3)

CLK

Note 1

Note 3

Note 4

Circuit Card

(No. 0 System)

Circuit Card

(No. 1 System)

Note 1

HSW00, 01 for No. 0 System /

HSW10, 11 for No. 1 System

Note 2

ISW-LN TSW CA-n Cables

Note 3

ISW-LN PLO CA-n Cables

Note 4

PLO-CLK CA-n Cables

TSW00 TSW01 TSW02 TSW03

Note 2

To TSW

of LN2 To TSW

of LN3

Note: For details on each equipment’s switching network, see Chapter 6, System Control

Procedures.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 2

Page 33

Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

Figure 2-23 General Block Diagram of the Whole System (2/2)

TSWM0 TSWM1

MISC

IOC EMA

HSW

PLO

MISC

IOC EMA

MISC

IOC EMA

PLO

ISAGT-B

TSW00 TSW01 TSW02 TSW03

IOGT

ISAGT

CPU

LANI

ISAGT-A

CPU

LANI

Fusion Link

ISW

LN2

LN3

To TSW

of LN0 To TSW

of LN1

To PLO of

LN0/1

DLKC

ISAGT-A

ISAGT-B

CPU

LANI

TSW00 TSW01 TSW02 TSW03

DLKC

PLO CLK

To MUX

(IMG0) To MUX

(IMG1)

To MUX

(IMG0) To MUX

(IMG1) To MUX

(IMG2) To MUX

(IMG3)

To MUX

(IMG2) To MUX

(IMG3)

CLK

Note 2

Note 1

Note 3

Note 4

Circuit Card

(No. 0 System)

Circuit Card

(No. 1 System)

Note 1

HSW00, 01 for No. 0 System /

HSW10, 11 for No. 1 System

Note 2

ISW-LN TSW CA-n Cables

Note 3

ISW-LN PLO CA-n Cables

Note 4

PLO-CLK CA-n Cables

< ISW (Inter-node Switch) >

ISAGT: PZ-GT13 LANI: PZ-PC19 IOGT: PH-GT10 TSW: PU-SW00

HSW: PU-SW01 PLO: PH-CK16/17-A EMA: PH-PC40 IOC: PH-IO24

< LN (Local Node) >

ISAGT-A: PZ-GT13 ISAGT-B: PZ-GT20 LANI: PZ-PC19 GT: PH-GT09 TSW: PH-SW12 MUX: PH-PC36

DLKC: PH-PC20 PLO: PH-CK16-A CLK: PH-CK18 EMA: PH-PC40 IOC: PH-IO24

Note: For details on each equipment’s switching network, see Chapter 6, System Control Procedures.

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24307

Page 34

Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

Figure 2-24 CPU Controlling Block Diagram (ISW)

LPM of ISW

EMA IOC /

MISC

ISAGT 0

LANI

PWR

CPU 0

MEMORY

PCI BUS

ISA BUS

CPU board

CPR

CPU clock

CPR

(ST-BY)

Reset Signal

(ST-BY)

MISC BUS

IOGT 1IOGT 0

IOP1 IOP0

ISAGT 1

CPU board

Fusion Link

PLO 0

PLO 1

MISC BUS

To TSWM1 of LN3

To TSWM0 of LN3

To TSWM1 of LN2

To TSWM0 of LN2

To TSWM1 of LN1

To TSWM0 of LN1

000

001

002

003

004

005

006

007

008

009

00A

00B

00C

00D

00E

00F

TSW

TSW/

INT

TSW

TSW 00

010

011

012

013

014

015

016

017

018

019

01A

01B

01C

01D

01E

01F

TSW

TSW/

INT

TSW

TSW 01

020

021

022

023

024

025

026

027

028

029

02A

02B

02C

02D

02E

02F

TSW

TSW/

INT

TSW

TSW 02

030

031

032

033

034

035

036

037

038

039

03A

03B

03C

03D

03E

03F

TSW

TSW/

INT

TSW

TSW 03

110

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

11A

11B

11C

11D

11E

11F

TSW

TSW/

INT

TSW

TSW 11

120

121

122

123

124

125

126

127

128

129

12A

12B

12C

12D

12E

12F

TSW

TSW/

INT

TSW

TSW 12

130

131

132

133

134

135

136

137

138

139

13A

13B

13C

13D

13E

13F

TSW

TSW/

INT

TSW

TSW 13

HSW 00

HSW 11HSW 01

HSW 10

To TSWM1 of LN3

To TSWM0 of LN3

To TSWM1 of LN2

To TSWM0 of LN2

To TSWM1 of LN1

To TSWM0 of LN1

To TSWM1 of LN0

To TSWM0 of LN0

To TSWM1 of LN0

To TSWM0 of LN0

Note 2

This figure shows a block diagram of the CPU controlling block in ISW, where CPU 0 is active.

To LPM

of LN0 To LPM

of LN1 To LPM

of LN2 To LPM

of LN3

- Symbols -

: Controlling Routes of CPU : Cable

: Circuit card (active) : Circuit card (ST-BY)

: External Cable : Clock Oscillator

: Signal

EMA: PH-PC40

LANI: PZ-PC19

IOC: PH-IO24 MUX: PH-PC36

ISAGT: PZ-GT13

IOGT: PH-GT10

TSW: PH-SW00

PLO: PH-CK16-A/17-A

CLK: PH-CK18

TSW I/O BUS

ISWM

TSW I/O BUS

Note 2

Note 3

HSW: PH-SW01

Note 1 Note 1

100

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

10A

10B

10C

10D

10E

10F

TSW

TSW/

INT

TSW

TSW 10

Note 1: The two HSW cards here provide the space division switching for a maximum of 16 PCM

highways from/to the TSW (PU-SW00) cards in ISWM. For more details, refer to NEAX2400 IPX

IPX-U “Circuit Card Manual”.

Note 2: See details in Figure 2-26, Speech Path Block Diagram.

Note 3: Multiple connection is provided on the backboard side between the PLOs here. For more details,

refer to the “Circuit Card Manual”.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 2

Page 35

Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

Figure 2-25 CPU Controlling Block Diagram (LN)

EMA IOC /

MISC

LANI

PWR

CPU 0

MEMORY

PCI BUS

ISA BUS

CPU board

CPR

CPU clock

Reset Signal

(ST-BY)

MISC BUS

TSWM 1 of LN0

TSW 00 TSW 01 TSW 11TSW 10

CLK 0 CLK 1

GT 1

GT 0

IOP1

IOP0

TSW/INT TSW/INT TSW/INTTSW/INT

TSW

TSW/

INT

TSW

TSW/

INT

TSW

TSW/

INT

TSW

TSW/

INT

TSW I/O

MISC BUS

BUS TSW I/O BUS

ISAGT-0A

ISAGT-0B

CPR

(ST-BY)

ISAGT-A

TSWM 0 of LN0

TSW 00 TSW 01 TSW 11TSW 10

PLO 0 PLO 1

GT 1

GT 0

IOP1

IOP0

TSW/INT TSW/INT TSW/INTTSW/INT

TSW

TSW/

INT

TSW

To ISWM

TSW/

INT

TSW

TSW/

INT

TSW

TSW/

INT

TSW I/O BUS

MISC BUS

TSW I/O BUS

LC/TRK

MUX

MUX PM BUS

PM BUS

LC/TRK

MUX

MUX PM BUS

PM BUS

LC/TRK

MUX

MUX PM BUS

PM BUS

LC/TRK

MUX

MUX PM BUS

PM BUS

IMG 0

PIM 3

PIM 2

PIM 1

PIM 0

ISAGT-B

LPM of LN0

Fusion Link

To LPM of ISW

This figure shows a block diagram of the CPU controlling block in LN0, where CPU 0 is active.

- Symbols -

: Controlling Routes of CPU : Cable

: Circuit card (active) : Circuit card (ST-BY)

: External Cable : Clock Oscillator

: Signal

DLKC

0/1

LC/TRK

MUX

MUX PM BUS

PM BUS

LC/TRK

MUX

MUX PM BUS

PM BUS

LC/TRK

MUX

MUX PM BUS

PM BUS

LC/TRK

MUX

MUX PM BUS

PM BUS

IMG 3

PIM 3

PIM 2

PIM 1

PIM 0

LC/TRK

MUX

MUX PM BUS

PM BUS

LC/TRK

MUX

MUX PM BUS

PM BUS

LC/TRK

MUX

MUX PM BUS

PM BUS

LC/TRK

MUX

MUX PM BUS

PM BUS

IMG 2

PIM 3

PIM 2

PIM 1

PIM 0

LC/TRK

MUX

MUX PM BUS

PM BUS

LC/TRK

MUX

MUX PM BUS

PM BUS

LC/TRK

MUX

MUX PM BUS

PM BUS

LC/TRK

MUX

MUX PM BUS

PM BUS

IMG 1

PIM 3

PIM 2

PIM 1

PIM 0

EMA: PH-PC40

LANI: PZ-PC19

IOC: PH-IO24

DLKC: PH-PC20

MUX: PH-PC36

ISAGT-A: PZ-GT13

ISAGT-B: PZ-GT20

GT: PH-GT09

TSW: PH-SW12

PLO: PH-CK16-A/17-A

CLK: PH-CK18

Note 1

Note 2

To ISWM Note 1 To ISWM Note 1 To ISWM Note 1

To LPM

of LN1 To LPM

of LN2 To LPM

of LN3

Note 1: See details in Figure 2-26, Speech Path Block Diagram.

Note 2: Multiple connection is provided on the backboard side between the PLOs here. For more

details, refer to the “Circuit Card Manual.”

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24307

Page 36

Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

Figure 2-26 Speech Path Block Diagram (1/2)

ISWM

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM0

IMG0 of LN0

PIM1

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM2

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM3

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM0

IMG1 of LN0

PIM1

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM2

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM3

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM0

IMG2 of LN0

PIM1

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM2

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM3

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM0

IMG3 of LN0

PIM1

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM2

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM3

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

- Symbols -

: Cable

: Circuit card (ACT)

: Circuit card (ST-BY)

: Speech Path

TSW (in TSWM0/1) : PH-SW12

TSW (in ISWM) : PU-SW00

HSW: PU-SW01

MUX: PH-PC36

TSW/INT TSW 00

000 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 00A 00B 00C00D 00E 00F

TSW/INT TSW 10

100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 10A 10B 10C 10D 10E 10F

HSW

TSW/INT TSW 01

010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 01A 01B 01C 01D 01E 01F

TSW/INT TSW 11

110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 11A 11B 11C 11D 11E 11F

TSW/INT TSW/INT TSW/INT

00800900A

00B 00C00D00E00F

TSWM 0

( LN0)

TSW 00

TSW02

TSW/INT

TSW 10

TSW 12

TSW 01

TSW03

TSW 11

TSW 13

TSW/INT TSW/INT TSW/INT TSW/INT

000001002003 004005006007 104105106107

100101102103

10810910A10B 10C10D10E10F

TSWM 1

( LN0)

TSW 00

TSW02

TSW 10

TSW 12

TSW 01

TSW03

TSW 11

TSW 13

TSW/INT TSW/INT TSW/INT TSW/INT

000001002003 004005006007 104105106107

100101102103

00800900A

00B 00C00D00E00F

10810910A10B 10C10D10E10F

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM0

IMG0 of LN1

PIM1

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM2

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM3

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM0

IMG1 of LN1

PIM1

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM2

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM3

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM0

IMG2 of LN1

PIM1

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM2

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM3

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM0

IMG3 of LN1

PIM1

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM2

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM3

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

TSWM 0

( LN1)

TSW 00

TSW02

TSW/INT

TSW 10

TSW 12

TSW 01

TSW03

TSW 11

TSW 13

TSW/INT TSW/INT TSW/INT

TSW/INT TSW/INT TSW/INT TSW/INT

000001002003 004005006007

00800900A00B 00C00D00E00F

104105106107

100101102103

10810910A10B 10C10D10E10F

TSWM 1

( LN1)

TSW 00

TSW02

TSW 10

TSW 12

TSW 01

TSW03

TSW 11

TSW 13

TSW/INT TSW/INT TSW/INT TSW/INT

000001002003 004005006007 104105106107

100101102103

00800900A00B 00C00D00E00F

10810910A10B 10C10D10E10F

HSW

TSW/INT TSW 02

020021022023 024025026027 02802902A02B 02C02D02E02F

TSW/INT TSW 12

120121122123 124125126127 12812912A12B 12C12D12E12F

TSW/INT

TSW 03

030031032033 034035036037 03803903A03B 03C03D03E03F

TSW/INT TSW 13

130131132133 134135136137 13813913A13B 13C13D13E13F

To TSWM0

of LN2 To TSWM1

of LN2 To TSWM0

of LN3 To TSWM1

of LN3

To TSWM0

of LN2 To TSWM1

of LN2 To TSWM0

of LN3 To TSWM1

of LN3

This figure shows a block diagram of speech path.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 2

Page 37

Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

Figure 2-26 Speech Path Block Diagram (2/2)

ISWM

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM0

IMG0 of LN2

PIM1

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM2

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM3

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM0

IMG1 of LN2

PIM1

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM2

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM3

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM0

IMG2 of LN2

PIM1

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM2

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM3

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM0

IMG3 of LN2

PIM1

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM2

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM3

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

- Symbols -

: Cable

: Circuit card (ACT)

: Circuit card (ST-BY)

: Speech Path

TSW (in TSWM0/1) : PH-SW12

TSW (in ISWM) : PU-SW00

HSW: PU-SW01

MUX: PH-PC36

TSW/INT TSW 02

020

021

022

023024

025

026

027028029

02A

02B02C

02D

02E

02F

TSW/INT TSW 12

120121

122

123124125

126

127128

129

12A

12B12C

12D

12E

12F

HSW

TSW/INT TSW 03

030031

032

033034

035036

037038

039

03A

03B

03C

03D

03E

03F

TSW/INT TSW 13

130131

132133134

135

136

137138

139

13A

13B

13C

13D

13E

13F

TSW/INT TSW/INT TSW/INT

00800900A

00B 00C00D00E00F

TSWM 0

( LN2)

TSW 00

TSW02

TSW/INT

TSW 10

TSW 12

TSW 01

TSW03

TSW 11

TSW 13

TSW/INT TSW/INT TSW/INT TSW/INT

000001002003 004005006007 104105106107

100101102103

10810910A10B 10C10D10E10F

TSWM 1

( LN2)

TSW 00

TSW02

TSW 10

TSW 12

TSW 01

TSW03

TSW 11

TSW 13

TSW/INT TSW/INT TSW/INT TSW/INT

000001002003 004005006007 104105106107

100101102103

00800900A

00B 00C00D00E00F

10810910A10B 10C10D10E10F

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM0

IMG0 of LN3

PIM1

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM2

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM3

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM0

IMG1 of LN3

PIM1

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM2

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM3

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM0

IMG2 of LN3

PIM1

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM2

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM3

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM0

IMG3 of LN3

PIM1

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM2

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM3

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

TSWM 0

( LN3)

TSW 00

TSW02

TSW/INT

TSW 10

TSW 12

TSW 01

TSW03

TSW 11

TSW 13

TSW/INT TSW/INT TSW/INT

TSW/INT TSW/INT TSW/INT TSW/INT

000001002003 004005006007

00800900A00B 00C00D00E00F

104105106107

100101102103

10810910A10B 10C10D10E10F

TSWM 1

( LN3)

TSW 00

TSW02

TSW 10

TSW 12

TSW 01

TSW03

TSW 11

TSW 13

TSW/INT TSW/INT TSW/INT TSW/INT

000001002003 004005006007 104105106107

100101102103

00800900A00B 00C00D00E00F

10810910A10B 10C10D10E10F

HSW

TSW/INT

TSW 00

000001002003 004005006007 00800900A00B 00C00D00E00F

TSW/INT

TSW 10

100101102103 104105106107 10810910A10B 10C10D10E10F

TSW/INT

TSW 01

010011012013 014015016017 01801901A01B 01C01D01E01F

TSW/INT

TSW 11

110111112113 114115116117 11811911A11B 11C11D11E11F

To TSWM0

of LN0 To TSWM1

of LN0 To TSWM0

of LN1 To TSWM1

of LN1

To TSWM0

of LN0 To TSWM1

of LN0 To TSWM0

of LN1 To TSWM1

of LN1

This figure shows a block diagram of speech path.

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24307

Page 38

Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

Figure 2-27 Speech Path Range of Fault

MUX

A fault within this range

affects this module.

32ch

A fault within this range

affects the circuit card.

A fault within this range affects two slots.

PIM 3

A fault within this range

affects this module.

32ch

A fault within this range

affects the circuit card.

A fault within this range

affects two slots.

PIM 3

A fault within this range

affects this module.

32ch

A fault within this range

affects the circuit card.

A fault within this range

affects two slots.

PIM 3

A fault within this range

affects this module.

32ch

A fault within this range

affects the circuit card.

A fault within this range

affects two slots.

PIM 3

TSW

TSW/INT

512ch

LC/TRK

MUX

LC/TRK

: Circuit Card : Possible fault range to be affected : Speech Path

Symbols

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 2

Page 39

Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

2.8 Explanation of Terms

•C-Level Infinite Loop

The program repeatedly executes specific routines due to a fault of the main memory, data destruction,

etc. The program is not able to be processed normally. This faulty condition is referred to as Program

Infinite Loop. C-Level infinite loop is a state where a clock-level program, which runs under clock

interrupt disable state, is in an infinite loop status.

•B-Level Infinite Loop

This is a state where a program infinite loop has occurred during a connection processing and the

connection for the next call is not able to be processed.

•PM (Port Microprocessor)

Each line/trunk card mounted in the PIM is equipped with a processor called Port Microprocessor

(PM), which continuously supervises the lines/trunks.

•Ready Error

For acknowledging the connection between the CPU and a circuit card, an interface signal called

Ready Signal is used. When the CPU has accessed a specific circuit card and the normality of the

connection is acknowledged, the Ready Signal is returned to the CPU within 6 µs. If the Ready signal

is not returned to the CPU within 6 µs after access, the situation is referred to as Ready Error.

•Parity Error

For confirming the normality of data transfer between the CPU and the circuit card under the control

of the CPU, parity check is made. When an error is detected in a parity check, it is referred to as Parity

Error. Parity check means to confirm the normality of data by adding an error detecting parity bit to

a set of data to be transferred.

When a set of data is transferred, a parity bit is added to the data so that the data has an even-number

of “1” bits (it is referred to as Even Parity). When there is an odd-number of “1” bits in the received

one set of data, it is detected as an error.

•Monitor Restart

Monitor restart processing suspends current processings in progress without applying any hardware

controlling, allowing the system to restart its operations from the monitor program.

The system abandons only the processings of the calls being handled by the program, and maintains

all the connections that have already been established.

•Circuit Card Front Initializing Restart

The whole system is forcibly initialized. However, the initialization varies with the setting of the

SENSE switch on the DSP of CPU (see Table 2-2).

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24307

Page 40

Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

•PM (Line/Trunk Card) Make-Busy Restart

In this processing, the faulty PM (Line/Trunk Card) is isolated from the system and, at the same time,

the calls associated with that faulty PM (Line/Trunk Card) are released. No calls related to the faulty

PM (Line/Trunk Card) are processed and the system normally runs without the faulty PM (Line/Trunk

Card).

•Data Copy Restart

In a system of dual CPU configuration, the RAM memory (including the data memory) is copied from

the ACT side CPU into the STBY side CPU, and ACT/STBY is changed over and monitor restart is

executed.

In the case of this restart processing, only the ACT side CPU and the STBY side CPU are changed

over without any effect on the current connections. However, no call processings are executed while

the restart processing is in progress (from copying until the end of the changeover).

Table 2-2 Kinds of Circuit Card Front Restart

SENSE (0~F) KIND OF RESTART REMARKS

1 DM Clear Restart

2 DM Load Restart When the system is in operation

5 OAI Memory Clear Restart

C OFF-line Restart

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 2

Page 41

Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

3. HOW TO READ PRECAUTIONS, DIAGNOSTIC, AND FAULT REPAIR INFORMATION

3.1 Precaution about Diagnostic Procedure/Fault Repair Procedure

When performing diagnostic procedures/fault repair procedures, be aware of the following actions:

(1) When replacing a circuit card with a spare, handle the circuit card using the Field Service Kit.

(a) To protect the circuit card from static electricity, wear a wrist strap before handling the circuit card.

(b) Before extracting the circuit card from its mounting slot, set its MB switch to the UP side (ON).

(2) When holding a circuit card by hand, wear gloves and be careful not to touch mounted parts, gold-

plated terminal, etc., on the circuit card.

The 3M Model 8012 Portable Field Service Kit, shown in Figure 2-28, is recommended as an effective

countermeasure against static electricity.

Figure 2-28 3M® Model 8012 Portable Field Service Kit

Wrist Strap

Place the Circuit

Card on a

conductive sheet.

Connect ground wire to the Earth

terminal of the Module Group.

Note: 3M is a registered trademark of Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing, Inc.

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24307

Page 42

Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

Figure 2-29 How to Hold a Circuit Card

(3) When a circuit card appears to be faulty, check the following items before replacing it with a spare:

(a) Poor connector contact at the circuit card may be responsible for the fault. Repeat insertion and

extraction of the circuit card a few times. Clean the connector portion, and recheck for proper

operation.

(b) Check the lead wires of vertically-mounted parts (resistors, capacitors, etc.) to ensure they have not

shorted each other or broken.

modified cross connection wires erroneously left unconnected.

(d) Check the ROMs to ensure proper seating in the IC socket. Figure 2-30 shows a leg that is bent and

not set in the socket.

Figure 2-30 How to Set the ROM in IC Socket

1234

OFF

12345678

OFF

12345678

OFF

12345678

OFF

12345678

OFF

1234

OFF

1234

OFF

12345678

OFF

12345678

OFF

12345678

OFF

12345678

OFF

Card Puller Tab

Circuit Card

Plastic Bag

Gold Plated Terminal

Note

Note: Do not touch the Gold Plated Terminal with bare hands.

A pin is bent, not

inserted in the socket.

ROM

SOCKET

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 2

Page 43

Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

(4) How to clean the connector portion (gold-plated terminal):

(a) Dip the gold-plated terminal portion in the cleaning fluid for 3 to 5 seconds (only PA-XX type circuit

card), as shown in Figure 2-31.

Figure 2-31 How to Clean the Connector Portion

Note 1: Some of the parts are subject to damage if they come in contact with the cleansing liquid. Be careful

to allow only the connector portion (gold-plated terminal) to contact the cleaning liquid.

Note 2: Be sure to use fresh cleaning fluid (FREON or isopropyl alcohol).

(b) Using a soft cotton cloth, wipe both sides of the connector portion (gold-plated terminal) clean (only

PA-XX type circuit card), as shown in Figure 2-32.

Figure 2-32 How to Clean Gold-Plated Terminal

Note 1: Use cloth (gauze, etc.) to clean.

Note 2: After wiping, be careful not to leave lint on the surface of the circuit card.

(5) When a check on the flat cable or LT cable is directed in the tree, check the following items:

(a) Make a visual check to see if the connector is properly connected.

(b) Poor connector contact may be responsible for the fault. Repeat connection and disconnection a few

times, and check again to see if the connector is properly connected.

(6) When replacing the circuit card is directed in the tree, replace the circuit card with a spare as per Chapter 4.

(7) When multiple circuit cards appear to be faulty, before replacing them with spares, remount them (one at

a time) into their slots, to determine which cards should be replaced.

Circuit

Card

Cleaning

Fluid

Container

gauze

Gold-plated terminal

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24307

Page 44

Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

The following is an example where the fault was recovered after the replacement of circuit cards:

(8) When a fault recovery is completed, use the RALM/RALMN command to clear all the alarm indications

and registered system messages. If required, restore temporary cross connections and transient data for

testing to the original ones.

Set the 1st circuit card back into its mounting slot

If the fault recurs: Replace the circuit card.

Set the 2nd circuit card back into its mounting slot

If the fault recurs: Replace the circuit card.

Set the 3rd circuit card back into its mounting slot

If the fault recurs: Replace the circuit card.

If a circuit card is found to be faulty, send the faulty circuit card for repair.

The fault may be a temporary one, or due to poor contact of the circuit card. Observe the

situation for a while.

START

END

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 2

Page 45

Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

3.2 How to Follow Diagnostic Procedure/Fault Repair Procedure

(a) Diagnostic Work

A fault diagnostic procedure by system message is explained in the “TREE” format on an individual

system message basis.

•Proceed with judgment as to whether the fault status coincides with the indicated status, following

the sequence beginning from START.

•How to proceed with the diagnosis work is explained in Figure 2-33.

STEP 1 Determine whether the fault coincides with the fault status (1) in Figure 2-33.

STEP 2 If the fault status does coincide, the fault is indicated by (2). Repair the fault by referring to the

relevant section in Chapter 5. Otherwise, proceed to (3).

STEP 3 Perform the work indicated by (3). The result of the work (3) is broken down as indicated by

(4).

STEP 4 Determine whether the result of work (3) coincides with the status indicated by (5). If so, the

fault(s) is/are indicated either by (6) or by (7). If not, proceed to the next Step.

STEP 5 Perform the work indicated by (8), and if the result of the work is the same as the status

indicated, the fault is indicated by (9). If the fault repair work indicated by (9) affects another

normal line, recheck the work as indicated by (10).

(b) Fault Repair Procedure

A fault repair procedure is explained by means of “TREE” format in Chapter 5. The following

explains how to follow the “TREE” format and proceed with designated work. See Figure 2-34.

•Begin from START and proceed with the necessary repair work following the sequence.

•When a faulty circuit card (or circuit cards) is suspected, replace the faulty circuit card with a spare

in accordance with the work procedure pertaining to that specific circuit card.

STEP 1 Replace the circuit card indicated by (A) with a spare and check it. Perform the detailed work

as per (B). If the fault status is beyond repair, proceed to the next step.

STEP 2 If the range of the fault or the system configuration is as indicated by (C), perform a check as

indicated by (D). If the fault status is beyond repair, proceed to the next step.

STEP 3 Replace the circuit card indicated by (E) with a spare and check it. The detailed procedure

indicated by (G) varies with the system configuration indicated by (F).

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24307

Page 46

Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

Figure 2-33 Diagnostic Work Items and Symbols Example

FAULT SUPERVISION

START

END

When FAULT

Section No.

(1)

: It is the fault of

Perform

(3)

(4)

When

(5)

(2)

When FAULT

Section No.

: It is the fault of

(7)

When

(8)

with

performed FAULT

Section No.

(9)

CHECK OF WORK

(6)

(10)

(11)

(Chapter 5)

(11)

(5)

Note: (1): Judgment of fault status

(2),(6),(7),(9): When the fault status coincides with the indication, the cause of the fault is indicated.

(11): When repairing the fault, refer to the relevant section in Chapter 5.

(3): Operating items for diagnosis

(4): Branching of the result of the operation

(5): Judgment of the status of the result of the operation

(8): When operating method is unknown, refer to Chapter 6.

(11)

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 2

Page 47

Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

Figure 2-34 Recovery Procedure Example

START

END

Check

(A) (B)

When

(F) (G)

Check

(E)

When

(G)

(F)

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24307

Page 48

Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

4. REPORTING FAULT TO NEC

When the cause of a fault is uncertain, make note of the situation involved and report it to NEC. When

forwarding faulty circuit cards to NEC, exercise caution to protect from static electricity.

4.1 Fault Reporting Method

The following three items must be included in the report without fail:

(1) Faulty situation (reports should be similar to “dial tone is not heard only on individual lines,” “incoming

C.O. line calls are not able to be terminated only to a specific ATTCON/DESKCON,” etc.)

•Faulty phenomena

On lifting the handset, dial tone is not heard but side tone is heard, etc.

•History of fault

When did the fault occur? What kind of repair procedure has been executed? Does the fault still exist

or not exist? etc.

•Range of fault

Range of fault should be reported: Single line?, Specific trunk?, Specific circuit card?, Specific PIM?,

Whole system?, etc.

(2) Circuit Card Version Number, Program Name, and Program Package Version Number of the circuit card.

Figure 2-35 shows an example of PA-16LCBE circuit card.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 2

Page 49

Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

Figure 2-35 Circuit Card Version Number, Program Name, and Program Package Version Number

PA-

16LCBE

SPA-

16LCBE

SP 785

A 6A

Front

Program Package

Version Number

Program Name

Circuit Card Name

9A 91-03

TR 5448

Right View of Circuit Card

Circuit Card Version Number

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24307

Page 50

Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

4.2 Forwarding Faulty Circuit Card Method

Send the faulty circuit card to the NEC agent to whom a request is made for a replacement card. Adhere

to the following procedure for sending the faulty circuit card:

(1) Insert connector covers onto the circuit card terminals.

(2) Put the circuit card into a static electricity protective bag.

(3) Pack the circuit card with air cap, etc.

(4) Set the circuit card into the cardboard box for that specific circuit card.

(5) If multiple circuit cards are to be sent, set each circuit card in a separate cardboard box and stuff the box

with shock absorbing material.

Note: When sending a faulty circuit card, put it in a static guard bag. To prevent damage, NEVER place the

circuit card in a vinyl bag or ship it without a protective bag.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 51

Issue 1

CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM MESSAGES

This chapter explains how to read and analyze system messages displayed during routine diagnosis, system op-

eration status controlling, and occurrence of a fault within the system. Table 3-1 provides a list of system mes-

sages.

Table 3-1 List of System Messages

MESSAGE NO. SYSTEM MESSAGE PAGE

0-C Reset Interrupt 56

0-D CPU Clock Down 58

0-E C-Level Infinite Loop 59

0-F Memory Failure 61

0-G B-Level Infinite Loop (Permanent) 63

0-H B-Level Infinite Loop (Temporary) 64

0-I Mate CPU Failure 65

0-J Abnormal Interrupt 66

1-A Both TSW Failure (Permanent) 67

1-B TSW Failure (Permanent) 68

1-C Both TSW Write Failure 69

1-D TSW Write Failure 70

1-E Both TSW Clock Failure 71

1-F TSW Clock Failure 72

1-G Both HSW Failure 73

1-H HSW Failure 74

1-I Both HSW Write Failure 75

1-J HSW Write Failure 76

1-K Both HSW CLK Failure 77

1-L HSW CLK Failure 79

1-O Both PLO Failure 81

1-P PLO Failure 83

1-S Module Group Down Failure 85

1-T TSW ACT Change Report 86

1-U DLKC Data Transfer Failure (Permanent) 88

1-V DLKC Data Transfer Failure (Temporary) 89

1-W PLO Restore 90

1-X LN Æ ISW CLK/FH Failure 91

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 52

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

1-Y LN Æ ISW CLK/FH Failure (Both) 93

1-Z LN Æ ISW CLK/FH Release 95

2-T AP-INT Data Transfer Failure (Permanent) Note 1 -

2-U AP-INT Data Transfer Failure (Temporary) Note 1 -

2-V IP Data Transfer Failure (Permanent) Note 1 -

2-W IP Data Transfer Failure (Temporary) Note 1 -

3-B C-Level Infinite Loop (Permanent) 97

3-C C-Level Infinite Loop (Temporary) 98

3-D Lock-Up Failure (Permanent) 99

3-E Lock-Up Failure (Temporary) 100

3-F -48V Over Current 101

3-G Ground Failure 102

3-H Digital Line Warning 103

3-I Digital Line Failure 104

3-J Digital Line Restore 105

4-C Both TSW Ready Failure 106

4-D TSW Ready Failure 107

4-E Both HSW Ready Failure 108

4-F HSW Ready Failure 109

4-Q DLKC Ready Failure 110

4-R IO Ready Failure for UAP Note 1 -

4-S MUX Ready Failure 111

4-T Both MUX Ready Failure 112

4-U PCI Card Failure 113

4-V PCI Card Failure Recovered 114

6-A System Failure 115

6-B RGU and Howler Failure 116

6-C Line Load Control Start 117

6-D Line Load Control Stop 118

6-H Bad Call Notification 119

6-I STA-Test Connection Data 124

6-J Emergency Call 127

6-L Emergency Control Start 128

Table 3-1 List of System Messages (Continued)

MESSAGE NO. SYSTEM MESSAGE PAGE

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 53

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

6-M Emergency Control Stop 129

6-N Abnormal Call Duration Data 130

6-O SMDR Output Buffer Overflow Alarm 133

6-P SMDR Output Buffer Overflow Release 136

7-A System Initialize With Data Load 137

7-B System Initialize 139

7-C CPU MBR Key Turn ON 140

7-D CPU MBR Key Turn OFF 141

7-E TSW MBR Key Turn ON 142

7-F TSW MBR Key Turn OFF 143

7-I ALMC MB Key Turn ON 144

7-J ALMC MB Key Turn OFF 145

7-K PM MB Key Turn ON 146

7-L PM MB Key Turn OFF 147

7-M NCU MB Key Turn ON 148

7-N NCU MB Key Turn OFF 149

7-O Cyclic Diagnosis Normal 150

7-P Cyclic Diagnosis Information (Error Detected) 160

7-U PLO MB Key Turn ON 180

7-V PLO MB Key Turn OFF 181

13-A CCH Clock Failure 183

13-B CCH C-Level Infinite Loop Failure (Permanent) 184

13-C CCH C-Level Infinite Loop Failure (Temporary) 185

13-D CCH Lock-Up Failure (Permanent) 186

13-E CCH Lock-Up Failure (Temporary) 187

13-F CCH B-Level Infinite Loop Failure (Permanent) 188

13-G CCH B-Level Infinite Loop Failure (Temporary) 189

13-H CCS Link Failure (Permanent) 190

13-I CCS Link Failure (Temporary) 192

13-J Restoration From CCS Link Failure 194

13-K CCH Reset Interrupt Failure 195

13-N Digital Line Warning 196

13-O Digital Line Failure 197

Table 3-1 List of System Messages (Continued)

MESSAGE NO. SYSTEM MESSAGE PAGE

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 54

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

13-P Digital Line Restore 198

13-Q DAU Battery Operation 199

13-R DAU Line Operation 200

13-Z Power Failure 201

15-A VPS Failure (Temporary) 202

15-B VPS Failure (Permanent) 203

15-C VPS Restore 204

16-A Inside Trunk All Busy 205

16-B Virtual Tie Line Set Report 207

16-C Virtual Tie Line Cancel Report 208

16-E Virtual Tie Line Set Time Out 209

16-F Sender Start Time Out 212

16-K I/O Port Line OFF 219

16-L I/O Port Line Restore 220

16-M Hard Clock Failure 221

16-N Hard Clock Restore 222

16-T IOC Failure (Temporary) 223

16-U IOC Failure (Permanent) 224

16-X Station Exchanged Report 225

17-A CCH MBR Key Turn ON 228

17-B CCH MBR Key Turn OFF 229

17-C CCH MB Key Turn ON 230

17-D CCH MB Key Turn OFF 231

17-H Day/Night Change Information 232

17-O IOC MB Key Turn ON 234

17-P IOC MB Key Turn OFF 235

17-Q IOC MBR Key Turn ON 236

17-R IOC MBR Key Turn OFF 237

17-Y GATE-HSW MBR Key ON 238

17-Z GATE-HSW MBR Key OFF 239

23-J ATM Interface Warning Note 2 -

23-K ATM Interface Failure Note 2 -

23-L ATM Interface Recovered Note 2 -

Table 3-1 List of System Messages (Continued)

MESSAGE NO. SYSTEM MESSAGE PAGE

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 55

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

Note 1: Refer to “Fusion Network System Manual.”

Note 2: Refer to the manual related to ATM.

Note 3: Refer to “Wireless System Manual.”

Note 4: Refer to the manual related to OAI.

23-P Dch Back-Up Automatic Change Start/End 240

23-Q Dch Back-Up Manual Change Start/End 242

23-R ATM Interface Change Report Note 2 -

23-S FCCH Failure Note 1 -

23-T FCCH Failure Recovered Note 1 -

23-U FCCH Status Notice Note 1 -

23-W FCCH Advancing Start Note 1 -

23-X FCCH Advancing End Note 1 -

23-Y MUX Clock Failure 244

23-Z Both MUX Clock Failure 245

25-J ZT Operation Start Note 3 -

25-K ZT Set Up NG Note 3 -

25-L ZT Fault Note 3 -

25-M ZT Fault Recovery Note 3 -

25-N ZT Carrier Fault Note 3 -

26-N MAT Log 246

26-R Call Trace 247

26-V LAN Interface Error Report 251

26-W LAN Interface Release Report 255

27-C ATM Interface Port MB Key ON Note 2 -

27-D ATM Interface Port MB Key OFF Note 2 -

27-E DLMX MBR Key Turn ON 257

27-F DLMX MBR Key Turn OFF 258

27-G DLMX ACT Change Report 259

33-A MUX Clock Restore 260

33-B SDT Alarm Warning 261

33-C SDT Alarm Trouble 263

33-D SDT Alarm Restore 266

33-E SDT Interface Change Notify 267

Table 3-1 List of System Messages (Continued)

MESSAGE NO. SYSTEM MESSAGE PAGE

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 56

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the processor is reset due to a failure in the system.

➀ Self-CPU Restart Information

➁ Mate-CPU Restart Information (FF

H: not mounted)

➂ Related-call Release Result

See Chapter 5 for repair procedure.

1: XXXX XX00 XXXX 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂ ➃

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b4 b3 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

0-C Reset Interrupt

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0: 0/1 = -/Monitor Restart

b1: 0/1 = -Phase 1 Restart Note 1

b3: 0/1 = -/Initialization

b4: 0/1 = -/Data Copy Restart executed (for Dual-CPU system only)

b6: 0/1 = Program Load not executed/executed

b7: 0/1 = ACT/STBY (active system indication after restart)

b0: 0/1 = -/Monitor Restart

b1: 0/1 = -Phase 1 Restart Note 1

b3: 0/1 = -/Initialization

b4: 0/1 = -/Data Copy Restart executed (for Dual-CPU system only)

b6: 0/1 = Program Load not executed/executed

b7: 0/1 = ACT/STBY (active system indication after restart)

b7: 0/1 = Call Release Processing after restart

→

“Normal End”/

“Abnormal End”

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 57

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

➃Data Load Result after restart

processing

Note 1: Phase 1 Restart is executed when initializing the system without disrupting the following two-way

connections that have already been established:

•Basic two-way connections (STN-STN, STN-TRK, TRK-TRK)

•Fixed connections

•Two-way connections established on a Fusion link

For more details, see Chapter 6, Section 12.

Note 2: The number sharing data load also affects the data load of Dual Station Calling Over-FCCS.

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b11 b9 b8

b0: 0/1 = Office Data Load

→

“Normal End”/“Abnormal End”

b1: 0/1 = Call Fowarding Data Load

→

“Normal End”/“Abnormal End”

b2: 0/1 = Individual Speed Calling data load

→

“Normal End”/“Abnormal

End”

b3: 0/1 = RCF Data Load

→

“Normal End”/“Abnormal End”

b4: 0/1 = Name Display Data Load

→

“Normal End”/“Abnormal End”

b5: 0/1 = Network DM Load

→

“Normal End”/“Abnormal End”

b6: 0/1 = Local DM Load

→

“Normal End”/“Abnormal End”

b7: 0/1 = DM Load/Non Load

b8: 0/1 = User Assign Soft Key data load

→

“Normal End”/“Abnormal

End”

b9: 0/1 = Number Sharing data load is “Normal End”/“Abnormal End”

Note 2

b11: 0/1 = Call Block data load is “Normal End”/“Abnormal End”

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 58

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when a fault has occurred to the clock oscillator in the CPU.

➀ Self-CPU Restart Information

➁ Mate-CPU Restart Information (FF

H: not mounted)

➂ Related Call Information

See Chapter 5 for repair procedure.

1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁➂

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b5 b4 b3 b0

Default Alarm:

0-D CPU Clock Down

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0: 0/1=-/Monitor Restart

b3: 0/1=-/Initialization

b4: 0/1=-/Data Copy restart (for Dual-CPU system only)

b5: 0/1=-/MB control

b7: 0/1=ACT/STBY (active system indication after restart)

b0: 0/1=-/Monitor Restart

b3: 0/1=-/Initialization

b4: 0/1=-/Data Copy restart (for Dual-CPU system only)

b5: 0/1=-/MB control

b7: 0/1=ACT/STBY (active system indication after restart)

b7: 0/1=Released/Not released

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 59

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

C-level infinite loop is a state where a clock-level program, running under clock interrupt disable state, is in

an infinite loop. This message displays when the counter value to check the normality of the processing has

become abnormal.

➀ Self-CPU Restart Information after

clock fault occurrence

➁ Mate-CPU Restart Information

➂ NMI Factor

See Chapter 5 for repair procedure.

0-E C-level Infinite Loop

1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX

➀ ➁➂ ➃➄

➅➆ ➇

4: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 5: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 6: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX

➇

7: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 8: XX00 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➇

b7 b5 b4 b3 b0

b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

SUP

0-E C-Level Infinite Loop

Default Grade:

2Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0: 0/1 = -/Monitor Restart

b3: 0/1 = -/Initialization

b4: 0/1 = -/Data Copy Restart (for Dual-CPU system only)

b5: 0/1 = -/MB control

b7: 0/1 = ACT/STBY (active system indication after restart)

b0: 0/1 = -/Monitor Restart

b3: 0/1 = -/Initialization

b4: 0/1 = -/Data Copy Restart (for Dual-CPU system only)

b5: 0/1 = -/MB control

b7: 0/1 = ACT/STBY (active system indication after restart)

b0: 0/1 = -/Reset by Power On

b1: 0/1 = -/Watchdog Timer timeout

b2: 0/1 = ISAGT is mounted/ISGAT is not mounted

b3: 0/1 = -/OSC clock interrupt on ISGAT

b4: 0/1 = -/IO parity Alarm

b5: 0/1 = -/IO ready Alarm

b6: 0/1 = -/External NMI

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 60

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

➃ System Controlling Port B

➄ CPU Alarm

➅ CPU Changeover Factors

➆ System ALM

➇ Data to be Analyzed by NEC

Engineers

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b0: 0/1 = Timer 2 Gate ON/OFF

b1: 0/1 = Speaker Gate ON/OFF

b2: 0/1 = Parity Check Enable/MASK

b3: 0/1 = Channel Check Enable/MASK

b4: 0/1 = -/RAM Refresh Pulse Output State

b5: 0/1 = -/Timer 2 Output State

b6: 0/1 = -/Channel Check Error Detected

b7: 0/1 = -/Parity Error Detected

b0: 0/1 = -/ACT-side Processor CLK Alarm

b1: 0/1 = -/ACT-side Processor COP Alarm

b2: 0/1 = -/ACT-side Processor MEM Alarm

b3: 0/1 = -/ACT-side Processor Emergency Timer Overflow

b4: 0/1 = -/STBY-side Processor CLK Alarm

b5: 0/1 = -/STBY-side Processor COP Alarm

b6: 0/1 = -/STBY-side Processor MEM Alarm

b7: 0/1 = -/STBY-side Processor Emergency Timer Overflow

b0: 0/1 = -/CLK Alarm

b1: 0/1 = -/Emergency Timer Overflow

b2: 0/1 = -/SOFT EMA

b3: 0/1 = -/SOFT changeover

b4: 0/1 = -/Emergency Counter Overflow

b5: 0/1 = STBY/ACT

b6: 0/1 = Dual/Single

b7: 0/1 = CPU 0/CPU 1

b0: 0/1 = -/Main Power Alarm

b1: 0/1 = -/Power Alarm

b2: 0/1 = -/FUSE Alarm

b3: 0/1 = -/TEMP MJ Alarm

b4: 0/1 = -/TEMP MN Alarm

b5: 0/1 = -/Parity Alarm

b6: 0/1 = Card is not mounted/mounted

b7: 0/1 = -/EMA CLK Alarm

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 61

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when a CPU memory read/write error occurs.

➀Information on Self-CPU Restart

after detection of a clock fault

➁ Mate-CPU Restart Information

➂ NMI Factor

See Chapter 5 for repair procedure.

0-F Memory Failure

1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX

➀ ➁➂ ➃ ➄ ➅ ➆➇

4: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 5: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 6: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX

➇

7: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 8: XX00 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➇

b7 b5 b4 b3 b0

b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

SUP

0-F Memory Failure

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0: 0/1 = -/Monitor Restart

b3: 0/1 = -/Initialization

b4: 0/1 = -/Data Copy Restart (for Dual-CPU system only)

b5: 0/1 = -/MB control

b7: 0/1 = ACT/STBY (active system indication after restart)

b0: 0/1 = -/Monitor Restart

b3: 0/1 = -/Initialization

b4: 0/1 = -/Data Copy Restart (for Dual-CPU system only)

b5: 0/1 = -/MB control

b7: 0/1 = ACT/STBY (active system indication after restart)

b0: 0/1 = -/Reset by Power On

b1: 0/1 = -/Watchdog Timer timeout

b2: 0/1 = ISGAT is mounted/ISGAT is not mounted

b3: 0/1 = -/OSC clock interrupt on ISGAT

b4: 0/1 = -/IO parity Alarm

b5: 0/1 = -/IO ready Alarm

b6: 0/1 = -/External NMI

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 62

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

➃ System Controlling Port B

➄ CPU Alarm

➅ CPU Changeover Factors

➆ System ALM

➇ Data to be Analyzed by NEC

Engineers

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b0: 0/1 = Timer 2 Gate ON/OFF

b1: 0/1 = Speaker Gate ON/OFF

b2: 0/1 = Parity Check Enable/MASK

b3: 0/1 = Channel Check Enable/MASK

b4: 0/1 = -/RAM Refresh Pulse Output State

b5: 0/1 = -/Timer 2 Output State

b6: 0/1 = -/Channel Check Error Detected

b7: 0/1 = -/Parity Error Detected

b0: 0/1 = -/ACT-side Processor CLK Alarm

b1: 0/1 = -/ACT-side Processor COP Alarm

b2: 0/1 = -/ACT-side Processor MEM Alarm

b3: 0/1 = -/ACT-side Processor Emergency Timer Overflow

b4: 0/1 = -/STBY-side Processor CLK Alarm

b5: 0/1 = -/STBY-side Processor COP Alarm

b6: 0/1 = -/STBY-side Processor MEM Alarm

b7: 0/1 = -/STBY-side Processor Emergency Timer Overflow

b0: 0/1 = -/CLK Alarm

b1: 0/1 = -/Emergency Timer Overflow

b2: 0/1 = -/SOFT EMA

b3: 0/1 = -/SOFT changeover

b4: 0/1 = -/Emergency Counter Overflow

b5: 0/1 = STBY/ACT

b6: 0/1 = Dual/Single

b7: 0/1 = CPU 0/CPU 1

b0: 0/1 = -/Main Power Alarm

b1: 0/1 = -/Power Alarm

b2: 0/1 = -/FUSE Alarm

b3: 0/1 = -/TEMP MJ Alarm

b4: 0/1 = -/TEMP MN Alarm

b5: 0/1 = -/Parity Alarm

b6: 0/1 = Card is not mounted/mounted

b7: 0/1 = -/EMA CLK Alarm

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 63

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when a B-level infinite loop failure occurs.

➀Information on Self-CPU Restart

after detection of a clock fault

➁ Mate-CPU Restart Information

➂ B-level Infinite Loop

➃ Data to be Analyzed by NEC Engineers

See Chapter 5 for repair procedure.

0-F Memory Failure

1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX

➀ ➁➂ ➃

4: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 5: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 6: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX

➃

7: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 8: XX00 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➃

b7 b5 b4 b3 b0

b1 b0

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

0-G B-Level Infinite Loop (Permanent)

Default Grade:

2Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0: 0/1 = -/Monitor Restart

b3: 0/1 = -/Initialization

b4: 0/1 = -/Data Copy restart (for Dual-CPU system only)

b5: 0/1 = -/MB control

b7: 0/1 = ACT/STBY (active system indication after restart)

b0: 0/1 = -/Monitor Restart

b3: 0/1 = -/Initialization

b4: 0/1 = -/Data Copy Restart (for Dual-CPU system only)

b5: 0/1 = -/MB control

b7: 0/1 = ACT/STBY (active system indication after restart)

b0: 0/1 = -/B-level Infinite Loop

b1: 0/1 = -/Task Timer Timeout

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 64

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when, in the CPU program processing, the counter value to check the normality of the

processing has become abnormal.

➀ Self-CPU Restart Information

➁ Mate-CPU Restart Information

(FF H: not mounted)

➂

➃ Data analyzed by NEC Engineers

See Chapter 5 for repair procedure.

1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX

➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➃ ➃

4: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 5: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 6: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX

➃➃➃

7: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 8: XX00 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➃➃

b7 b5 b4 b3 b0

b1 b0

Default Alarm:

SUP

0-H B-Level Infinite Loop (Temporary)

Default Grade:

1Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0: 0/1 = -/Monitor Restart

b3: 0/1 = -/Initialization

b4: 0/1 = -/Data Copy restart (for Dual-CPU system only)

b5: 0/1 = -/MB control

b7: 0/1 = ACT/STBY (active system indication after restart)

b0: 0/1 = -/Monitor Restart

b3: 0/1 = -/Initialization

b4: 0/1 = -/Data Copy restart (for Dual-CPU system only)

b5: 0/1 = -/MB control

b7: 0/1 = ACT/STBY (active system indication after restart)

b0: 0/1 = -/B-level Infinite Loop

b1: 0/1 = -/Task Timer Timeout

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 65

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when a fault, such as the Clock down or C-level infinite loop error, has occurred.

➀ STBY-side CPU Fault Information

See Chapter 5 for repair procedure.

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

SUP

0-I Mate CPU Failure

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0: 0/1 = -/CPU clock down

b1: 0/1 = -/C-level infinite loop

b2: 0/1 = -/Memory error, Parity alarm

b3: 0/1 = -/Emergency Timer Overflow

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 66

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the CPU detects abnormal interruption.

➀ Self-CPU Restart Information

➁ Mate-CPU Restart Information

(FF H: not mounted)

➂

➃ Data analyzed by NEC Engineers

See Chapter 5 for repair procedure.

1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX

➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➃ ➃ ➃

4: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 5: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 6: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX

➃➃➃

7: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 8: XX00 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➃➃

b7 b5 b4 b3 b0

b1 b0

Default Alarm:

SUP

0-J Abnormal Interrupt

Default Grade:

2Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0: 0/1 = -/Monitor Restart

b3: 0/1 = -/Initialization

b4: 0/1 = -/Data Copy restart (for Dual-CPU system only)

b5: 0/1 = -/MB control

b7: 0/1 = ACT/STBY (active system indication after restart)

b0: 0/1 = -/Monitor Restart

b3: 0/1 = -/Initialization

b4: 0/1 = -/Data Copy restart (for Dual-CPU system only)

b5: 0/1 = -/MB control

b7: 0/1 = ACT/STBY (active system indication after restart)

b0: 0/1 = -/Abnormal Interruption (Hardware)

b3: 0/1 = -/Program Exception

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 67

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when link information cannot be written into the switch memory of the TSW in both

systems.

➀TSW system in which a fault is

detected

➁ Status at the time of fault detection

➂ Data analyzed by NEC Engineers

See Chapter 5 for repair procedure.

1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b6 b0

Default Alarm:

1-A Both TSW Failure (Permanent)

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0: 0/1 = TSW No. 0/TSW No. 1

b0: 0/1 = TSW No. 0 system/TSW No. 1 system

b6: Speech Path in ACT status

0/1 = No. 0 system/No. 1 system

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 68

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when link information cannot be written into the switch memory of the TSW card in

one of the dual systems.

➀TSW system in which a fault is

detected

➁ Status at the time of fault detection

➂ Data analyzed by NEC Engineers

See Chapter 5 for repair procedure.

1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b6 b0

Default Alarm:

1-B TSW Failure (Permanent)

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0: 0/1 = TSW No. 0/TSW No. 1

b6: 0/1 = Speech Path in ACT status

No. 0 system/No. 1 system

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 69

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the link information cannot be written into the switch memory of the TSW in both

systems.

➀TSW system in which a fault is

detected

➁

➂ Data analyzed by NEC Engineers

See Chapter 5 for repair procedure.

1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b6 b0

Default Alarm:

1-C Both TSW Write Failure

Default Grade:

2Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0: 0/1 = TSW No. 0/TSW No. 1

b6: 0/1 = Speech Path in ACT status

No. 0 system/No. 1 system

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 70

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the link information cannot be written into the switch memory of the TSW card

in one of the dual systems.

➀TSW system in which a fault is

detected

➁ Status at the time of fault detection

➂ Data analyzed by NEC Engineers

See Chapter 5 for repair procedure.

1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b6 b0

Default Alarm:

1-D TSW Write Failure

Default Grade:

2Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0: 0/1 = TSW No. 0/TSW No. 1

b6: 0/1 = Speech Path ACT status

TSW No. 0 system is ACT/TSW No. 1 system is ACT

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 71

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the system detects a clock failure, such as TSW internal clock down or Frame

Head down, in both systems.

➀TSW card in which a fault is

detected

➁ Clock status of No. 0 TSW

➂ Clock status of No. 1 TSW

Note: Refer to the meaning of ➁.

See Chapter 5 for repair procedure.

1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b1 b0

b7 b6 b2

Default Alarm:

1-E Both TSW Clock Failure

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0: 0/1 = -/Clock failure of No. 0 TSW

b1: 0/1 = -/Clock failure of No. 1 TSW

b2: 0/1 = -/DTG output down

b6: 0/1 = -/External 32 ch Clock (PLO) No. 0 System down

b7: 0/1 = -/External 32 ch Clock (PLO) No. 1 System down

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 72

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the system detects a clock failure, such as TSW internal clock down or Frame

Head down in one of the dual systems.

➀TSW card in which a fault is

detected

➁ Clock status of No. 0 TSW

➂ Clock status of No. 1 TSW

Note: Refer to the meaning of ➁.

See Chapter 5 for repair procedure.

1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b1 b0

b7 b6 b2

Default Alarm:

1-F TSW Clock Failure

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0: 0/1 = -/Clock failure of No. 0 TSW

b1: 0/1 = -/Clock failure of No. 1 TSW

b2: 0/1 = -/DTG output down

b6: 0/1 = -/External 32 ch Clock (PLO) No. 0 System down

b7: 0/1 = -/External 32 ch Clock (PLO) No. 1 System down

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 73

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the system detects any failure at the HSW in both systems.

➀ HSW detected as faulty

➁ System status at the time of fault

detection

➂ Wire Address

➃ Write Data

➄ Read Data

See Chapter 5 for repair procedure.

1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XX00 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂ ➃➄

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b4 b3 b2 b0

Default Alarm:

1-G Both HSW Failure

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0: 0/1 = No. 0 system / No. 1 system

b0: HSW No. (0-1)

b2-b3: Kind of TSW

10 = Second Switching

b4: HSW No. (0-1)

b6: Speech Path in ACT state

0/1 = No. 0 system/No. 1 system

b7: Base clock in ACT state

Data analyzed by NEC Engineers.

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 74

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the system detects any failure at the HSW in one of the dual systems.

➀ HSW detected as faulty

➁ System status at the time of fault

detection

➂ Wire Address

➃ Write Data

➄ Read Data

See Chapter 5 for repair procedure.

1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XX00 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂ ➃➄

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b4 b3 b2 b0

Default Alarm:

1-H HSW Failure

Default Grade: Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0: 0/1 = No. 0 system / No. 1 system

b0: HSW No. (0-1)

b2-b3: Kind of TSW

10 = Second Switching

b4: HSW No. (0-1)

b6: Speech Path in ACT state

0/1 = No. 0 system/No. 1 system

b7: Base clock in ACT state

Data analyzed by NEC Engineers.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 75

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the link information cannot be written into the switch memory of the HSW card

in both systems.

➀ HSW detected as faulty

➁ System status at the time of fault

detection

➂ Wire Address

➃ Write Data

➄ Read Data

See Chapter 5 for repair procedure.

1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XX00 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂ ➃➄

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b4 b3 b2 b0

Default Alarm:

1-I Both HSW Write Failure

Default Grade:

2Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0: 0/1 = No. 0 system / No. 1 system

b0: HSW No. (0-1)

b2-b3: Kind of TSW

10 = Second Switching

b4: HSW No. (0-1)

b6: Speech Path in ACT state

0/1 = No. 0 system/No. 1 system

b7: Base clock in ACT state

Data analyzed by NEC Engineers.

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 76

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the link information cannot be written into the switch memory of the HSW card

in one of the dual systems.

➀ HSW detected as faulty

➁ System status at the time of fault

detection

➂ Wire Address

➃ Write Data

➄ Read Data

See Chapter 5 for repair procedure.

1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XX00 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂ ➃➄

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b4 b3 b2 b0

Default Alarm:

1-J HSW Write Failure

Default Grade:

2Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0: 0/1 = No. 0 system / No. 1 system

b0: HSW No. (0-1)

b2-b3: Kind of TSW

10 = Second Switching

b4: HSW No. (0-1)

b6: Speech Path in ACT state

0/1 = No. 0 system/No. 1 system

b7: Base clock in ACT state

Data analyzed by NEC Engineers.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 77

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the system detects a clock failure such as HSW internal clock down or Frame

Head down in both systems.

➀ HSW detected as faulty

➁ Details on failure

➂ Clock status of No. 0 HSW

1: XXXX XXXX XXXX 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄ ➅

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b4 b0

b3 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

1-K Both HSW CLK Failure

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0: 0/1 = No. 0 system / No. 1 system

b0: 0/1 = -/Clock failure in HSW

b4: HSW No. (0-1)

b0: 0/1 = -/HSW card internal clock down

b1: 0/1 = -/External 32 ch Clock (PLO) down

b3: 0/1 = -/Frame Head Return down

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 78

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

➃ Clock status of No. 1 HSW

Note: Refer to the meaning of ➂.

➄ Clock status of No. 2 HSW

Note: Refer to the meaning of ➂.

➅ Clock status of No. 3 HSW

Note: Refer to the meaning of ➂.

See Chapter 5 for repair procedure.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 79

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the system detects a clock failure such as HSW internal clock down or Frame

Head down in both systems.

➀ HSW detected as faulty

➁ Details on failure

➂ Clock status of No. 0 HSW

1: XXXX XXXX XXXX 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄ ➅

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b4 b0

b3 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

1-L HSW CLK Failure

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0: 0/1 = No. 0 system / No. 1 system

b0: 0/1 = -/Clock failure in HSW

b4: HSW No. (0-1)

b0: 0/1 = -/HSW card internal clock down

b1: 0/1 = -/External 32 ch Clock (PLO) down

b3: 0/1 = -/Frame Head Return down

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 80

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

➃ Clock status of No. 1 HSW

Note: Refer to the meaning of ➂.

➄ Clock status of No. 2 HSW

Note: Refer to the meaning of ➂.

➅ Clock status of No. 3 HSW

Note: Refer to the meaning of ➂.

See Chapter 5 for repair procedure.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 81

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the system detects a fault, such as input clock all down or output clock down in

the PLO/CLK cards (both systems).

➀ Detected PLO number

Note 1: For CLK in TSWM1 (used in LN only).

Note 2: For PLO in TSWM0 (used in LN only).

➁ Valid Information bit for Scan

Data 1

➂ Valid Information bit for Scan

Data 2

See Chapter 4 for the Circuit Card Replacement Procedure.

1: XXXX XXXX XX00 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b0

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

1-O Both PLO Failure

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0: 0/1 = No. 0 PLO/No. 1 PLO

b6: 0/1 = -/CLK card failure Note 1

b7: 0/1 = -/PLO card failure Note 2

b0-b7: The bit position corresponding to the detected information in Scan

Data 1 ( ) is flagged “1”.

➃

b0-b7: The bit position corresponding to the detected information in Scan

Data 2 ( ) is flagged “1”.

➄

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 82

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

➃ Scan Data 1: Current Status of the

PLO card

➄ Scan Data 2: Current status of the

PLO card

Note 1: The clock status includes that of PH-CK18 (CLK) card.

Note 2: This information includes the failure detected in PH-CK18 (CLK) card.

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b4 b1 b0

b0: Clock status at the time of detection Note 1

0/1 = STBY/ACT

b1: Circuit Card status at the time of detection

0/1 = PLO synchronizing/PLO self running or drifting

b2: 0/1 = -/Input clock down

b3, b4:Route of Input clock

b5: 0/1 = -/PLO input all down

b6: 0/1 = -/PLO output down Note 2

b7: 0/1 = -/Drifting

b3 b4 DCS Input Route Route of Input Clock

00 0 0

01 1 1

10 - 2

11 - 3

b0: 0/1 = -/5msec Burst Clock down

b1: 0/1 = -/Frame Synchronization from SYNC card is down

b4: 0/1 = -/Internal OSC clock down

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 83

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the system detects all the failures concerned with input clock down or output clock

down in the PLO/CLK card (one of dual system).

➀ Details on detected PLO

Note 1: For CLK in TSWM1 (used in LN only).

Note 2: For PLO in TSWM0 (used in LN only).

➁ Valid Information bit for Scan

Data 1

➂ Valid Information bit for Scan

Data 2

See Chapter 4 for the Circuit Card Replacement Procedure.

1: XXXX XXXX XX00 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

1-P PLO Failure

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0: 0/1 = No. 0 PLO/No. 1 PLO

b6: 0/1 = -/CLK card failure Note 1

b7: 0/1 = -/PLO card failure Note 2

b0-b7: The bit position corresponding to the detected information in Scan

Data 1 ( ) is flagged “1”.

➃

b0-b7: The bit position corresponding to the detected information in Scan

Data 2 ( ) is flagged “1”.

➄

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 84

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

➃ Scan Data 1: Status of the PLO card

➄ Scan Data 2: Current status of the

PLO card

Note 1: The clock status includes that of PH-CK18 (CLK) card.

Note 2: This information includes the failure detected in PH-CK18 (CLK) card.

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b4 b1 b0

b0: Clock status at the time of detection Note 1

0/1 = STBY/ACT

b1: Circuit card status at the time of detection

0/1 = PLO synchronizing/PLO self running or drifting

b2: 0/1 = -/Input clock down

b3, b4:Route of Input clock

b5: 0/1 = -/PLO input all down

b6: 0/1 = -/PLO output down Note 2

b7: 0/1 = -/Drifting

b3 b4 DCS Input Route Route of Input Clock

00 0 0

01 1 1

10 - 2

11 - 3

b0: 0/1 = -/5msec clock down

b1: 0/1 = -/Frame signal from SYNC card is down

b4: 0/1 = -/Internal OSC clock down

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 85

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when a fault of the speech path system has occurred in a specific Module Group. The

specific Module Group is placed into make-busy state.

➀ MG number of fault detection

➁ The kind of failure

➂ Speech Path/Clock System

See Chapter 4 for the Circuit Card Replacement Procedure.

1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b1 b0

Default Alarm:

1-S Module Group Down Failure

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0: 0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

b0-b7: 00H/01H = -/ACT-side TSW fault

b0: ACT side speech path

0/1 = No. 0 system/No. 1 system

b1: ACT side clock

0/1 = No. 0 system/No. 1 system

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 86

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the changeover of the TSW system is executed.

➀ACT side Speech Path (TSW) after

changeover

➁ Reason for changeover

1: XXXX 0000 XXXX XXXX 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 XXXX XXXX

➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄ ➅

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

NON

1-T TSW ACT Change Report

Default Grade:

2Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

19 21 22

b0: 0/1 = No. 0 system/No. 1 system

b7-b4 b3-b0 CARD CONTENTS

01TSWI/O Alarm

2 32 ch Clock down, FH down

3 24 ch Clock down, FH down

6 TSW SW Memory write failure

9 I/O Alarm release

10 32 ch Clock down recovered, FH down

recovered

11 24 ch Clock down recovered, FH down

recovered

13 TSW MBR key OFF

15 TSW ACT/STBY changeover by the

CMODI command

6 1 MUX MUX circuit card Ready failure

2 MUX circuit card Clock failure

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 87

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

➂~➅ Status of ACT side TSW card

~ Status of STBY side TSW

card

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b0-b3, b4-b7: The status of TSW card in each MG (00~07)

0000 = Normal

0001 = Abnormal (Impossible to make links)

➂MG00 MG01

➃MG02 MG03

➄MG04 MG05

➅MG06 MG07

b7-b4 b3-b0

b0-b3, b4-b7: The status of TSW card in each MG (00~07)

0000 = Normal

0001 = Abnormal (Impossible to make links)

MG00 MG01

MG02 MG03

MG04 MG05

MG06 MG07

b7-b4 b3-b0

19 22

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 88

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when DLKC data transfer failure (temporary), shown in message [1-V], occurs more

than 16 times an hour. At this time, the faulty DLKC card is shut and its switching network automatically

changes over.

➀ System status of faulty DLKC card

➁ Error Code

➂ Details on Switching Network

1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b1 b0

Default Alarm:

1-U DLKC Data Transfer Failure (Permanent)

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0: 0/1 = No. 0 system / No. 1 system

01H: Firmware fault

02H: Data transfer time out to DLKC

03H: No answer time out (at DLKC)

04H: Data parity error

b0: Status of Speech Path System (including DLKC)

0/1 = No. 0 system is ACT/No. 1 system is ACT

b1: Status of basic clock

0/1 = No. 0 system is ACT/No. 1 system is ACT

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 89

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when a data sending error or no answer error occurs at the time of data transfer from

CPU to DLKC card.

➀ System status of faulty DLKC card

➁ Error Code

➂ Details on Switching Network

Note: This data displays when the STBY DLKC card is detected as faulty.

1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b7 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

SUP

1-V DLKC Data Transfer Failure (Temporary)

Default Grade:

1Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0: 0/1 = No. 0 system / No. 1 system

01H: Firmware fault

02H: Data transfer time out to DLKC

03H: No answer time out (at DLKC)

04H: Data parity error

b0: Status of Speech Path System (including DLKC)

0/1 = No. 0 system is ACT/No. 1 system is ACT

b1: Status of basic clock

0/1 = No. 0 system is ACT/No. 1 system is ACT

b7: Information on Reset of STBY DLKC Note

0/1 = - /STBY DLKC card was reset

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 90

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when a PLO/CLK-related failure, such as internal clock down is restored.

➀ Restoration of PLO fault

➁ Current status of PLO card

➂ Current status of the PLO card

Note 1: The status includes that of PH-CK18 (CLK) card.

Note 2: This information includes the failure detected in PH-CK18 (CLK) card.

1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b4 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

NON

1-W PLO Restore

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0: 0/1 = PLO No. 0 system/PLO No. 1 system

b0: 0/1 = Clock is in STBY side/ACT side Note 1

b1: 0/1 = PLO synchronizing/PLO self running or drifting

b2: 0/1 = -/Input clock down

b3, b4:Route of input clock (see the table below)

b5: 0/1 = -/PLO input all down

b6: 0/1 = -/PLO output down Note 2

b7: 0/1 = -/Drifting

b4 b3 Connected With Primary

Oscillator (M-OSC) Connected With

External Clock

0 0 No. 0 M-OSC Route 0

0 1 No. 1 M-OSC Route 1

10 –Route 2

11 –Route 3

b0: 0/1 = -/5msec clock down

b1: 0/1 = -/Frame Synchronization from SYNC card is down

b4: 0/1 = -/Internal OSC clock down

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 91

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message (for the ISW only) displays when a TSW card (one of the dual systems) of ISW fails to receive

the CLK/FH signals, sent from the LN side.

➀ TSW detected as faulty

➁,➂ Details on the fault (TSW No. 0

side)

➁

➂

Note 1: This data is displayed when b0 of ➀ is set as “1.”

Note 2: For more information on each lamp, refer to the “Circuit Card Manual.”

1: XX00 XXXX XXXX 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b1 b0

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

LN13 LN12 LN11 LN10 LN03 LN02 LN01 LN00

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

LN33 LN32 LN31 LN30 LN23 LN22 LN21 L200

Default Alarm:

NON

1-X LN →

→→

→ ISW CLK/FH Failure

Default Grade:

0Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0: 0/1 = -/No. 0 system

b1: 0/1 = -/No. 1 system

The bits here correspond to “LN00” through “LN33” lamps, apiece, on a

TSW (PU-SW00) card of No. 0 system. If “1” is set, the corresponding PCM

traffic has encountered a CLK/FH failure.

0: -

1: LN

→

ISW CLK/FH Failure

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 92

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

➃,➄ Details on the fault (TSW 1

side)

➃

➄

Note 1: This data is displayed when b1 of ➀ is set as “1.”

Note 2: For more information on each lamp, refer to the “Circuit Card Manual.”

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

LN13 LN12 LN11 LN10 LN03 LN02 LN01 LN00

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

LN33 LN32 LN31 LN30 LN23 LN22 LN21 L200

The bits here correspond to “LN00” through “LN33” lamps, apiece, on a

TSW (PU-SW00) card of No. 1 system. If “1” is set, the corresponding PCM

traffic, once detected as faulty, has recovered.

0: -

1: LN

→

ISW CLK/FH Failure

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 93

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message (for the ISW only) displays when a TSW card (both systems) of ISW fails to receive the CLK/

FH signals, sent from the LN side.

➀ TSW detected as faulty

Note: Both b0 and b1 are displayed as “1.”

➁,➂ Details on the fault (TSW No. 0

side)

➁

➂

1: XX00 XXXX XXXX 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b1 b0

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

LN13 LN12 LN11 LN10 LN03 LN02 LN01 LN00

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

LN33 LN32 LN31 LN30 LN23 LN22 LN21 L200

Default Alarm:

NON

1-Y LN →

→→

→ ISW CLK/FH Failure (Both)

Default Grade:

0Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0: 0/1 = -/No. 0 system

b1: 0/1 = -/No. 1 system

The bits here correspond to “LN00” through “LN33” lamps, apiece, on a

TSW (PU-SW00) card of No. 0 system. If “1” is set, the corresponding PCM

traffic has encountered a CLK/FH failure.

0: -

1: LN

→

ISW CLK/FH Failure

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 94

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

➃,➄ Details on the fault (TSW No. 1

side)

➃

➄

Note 1: For more information on each lamp, refer to the “Circuit Card Manual.”

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

LN13 LN12 LN11 LN10 LN03 LN02 LN01 LN00

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

LN33 LN32 LN31 LN30 LN23 LN22 LN21 L200

The bits here correspond to “LN00” through “LN33” lamps, apiece, on a

TSW (PU-SW00) card of No. 1 system. If “1” is set, the corresponding PCM

traffic has encountered a CLK/FH failure.

0: -

1: LN

→

ISW CLK/FH Failure

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 95

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message (for the ISW only) displays when LN

→

ISW CLK/FH failure has recovered and issues the [1-

X, 1-Y] system messages.

➀ TSW detected as fault recovery

Note: When fault recovery is detected in both No. 0/No. 1 system, “1” is set in b0 and b1 simultaneously.

➁,➂ Details on the recovered traffic

(TSW No. 0 side)

➁

➂

Note 1: This data is displayed when b0 of ➀ is set as “1.”

Note 2: For more information on each lamp, refer to the “Circuit Card Manual.”

1: XX00 XXXX XXXX 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b1 b0

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

LN13 LN12 LN11 LN10 LN03 LN02 LN01 LN00

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

LN33 LN32 LN31 LN30 LN23 LN22 LN21 L200

Default Alarm:

NON

1-Z LN

→

→→

→

ISW CLK/FH Release

Default Grade:

0Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0: 0/1 = -/No. 0 system

b1: 0/1 = -/No. 1 system

The bits here correspond to “LN00” through “LN33” lamps, apiece, on a

TSW (PU-SW00) card of No. 0 system. If “1” is set, the corresponding PCM

traffic, once detected as faulty, has recovered.

0: -

1: Recovery of LN

→

ISW CLK/FH Failure

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 96

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

➃,➄ Details on the recovered traffic

(TSW No. 1 side)

➃

➄

Note 1: This data is displayed when b1 of ➁ is set as “1.”

Note 2: For more information on each lamp, refer to the “Circuit Card Manual.”

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

LN13 LN12 LN11 LN10 LN03 LN02 LN01 LN00

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

LN33 LN32 LN31 LN30 LN23 LN22 LN21 L200

The bits here correspond to “LN00” through “LN33” lamps, apiece, on a

TSW (PU-SW00) card of No. 1 system. If “1” is set, the corresponding PCM

traffic, once detected as faulty, has recovered.

0: -

1: LN

→

ISW CLK/FH Failure

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 97

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when a C-level program abnormal state is detected as permanent. When the Port

Microprocessor (PM) on an LC/TRK card detects the abnormal state, the PM places the card into make-busy

status. If the failure occurs more than 15 times an hour, the system judges the failure as permanent, and issues

the [3-B] system message.

➀Faulty Circuit Card Mounting

Location

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

3-B C-Level Infinite Loop (Permanent)

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0-b4: Group

b5-b6: Unit (0-3)

b7: Module Group

0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 98

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when C-level program is detected as abnormal by the Port Microprocessor (PM)

mounted on an LC/TRK card. If the failure occurs less than 15 times/hour, and a B-monitor/Initial restart

executes as the result, the failure is judged as temporary and this message is created.

➀Faulty Circuit Card Mounting

Location

➁ PM Restart Type

Note: B-monitor Restart: Ports whose link have already been established remain connected. Ports processing

a call-origination may be released.

Initial Restart: All ports on the circuit card are forcibly released to be placed in idle state.

1: XX0X 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

SUP

3-C C-Level Infinite Loop (Temporary)

Default Grade:

1Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0-b4: Group

b5-b6: Unit (0-3)

b7: Module Group

0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

b0: 0/1 = B-monitor/Initial Restart Note

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 99

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

At the periodic interval, the CPU sends diagnosis data to the Port Microprocessor (PM) on LC/TRK cards in

order to monitor the PM. If the CPU cannot receive the return data within a predetermined period of time, the

system displays this data. When the failure is detected more than 15 times per hour, the failure is judged as

permanent.

➀ Faulty Circuit Card Location

See Chapter 5 for repair procedure.

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

3-D Lock-Up Failure (Permanent)

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0-b4: Group

b5-b6: Unit (0-3)

b7: Module Group

0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 100

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

At the periodic interval, the CPU sends diagnosis data to the Port Microprocessor (PM) on LC/TRK cards in

order to monitor the PM. If the CPU cannot receive the return data within a predetermined period of time, the

system displays this data. When the failure is detected less than 15 times per hour, the failure is judged as

temporary.

➀ Faulty Circuit Card Location

➁ PM Restart Type

1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

SUP

3-E Lock-Up Failure (Temporary)

Default Grade:

1Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0-b4: Group

b5-b6: Unit (0-3)

b7: Module Group

0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

b0: 0/1 = B-monitor/Initial Restart

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 101

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when over current of the operating power (DC-48V) is supplied from the ATI/ELC

circuit card to the Attendant Console/Dterm. When this fault occurs, the related circuit card is placed into make-

busy state and stops supplying power.

➀ Faulty PM Location

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

SUP

3-F -48V Over Current

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0-b4: Group

b5, b6:Unit

b7: Module Group

0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 102

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when a wire of the line between the LC circuit card and the telephone set is short-

circuited with ground.

➀ Faulty Circuit Card Location

➁ Faulty Circuit Card Location

Note: This message displays when using the specific LC card providing the above function.

1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

SUP

3-G Ground Failure

Default Grade:

1Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0-b2: Circuit No. (0-7)

b3-b7: Circuit card No. (0-31)

b0, b1:Unit No. (0-3)

b2-b7: MG No.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 103

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the DTI card detects abnormal state of a digital line but this failure has influence

on the Speech path. When the status is getting worse, they system will issue [3-I] Digital Line Failure.

➀ Faulty PM (LENS) Location

➁ Kind of Fault

➂Fault Detection Time Slot No.

(This data is valid only when the

kind of fault is 08H)

1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

SUP

3-H Digital Line Warning

Default Grade:

2Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0-b4: Group

b5, b6:Unit (0-3)

b7: 0/1 = Even numbered MG/Odd numbered MG

01H = Frame alignment loss occurs three times a day

02H = Bit error rate is over 10-6

03H = Slip occurs twice a day

04H = Multiframe alignment loss occurs three times a day

08H = Fault detection on the CCIS Bch

b0-b4: Time Slot No. in which the Digital line failure is detected

(1-16, 17-31)

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 104

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays after [3-H] Digital Line Warning lasts in the DTI card over the particular time. This

failure may cause a speech path fault to the DTI card.

➀ Faulty PM Location

➁ Kind of fault

➂Faulty Circuit Card Location (This

data is valid when ➁ is 0FH)

➃ Faulty Circuit Card Location (This

data is valid when ➁ is 0FH)

1: XXXX 0000 XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX

➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➂ ➃ ➂ ➃ ➂ ➃ ➂ ➃ ➂ ➃ ➂ ➃ ➂ ➃ ➂ ➃ ➂ ➃

4: XXXX XXXX 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➂ ➃ ➂ ➃

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

SUP

3-I Digital Line Failure

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0-b4: Group

b5, b6:Unit

b7: Module Group

0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

01H = Frame alignment loss occurs 100 times a day

03H = Slip occurs 50 times a day

04H = Multiframe alignment loss occurs 110 times a day

06H = Frame alignment loss lasts for 2 to 3 sec.

07H = Bit error rate is over 10-4

09H = Warning signal (AIS) from the opposite office has been received for 1

sec. continuously.

0BH = Multiframe alignment loss lasts for 2 to 3 sec.

0FH = Digital Line is not restored

b3-b7: Group No.

b0, b1:Unit No. (0-3)

b2-b7: MG No.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 105

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when a digital line fault is restored.

➀ Faulty Line Location

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

3-J Digital Line Restore

Default Grade:

0Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0-b4: Group No.

b5, b6:Unit No. (0-3)

b7: Module Group

0/1 = Even-numbered MG/odd-numbered MG

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 106

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when a Ready Failure occurs in both systems as a result of the TSW card having a failure

or the card is not mounted properly.

➀Faulty TSW Information

See Chapter 5 for repair procedure.

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

4-C Both TSW Ready Failure

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0: 0/1 = TSW No. 0 system/TSW No. 1 system

Note: When Ready Failure occurs in both systems, the [4-C]

message is separately issued twice: “0” displays in one

message, and “1” in the other message.

b1: Details on faulty TSW card

0 = TSW card (LN) connection to MUX or TSW card within ISWM

Note 1

1 = TSW card (LN) connected to TSW of ISWM Note 2

b7: Fault-detected circuit card

0 = PH-SW12 (LN) or PU-SW00 (ISW)

1 = PH-GT09 (LN only)

Note 1

TSWM0

[ISW]

[LN0]

TSW00 TSW01 TSW02 TSW03

Note 2

To MUX

(IMG0) To M UX

(IMG1)

Note 1

TSWM1

TSW00 TSW01 TSW02 TSW03

Note 2

To M UX

(IMG2) To MUX

(IMG3)

ISWM

TSW00 TSW01 TSW02 TSW03

To LN1 To LN2 To LN3

Note 1

Note 1: If a fault occurs in any of the TSW cards, “0” is set in bit 1 of ➀.

Note 2: If a fault occurs in any of the TSW cards, “1” is set in bit 1 of ➀.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 107

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when a TSW Ready Failure occurs in one of the dual systems because the TSW card

fails or the card is not mounted properly.

➀Faulty TSW Information

See Chapter 5 for repair procedure.

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

4-D TSW Ready Failure

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0: 0/1 = TSW No. 0 system/TSW No. 1 system

b1: Details on faulty TSW card

0 = TSW card (LN) connection to MUX or TSW card within ISWM

Note 1

1 = TSW card (LN) connected to TSW of ISWM Note 2

b7: Fault-detected circuit card

0 = PH-SW12 (LN) or PU-SW00 (ISW)

1 = PH-GT09 (LN only)

Note 1

TSWM0

[ISW]

[LN0]

TSW00 TSW01 TSW02 TSW03

Note 2

To MUX

(IMG0) To M UX

(IMG1)

Note 1

TSWM1

TSW00 TSW01 TSW02 TSW03

Note 2

To M UX

(IMG2) To MUX

(IMG3)

ISWM

TSW00 TSW01 TSW02 TSW03

To LN1 To LN2 To LN3

Note 1

Note 1: If a fault occurs in any of the TSW cards, “0” is set in bit 1 of ➀.

Note 2: If a fault occurs in any of the TSW cards, “1” is set in bit 1 of ➀.

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 108

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when I/O Ready Failure occurs in both HSW systems.

➀ HSW Fault Detected

Note: When I/O ready failure ocurs simultaneously in both HSW systems, the [4-E] message is separately

issued twice: “0” is displayed in one message and “1” in the other message.

➁ Details on HSW No.

See Chapter 5 for repair procedure.

1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b4 b0

Default Alarm:

4-E Both HSW Ready Failure

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0: 0/1 = No. 0 system/No. 1 system Note

b0: 0/1 = -/Ready Fault in HSW

b4: HSW No. (0-1)

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 109

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when I/O Ready Failure occurs in both HSW systems.

➀ HSW Fault Detected

➁ Details on HSW No.

See Chapter 5 for repair procedure.

1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b4 b0

Default Alarm:

4-F HSW Ready Failure

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0: 0/1 = No. 0 system/No. 1 system

b0: 0/1 = -/Ready Fault in HSW

b4: HSW No. (0-1)

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 110

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when I/O Ready Failure occurs on a DLKC card.

➀Details on faulty DLKC card

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b0

Default Alarm:

4-Q DLKC Ready Failure

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0: 0/1 = No. 0 system/No. 1 system

b7: 0/1 = ACT/STBY

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 111

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the MUX (PH-PC36) card has a Ready Failure in one of the dual systems. When

the card is not ready for service function because of the failure or because the card is not mounted properly,

the system creates this message.

➀Unit and MG number for the faulty

MUX card

➁Faulty MUX card information

See Chapter 5 for repair procedure.

1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

4-S MUX Ready Failure

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0: 0/1 = -/Even-numbered MG, Unit 0

b1: 0/1 = -/Even-numbered MG, Unit 1

b2: 0/1 = -/Even-numbered MG, Unit 2

b3: 0/1 = -/Even-numbered MG, Unit 3

b4: 0/1 = -/Odd-numbered MG, Unit 0

b5: 0/1 = -/Odd-numbered MG, Unit 1

b6: 0/1 = -/Odd-numbered MG, Unit 2

b7: 0/1 = -/Odd-numbered MG, Unit 3

b0: MG

0/1 = Even number/Odd number

b1: 0/1 = No. 0 system/No. 1 system

b2: ACT or STBY status

0/1 = ACT/STBY

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 112

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the MUX (PH-PC36) card has a Ready Failure in both of the dual systems. When

the card is not ready for service function because of the failure or because the card is not mounted properly,

the system creates this system message.

➀Unit and MG number for the MUX

card

➁Faulty MUX card information

Note 1: Though this message indicates the Ready Failure in both systems, the information displayed here only

relates to the ACT-side MUX status. (Two messages are not displayed separately.)

Note 2: Fixed as “0 (=ACT).” See Note 1.

See Chapter 5 for repair procedure.

1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

4-T Both MUX Ready Failure

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0: 0/1 = -/Even-numbered MG, Unit 0

b1: 0/1 = -/Even-numbered MG, Unit 1

b2: 0/1 = -/Even-numbered MG, Unit 2

b3: 0/1 = -/Even-numbered MG, Unit 3

b4: 0/1 = -/Odd-numbered MG, Unit 0

b5: 0/1 = -/Odd-numbered MG, Unit 1

b6: 0/1 = -/Odd-numbered MG, Unit 2

b7: 0/1 = -/Odd-numbered MG, Unit 3

b0: MG

0/1 = Even number/Odd number

b1: 0/1 = No. 0 system/No. 1 system Note 1

b2: ACT or STBY status Note 2

0/1 = ACT/STBY

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 113

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when a PCI card failure occurs.

➀ Fault detection on PCI card

➁ Error status on PCI slot 0

➂ Error status on PCI slot 1

➃ Not used

➄ Error status on PCI slot 3

Note 1: Physical Connection Error

•Ethernet cable is disconnected.

•Ethernet cable has short-circuited.

•Ethernet straight/cross cable selection error

Note 2: Hardware Fault

•Transmitter failure

•Controller lock-up

1: 0X0X 0X0X 0X00 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b3 b2 b1 b0

b1 b0

Default Alarm:

4-U PCI Card Failure

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0: 0/1 = -/Error detection on PCI slot 0 (LANI-A)

b1: 0/1 = -/Error detection on PCI slot 1

b2: 0/1 = -/Error detection on PCI slot 2 (Not used)

b3: 0/1 = -/Error detection on PCI slot 3 (LANI-B)

b0: 0/1 = -/Physical connection error Note 1

b1: 0/1 = -/Hardware Fault Note 2

b0: 0/1 = -/Physical connection error Note 1

b1: 0/1 = -/Hardware Fault Note 2

b0: 0/1 = -/Physical connection error Note 1

b1: 0/1 = -/Hardware Fault Note 2

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 114

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the PCI card, which was detected as faulty, is recovered.

➀ Detection of PCI restoration

➁Details on error restoration

(PCI slot 0)

➂Details on error restoration

(PCI slot 1)

➃Not used

➄Details on error restoration (PCI

slot 3)

Note: Physical Connection Error

•Ethernet cable is disconnected.

•Ethernet cable has short-circuited.

•Ethernet straight/cross cable selection error

1: 0X0X 0X0X 0X00 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

4-V PCI Card Failure Recovered

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0: 0/1 = -/Error restoration on PCI slot 0 (LANI-A)

b1: 0/1 = -/Error restoration on PCI slot 1

b2: 0/1 = -/Error restoration on PCI slot 2 (Not used)

b3: 0/1 = -/Error restoration on PCI slot 3 (LANI-B)

b0: 0/1 = -/Physical connection error restoration Note

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 115

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when any of the following faults are detected:

•Power failure

•Fuse blowing

•In-Frame abnormal temperature

➀ Probable cause for the failure

➁The frame in which a fault is

detected

➂ Factor of the failure

See Chapter 5 for repair procedure.

1: XX00 XXXX 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

NON

6-A System Failure

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified:

(FIXED) NON Lamp Modified:

(FIXED) 3

b0: Input power (-48V) down or failure

b1: PWR Supply Fault

b2: PWR Supply Fuse Alarm

b3: Abnormal temperature MJ (70ºC (158ºF))

b4: Abnormal temperature MN (60ºC (140ºF))

b0-b3: Frame No. (0-3)

b4, b5:Frame Group No. (0 only)

b6, b7:Kind of frame

00 = IMG

b0: 0/1 = -/OBP Alarm 0 side

b1: 0/1 = -/OBP Alarm 1 side

b2: 0/1 = -/OBP Alarm MISC side

b3: 0/1 = -/Power Alarm 0 side

b4: 0/1 = -/Power Alarm 1 side

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 116

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when a fault in either the ringer or howler tone occurs in the PWR card.

➀Unit and MG number of fault

detection

➁ Kind of the fault

1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b2 b1 b0

b1 b0

Default Alarm:

6-B RGU and Howler Failure

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0, b1:Unit No. (0-3)

b2: 0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

b0: 0/1 = -/RGU (Ringing Unit) Fault

b1: 0/1 = -/Howler Fault

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 117

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the CPU usage (occupancy) rate exceeds the value assigned to ASYD, SYS1,

INDEX56, and the call origination from the pre-selected group of stations is restricted (i.e. Line Load Control

is set). This system message is always indicated as 0.

1: 0000 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

Default Alarm:

NON

6-C Line Load Control Start

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 118

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the CPU usage (occupancy) rate becomes lower than the value assigned to ASYD,

SYS1, INDEX57, and Line Load Control is cancelled. This system message is always indicated as 0.

1: 0000 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

Default Alarm:

NON

6-D Line Load Control Stop

Default Grade:

2Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 119

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays to indicate the result of Bad Call Notification.

➀ Bad Call Notification

1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄ ➅ ➆ ➇ ➈ ➉ 11 12

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

SUP

6-H Bad Call Notification

Default Grade:

2Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0-b3: Station number digit with the fault. (This data is always indicated as

“0” when Type of connection is 2 (ACD Trunk).)

b4-b7: Type of connection

0 = Station connection

1 = Trunk connection

2 = ACD Trunk connection

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 120

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

When type of connection is intra-Station connection

➁ ~ ➃ Station number (see table)

➄ Called station number

➅ ~ ➇ Called station number

(See table)

➈ Time Slot Number of Link 1 Note 1

➉ Not used

Time Slot Number of Link 2 Note 1

Not used

Note 1: Station at which the operation was performed as shown in the figure below.

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b3 b2 b1 b0

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b4-b7 b0-b3

➁DC0 DC1

➂DC2 DC3

➃DC4 DC5

b0-b3: Number of digits for the called station number

b4-b7 b0-b3

➅DC0 DC1

➆DC2 DC3

➇DC4 DC5

CALLED SIDE (TRUNK)

LINK 1

LINK 2

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 121

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

When type of connection is Trunk connection

➁ ~ ➃ Station number (See table)

➄ Remote Route No.

➅ Remote Route No.

➆ Called trunk No.

➇ Not used

➈ Time Slot Number of Link 1 Note 1

➉ Not used

Time Slot Number of Link 2 Note 1

Not used

Note 1: Station at which the operation was performed as shown below.

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b3 b2 b1 b0

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b4-b7 b0-b3

➁DC0 DC1

➂DC2 DC3

➃DC4 DC5

b0-b5: Route No. (1-63)

b6: OP

0/1 = Data in OPRT ( ➅ ) is invalid/valid

b7: AC

0/1 = Internal trunk/External trunk

b0-b3: OPRT Route No. (Over 64)

b0-b7: Trunk No.

CALLED SIDE (TRUNK)

LINK 1

LINK 2

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 122

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

When type of connection is ACD Trunk connection

➁ ACD Trouble Kind

Note 1: When“➁ (ACD Trouble Kind)” is 01 Hex:

➂ ~ ➅ Information on Calling Party

➆ ➇ Not Used

➈ ➉ Information on Calling Party

Refer to

Information on Held Party or 3rd Station/Trunk in 3-Party Connection

Refer to

Note 2: When“➁ (ACD Trouble Kind)” is 14 Hex:

➂ Issue of ACDP (First digit of decimal place)

➃ Issue of ACDP (Second digit of decimal place)

Note 3: When“➁ (ACD Trouble Kind)” is 21 Hex:

➂ ~ ➅ Information on Calling Party

Refer to ➂ ~ ➅ of Note 1

➆ ➇ Not used

➈ ➉ Information on Unknown Pilot No.

Refer to ➂ ~ ➅, (a) Station of Note 1

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b0-b7: ACD trouble kind

01H=ACD trunk trouble key Note 1

14H=ACD reset start Note 2

15H=Insufficient ACD memory

16H=Insufficient ACD call record

17H=Excessive business station on ACD calls

18H=Excessive calls queued

21H=Unknown Pilot No. called Note 3

24H=Illegal execution of ACD timeout procedure Note 4

30H=ACD pointer error detection and recovery Note 5

33H=ACDP reset completion Note 6

34H=Call recovery failure on unknown Pilot No. Note 7

37H=ACD Traffic (incoming) Capacity Over

99H=Illegal ACD processing-trace stored Note 4

(b) Trunk

Route No.+Trunk No.

Example: RT125,TKl0

01 25 00 l0

➂ ➃ ➄➅

b4-b7 b0-b3

➂DC0

➃DC1 DC2

➄DC0

➅DC1 DC2

Route No.

Trunk No.

(a) Station

My Line No.

b4-b7 b0-b3

➂DC0 DC1

➃DC2 DC3

➄DC4 DC5

➅

11 12

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 123

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

Note 4: When“➁ (ACD Trouble Kind)” is 24 or 99 Hex:

➂ ~ ➅ Not used

➆, ➇ Error Counter

Note 5: When“➁ (ACD Trouble Kind)” is 30 Hex:

➂ ~ ➅ Pointer Address

➆Not used

➇Error Kind

Note 6: When“➁ (ACD Trouble Kind)” is 33 Hex:

➂ ACDP Data Memory

00 = Used

01 = Not used

➃ACDP System Capacity

02 = 50 Agent Positions

04 = 200 Agent Positions

07 = 500 Agent Positions

12 = 900 Agent Positions

15 = 2,000 Agent Positions

Note: If other data is output, the ACD system may not be working correctly. In this case, be sure to install the

ACD application again by using the MSVIP command.

Note 7: When“➁ (ACD Trouble Kind)” is 34 Hex:

➂ ~ ➅ Information on Unknown Pilot No.

Refer to ➂ ~ ➅, (a) Station of Note 1

Note

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 124

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays to indicate the result of a designated connection test (Individual Trunk Access) from a

station.

➀Test Item (b0-b3 is valid only for

Outgoing trunk test)

1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX 00XX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XX00

➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄ ➅ ➆ ➇ ➈ ➉ 11 12 12 12 12 12

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

NON

6-I STA-Test Connection Data

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0-b2: Kind of Signal

2 = Second Dial Tone

6 = Sender (Delay Dial Start)

7 = Sender (Wink Start)

b3: 0/1 = Data is not valid/valid

b4-b7: Test item

1 = Outgoing Trunk Test

2 = ORT/IRT Test

3 = Sender Test

4 = Digital Conference

5 = Tone Test

6 = Ringing Signal test

0 = Test NG

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 125

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

➁

➂ ~ ➄ Station number of testing

station (see table)

➅ Tenant No.

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b7 b3 b2 b1 b0

b0-b3: Number of digits of testing station No.

b4-b7: Error Numbers (see table below)

Error Numbers and Their Meanings

ERROR NO. MEANING

0---

1 Testing station is restricted from activating the

service.

2 Route Number Error of the designated trunk

3 Trunk Number Error of the designated trunk

4 Trunk busy

5 Sender busy

6 SMDR failure

7 Call origination restriction

8Register busy

9 Trunk Number Error - when the trunk has been

designated by SHF.

A Trunk busy - when the trunk has been designated

by SHF.

B Inter-digit timer expiration

C Register or sender is defective with respect to DP,

DP/PB

D Register of sender is faulty with respect to PB

ETone fault

F Test Processing Error

b4-b7 b0-b3

➂DC0 DC1

➃DC2 DC3

➄DC4 DC5

b0-b3: Tenant No. (1-15)

b7: OP

0/1 = Data in OPTN ( ➆ ) is invalid/valid

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 126

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

➆ Tenant No.

➇ Tested Route No.

Note: When Logical Routes are assigned, Logical Route Numbers are displayed here.

➈ OPRT data

Note: When Logical Routes are assigned, Logical Route Numbers are displayed here.

➉ (This data is not for Ringing Signal Test)

Digit of Dialed Number (for test)

Dialed Number (for test)

(a) Dialed Number sent by the test Trunk/Sender

b3 b2 b1 b0

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b7 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b4-b7 b0-b3 b4-b7 b0-b3

DC0 DC1 DC12 DC13

DC2 DC3 DC14 DC15

DC4 DC5 DC16 DC17

DC6 DC7 DC18 DC19

DC8 DC9 DC20 DC21

DC10 DC11

b0-b3: Tenant No. (Over 15)

b0-b5: Route No. (1-63) Note

b6: OP

0/1 = Data in OPRT ( ➈ ) is invalid/valid

b7: AC

0/1 = Internal trunk/External trunk

b0-b7: Route No. ( 64) Note

b0-b7: Trunk No. for Outgoing trunk test, ORT/IRT Test, Sender

Test and Digital Conference test

Tone Slot No. for Tone Test

0 = DT 1 = SPDT

2 = RBT 3 = CRBT, CWT

4 = BT 5 = RBT

6 = SST, WT 7 = SDT

8 = TRG 9 = SDTT

10 = CWRBT 14 = MSC

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b0-b4: Dialed number digit sent by the test Trunk/Sender

Dialed number digit received by the test Register

b) Dialed Number received by the test Register

b4-b7 b0-b3

DC0 DC1

DC2 DC3

DC4 DC5

DC6 DC7

DC8 DC9

DC10 DC11

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 127

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when a call terminates to the Emergency Telephone.

➀ ~ ➅ Called Station (Emergency

Telephone) No. (ASCII Code)

➆ ~ Calling Station No. (ASCII

Code)

1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄ ➅ ➆ ➇ ➈ ➉

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

SUP

6-J Emergency Call

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

➀DC0 (1st digit)

➁DC1 (2nd digit)

➂DC2 (3rd digit)

➃DC3 (4th digit)

➄DC4 (5th digit)

➅DC5 (6th digit)

➆DC0 (1st digit)

➇DC1 (2nd digit)

➈DC2 (3rd digit)

➉DC3 (4th digit)

DC4 (5th digit)

DC5 (6th digit)

1211

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 128

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the LCR-Attendant Manual Override is set at the Attendant/Desk Console.

➀ Route Selection Time Pattern No.

assigned at Attendant/Desk

Console

Note: Route Selection Time Pattern 0-7 corresponds to TDPTN No. 0-7 in the AOPR command.

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

NON

6-L Emergency Control Start

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0-b2: Pattern No. (1-7)

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 129

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the LCR-Attendant Manual Override is cancelled at the Attendant/Desk Console.

➀ Suspension of Emergency Control

Note: Route Selection Patterns 0-7 corresponds to TDPTN No. 0-7 in the AOPR command.

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

Default Alarm:

NON

6-M Emergency Control Stop

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0: Fixed 0.

0 = Outgoing call restriction is released by Attendant/Desk Console

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 130

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the system detects abnormal duration in the line connection between the calling

and called party. When the calling and called party establish a line connection and continue the hook-up for an

extremely short or long period of time (predetermined by the ASYD command (SYS1, INDEX45, 46)), this

message is created.

➀ Calling party information

➁ Tenant No. of Calling/Called party (Hex.)

➂ Calling party Information

When calling party is Station

Calling station No. (See table)

1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XX00 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XX00

➀ ➁ ➁ ➂ ➂ ➂ ➂ ➃ ➄ ➄ ➄ ➄ ➄ ➄ ➄ ➄ ➄ ➄ ➄ ➄ ➄ ➄

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b3 b2 b1 b0

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

NON

6-N Abnormal Call Duration Data

Default Grade:

0Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0-b3: Type of Calling party

0 = Station

1 = Attendant console

2 = Trunk

b7: 0/1 = Short/Long Time

b4-b7 b0-b3

DC0 DC1

DC2 DC3

DC4 DC5

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 131

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

When calling party is ATTCON/DESKCON

Attendant/Desk console No. (See

table.)

When calling party is Trunk

Route No. and Trunk No. (See table.)

Note:

Route No. (a)

Route No. (b)

➃ Called party information

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b3 b2 b1 b0

b4- b7 b0-b3

DC0 DC1

b0-b7

(a) Route No. (Hex) Note

(b) Route No. (Hex) Note

(d) Trunk No. (Hex)

b0-b5: Route No. (1-63)

b6: OP

0/1 = Data in OPRT is invalid/valid

b7: AC

0/1 = Internal trunk/External trunk

b0-b3: OPRT

Route No. (Over 64)

b0-b3: 00 = Station-to-Station call

01 = Outgoing call to outside

02 = Incoming call from outside

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 132

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

➄ Called Party Information

Station to Station Call

OG Call to outside IC Call from outside

b4-b7 b0-b3

(a)

Tenant No.

DC0 DC1

DC2 DC3

DC4 DC5

(a) Type of called party

00 = Station

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b0-b7

Route No. (Hex)

Trunk No. (Hex)

b4-b7 b0-b3

Route No. (Hex)

Trunk No. (Hex)

DC0 DC1

DC2 DC3

DC4 DC5

DC6 DC7

DC8 DC9

DC10 DC11

DC12 DC13

DC14 DC15

DC16 DC17

DC18 DC19

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 133

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the SMDR output buffer usage rate has exceeded the value assigned to ASYD,

SYS1, INDEX249.

➀ Detail Information

(a) FS = 0, FE = 0/1

➁

1: XXXX XXXX 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂ ➃

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

SUP

6-O SMDR Output Buffer Overflow Alarm

Default Grade:

1Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0-b3: FS

b4-b7: FE

This system message varies depending on the data at ➀.

FS FE MEANING

(a) 0 0 SMDR output buffer usage rate exceeds the value

assigned by ASYD, SYS1, INDEX249.

(a) 0 1 After SMDR output buffer usage rate exceeds the

value assigned by ASYD, SYS1, INDEX249,

usage rate lowered less than the value assigned by

INDEX250.

(b) 1 0 -

failure.

b0: 0/1 = Data assigned by the ASYD, SYS1, INDEX249, 250 is valid/

invalid

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 134

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

➂ Buffer Usage Rate Assigned by

ASYD, SYS1, INDEX249

➃ Buffer Usage Rate Assigned by

ASYD, SYS1, INDEX250

(b) FS = 1, FE = 0

➁

➂ Overflow Rate

➃ Overflow Rate

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b1 b0

b7 b6 b5 b4

b0-b3: Units

b4-b7: Tens

b0-b3: Units

b4-b7: Tens

b0, b1:Fault Grade by ALMG command

00 = NON CONT 01 = SUP

10 = MN 11 = MJ

b0: 0/1 = -/100% Overflow

b4-b7: 1-9 = 10%-90% Overflow

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 135

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

➁ SMDR Group No.

➂ Port No.

➃ Not used

(d) FS = 3, FE = 0

➁

b3 b2 b1 b0

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b3 b2 b1 b0

b0-b3: SMDR Group No. to which failure occurred

b0-b7: Port No. allocated for SMDR Group to which failure occurred (0-7)

b0-b3: SMDR Group No. to which failure occurred

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 136

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the SMDR output buffer usage rate has been lowered to less than the value

assigned in the ASYD, SYS1, INDEX250 after the rate exceeds the value assigned by INDEX249.

➀ Detail Information

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

NON

6-P SMDR Output Buffer Overflow Release

Default Grade:

0Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0-b7: 00H = After SMDR output buffer usage rate exceeds the value

assigned by ASYD, SYS1, INDEX249, the rate lowered less than

the value assigned by INDEX250.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 137

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays after the office data is loaded and system initialization has executed.

➀

➁ Load Status

1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b11 b9 b8

Default Alarm:

NON

7-A System Initialize With Data Load

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0: 0/1 = IPL/PWR ON

b1: 0/1 = Load Key OFF/ON

b2: 0/1 = IPL KEY/MAT INITIAL

b3: 0/1 = Program load is executed/-

b4: 0/1 = -/Phase1 Restart Note 1

b0: Office Data Load Status

0/1 = Load OK/NG

b1: Call Forwarding Data Load Status

0/1 = Load OK/NG

b2: Individual Speed Calling Data Load Status

0/1 = Load OK/NG

b3: RCF Data Load Status

0/1 = Load OK/NG

b4: Name Display Data Load Status

0/1 = Load OK/NG

b5: Network DM Load Status

0/1 = Load OK/NG

b6: Local DM Load Status

0/1 = Load OK/NG

b7: 0/1 = DM Load/Non Load

b8: User assign Soft Key Data Load Status

0/1 = Load OK/NG

b9: Number Sharing Data Load Status

0/1 = Load OK/NG Note 2

b11: Call Block Data Load Status

0/1 = Load OK/NG

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 138

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

Note 1: Phase 1 Restart is executed when initializing the system without disrupting the following two-way

connections that have already been established:

•Basic two-way connections (STN-STN, STN-TRK, TRK-TRK)

•Fixed connections

•Two-way connections established on a Fusion link

Note 2: The Number Sharing data load also affects the data load of Dual Station Calling Over-FCCS .

For more details, see Chapter 6, Section 12.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 139

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when system initialization is activated.

➀

➁ Details on Intialization Note 2

➂ FPC No. Note 2

Note 1: Phase 1 Restart is executed when initializing the system without disrupting the following two-way

connections that have already been established:

•Basic two-way connections (STN-STN, STN-TRK, TRK-TRK)

•Fixed connections

•Two-way connections established on a Fusion link

Note 2: When the whole system is initialized via key information from the ISW, this message is output in each

LN/ISW. However, the data ➁ and ➂ are displayed at the ISW only.

For more details, see Chapter 6, Section 12.

1: XX00 XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b4 b3 b2

b1 b0

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

NON

7-B System Initialize

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b2: 0/1 = IPL KEY/MAT INITIAL

b3: 0/1 = Program Load/Non Load

b4: 0/1 = -/Phase1 Restart Note 1

b0: 0/1 = -/ISW

→

LN Remote Initialization Request

b1: 0/1 = -/ISW

→

LN Data Sending Error

b0-b7: FPC No. of LN where initialization request sent

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 140

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the MBR switch on the CPU Front Panel has been turned ON at the time of CPU

changeover or speech path changeover.

➀ Self-CPU Restart Information

➁ Mate-CPU Restart Information

1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b5 b4 b3 b0

Default Alarm:

NON

7-C CPU MBR Key Turn ON

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0: 0/1 = -/Monitor Restart

b3: 0/1 = -/Initialization

b4: 0/1 = -/Data Copy Restart (for Dual-CPU system only)

b5: 0/1 = -/MB control

b7: 0/1 = ACT/STBY (active system indication after restart)

b0: 0/1 = -/Monitor Restart

b3: 0/1 = -/Initialization

b4: 0/1 = -/Data Copy Restart (for Dual-CPU system only)

b5: 0/1 = -/MB control

b7: 0/1 = ACT/STBY (active system indication after restart)

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 141

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the MBR switch on the CPU Front Panel has been turned OFF at the time of CPU

changeover or speech path changeover.

➀ Self-CPU Restart Information

➁ Mate-CPU Restart Information

1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b5 b4 b3 b0

Default Alarm:

NON

7-D CPU MBR Key Turn OFF

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0: 0/1 = -/Monitor Restart

b3: 0/1 = -/Initialization

b4: 0/1 = -/Data Copy Restart (for Dual-CPU system only)

b5: 0/1 = -/MB control

b7: 0/1 = ACT/STBY (active system indication after restart)

b0: 0/1 = -/Monitor Restart

b3: 0/1 = -/Initialization

b4: 0/1 = -/Data Copy Restart (for Dual-CPU system only)

b5: 0/1 = -/MB control

b7: 0/1 = ACT/STBY (active system indication after restart)

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 142

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the MBR switch on the TSW card has been turned ON at CPU changeover or

speech path changeover.

➀ System Status of TSW Card

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b0

Default Alarm:

NON

7-E TSW MBR Key Turn ON

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0: 0/1 = No. 0 system/No. 1 system

b7: Kind of PKG

0/1 = SW12/GT09

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 143

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the MBR switch on the TSW card has been turned OFF at CPU changeover or

speech path changeover.

➀ System Status of TSW Card

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b0

Default Alarm:

NON

7-F TSW MBR Key Turn OFF

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0: 0/1 = No. 0 system/No. 1 system

b7: Kind of PKG

0/1 = SW12/GT09

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 144

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the MB switch on the EMA card has been turned ON when extracting or inserting

a circuit card or at PM initialization. This message displays with the [7-J]: ALMC MB Key Turn OFF message.

➀ Frame No. and its Kind

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

SUP

7-I ALMC MB Key Turn ON

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0-b3: Frame No. (0 only)

b4-b5: Frame Group No. (0 only)

b6-b7: Kind of Frame

00=IMG

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 145

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the MB switch on the EMA card has been turned OFF when extracting or inserting

a circuit card or at PM initialization.

➀ Frame No. and its Kind

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

NON

7-J ALMC MB Key Turn OFF

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0-b3: Frame No. (0 only)

b4-b5: Frame Group No. (0 only)

b6-b7: Kind of Frame

00=IMG

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 146

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the MB switch on the line/trunk card has been turned ON when extracting or

inserting a circuit card or at PM initialization.

➀ Faulty Line/Trunk Card Location

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

NON

7-K PM MB Key Turn ON

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0-b4: Group No.

b5, b6:Unit No. (0-3)

b7: MG No.

0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 147

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the MB switch on the line/trunk card has been turned OFF when extracting or

inserting a circuit card or at PM initialization.

➀ Faulty Line/Trunk Card Location

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

NON

7-L PM MB Key Turn OFF

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0-b4: Group No.

b5, b6:Unit No. (0-3)

b7: MG No.

0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 148

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the MB switch on the PFT card has been turned ON when extracting or inserting

a circuit card or at PM initialization.

➀ Faulty PFT Card No.

➁ Faulty PFT Card Location

1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b2 b1 b0

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

NON

7-M NCU MB Key Turn ON

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0-b2: Circuit card No. (0-7)

b0-b4: Group No.

b5, b6:Unit No. (0-3)

b7: 0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 149

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the MB switch on the PFT card has been turned OFF when extracting or inserting

a circuit card, or at PM initialization.

➀ Faulty PFT Card No.

➁ Faulty PFT Card Location

1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b2 b1 b0

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

NON

7-N NCU MB Key Turn OFF

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0-b2: Circuit card No. (0-7)

b0-b4: Group No.

b5, b6:Unit No. (0-3)

b7: 0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 150

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

In a specific time cycle, the system allows a routine diagnosis in its hardware and software to determine if they

are operating properly. This message indicates that the system has been checked by the routine diagnosis

program and the result of the diagnosis is normal.

➀ Performed Diagnosis Item

Note: The data in this area will be diverse, according to the diagnosis specified in ➀. For details on each

item data, see the following pages.

1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

Note

➀

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

NON

7-O Cyclic Diagnosis Normal

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

[00H] Routine Diagnosis Start

[10H] Program Memory Verification Normal End

[20H] Data Memory Verification Normal End

[30H] TSW ACT/STBY Changeover Normal End

[40H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Normal End

[50H] No Trunk Ineffective Hold

[70H] Call Forwarding Memory Clear Normal End

[A0H] Periodic Back-up Normal End

[C0H] Detection of Remaining Link Normal End

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 151

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

[00H] Routine Diagnosis Start

➀ Performed Diagnosis Item

➁ Diagnosis Menu (SYS1, Index 89)

➂ Diagnosis Menu (SYS1, Index 90)

➃ Call Forward Memory Clear Item

(SYS1, Index 232)

➄ Periodic Back-up Item

(SYS1, Index 304)

1: 00XX 0X0X XX00 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b3 b1

b2 b1 b0

b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

[00H] Routine Diagnosis Start (LN)

[01H] Routine Diagnosis Start (ISW)

b0: 0/1=-/Program Memory Verification

b1: 0/1=-/Data Memory Verification

b2: 0/1=-/TSW ACT/STBY Changeover

b3: 0/1=-/CPU ACT/STBY Changeover

b4: 0/1=-/Trunk Ineffective Hold Check

b5: 0/1=-/Trunk Ineffective Hold Detection

b6: 0/1=-/Call Forwarding Memory Clear

b7: 0/1=-/IP ACT/STBY Changeover

b1: 0/1 = -/Periodic Back-up

b3: 0/1 = -/Residual Link Detection

b0: 0/1 = -/Call Forward All Clear

b1: 0/1 = -/Call Forward Busy Clear

b2: 0/1 = -/Call Forward No Answer Clear

b0: 0/1 = -/Individual Speed Calling Data Save

b1: 0/1 = -/Call Forwarding Data Save

b2: 0/1 = -/PCS Data Save

b3: 0/1 = -/Name Display Data Save

b4: 0/1 = -/User Assign Soft Key Data Save

b5: 0/1 = -/Number Sharing Data Save

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 152

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

[10H] Program Memory Verification Normal End

➀ Performed Diagnosis Item

➁ Information on HD

➂ Verification of Drive Number

1: 10XX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b1 b0

b3 b2 b1 b0

[10H] Program Memory Verification Normal End

b0: 0/1 = -/HFD 0 is normal

b1: 0/1 = -/HFD 1 is normal

b0: 0/1 = -/Drive Number 0

b1: 0/1 = -/Drive Number 1

b2: 0/1 = -/Drive Number 2

b3: 0/1 = -/Drive Number 3

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 153

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

[20H] Data Memory Verification Normal End

➀ Performed Diagnosis Item

➁ Verification of HD

➂ Verification of Data Memory

1: 20XX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b1 b0

b2 b1 b0

[20H] Data Memory Verification Normal End

b0: 0/1 = -/HFD 0 is normal

b1: 0/1 = -/HFD 1 is normal

b0: 0/1 = -/Data Memory

b1: 0/1 = -/Local Data Memory

b2: 0/1 = -/Network Data Memory

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 154

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

[30H] TSW ACT/STBY Changeover Normal End

➀ Performed Diagnosis Item

➁ Active TSW system after the

changeover

1: 30XX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

[30H] TSW ACT/STBY Changeover Normal End

b0: 0/1 = TSW No. 0 is ACT/TSW No. 1 is ACT

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 155

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

[40H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Normal End

➀ Performed Diagnosis Item

➁ Active status information after

changeover

1: 40XX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b1 b0

[40H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Normal End

b0: CPU

0/1 = No. 0 is ACT/No. 1 is ACT

b1: TSW

0/1 = No. 0 is ACT/No. 1 is ACT

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 156

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

[50H] No Trunk Ineffective Hold

➀ Performed Diagnosis Item

➁ MG and Unit of No.

1: 50XX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

[50H] No Trunk Ineffective Hold

b0: Unit 0, Even-numbered MG

1 = No Trunk Ineffective Hold

b1: Unit 1, Even-numbered MG

1 = No Trunk Ineffective Hold

b2: Unit 2, Even-numbered MG

1 = No Trunk Ineffective Hold

b3: Unit 3, Even-numbered MG

1 = No Trunk Ineffective Hold

b4: Unit 0, Odd-numbered MG

1 = No Trunk Ineffective Hold

b5: Unit 1, Odd-numbered MG

1 = No Trunk Ineffective Hold

b6: Unit 2, Odd-numbered MG

1 = No Trunk Ineffective Hold

b7: Unit 3, Odd-numbered MG

1 = No Trunk Ineffective Hold

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 157

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

[70H] Call Forwarding Memory Clear Normal End

➀ Performed Diagnosis Item

1: 7000 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

[70H] Call Forwarding Memory Clear Normal End

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 158

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

[A0H] Periodic Back-up Normal

➀ Performed Diagnosis Item

➁ Information on Periodic Backup

Normal End

➂ Backup Data to No. 0 system

➃Backup Data to No. 1 system

Note: The Number Sharing data load also affects the data load of Dual Station Calling Over-FCCS.

1: A0XX XX00 0000 XX00 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂ ➃

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b1 b0

b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

[A0H] Periodic Back-up Normal

b0: 0/1 = HFD 0 Normal end/Abnormal end

b1: 0/1 = HFD 1 Normal end/Abnormal end

b0: 0/1 = -/Individual Speed Calling Data

b1: 0/1 = -/Call Forwarding Data

b2: 0/1 = -/RCF

b3: 0/1 = -/Name Display Data

b4: 0/1 = -/User Assign Soft Key Data

b5: 0/1 = -/Number Sharing Data Note

b6: 0/1 = -/Call Block Data

b0: 0/1 = -/Individual Speed Calling Data

b1: 0/1 = -/Call Forwarding Data

b2: 0/1 = -/RCF

b3: 0/1 = -/Name Display Data

b4: 0/1 = -/User Assign Soft Key Data

b5: 0/1 = -/Number Sharing Data Note

b6: 0/1 = -/Call Block Data

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 159

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

[C0H] Detection of Remaining Link Normal End

➀ Performed Diagnosis Item

1: C000 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

[C0H] Detection of Remaining Link Normal End

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 160

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

In a specific time cycle, the system allows a routine diagnosis in its hardware and software to determine if they

are operating properly. This message indicates that the system has been checked by the routine diagnosis

program and the result of the diagnosis is not normal.

➀ Detected Error Item

Note 1: This data is output at the ISW.

Note 2: This data is collected and output at the ISW.

Note 3: The data in this area will be diverse, according to the diagnosis specified in ➀. For details on each

item data, see the following pages.

1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

Note 3

➀

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

NON

7-P Cyclic Diagnosis Information (Error Detected)

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

[10H] Program Memory Verification Discrepancy

[11H] Program Memory Verification Impossible (HFD Fault)

[12H] Program Memory Verification Impossible (Fault at CPU side)

[20H] Data Memory Verification Discrepancy

[21H] Data Memory Verification Impossible (HFD Fault)

[31H] TSW ACT/STBY Changeover Failure (ISW)

[32H] TSW ACT/STBY Changeover Failure (LN)

[41H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Failure

[42H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Failure (DM or PM Verification

NG)

[43H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Failure (PCI Fault)

[44H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Failure (Changeover NG or CPU

RAM Copy NG)

[50H] Trunk Ineffective Hold Detected

[51H] Trunk Ineffective Hold Detected and Released

[52H] Trunk Ineffective Hold Detected Impossible

[70H] Call Forwarding Memory Clear NG

[A0H] Periodic Backup Abnormal End

[C0H] Detection of Remaining Link Abnormal End

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 161

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

[10H] Program Memory Verification Discrepancy

➀ Detected Error Item

➁ Faulty HFD number

➂ Verification of Drive Number

➃ Data analyzed by NEC Engineers

1: 1000 XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂ ➃

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b1 b0

b3 b2 b1 b0

[10H] Program Memory Verification Discrepancy

b0: 0/1 = -/HFD 0

b1: 0/1 = -/HFD 1

b0: 0/1 = -/Drive Number 0

b1: 0/1 = -/Drive Number 1

b2: 0/1 = -/Drive Number 2

b3: 0/1 = -/Drive Number 3

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 162

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

[11H] Program Memory Verification Impossible (HFD Fault)

➀ Detected Error Item

➁ HFD No. (verification suspended)

➂ Error Type

➃ Data analyzed by NEC Engineers

➄ Error Drive Note

Note: This data is available when ➂ is 00 Hex.

1: 11XX XXXX XXXX 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂

➃➄

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b1 b0

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b3 b2 b1 b0

[11H] Program Memory Verification Impossible (HFD Fault)

b0: 0/1 = -/HFD 0

b1: 0/1 = -/HFD 1

00H: HD Processing NG

01H: HD Not Connected

02H: HD Busy

03H: HD Fault (Fault processing/No equipment, etc.)

04H: Transfer NG

05H: Response Timeout

b0: 0/1 = -/Drive Number 0

b1: 0/1 = -/Drive Number 1

b2: 0/1 = -/Drive Number 2

b3: 0/1 = -/Drive Number 3

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 163

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

[12H] Program Memory Verification Impossible (Fault at CPU side)

➀ Detected Error Item

➁ Cause for suspended verification

1: 12XX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b1 b0

[12H] Program Memory Verification Impossible (Fault at CPU side)

01H: CPU-to-CPU communication failure

02H: Check sum file copy failure

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 164

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

[20H] Data Memory Verification Discrepancy

➀ Detected Error Item

➁ Faulty HFD

➂ Diagnosed Data Memory

➃ Data analyzed by NEC Engineers

1: 20XX XX00 XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX

➀ ➁ ➂ ➃

4: XXXX XXXX 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b1 b0

b2 b1 b0

[20H] Data Memory Verification Discrepancy

b0: 0/1 = -/HFD 0

b1: 0/1 = -/HFD 1

b0: 0/1 = -/Data Memory (DM)

b1: 0/1 = -/Local Data Memory (LDM)

b2: 0/1 = -/Network Data Memory (NDM)

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 165

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

[21H] Data Memory Verification Impossible (HFD Fault)

➀ Detected Error Item

➁ Faulty HFD

➂ Diagnosed Data Memory

➃ Error Type

➄ Signal Code

➅ Data analyzed by NEC Engineers

➆ Error Drive

Note: When ➃ (Error Type) is 00H, ➄ Signal Code, ➅ and ➆ Error Drive are valid.

DM LDM NDM

1: 21XX XX00 XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄ ➅ ➆ ➃ ➄ ➅ ➆ ➃ ➄ ➅ ➆

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b1 b0

b2 b1 b0

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b3 b2 b1 b0

[21H] Data Memory Verification Impossible (HFD Fault)

b0: 0/1 = -/HFD 0

b1: 0/1 = -/HFD 1

b0: 0/1 = -/Data Memory (DM)

b1: 0/1 = -/Local Data Memory (LDM)

b2: 0/1 = -/Network Data Memory (NDM)

00H: HD Processing NG

01H: HD Connection NG

02H: HD Busy

03H: HD Fault (Fault processing/No equipment etc.)

04H: Transfer NG

05H: Response Timeout

51H: Data Transfer starts

53H: File Transfer starts

55H: Data Load

b0: 0/1 = -/Drive Number 0

b1: 0/1 = -/Drive Number 1

b2: 0/1 = -/Drive Number 2

b3: 0/1 = -/Drive Number 3

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 166

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

[31H] TSW ACT/STBY Changeover Failure (ISW)

Note: This data is output at the ISW

➀ Detected Error Item

➁ Active TSW No.

➂ FPC No. of ISW

➃ Number of MUX cards (ACT side)

Note

➄ Number of MUX cards (STBY

side) Note

Note: This data is displayed when MUX failure occurs in LN side.

1: 31XX XX00 XXXX 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

[31H] TSW ACT/STBY Changeover Failure (ISW)

b0: 0/1=TSW No. 0 is ACT/No. 1 is ACT

b0-b7: Total number of MUX cards mounted in all LNs

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 167

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

[32H] TSW ACT/STBY Changeover Failure (LN)

Note: This data is collected and output at the ISW.

➀ Detected Error Item

➁ Active TSW No.

➂ FPC No. of LN

➃,➄, ➅, ➆ MUX card (ACT side)

linkage condition

1: 32XX XX00 XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄ ➅ ➆ ➇ ➈ ➉

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

[32H] TSW ACT/STBY Changeover Failure (LN)

b0: 0/1 = TSW No. 0 is ACT/No. 1 is ACT

As shown in the table below, each bit represents the Unit number allocated

for each MUX card position. When “1” is set, the corresponding MUX card

(status: ACT) has a functional failure.

MG1 MG0

Unit 3 Unit 2 Unit 1 Unit 0 Unit 3 Unit 2 Unit 1 Unit 0

MG3 MG2

Unit 3 Unit 2 Unit 1 Unit 0 Unit 3 Unit 2 Unit 1 Unit 0

MG5 MG4

Unit 3 Unit 2 Unit 1 Unit 0 Unit 3 Unit 2 Unit 1 Unit 0

MG7 MG6

Unit 3 Unit 2 Unit 1 Unit 0 Unit 3 Unit 2 Unit 1 Unit 0

0: -

1: MUX connection error

(functional fault/not mounted)

➃

➄

➅

➆

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 168

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

➇, ➈, ➉, MUX card (STBY side)

linkage condition

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

As shown in the table below, each bit represents the Unit number allocated

for each MUX card position. When “1” is set, the corresponding MUX card

(status: ACT) has a functional failure.

MG1 MG0

Unit 3 Unit 2 Unit 1 Unit 0 Unit 3 Unit 2 Unit 1 Unit 0

MG3 MG2

Unit 3 Unit 2 Unit 1 Unit 0 Unit 3 Unit 2 Unit 1 Unit 0

MG5 MG4

Unit 3 Unit 2 Unit 1 Unit 0 Unit 3 Unit 2 Unit 1 Unit 0

MG7 MG6

Unit 3 Unit 2 Unit 1 Unit 0 Unit 3 Unit 2 Unit 1 Unit 0

0: -

1: MUX connection error

(functional fault/not mounted)

➇

➈

➉

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 169

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

[41H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Failure

➀ Detected Error Item

➁ ACT Status Information

1: 41XX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b1 b0

[41H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Failure

b0: CPU

0/1 = No. 0 is ACT/ No. 1 is ACT

b1: TSW

0/1 = No. 0 is ACT/ No. 1 is ACT

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 170

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

[42H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Failure (DM Verification NG or PM Verification NG)

➀ Detected Error Item

➁ ACT Status Information

1: 42XX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b1 b0

[42H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Failure (DM or PM Verification NG)

b0: CPU

0/1 = No. 0 is ACT/No. 1 is ACT

b1: TSW

0/1 = No. 0 is ACT/No. 1 is ACT

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 171

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

[43H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Failure (PCI Fault)

➀ Detected Error Item

➁ ACT Status Information

1: 43XX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b1 b0

[43H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Failure (PCI Fault)

b0: CPU

0/1 = No. 0 is ACT/No. 1 is ACT

b1: TSW

0/1 = No. 0 is ACT/No. 1 is ACT

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 172

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

[44H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Failure (Changeover NG or CPU RAM Copy NG)

➀ Detected Error Item

➁ ACT Status Information

1: 44XX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b1 b0

[44H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Failure

Changeover NG or CPU RAM Copy NG)

b0: CPU

0/1 = No. 0 is ACT/No. 1 is ACT

b1: TSW

0/1 = No. 0 is ACT/No. 1 is ACT

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 173

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

[50H] Trunk Ineffective Hold Detected

➀ Detected Error Item

➁ LENS of Trunk Ineffective Hold

(MG, U)

➂ LENS of Ineffective Hold Trunk (G, LV)

1: 50XX 00XX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX

➀ ➁ ➂ ➂ ➂

4: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 5: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➂➂

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b2 b1 b0

Group No.

1: 500X 00XX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX

Group

Number 0➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄ ➅ ➆ ➇ ➈ ➉ 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

4: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 5: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

25 26

21 22 23 24 27 28 29 30 31

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

<Level>

Level

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

G30

G31

[50H] Trunk Ineffective Hold Detected

b1 b0

0 0 = Unit 0

0 1 = Unit 1

1 0 = Unit 2

1 1 = Unit 3

b2: 0/1 = Even No./Odd No. Module

0/1 = -/Ineffectively held

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 174

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

[51H] Trunk Ineffective Hold Detected and Released

➀ Detected Error Item

➁ LENS of Trunk Ineffective Hold

Detected and Released (MG, U)

➂ LENS of Ineffective Hold Trunk (G, LV)

1: 51XX 00XX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX

➀ ➁ ➂ ➂ ➂

4: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 5: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➂➂

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b2 b1 b0

Group No.

1: 500X 00XX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX

Group

Number ➀ ➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄ ➅ ➆ ➇ ➈ ➉ 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

4: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 5: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

25 26

21 22 23 24 27 28 29 30 31

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

<Level>

Level

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

G30

G31

[51H] Trunk Ineffective Hold Detected and Released

b1 b0

00 = Unit 0

01 = Unit 1

10 = Unit 2

11 = Unit 3

b2: 0/1 = Even No./Odd No. Module

0/1 = -/Ineffectively held

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 175

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

[52H] Trunk Ineffective Hold Detected Impossible

➀ Detected Error Item

➁ Cause for the Suspended Detection

1: 5200 XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b1 b0

[52H] Trunk Ineffective Hold Detected Impossible

b1 b0

0 1 = The CPU to detect is abnormal

1 0 = Data transfer error

1 1 = No Answer error

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 176

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

[70H] Call Forwarding Memory Clear NG

➀ Detected Error Item

➁ Cause for which the Transfer

Memory has been stopped

1: 7000 0X00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b1 b0

[70H] Call Forwarding Memory Clear NG

b1 b0

0 1 = CPU is abnormal

1 0 = Data Transfer error

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 177

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

[A0H] Periodic Backup Abnormal End

➀ Error detection by Routine

Diagnosis

➁ Periodic Backup Abnormal End

Information

➂ Backup Data to No. 0 system

➃ Error Code of No. 0 system HD

Note: The Number Sharing data load also affects the data load of Dual Station Calling Over-FCCS.

1: A0XX XX00 XXXX XX00 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XX00 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄ ➅ ➆ ➇ ➈ ➉

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b1 b0

b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

[A0H] Periodic Backup Abnormal End

b0: 0/1 = HFD 0 Normal end/Abnormal end

b1: 0/1 = HFD 1 Normal end/Abnormal end

b0: 0/1 = -/Individual Speed Calling Data

b1: 0/1 = -/Call Forwarding Data

b2: 0/1 = -/RCF

b3: 0/1 = -/Name Display Data

b4: 0/1 = -/User Assign Soft Key Data

b5: 0/1 = -/Number Sharing Data Note

b6: 0/1 = -/Call Block Data

21H:

40H~47H:

53H:

57H:

59H~5BH:

80H~84H:

A0H:

A2H~A6H:

BDH:

C0H: Failed installation

01H: HD being used by another program

02H: HD not equipped

Parameter

HD Fault

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 178

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

➄ Error Status of No. 0 System HD

➅ Backup Data to No. 1 System

➆ Error Code of No. 1 System HD

➇ Error Status of No. 1 System HD

➈ [Data analyzed by NEC Engineers]

➉ [Data analyzed by NEC Engineers]

b7 b3 b2 b1 b0

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b7 b3 b2 b1 b0

Error occurs;

b0: 0/1 = -/At the time data transfer started

b1: 0/1 = -/At the time data saved

b2: 0/1 = -/At the time data transfer ended

b3: 0/1 = -/At the time file transfer started

Refer to No. ➂

Refer to No.➃

Refer to No.➄

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 179

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

[C0H] Detection of Remaining Link Abnormal End

➀ Performed Diagnosis Item

➁ Error Data

1: C000 XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b1 b0

[C0H] Detection of Remaining Link Abnormal End

b1 b0

0 1 = CPU is not normal

1 0 = Data transfer error

1 1 = No Answer error

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 180

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the MB switch on the PLO/CLK card is turned ON when extracting or inserting

a circuit card.

➀ Switched PLO system

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

Default Alarm:

NON

7-U PLO MB Key Turn ON

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0: 0/1 = PLO No. 0 system/PLO No. 1 system

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 181

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the MB switch on the PLO/CLK card has been turned off when extracting or

inserting a circuit card.

➀ Switched PLO System

➁ Status of the PLO card at the time

of the fault detection (Scan Data 1)

Note: This information includes the failure detected in PH-CK18 (CLK) card.

1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

NON

7-V PLO MB Key Turn OFF

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0: 0/1 = PLO No. 0 system/PLO No. 1 system

b0: 0/1 = Clock STBY/ACT

b1: 0/1 = PLO Synchronizing/PLO self-running or drifting

b2: 0/1 = -/Input clock down

b3, b4:Route of Input clock (see table)

b5: 0/1 = -/PLO input all down

b6: 0/1 = -/PLO output down Note

b7: 0/1 = -/Drifting

b4 b3 Connected With Primary

Oscillator (M-OSC) Connected With

External Clock

0 0 No. 0 M-OSC Route 0

0 1 No. 1 M-OSC Route 1

10 - Route 2

11 - Route 3

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 182

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

➂ Status of the PLO card at the time

of the failure detection (Scan Data

b4 b1 b0

b0: 0/1 = -/n × 5msec clock down

b1: 0/1 = -/Frame Synchronization down from SYNC card

b4: 0/1 = -/Internal OSC clock down

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 183

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when a clock down failure occurs in the CCH/DCH circuit card. When this message is

indicated, the related CCH/DCH card is placed into make-busy status.

➀ Location of faulty CCH/DCH card

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

SUP

13-A CCH Clock Failure

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0-b4: Group No.

b5, b6:Unit No. (0-3)

b7: 0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 184

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when C-level infinite loop of the Port Microprocessor (PM) in the CCH/DCH circuit

card has occurred.

➀ Location of faulty CCH/DCH card

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

SUP

13-B CCH C-Level Infinite Loop Failure (Permanent)

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0-b4: Group No.

b5, b6:Unit No. (0-3)

b7: 0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 185

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when C-level infinite loop of the Port Microprocessor (PM) in the CCH/DCH circuit

card has occurred.

➀ Location of faulty CCH/DCH card

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

SUP

13-C CCH C-Level Infinite Loop Failure (Temporary)

Default Grade:

1Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0-b4: Group No.

b5, b6:Unit No. (0-3)

b7: 0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 186

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when a Port Microprocessor (PM) of the CCH/DCH card did not send an answer to the

CPU.

➀ Location of faulty CCH/DCH card

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

SUP

13-D CCH Lock-Up Failure (Permanent)

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0-b4: Group No.

b5, b6:Unit No. (0-3)

b7: 0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 187

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when a Port Microprocessor (PM) of the CCH/DCH card did not send an answer to the

CPU.

➀ Location of faulty CCH/DCH card

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

SUP

13-E CCH Lock-Up Failure (Temporary)

Default Grade:

1Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0-b4: Group No.

b5, b6:Unit No. (0-3)

b7: 0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 188

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when B-level infinite loop of the Port Microprocessor (PM) in the CCH/DCH circuit

card has occurred.

➀ Location of faulty CCH/DCH card

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

SUP

13-F CCH B-Level Infinite Loop Failure (Permanent)

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0-b4: Group No.

b5, b6:Unit No. (0-3)

b7: 0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 189

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when B-level infinite loop of the Port Microprocessor (PM) in the CCH/DCH circuit

card has occurred.

➀ Location of faulty CCH/DCH card

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

SUP

13-G CCH B-Level Infinite Loop Failure (Temporary)

Default Grade:

1Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0-b4: Group No.

b5, b6:Unit No. (0-3)

b7: 0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 190

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when a failure has occurred numerous times to a common channel signaling link and

the link has been placed into make-busy state.

➀ Location of Faulty CCH/DCH Card

➁ Data to be Analyzed by NEC

Engineers

1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

SUP

13-H CCS Link Failure (Permanent)

Default Grade:

1Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0-b4: Group No.

b5, b6:Unit No. (0-3)

b7: 0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 191

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

➂ Probable cause for the failure

b3 b2 b1 b0

b0-b3: See Table:

FLT ID CCITT

ERROR FACTOR

00 A S (F = 1) frame is received.

01 B DM (F = 1) response is received.

02 C UA (F = 1) response is received.

03 D UA (F = 0) response is received.

04 E DM (F = 0) response is received.

05 F SABME command is received.

06 G N200 Timeout (Link is set)

07 H N200 Timeout (Link is

disconnected)

08 I N200 Timeout (Link failure is

restored to normal)

09 J N (R) frame error is received.

0A K FRMR frame is received (Link is

re-setup).

0B L Undefined frame is received.

0C M -

0D N Improper long frame is received.

0E O I frame with I field which exceeds

N201 is received.

0F - -

10 - Layer 1 down (for ILC)

40 - FRMR frame is received. (Link is

not re-setup)

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 192

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when a failure has occurred numerous times to a common channel signaling link and

the link has been placed into make-busy state. When this fault lasts over three minutes, the system message

changes to [13-H] CCS Link Failure (Permanent).

➀ Location of faulty CCH/DCH card

➁ Data to be Analyzed by NEC Engineers

1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

NON

13-I CCS Link Failure (Temporary)

Default Grade:

1Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0-b4: Group No.

b5, b6:Unit No. (0-3)

b7: 0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 193

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

➂ Probable cause for the failure

b3 b2 b1 b0

b0-b3: See Table.

FLT ID CCITT

ERROR FACTOR

00 A S (F = 1) frame is received.

01 B DM (F = 1) response is received.

02 C UA (F = 1) response is received.

03 D UA (F = 0) response is received.

04 E DM (F = 0) response is received.

05 F SABME command is received.

06 G N200 Timeout (Link is set)

07 H N200 Timeout (Link is disconnected)

08 I N200 Timeout (Link failure is restored

to normal)

09 J N (R) frame error is received.

0A K FRMR frame is received (Link is

re-setup).

0B L Undefined frame is received.

0C M -

0D N Improper long frame is received.

0E O I frame with I field which exceeds

N201 is received.

0F - -

10 - Layer 1 down (for ILC)

40 - FRMR frame is received. (Link is not

re-setup)

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 194

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the faults pertaining to CCIS/ISDN Link are restored to normal.

➀ Location of faulty CCH/DCH card

➁ Data to be Analyzed by NEC Engineers

1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

NON

13-J Restoration From CCS Link Failure

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0-b4: Group No.

b5, b6:Unit No. (0-3)

b7: 0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 195

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when a fault occurred to the Port Microprocessor (PM) within the CCH/DCH circuit

card and the restart processing is executed.

➀ Location of faulty CCH/DCH card

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

SUP

13-K CCH Reset Interrupt Failure

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0-b4: Group No.

b5, b6:Unit No. (0-3)

b7: 0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 196

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when a digital line failure occurs on the DAI circuit card.

➀ DAI Card Mounting Location

➁ Kind of Fault

1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

SUP

13-N Digital Line Warning

Default Grade:

1Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0-b4: Group No.

b5, b6:Unit No. (0-3)

b7: MG No.

0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

b0-b4: Kind of Fault (HEX)

00 = -

01 = Frame alignment loss PCM down

02 = Bit error rate is over 10-6

03 = Slip is detected

04 = -

05 = Dch down

06 = Multi-frame alignment loss

07 = -

10 = -

11 = Frame alignment loss PCM down (frequently)

12 = Bit error rate is over 10-4

13 = Slip is detected (frequently)

14 = Opposite office alarm is detected

15 = -

16 = Multi-frame alignment loss (frequently)

17 = Frame alignment loss PCM down (continuously)

18 = Multi-frame alignment loss (continuously)

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 197

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when a digital line failure occurs in succession on the DAI circuit card.

➀ DAI Card Mounting Location

➁ Kind of Fault

1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

SUP

13-O Digital Line Failure

Default Grade:

2Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0-b4: Group No.

b5, b6:Unit No. (0-3)

b7: MG No.

0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

b0-b4: Kind of Fault (HEX)

00 = -

01 = Frame alignment loss PCM down

02 = Bit error rate is over 10-4

03 = Slip is detected

04 = Opposite office alarm (AIS) is detected

05 = -

06 = Multi-frame alignment loss

07 = Frame alignment loss PCM down (continuously)

08 = Multi-frame alignment loss (continuously)

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 198

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when a digital line failure is restored to normal.

➀ DAI Card Mounting Location

➁ Kind of Fault

1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

NON

13-P Digital Line Restore

Default Grade:

0Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0-b4: Group No.

b5, b6:Unit No. (0-3)

b7: MG No.

0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

b0-b4: Kind of Fault (HEX)

00 = -

01 = Frame alignment loss PCM down

02 = Bit error rate is over 10-4

03 = -

04 = Opposite office alarm (AIS) is detected

05 = Dch restores to normal

06 = Multi-frame alignment loss

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 199

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the battery is operated in the due to the Digital Access Unit (DAU) power down.

➀ DAI Card Mounting Location

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

SUP

13-Q DAU Battery Operation

Default Grade:

1Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0-b4: Group No.

b5, b6:Unit No. (0-3)

b7: MG No.

0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 200

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the main power of the Digital Access Unit (DAU) system is restored to normal,

ending the temporary power acceptance from the battery observed in the message [13-Q] DAU

Battery Operation.”

➀ DAI Card Mounting Location

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

NON

13-R DAU Line Operation

Default Grade:

0Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0-b4: Group No.

b5, b6:Unit No. (0-3)

b7: 0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 201

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when a PWR circuit card failure is detected.

➀ Power Circuit Card Location

➁ Fault Information

➂ Power Card Classification

See Chapter 4 for the Circuit Card Replacement Procedure.

1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b2 b1 b0

b4 b3 b2 b1

Default Alarm:

NON

13-Z Power Failure

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0, b1:Unit No. (0-3)

b2: MG No.

0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

b1: 0/1 = -/-5V Power Failure

b2: 0/1 = -/+12V Power Failure

b3: 0/1 = -/+5V Power Failure

b4: 0/1 = -/-48V Power Failure

b0: 0/1 = Group 24 (0 side) / Group 25 (1 side)

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 202

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when a VPS failure is detected.

➀ Probable cause for the failure

➁ LENS of VPS

➂ LENS of VPS

See Chapter 4 for the Circuit Card Replacement Procedure.

1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

SUP

15-A VPS Failure (Temporary)

Default Grade:

1Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0-b7: 0 = -

1 = Sector error

FF = Other than above

b0-b2: Level

b3-b7: Group

b0, b1:Unit

b2-b7: Module Group

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 203

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when a VPS failure is detected.

➀ Probable cause for the failure

➁ LENS of VPS

➂ LENS of VPS

1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

15-B VPS Failure (Permanent)

Default Grade:

2Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0-b7: 0 = -

01H = Sector error

FF = Other than above

b0-b2: Level

b3-b7: Group

b0, b1:Unit

b2-b7: Module Group

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 204

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when a VPS failure, observed in the message [15-B], is restored to normal.

➀ LENS of VPS

➁ LENS of VPS

1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

NON

15-C VPS Restore

Default Grade:

2Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0-b2: Level

b3-b7: Group

b0, b1:Unit

b2-b7: Module Group

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 205

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when Intra-Office Trunks (ATI, RST, etc.) have all become busy.

➀ Details on Trunk name and its

Route number

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

SUP

16-A Inside Trunk All Busy

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

See table on the following page

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 206

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

ROUTE

NO. DATA

(HEX.) TRUNK NAME ROUTE

NO. DATA

(HEX.) TRUNK NAME

901 01 Attendant Console 917 11 MFC Sender

902 02 Originating Register Trunk 918 12 Not used

903 03 Incoming Register Trunk 919 13 MODEM

904 04 MF Receiver 920 14 MODEM

905 05 Sender Trunk DP/PB 921 15 MODEM

906 06 PB Receiver for Automated

Attendant Service 922 16 MODEM

907 07 AMP 923 17 MODEM

908 08 Not used 924 18 MODEM

909 09 Three-Way Conference Trunk 925 19 MODEM

910 0A Not used 926 1A MODEM

911 0B Not used 927 1B Not used

912 0C Originating Register Trunk for

ATTCON/DESKCON 928 1C Not used

913 0D Three-Way Conference Trunk for

ATTCON/DESKCON 929 1D Data Signaling Trunk-Option

914 0E Not used 930 1E Rate Adaptation Conversion Trunk

915 0F Night ATTCON/DESKCON 931 1F Not used

916 10 MFC Register

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 207

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when Virtual Tie Line setup has completed.

➀ Counter

➁ Virtual Tie Line Call Header

Location

➂ Virtual Tie Line Call Header

Location

1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b2 b1 b0

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

NON

16-B Virtual Tie Line Set Report

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0: 00=-

01=Re-setup

b0,b1: Unit No.

b2: Module Group No.

b0-b2: Level

b3-b7: Group No.

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 208

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when Virtual Tie Line Cancel has completed.

➀ Counter

➁ Virtual Tie Line Call Header

Location

➂ Virtual Tie Line Call Header

Location

1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b2 b1 b0

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

NON

16-C Virtual Tie Line Cancel Report

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0: 0/1=-/Re-setup

b0,b1: Unit No.

b2: Module Group No.

b0-b2: Level

b3-b7: Group No.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 209

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when Virtual Tie Line Setup has failed due to a fault in the network of the terminating

office concerned.

➀ Virtual Tie Line Call Header

Location

➁ Virtual Tie Line Call Header

Location

1: 00XX XX8X XXXX 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀➁ ➂ ➃ ➄

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b2 b1 b0

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

NON

16-E Virtual Tie Line Set Time Out

Default Grade:

1Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0,b1: Unit No.

b2: Module Group No.

b0-b2: Level

b3-b7: Group No.

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 210

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

➂ Virtual Tie Line Call Header

Location

➃ Fault Cause

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

CLASS REASON

KIND

VALUE DATA REASON KIND

Reason Kind

Class Value

8765 4321(bit)

-000 xxxx

-001

Normal Event Class

000

001

0001

0010

0011

0110

0111

0000

0001

0010

0011

0101

0110

1010

1011

1100

1101

1110

1111

Dead Number

No route to the designated transit network

No route to the opposite Party

Use of channel not allowed

Call terminated to a setup channel

Normal disconnection

Called user busy

No response from called user

Called party being rung/no answer

Communication denied

Opposite party’s terminal number changed

Disconnection and release of the user not selected

Opposite party’s terminal out of order

Invalid number format (Incomplete Number)

Facility denied

Answer to status inquiry

Other normal class

b0-b3: Call Source

b4-b7: “8” is always indicated.

DATA CALL SOURCE

0User

1 Private network to which the user is directly connected.

(Self side)

2 National network to which the user is directly connected.

(Self side)

3 Tie-Line Network

4 National network to which the opposite party is directly

connected. (Opposite party’s side)

5 Private network to which the opposite party is directly

connected. (Opposite party’s side)

7 International Network

A Network from Interworking

Other Spare

b0-b3: Reason Kind

b4-b6: Class

0=No Answer

Other than 0=Refer to the following table

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 211

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

010 xxxx

Classes not allowed use of resources

010

0010

0110

1001

1010

1011

1100

1111

No usable channel/line

Network failure

Temporary failure

Switching system congested

Access information discarded

Use of requested line/channel not allowed

Class not allowed use of other resources

Reason Kind

Class Value

8765 4321(bit)

011 xxxx

Classes not allowed use of services

011

0001

0010

1001

1010

1111

Use of QOS not allowed

Requested facility not contracted

Bearer capability not allowed

Bearer capability not allowed at present

Class not allowed to use other services or options

100 xxxx

Classes not provided with services

100

0001

0010

0101

0110

1111

Unprovided bearer capability designated

Unprovided channel kind designated

Unprovided facility requested

Restricted digital information bearer capability

Class unprovided with other services or options

101 xxxx

Invalid message class

001

101

0001

0010

0011

0100

0101

0110

1000

1011

1111

Invalid call number used

Invalid channel number used

Designated transit call ID number unused

Transit call ID number being used

No transit call

Designated transit call disconnected and released

Terminal attributes unmatch

Invalid transit network selected

Other invalid message class

110 xxxx

Procedure error (ex: unrecognized

message) class

110

0000

0001

0010

0011

0100

0101

0110

1111

100

101

102

111

Mandatory information elements inadequate

Message kind undefined or unprovided

Call status and message unmatching or message

kind undefined

Information element undefined

Content of information element invalid

Call status and message unmatching

Recovery due to timer over

Class of other procedure errors

111 xxxx

Interworking class 111 111 127 Other interworking class

Others Reserved

CLASS REASON

KIND

VALUE DATA REASON KIND

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 212

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message indicates that an outgoing call (by connection acknowledge system) has not received an

acknowledgment signal from the opposite office. As a result, the attempted outgoing call is routed to Reorder

Tone (ROT) connection.

In Case of Station OG/ATT OG/ATT Tandem Connection

➀ Type of connection and station

number digits

➁ ~ ➃ Calling station number

(See table)

1: XXXX XXXX XX0X XX0X 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX

➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄ ➅ ➆ ➇ ➈ ➉ 11 12

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b2 b1 b0

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

NON

16-F Sender Start Time Out

Default Grade:

0Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0-b2: Digits of station number (origination)

b6-b7:

0 0 = Station OG connection

0 1 = ATT OG connection

1 1 = ATT Tandem connection

b4-b7 b0-b3

➁DC0 DC1

➂DC2 DC3

➃DC4 DC5

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 213

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

➄ Tenant No. of calling station (Hex.)

➅ OPTN data

Note: This data displays when the Tenant No. of the calling station is larger than 15, and bit7 of ➄ displays

as “1” (otherwise, “0” displays at any time). While the four-bit data of ➄ is self-sufficient in verifying

the Tenant No. “1-15,” this OPTN data provides a supportive role to cover the larger Tenant No.

ranging from 16 to 255. Use the following method to analyze the data:

➆ OG route number (Hex.)

b7 b6 b2 b1 b0

b3 b2 b1 b0

Tenant No. of Calling Station (1-15) =0000 Tenant No.

OPTN data (0: fixed) bit 0 - bit 3 of ➄

Tenant No. of Calling Station (16-255) = OPTN data Tenant No.

OPTN data (variable) bit 0 - bit 3 of ➄

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b7: OP data (0/1)

When OPTN data of ➅ is valid, “1” displays.

b0-b3: Tenant No. of calling station

• bit7=0 →Tenant No. ≤ 15 Refer to the OPTN

• bit7=1 →15 < Tenant No.≤ 255 data of ➅

b0-b3: OPTN data Note

b7: AC data

0/1=Internal trunk/External trunk

b6: OP data (0/1)

When OPRT data of ➇ is valid, “1” displays,

b0-b5: OG route number

• bit 6=0 → Route No. ≤ 64 Refer to the OPTN

• bit 6=1 →63 < Route No. data of ➇

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 214

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

➇ OPRT data

Note: This data displays when the OG Route No. is larger than 63, and bit6 of ➆ displays as “1” (otherwise,

“0” displays at any time). While the six-bit data of ➆ is self-sufficient in verifying the Route No. “1-

63,” this OPRT data provides a supportive role to cover the Route No., which is larger than 63. Use the

following method to analyze the data:

➈ Trunk No. of OG trunk

➉ Trunk No. of the sender

11 Number of digits dialed by the

caller

b3 b2 b1 b0

OG Route No. (1-63) =0000 OG Route No.

OPTN data (0:fixed) bit0 - bit5 of ➆

OG Route No. (64 or larger) = OPTN data OG Route No.

OPTN data (variable) bit0 - bit5 of ➆

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b0-b3: OPRT data Note

b0-b7: Trunk No. of OG trunk

b0-b7: Trunk No. of the sender

b0-b4: Number of digits dialed by the caller

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 215

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

12 Number dialed by the caller (See

table)

In Case of Tandem Connection

➀ Type of connection

➁ IC route number (Hex.)

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b7 b6

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b4-b7 b0-b3

DC0 DC1

DC2 DC3

DC4 DC5

DC6 DC7

DC8 DC9

DC10 DC11

DC12 DC13

DC14 DC15

DC16 DC17

DC18 DC19

DC20 DC21

b7 b6

1 0 = Tandem connection

b7: AC data

0/1=Internal trunk/External trunk

b6: OP data (0/1)

When OPRT data of ➂ is valid, “1” displays.

b0-b5: IC route number

• bit 6=0 →Route No. ≤ 64 Refer to the OPTN

• bit 6=1 →< 63 Route No. data of ➂

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 216

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

➂ OPRT data

Note: This data displays when the IC Route No. is larger than 63, and bit6 of ➁ displays as “1” (otherwise,

“1” displays at any time). While the six-bit data of ➁ is self-sufficient in verifying the Route No. “1-

63,” this OPRT data provides a supportive role to cover the Route No., which is larger than 63. Use the

following method to analyze the data:

➃ ~ ➄ Trunk No. of IC trunk

➅ Not used

➆ OG route number (Hex.)

b3 b2 b1 b0

IC Route No. (1-63) =0000 IC Route No.

OPRT data (0:fixed) bit0 - bit5 of ➁

IC Route No. (64 or larger) = OPRT data IC Route No.

OPRT data (variable) bit0 - bit5 of ➁

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b0-b3: OPRT data Note

b0-b7: Trunk No. of IC trunk

b7: AC data

0/1=Internal trunk/External trunk

b6: OP data (0/1)

When OPRT data of ➇ is valid, “1” displays,

b0-b5: OG route number

• bit 6=0 →Route No. ≤ 64 Refer to the OPTN

• bit 6=1 →< 63 Route No. data of ➇

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 217

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

➇ OPRT data

Note: This data displays when the OG Route No. is larger than 63, and bit6 of ➆ displays as “1” (otherwise,

“0” is displays at any time). While the six bit data of ➆ is self-sufficient in verifying the Route No. “1-

63,” this OPRT data provides a supportive role to cover the Route No., which is larger than 63. Use the

following method to analyze the data:

➈ Trunk No. of OG trunk

➉ Trunk No. of the sender

11 Number of digits dialed by the

caller

b3 b2 b1 b0

OG Route No. (1-63) =0000 OG Route No.

OPRT data (0: fixed) bit 0 - bit 5 of ➆

OG Route No. (64 or larger) = OPRT data OG Route No.

OPRT data (variable) bit 0 - bit 5 of ➆

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b0-b3: OPRT data Note

b0-b7: Trunk No. of OG trunk

b0-b7: Trunk No. of the sender

b0-b4: Number of digits dialed by the caller

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 218

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

12 Number dialed by the caller (See

table)

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b4-b7 b0-b3

DC0 DC1

DC2 DC3

DC4 DC5

DC6 DC7

DC8 DC9

DC10 DC11

DC12 DC13

DC14 DC15

DC16 DC17

DC18 DC19

DC20 DC21

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 219

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the DR signal of the RS-232C, connected to the port designated by the system

data, remains OFF for 30 consecutive seconds while the system is in service (immediately after startup in the

case of system start-up).

➀ Faulty Port No.

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

NON

16-K I/O Port Line OFF

Default Grade:

1Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

0/1 = -/Link Down

b0: Port 0 b4: Port 4

b1: Port 1 b5: Port 5

b2: Port 2 b6: Port 6

b3: Port 3 b7: Port 7

IOC0 IOC1

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 220

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when [16-K] I/O Port Line Down Failure is restored to normal.

➀ Faulty Port No.

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

NON

16-L I/O Port Line Restore

Default Grade:

1Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

0/1 = -/Link Down

b0: Port 0 b4: Port 4

b1: Port 1 b5: Port 5

b2: Port 2 b6: Port 6

b3: Port 3 b7: Port 7

IOC0 IOC1

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 221

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the timer circuit on the EMA card becomes faulty and stops functioning and 64-

Hz clock alarm is output.

➀ Message Detail Data

This system message is always indicated as 0000.

1: 0000 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

Default Alarm:

SUP

16-M Hard Clock Failure

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 222

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when [16-M] Hard Clock Failure is restored to normal.

➀ Message Detail Data

This system message is always indicated as 0000.

1: 0000 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

Default Alarm:

NON

16-N Hard Clock Restore

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 223

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the IOC card fails.

➀ IOC circuit card No.

➁ Cause for the fault

1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

SUP

16-T IOC Failure (Temporary)

Default Grade:

1Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0: 0/1 = No. 0/No. 1

b0: 0/1 = -/COP Alarm

b1: 0/1 = -/CLK Alarm

b2: 0/1 = -/MEM bus CLK Alarm

b3: 0/1 = -/Abnormal Interruption

b4: 0/1 = -/Infinite Loop Detected

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 224

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the IOC card failure, observed in the message [16-T], is detected more than eight

times a day.

➀ IOC circuit card No.

➁ Cause for the fault

See Chapter 4 for the Circuit Card Replacement Procedure.

1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

SUP

16-U IOC Failure (Permanent)

Default Grade:

2Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0: 0/1 = No. 0/No. 1

b0: 0/1 = -/COP Alarm

b1: 0/1 = -/CLK Alarm

b2: 0/1 = -/MEM bus CLK Alarm

b3: 0/1 = -/Abnormal Interruption

b4: 0/1 = -/Infinite Loop

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 225

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the user uses Follow Phone (SWAP) service.

➀ Error code

1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XX00 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX 00XX 3: XXXX 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄ ➅ ➆ ➇ ➈ ➉ 11 12 13 14 14

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

ERROR

CODE (HEX) FAILURE ERROR

CODE (HEX) FAILURE

00 Normal End 16 Called station is busy

01 MG unmatch 17 MW has been set to Calling or Called

station

02 Called party is not the station 18 Call Back/OG queuing has been set to

Calling or Called station

03 TEC of Calling or Called station is abnor-

mal 19 Call Forwarding - All Calls has been set to

Calling or Called station

04 TEC unmatch 20 Call Forwarding - Busy Line has been set to

Calling or Called station

05 Hunting group unmatch 21 Call Forwarding - Don’t Answer has been

set to Calling or Called station

06 Call Pick Up group unmatch 22-31 -

07 Calling or Called station is Night station 32 Under processing of Data Memory Back

08 Call Pick Up Expand group unmatch 33 •Collision of swap service

•Under swapping of One Touch Memory

•Memory overflow (Max. 4 stations)

Default Alarm:

NON

16-X Station Exchanged Report

Default Grade:

0Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0-b7: See table

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 226

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

➁ Tenant No. of the calling station

➂ Accommodated location of the

calling station after Follow Phone

service

➃ Accommodated location of the

calling station after Follow Phone

service

09 - 34 Data Memory read error

10 Calling or Called Dterm has Data Line 35 Data Memory swap failure

11 Calling or Called Dterm has OAI function

key 36 OAI Terminal Information swap failure

(CM Data)

12 Calling or Called station is Agent/

Supervisor (ACD) 37 OAI Terminal Information swap failure

(LP Data)

13-15 - 38 SST Time out

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

ERROR

CODE (HEX) FAILURE ERROR

CODE (HEX) FAILURE

b0-b3: Tenant No. (1-15)

b0-b7: Tenant No. (over 15)

b0-b2: Level

b3-b7: Group (0-22)

b0, b1:Unit No. (0-3)

b2-b7: MG No.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 227

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

➄ ~ ➆ Station No. of the calling

station

➇ Tenant No. of the called station

➈ Accommodated location of the

called station

➉ Accommodated location of the

called station

11 ~ 13 Station No. of the called

station

14 Data Analyzed by NEC Engineers

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b4-b7 b0-b3

➄DC0 DC1

➅DC2 DC3

➆DC4 DC5

b0-b3: Tenant No. (1-15)

b0-b7: Tenant No. (over 15)

b0-b2: Level

b3-b7: Group

b0, b1:Unit No. (0-3)

b2-b7: MG No.

b4-b7 b0-b3

11 DC0 DC1

12 DC2 DC3

13 DC4 DC5

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 228

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the MBR switch on the CCH/DCH card has turned ON.

➀ CCH/DCH Card Mounting

Location

➁ CKT No.

1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b1 b0

Default Alarm:

NON

17-A CCH MBR Key Turn ON

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0-b4: Group No.

b5, b6:Unit No. (0-3)

b7: MG No.

0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

b0, b1:CKT No. (0-3)

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 229

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the MBR switch on the CCH/DCH card has turned OFF.

➀ CCH/DCH Card Mounting

Location

➁ CKT No.

1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b1 b0

Default Alarm:

NON

17-B CCH MBR Key Turn OFF

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0-b4: Group No.

b5, b6:Unit No. (0-3)

b7: MG No.

0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

b0, b1:CKT No. (0-3)

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 230

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the MB switch on the CCH/DCH card has turned ON when extracting or inserting

a circuit card or at PM initialization, etc.

➀ CCH/DCH Card Mounting

Location

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

NON

17-C CCH MB Key Turn ON

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0-b4: Group No.

b5, b6:Unit No. (0-3)

b7: MG No.

0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 231

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the MB switch on the CCH/DCH card has turned OFF when extracting or

inserting a circuit card or at PM initialization, etc.

➀ CCH/DCH Card Mounting

Location

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

NON

17-D CCH MB Key Turn OFF

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0-b4: Group No.

b5, b6:Unit No. (0-3)

b7: MG No.

0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 232

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the NIGHT switch on the ATTCON/DESKCON has been operated or when the

DAY/NIGHT change has been executed by the external switch operation.

➀ Tenant No.

➁ Changing Method

1: XXXX XXXX 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂ ➃

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

NON

17-H Day/Night Change Information

Default Grade:

0Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0-b3: Tenant No. (1-15)

b4-b7: Tenant No. (over 15)

b0-b7: 1=Night Key on the ATTCON/DESKCON

2=External Key

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 233

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

➂ Day/Night Mode Specification

➃ External Switch Status

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b0-b3: Mode after changing (Refer to table below)

b4-b7: Mode before changing (Refer to table below)

Note: This data is programmed as initial data.

b0 b1 b2 b3 MEANING

b4 b5 b6 b7

0000Day Mode

0 0 0 1 Night Mode 1

0 0 1 0 Night Mode 2 (available only for Japan)

0011Night Mode 3 (DIT-Night Connection Fixed)

Note

b0-b7: 01=Not used

02=Day/Night Change

03=Not used

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 234

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the MB switch on the IOC card has turned ON when extracting or inserting a

circuit card.

➀ Circuit Card No.

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

Default Alarm:

NON

17-O IOC MB Key Turn ON

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0: 0/1 = IOC 0/IOC 1

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 235

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the MB switch on the IOC card has turned OFF.

➀ Circuit Card No.

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

Default Alarm:

NON

17-P IOC MB Key Turn OFF

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0: 0/1 = IOC 0/IOC 1

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 236

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the MBR switch on the IOC card has turned ON at the time of CPU changeover

or speech path changeover.

➀ Circuit Card No.

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

Default Alarm:

NON

17-Q IOC MBR Key Turn ON

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0: 0/1 = IOC 0/IOC 1

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 237

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the MBR switch on the IOC card has turned OFF at the time of CPU changeover

or speech path changeover.

➀ Circuit Card No.

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

Default Alarm:

NON

17-R IOC MBR Key Turn OFF

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0: 0/1 = IOC 0/IOC 1

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 238

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the MBR switch on the IOGT (PH-GT10) card in ISW is turned ON.

➀ IOGT card system status

➁ IOGT card system status after key

operation

Note 1: If the MBR key on the active IOGT card is flipped, the ACT/STBY of Speech Path Systems within the

whole system is totally changed over. For more details, refer to Chapter 6, Chapter 12.

Note 2: “1” is always displayed in the bit data.

1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

Default Alarm:

NON

17-Y GATE-HSW MBR Key ON

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0: 0/1 = No. 0 system/No. 1 system

b7: 0/1 = Normal/MB Note 1

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 239

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the MBR switch on the IOGT (PH-GT10) card in ISW is turned OFF.

➀ IOGT card system status

➁ IOGT card system status after key

operation

Note: If failure occurs on the HSW card side, the IOGT card is placed in Make-Busy state and “1” is

displayed in the bit. Otherwise, “0” is displayed.

1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

Default Alarm:

NON

17-Z GATE-HSW MBR Key OFF

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0: 0/1 = No. 0 system/No. 1 system

b7: 0/1 = Normal/MB Note

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 240

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the Primary Dch fails, Dch Back-Up function is operated automatically.

➀ Condition of the Dch

➁ Location of the Dch (Primary)

➂ Location of the Dch (Back-up)

1: XXXX XXXX XXXX 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄ ➅

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

NON

23-P Dch Back-Up Automatic Change Start/End

Default Grade:

1Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0-b7: 1 = Back-up Start

2 = Back-up End

3 = Back-up Failed

b0-b4: Group No.

b5, b6:Unit No. (0-3)

b7: 0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

b0-b4: Group No.

b5, b6:Unit No. (0-3)

b7: 0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 241

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

➃ Changeover Information

➄ Status of the Primary/Back-up Dch

➅ EVENT No.

b3 b2 b1 b0

b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b0, b1:00 = Change from Primary Dch to Dch for Back-up

01 = Change from Dch for Back-up to Primary Dch

10 = Place Primary Dch to ACT status

11 = Place Dch for Back-up to ACT status

b2, b3:00 = Change signal is received

01 = Change signal is sent

b0-b2: Status of Primary Dch

0 = In service (ACT status)

1 = STBY

2 = Out of Service

3 = Make Busy

4 = Changing the status from STBY to In Service

5 = Manual Changeover out of service

b3-b5: Status of Primary Dch

0 = In service (ACT status)

1 = STBY

2 = Out of Service

3 = Make Busy

4 = Changing the status from STBY to In Service

5 = Manual Changeover out of service

b0-b7: EVENT No.

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 242

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the Primary Dch fails, and the Dch Back-Up function is operated manually.

➀ Condition of the Dch

➁ Location of the Dch (Primary)

➂ Location of the Dch (Back-up)

1: XXXX XXXX XXXX 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄ ➅

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

NON

23-Q Dch Back-Up Manual Change Start/End

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0-b7: 1 = Back-up Start

2 = Back-up End

3 = Back-up Failed

b0-b4: Group No.

b5, b6:Unit No. (0-3)

b7: 0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

b0-b4: Group No.

b5, b6:Unit No. (0-3)

b7: 0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 243

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

➃ Detailed information on changing

Dch

➄ Status of the Primary/Back-up Dch

➅ EVENT No.

b3 b2 b1 b0

b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b0, b1:00 = Change from Primary Dch to Dch for Back-up

01 = Change from the Dch for Back-up to Primary Dch

10 = Primary Dch Changeover to ACT status

11 = Back-up Dch Changeover to ACT status

b2, b3:The way of changing

00 = Changed by the MAT

01 = Changed by the MB switch of the circuit card

02 = Changed by placing Dch to Make-Busy

03 = Unknown

b0-b2: Status of Primary Dch

0 = In service (ACT status)

1 = STBY

2 = Out of Service

3 = Make Busy

4 = Changing the status from STBY to In Service

5 = Manual Changeover out of service

b3-b5: Status of Back-up Dch

0 = In service (ACT status)

1 = STBY

2 = Out of Service

3 = Make Busy

4 = Changing the status from STBY to In Service

5 = Manual Changeover out of service

b0-b7: EVENT No.

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 244

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the MUX (PH-PC36) card has a clock failure in one of the dual systems.

➀ MUX Card Location and System

Status

➁ Scan Data

See Chapter 5 for repair procedure.

1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b3 b2 b1

Default Alarm:

23-Y MUX Clock Failure

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0-b1: Unit number

b2: MG number

b3: 0/1 = MUX No. 0 system/MUX No. 1 system

b4: 0/1 = ACT/STBY

Scan Data:Clock alarm information on the faulty MUX card

b1: 0/1 = -/FH failure for 2M PCM Highway

b2: 0/1 = -/CLK failure for 2M PCM Highway

b3: 0/1 = -/4M CLK failure for PM

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 245

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the MUX (PH-PC36) card has a clock failure in both of the dual systems.

➀ MUX Card Location

➁ Scan Data 1

➂ Scan Data 2

See Chapter 4 for the Circuit Card Replacement Procedure.

1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b2 b1 b0

b3 b2 b1

Default Alarm:

23-Z Both MUX Clock Failure

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0-b1: Unit No.

b2: MG No.

Scan Data 1:Details on clock alarm information (ACT side)

b1: 0/1 = -/FH failure for 2M PCM Highway

b2: 0/1 = -/CLK failure for 2M PCM Highway

b3: 0/1 = -/4M CLK failure for PM

Scan Data 2:Details on clock alarm information (STBY side)

b1: 0/1 = -/FH failure for 2M PCM Highway

b2: 0/1 = -/CLK failure for 2M PCM Highway

b3: 0/1 = -/4M CLK failure for PM

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 246

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the MAT is log-in or log-out.

➀ I/O Port No. and MAT Status

➁ Command Name

➂ User Name

1: XX00 XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX

➀ ➁ ➁ ➁ ➁ ➁ ➁ ➂ ➂ ➂ ➂ ➂ ➂ ➂ ➂ ➂ ➂ ➂ ➂ ➂ ➂ ➂ ➂

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b2 b1 b0

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

NON

26-N MAT Log

Default Grade:

0Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0-b2: I/O Port No.

000 = Port 0 001 = Port 1

010 = Port 2 011 = Port 3

100 = Port 4 101 = Port 5

110 = Port 6 111 = Port 7

b4-b7: 0000 = Login

0001 = Logout

0010 = Command is startup

0011 = Command exit

b0-b7: Command name

b0-b7: MAT user name

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 247

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This massage is issued when a call, originated via a station/trunk, is judged as malicious, and then, the details

on the call is traced with the called party pressing an access code or the “Call Trace” key.

[When a call is originated from a station]

•Information on Called Party (Informer)

Fusion Point Code (FPC) (Hex.)

Note

Tenant No. (Hex.)

Note

Physical Station No. (Hex.)

Note

User Group No. (UGN) (Hex.)

Note

Telephone No. (Hex.)

Note

1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX

➀➁➂ ➃➄➅➆➇➈

4: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 5: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➉

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

NON

26-R Call Trace

Default Grade:

2Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b4 - b7 b0 - b3

dc0 dc1

dc2 dc3

b4 - b7 b0 - b3

dc0 dc1

dc2 dc3

b4 - b7 b0 - b3

dc0 dc1

dc2 dc3

dc4 dc5

b4 - b7 b0 - b3

dc0 dc1

dc2 dc3

b4 - b7 b0 - b3 b4 - b7 b0 - b3

dc0 dc1 dc8 dc9

dc2 dc3 dc10 dc11

dc4 dc5 dc12 dc13

dc6 dc7 dc14 dc15

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 248

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

•Information on Malicious call

Kind of Call (Hex.)

Note 10H=Call from a station

Fusion Point Code (FPC) (Hex.)

Note

Tenant No. (Hex.)

Note

Physical Station No. (Hex.)

Note

User Group No. (UGN) (Hex.)

Note

Telephone No. (Hex.)

Note

Note: Each No./code is output in hexadecimal. Detailed meanings are as follows:

Output Data (Hex.) Actual Meaning

1~9 →1~9

A→0

B→*

C→#

0→blank

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b4 - b7 b0 - b3

dc0 dc1

dc2 dc3

b4 - b7 b0 - b3

dc0 dc1

dc2 dc3

b4 - b7 b0 - b3

dc0 dc1

dc2 dc3

dc4 dc5

b4 - b7 b0 - b3

dc0 dc1

dc2 dc3

b4 - b7 b0 - b3 b4 - b7 b0 - b3

dc0 dc1 dc8 dc9

dc2 dc3 dc10 dc11

dc4 dc5 dc12 dc13

dc6 dc7 dc14 dc15

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 249

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

When a call is originated from a trunk

•Information on Called Party (Informer)

Fusion Point Code (FPC) (Hex.)

Note

Tenant No. (Hex.)

Note

Physical Station No. (Hex.)

Note

User Group No. (UGN) (Hex.)

Note

Telephone No. (Hex.)

Note

1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX

➀➁➂ ➃➄➅

4: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 5: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➆

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b4 - b7 b0 - b3

dc0 dc1

dc2 dc3

b4 - b7 b0 - b3

dc0 dc1

dc2 dc3

b4 - b7 b0 - b3

dc0 dc1

dc2 dc3

dc4 dc5

b4 - b7 b0 - b3

dc0 dc1

dc2 dc3

b4 - b7 b0 - b3

dc0 dc1

dc2 dc3

dc4 dc5

dc6 dc7

dc8 dc9

dc10 dc11

dc12 dc13

dc14 dc15

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 250

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

•Information on Malicious Call

Kind of Call (Hex.)

Note 20H=Call from a trunk

Calling No. of Trunk Call (Caller ID) (Hex.)

Note, Note 1

Note: Each No./code is output in hexadecimal. Detailed meanings

are as follows:

Output Data (Hex.) Actual Meaning

1~9 →1~9

A→0

B→*

C→#

0→blank

Note 1: If the number of the trunk call (Caller-ID) cannot be identified, the

data here is output as “0”.

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b4 - b7 b0 - b3

dc0 dc1

dc2 dc3

dc4 dc5

dc6 dc7

dc8 dc9

dc10 dc11

dc12 dc13

dc14 dc15

dc16 dc17

dc18 dc19

dc20 dc21

dc22 dc23

dc24 dc25

dc26 dc27

dc28 dc29

dc30 dc31

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 251

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message is issued when the connection error related to external LAN Interface equipment occurs in the

system.

~ IP Address for external equipment in which error has been detected. (Hex.)

, Port No. (Client Port No.) (Hex.)

Socket No. (Used Socket No.) (Hex.)

Error Code (TCP/IP Error Code) (Hex.) See Table 3-2.

TCP/IP Part Application Part

1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX

➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄ ➅ ➆ ➇ ➈ ➉

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

SUP

26-V LAN Interface Error Report

Default Grade: Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 252

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

Table 3-2 Error Code

Output Data

(Hex.) Definition Output Data

(Hex.) Definition

BSD SOCKET ERROR 58 Address family not supported

10 User parameter error PROTOCOL FAMILY

11 Host not reachable 59 Address already in use

12 Timeout 60 Can’t assign requested address

14 Protocol error 61 Network is down

15 No buffer space 62 Network is unreachable

16 Connection block invalid 63 Network dropped connection

17 Invalid pointer argument RESET

18 Operation would block 65 Connection reset by peer

19 Message too long 67 Socket is already connected

20 Protocol not available 68 Socket is not connected

50 Destination address required 69 Can’t send after socket shutdown

52 Protocol wrong type for socket 72 Connection refused

54 Protocol not supported 73 Host is down

55 Socket type not supported 76 Operation already in progress

56 Operation not supported on socket 77 Operation now in progress

57 Protocol family not supported

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 253

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

Application Type

[When =03 (SMDR) / 04 (MCI) ]

Device Number of Error-detected client PC

Kind of Error

Details on Detected Error

~ Not used

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b0-b7 : (Hex)

01=SUPER SERVER

02=MAT

03=SMDR

04=MCI

05=OAI

06=PMS

07=MIS

b0-b7: (Hex)

Device Number of error-detected Client PC.

If the Machine Number is not determined, “FF”

is output.

b0-b7: (Hex)

01=SEND Execution Error

02=RECEIVE Execution Error

03=SEND Execution Count Over

04=RECEIVE Execution Count Over

05=System Data is not assigned

06=Time Over

07=Parity Error

08=Connection Error

09=Connection Port Capacity Over

0A=Detection of B-level Infinite Loop

0B~FF=Not used

-When 01/02 is output at

b0-b7: Cause of error (Hex)

-When 05 is output at

b0-b7: 01=Data (Data Output via LAN) not

assigned

02=Device No. not assigned

-When 07 is output at

b0-b7: 00H=No Parity is set

01H=Odd Parity is set

02H=Even Parity is set

-When 08 is output at

b0-b7: Cause of error (Hex)

13 24

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 254

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

When =05 (OAI) / 07 (MIS)

Faulty Logical Port No. (Hex)

Error Kind (ERRK)

Not used

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Table 3-3 Error Kind (ERRK)

Output Data Error Situation Required Check

01H

SEND Execution Error

TCP/IP connection is down because the text is not transmit-

ted continuously.

[1] Check the TCP/IP Transmission

capacity on the UAP side is proper or

not.

[2] Check the operation status on the

UAP side is normal.

02H

RECEIVE Execution Error

Incorrect text format is received.

[1] Check the software operation on the

MIS or Host side.

[2] Check the LAN cable connection

status.

03H

TCP/IP Connection Error

TCP/IP connection is released due to the TCP port discon-

nection order from the MIS or Host.

Re-start the MIS or HOST computer.

04H

Connection Error (B-level Infinite Loop, etc.)

TCP port is released due to the detection of abnormal state in

the MIS or HOST operation.

Re-check the operation status of MIS or

Host.

05H

TCP/IP Port Capacity Over

TCP/IP connection cannot be established due to the connec-

tion port capacity over.

The number of allowed ports for applica-

tion use via TCP/IP must be 16 or less. Ad-

just the used application number not to

exceed “16” in total.

b0-b7 : Error Kind (Hex)

Refer to Table 3-3:

12 ~ 24

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 255

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message is issued when the LAN Interface Connection Failure, detected in Message [26-V], recovers.

This message is displayed when the LAN Interface Connection Failure is restored, and then the first data is

normally sent/received by the recovered application equipment.

~ IP Address for external equipment in which error has been detected. (Hex.)

, Port No. (Client Port No.) (Hex.)

Socket No. (Used Socket No.) (Hex.)

Error Code (TCP/IP Error Code) (Hex.) See Table 3-2.

TCP/IP Part Application Part

1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX

➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄ ➅ ➆ ➇ ➈ ➉

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

NON

26-W LAN Interface Release Report

Default Grade: Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 256

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

Application Type

When =03 (SMDR) / 04 (MCI)

Device Number of recovered client PC

Recovery Information

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b0-b7 : (Hex)

01=SUPER SERVER

02=MAT

03=SMDR

04=MCI

05=OAI

06=PMS

07=MIS

b0-b7: (Hex)

Device Number of recovered Client PC

for external LAN Interface.

b0-b7: (Hex)

01=Recovered

02~FF=Not defined

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 257

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message is issued when the MBR switch on the DLMX card has been turned ON at the time of DLMX

ACT/ST-BY changeover, etc.

➀ Location of the DLMX card

➁ System status of DLMX card

1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b7 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

NON

27-E DLMX MBR Key Turn ON

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0-b4: Group No.

b5, b6: Unit No. (0-3)

b7: MG No.

0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

b0: 0/1 = System #0/#1

b1: 0/1 = ACT/SY-BY

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 258

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message is issued when the MBR switch on the DLMX card has been turned OFF at the time of DLMX

ACT/ST-BY changeover, etc.

➀ Location of the DLMX card

➁ System status of DLMX card

1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b7 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

NON

27-F DLMX MBR Key Turn OFF

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0-b4: Group No.

b5, b6: Unit No. (0-3)

b7: MG No.

0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

b0: 0/1 = System #0/#1

b1: 0/1 = ACT/SY-BY

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 259

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message is issued when a DLMX card is placed to ACT state due to a mode changeover.

➀ Reason for changeover

1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

NON

27-G DLMX ACT Change Report

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b2 b1 b0

0 0 0 = MBR key operation

0 0 1 = Circuit Card Make Busy

0 1 0 = Detection of fault (on the DLMX card)

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 260

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the MUX (PH-PC36) card, whose clock function was detected as faulty, is

recovered.

➀ MUX Card Location and System

Status

➁ RLS Data

1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b3 b2 b1

Default Alarm:

NON

33-A MUX Clock Restore

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b0-b1: Unit number

b2: MG number

b3: 0/1 = MUX No. 0 system / MUX No. 1 system

b4: 0/1 = ACT/STBY

RLS Data:Clock alarm information on the recovered MUX card

b1: 0/1 = -/FH failure for 2M PCM Highway

b2: 0/1 = -/CLK failure for 2M PCM Highway

b3: 0/1 = -/4M CLK failure for PM

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 261

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when an abnormal state is detected temporarily on the SDT (PA-SDTA/B) card.

➀ MG (Module Group)

➁ Details on alarm

Note: Alarm-detected HW is specified in

➂

(next page).

1: X0XX 00XX XXXX XX00 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b0

b7 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

SUP

33-B SDT Alarm Warning

Default Grade:

2Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b7: 0/1 = Even-number MG/Odd-number MG

b4, b3 b2-b0

0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 1 Hardware Failure

0 0 0 1 0 Optical Line Failure

0 0 0 1 1 Onboard Power Alarm

0 1 0 0 0

0 1 0 0 1 PCM Loss

0 1 0 1 0 Frame Alignment Loss

0 1 0 1 1 Receiving Section Failure

0 1 1 0 0 Mistake Rate Degradation

0 1 1 0 1 Sending Section Failure

0 1 1 1 0 Mistake Detection

1 0 0 0 0

1 0 0 0 1 Receiving Path Failure

1 0 0 1 0 Pointer Failure

1 0 0 1 1 Sending Path Failure

1 0 1 0 0 Receiving Path Error

1 0 1 0 1 Sending Path Error

b7: SDT Card Status

0/1=No. 0 System/No.1 System

SDT Card

Trouble

52M Interface

Alarm

VC-11 Path

Trouble

Note

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 262

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

➂ Alarm-detected HW

Note: This data displays only when b4 is “1” and b3 is “0” in data

➁

Repair Procedure

Basically, fault repair work is not required by the display of this message. However, if the message is created

frequently, it is recommended that the repair work be performed as shown in the message [33-C] SDT Alarm

Trouble.

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

The data here specifies the HW, on which any of the VC-11 Path

Trouble was detected in data ➁ (see Note). Refer to the table below:

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

- - - - 28 27 26 25

24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

87654321

0/1=-/VC-11 Path Trouble

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 263

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when a grave failure occurs on the SDT (PA-SDTA/B) card. If this is issued, remember

the ACT/STBY change of the SDT card may be followed, as a result of fault detection in the optical fiber line

(see [33-E] message).

➀ MG (Module Group)

➁ Details on alarm

Note: Fault repair procedure on each alarm is shown on the next page.

1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b0

b7 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

33-C SDT Alarm Trouble

Default Grade:

3Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b7: 0/1 = Even-number MG/Odd-number MG

b4, b3 b2-b0

0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 1 Hardware Failure

0 0 0 1 0 Optical Line Failure

0 0 0 1 1 Onboard Power Alarm

0 0 1 0 0 Abnormal MB Key Operation

0 1 0 0 0

0 1 0 0 1 PCM Loss

0 1 0 1 0 Frame Alignment Loss

0 1 0 1 1 Receiving Section Failure

0 1 1 0 0 Mistake Rate Degradation

0 1 1 0 1 Sending Section Failure

0 1 1 1 0 Mistake Detection

1 0 0 0 0

1 0 0 0 1 Receiving Path Failure

1 0 0 1 0 Pointer Failure

1 0 0 1 1 Sending Path Failure

1 0 1 0 0 Receiving Path Error

1 0 1 0 1 Sending Path Error

b7: SDT Card Status

0/1=No. 0 System/No.1 System

SDT Card

Trouble

52M Interface

Alarm

VC-11 Path

Trouble

Note

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 264

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

Repair Procedure

Depending on the fault status shown in data ➁, perform necessary repair work:

(1) Hardware Failure/Onboard Power Alarm

SDT (PA-SDTA/B) card is faulty. Replace the card with a spare by referring to Chapter 4, Section 3.3.3,

SDT Card Replacement Procedure.

(2) Optical Line Failure

Diagnosis: In addition to this alarm, is the “PCM Loss” alarm also indicated?

YES →Optical line side is faulty.

Verify that the SDT card in the distant node is not placed into make-busy state. Also, perform the

light level check of the optical fiber cables.

NO →SDT card is faulty.

Replace the SDT card with a spare by referring to Chapter 4, Section 3.3.3, SDT Card

Replacement Procedure.

(3) Abnormal MB Key Operation

This alarm is indicated when the MB key on the PA-SDTA card is turned ON, even though the MBR key

has been on the OFF side. Place the MBR key UP (=ON) and then turn ON the MB key.

(4) PCM Loss

Abnormal state is detected on the optical line side. Verify that the SDT card in the distant node is not

placed into make-busy state. Also, perform the light level check of the optical fiber cables.

(5) 52M Interface Alarm

- Frame Alignment Loss

- Receiving Section Failure

- Mistake Rate Degradation

- Sending Section Failure

- Mistake Detection

Clock synchronization with the distant node might be lost, or a trouble might occur on the optical line

side. Check the PLO cards first in both self-node and distant node. When no fault is found, proceed with

the light level check of the optical fiber cables.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 265

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

(6) Receiving Path Failure/Receiving Path Error

Abnormal state is detected in the process of multiplexing the “Receive” signals. To restore this, perform

the following:

STEP 1 Initialization of SDT card (distant node)

Initialize the SDT card in the distant node, and observe the situation. If the fault is not restored,

proceed with STEP 2.

STEP 2 Initialization of SDT card (self-node)

Initialize the SDT card in the self-node, and observe the situation. If the fault is not restored,

proceed with STEP 3.

STEP 3 Replacement of SDT card

It cannot be confirmed which node side (self-node or distant node) is faulty. By referring to

Chapter 4, Section 3.3.5, SDT Card Replacement Procedure, first replace the SDT card only in

one of the nodes. When the fault does not recover, then also replace the SDT card in other side

of the nodes.

(7) Pointer Failure/Sending Path Failure/Sending Path Error

Abnormal state is detected in the process of multiplexing the “Send” signals. To restore this, perform the

following:

STEP 1 Initialization of SDT card

Initialize the SDT card in the self-node, and observe the situation. If the fault is not restored,

proceed with STEP 2.

STEP 2 Replacement of SDT card

By referring to Chapter 4, Section 3.3.5, SDT Card Replacement Procedure, replace the SDT

card in the self-node with a spare.

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 266

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the SDT (PA-SDTA/B) card or optical fiber line, which was once detected as

faulty, recovers.

➀ MG (Module Group)

➁ Details on the fault

1: X0XX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b0

b7 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

NON

33-D SDT Alarm Restore

Default Grade:

1Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b7: 0/1 = Even-number MG/Odd-number MG

b4, b3 b2-b0

0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 1 Hardware Failure

0 0 0 1 0 Optical Line Failure

0 0 0 1 1 Onboard Power Alarm

0 0 1 0 0 Abnormal MB Key Operation

0 1 0 0 0

0 1 0 0 1 PCM Loss

0 1 0 1 0 Frame Alignment Loss

0 1 0 1 1 Receiving Section Failure

0 1 1 0 0 Mistake Rate Degradation

0 1 1 0 1 Sending Section Failure

0 1 1 1 0 Mistake Detection

1 0 0 0 0

1 0 0 0 1 Receiving Path Failure

1 0 0 1 0 Pointer Failure

1 0 0 1 1 Sending Path Failure

1 0 1 0 0 Receiving Path Error

1 0 1 0 1 Sending Path Error

b7: SDT Card Status

0/1=No. 0 System/No.1 System

SDT Card

Trouble

52M Interface

Alarm

VC-11 Path

Trouble

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 3

Page 267

Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This message displays when the ACT/STBY of the SDT (PA-SDTA) card is changed over as a result of fault

detection in the optical fiber line. When the ACT/STBY change cannot be performed, this message also

indicates the cause for the changeover execution failure.

➀ MG (Module Group)

➁ Detailed information

➂ Cause for changeover execution failure

Repair Procedure

Once this message displays, be sure to check other messages, such as [33-C] SDT Alarm Trouble, and review

the cause for the changeover. If any fault is implicated, repair the whole fault(s) according to the situation.

1: X0XX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b0

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Default Alarm:

NON

33-E SDT Interface Change Notify

Default Grade:

2Grade Modified: Lamp Modified:

b7: 0/1 = Even-number MG/Odd-number MG

b0: Active SDT after Changeover

0/1=No.0 System/No.1 System

b1: Operating Status of SDT

0/1=In service/Out of service

b2, b3: Result of Changeover

0/1=Success/Failure

b7-b4 Cause for Changeover

0001 SDT had a serious failure

0010 MB key on SDT card was turned ON

0H: (Changeover Success)

1H: Optical interface isn’t dual

2H: Optical interface has a serious failure in each No.0/No.1 system

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24307

Page 268

Issue 1

This page is for your notes.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 4

Page 269

Issue 1

CHAPTER 4 UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

1. LPM ACCOMMODATING UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

This section explains how to replace unit/circuit cards mounted in the LPM (ISW/IMG 0).

1.1 Precautions

•Use this procedure to replace a faulty unit/circuit card with a spare or to check a spare card.

•There are functional switches (having set the default switch) on some of the circuit cards to be replaced.

As for switch setting on the circuit cards, confirm the circuit card mounting face layout for the LPM.

When a circuit card with a default switch setting is replaced with a spare card, always make the switch

setting on the new circuit card the same as on the replaced card. Otherwise, electronic components on

the circuit card may be destroyed, or the circuit card itself may fail to function normally.

•When handling a circuit card, always use the field service kit for countermeasures against static

electricity. Touching a circuit card without using the field service kit may destroy the card due to static

electricity on the human body.

1.2 Circuit Card Mounting Face Layout

Figure 4-1 shows the face layout of circuit cards mounted in the LPM.

CHAPTER 4 NDA-24307

Page 270

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

Figure 4-1 Circuit Card Mounting Face Layout of LPM

12345678

OFF

12345678

OFF

1234

OFF

MBR

FDD

OFF

PALM

OFF

OUT PWR

IN PWR

HDD

SW MB

SYSTEM SELECT0

SENSE

SYSTEM SELECT1

SYSTEM SELECT2 CPURST

SLOT No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6

STATUS

IMG1 IMG2 IMG3

CPUOPEWDT IMG0

12345678

OFF

12345678

OFF

1234

OFF

MBR

FDD

OFF

OUT PWR

IN PWR

HDD

SW MB

SYSTEM SELECT0

SENSE

SYSTEM SELECT1

SYSTEM SELECT2 CPURST

SLOT No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6

STATUS

IMG1 IMG2 IMG3

CPUOPEWDT IMG0

00 01 02 03 04

MMC (PH-M22)

MISC/IOC

IOC(PH-IO24)

EMA(PH-PC40)

MISC

LPM

FRONT VIEW CPR

PZ-PW92 LANI(PZ-PC19)

ISAGT (PZ-GT20)

Note 1

Note 2

ISAGT(PZ-GT13)PZ-IO27

PALM

Note 1: This card (PZ-GT20) is mounted in the CPR of LN(s) only.

Note 2: In place of PZ-IO27, the CPR may be equipped with PZ-IO28, which does not have the MB key.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 4

Page 271

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

1.3 Operating Procedures

The following paragraphs provide operating procedures to replace unit/circuit cards of the LPM. Perform

the operations that correspond to each reference item specified in Table 4-1.

Table 4-1 LPM Unit/Circuit Cards and Reference Items

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REFERENCE ITEM REMARKS

CPR Section 1.3.1, CPR Replacement Procedure CPU, ISAGT,

LANI, HFD

EMA Card Section 1.3.2, EMA Card Replacement Procedure

IOC Card Section 1.3.3, IOC Card Replacement Procedure

PWR Unit Section 1.3.4, Power Supply Unit Replacement Procedure

MISC Card Section 1.3.5, MISC Card Replacement Procedure

Improper key operations may result in a system down. Operate the key using extreme care.

During replacement of a circuit card, the system issues system messages and activates the related

alarm. Reset the indicated alarm after completing the replacement procedure.

If the indicated alarm is cleared via the RALM/RALMN command, the system also clears the

contents of the system message. Before using the RALM/RALMN command, print the messages

using the DFTD command.

Use the ALM RST button on the TOPU only to reset the alarm lamps.

WARNING

CHAPTER 4 NDA-24307

Page 272

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

1.3.1 CPR Replacement Procedure

This section explains how to replace the Control Processor Rack (CPR). The CPR

is mounted in IMG 0 of LN and ISW. Before starting the procedures, make a backup

copy of the main data, such as office data, Call Forwarding (CF) data and Speed

Calling (SPD) data, on to the hard disk of the HFD. Figure 4-2 shows the front view

of the CPR. Operate the related keys and connectors to replace the CPU with a new one. Using a

Phillips screwdriver, remove the four screws and extract the CPR with care, as shown in Figure 4-3.

Figure 4-2 CPR Face Layout

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

12345678

OFF

12345678

OFF

1234

OFF

MBR

FDD

OFF

OUT PWR

PALM

IN PWR

HDD

SW MB

SYSTEM SELECT0

SENSE

SYSTEM SELECT1

SYSTEM SELECT2 CPURST

SLOT No.

012345 6

STATUS

IMG1 IMG2 IMG3

CPUOPEWDT IMG0

PZ-IO27

Note 3

PZ-PW92 PZ-PC19(LANI) PZ-PC19(LANI)

Note 1

PZ-GT13(ISAGT)

PZ-GT20(ISAGT)

Note 2

Note 1: This card (secondary LANI for Fusion Link) is optional.

Note 2: This card is mounted in the CPR of LN only.

Note 3: In place of PZ-IO27, the CPR may be equipped with PZ-IO28, which does not have the MB

key.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 4

Page 273

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

Figure 4-3 How to Replace the CPU

..........

12345678

1234

SLOT No. 0 1 2 3 456

..........

12345678

1234

SLOT No. 0123456

CPR

LPM

IMG 0

CHAPTER 4 NDA-24307

Page 274

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

Replacement Procedure

Note: ACT/STBY of CPR can also be performed by using the CMODI/CMOD command. For details, refer to

Chapter 8, Maintenance Commands.

•System Changeover of the CPU from

ACT to STBY mode.

•IMG0 lamp on the DSP begin to flash

green.

•Check the mate CPU’s lamp indications:

At the ISW

•CPU OPE=Steady green

•IMG0 ~ IMG3=Steady green

at the LN

•CPU OPE=Steady green

•IMG0 ~ IMG3=Flash green

Note: IMG2 - IMG3 lamps may be

OFF depending on the system

configuration

•EMA SUP lamp on the EMA card lights

green.

Cable Name to be disconnected

CPU 0: 10AL-(110) FLT CA

CPU 1: 10AL-(130) FLT CA

START

Make a backup copy of the main data (office data,

CF/SPD data, etc.) onto the hard disk of the HFD.

Turn ON the MBR key on the DSP of the CPU

to be replaced. Then turn OFF the MBR key again.

Confirm the mate CPU's ACT mode.

Turn ON the EMA SUP key on the

EMA (PH-PC40) card.

Disconnect the power alarm cable from

the PALM connector on PZ-PW92.

IMG1 IMG2 IMG3

CPUOPEWDT IMG0

12345678

OFF

12345678

OFF

1234

OFF

MBR

FRONT VIEW

DSP

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

PWR (PZ-PW92)

FRONT VIEW

OFF

PALM

-48V

ALM

OUTPWR

INPWR

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 4

Page 275

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

•Refer to Figure 4-2 for

CPR face layout.

•Refer to Figure 4-2 for

CPR face layout.

•Refer to Figure 4-3 to

replace the CPU.

Cables to be disconnected

Ether cable: UTP CTG5 ST CA-n

Note:

The kind of Ethernet cable may vary,

Disconnect power cables from the OUTPWR

connector and INPWR connector on PZ-PW92.

Disconnect Ethernet cables from the front

connectors on the PZ-PC19 (LANI).

Remove the four screws fastened onto the CPR.

(Keep the removed screws.)

Turn OFF the SW key on PZ-PW92.

Disconnect bus cables from the front connectors

on the PZ-GT13/PZ-GT20 (ISAGT).

Cables to be disconnected from front

EXGT BUS CA-A for CN-M connector

depending on its connecting

conditions.

Cable to be disconnected from OUTPWR

CPU 0: 6P-(4P-3P) PWR CA-A

CPU 1: 6P-(4P-3P) PWR CA-B

Cable to be disconnected from INPWR

CPU 0: 4P-2P PWR CA-A

CPU 1: 4P-2P PWR CA-B

PWR (PZ-PW92)

FRONT VIEW

OFF

PALM

-48V

ALM

OUTPWR

INPWR

connector of PZ-GT13

34PH 50AL CA-A for CN-T connector

34PH 50AL CA-B (in LN only)

Cables to be disconnected from front

connector of PZ-GT20

CHAPTER 4 NDA-24307

Page 276

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

•Refer to Figure 4-3 to replace

the CPU.

•Refer to Circuit Card Installation

Into New CPR procedure in this

section.

Extract the CPR from the LPM.

Mount the ISAGT (PZ-GT13/PZ-GT20) and

LANI (PZ-PC19) cards onto the new CPR.

Then, insert the new CPR into the LPM.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 4

Page 277

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

Note:

Do not connect the cable for the

Connect the disconnected bus cables to the

front connectors on the PZ-GT13/PZ-GT20.

Turn ON the SW key on PZ-PW92.

Connect the disconnected power alarm cable

to the PALM connector on PZ-PW92.

Connect the disconnected Ethernet cables

Connect the disconnected power cables to

the OUTPWR and INPWR connectors.

PALM connector yet.

to the connectors on the PZ-PC19.

PWR (PZ-PW92)

FRONT VIEW

OFF

PALM

-48V

OUTPWR

INPWR ALM

CHAPTER 4 NDA-24307

Page 278

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

•EMA SUP lamp on the

EMA card goes OFF.

•IMG0 lamp on the DSP

flashes green.

Flip the MBR key on the DSP of the new

CPR from ON to OFF.

END

Turn OFF the EMA-SUP key on the EMA

(PH-PC40) card.

Confirm that IPL has completed successfully.

Initial Program Load (IPL)

starts automatically.

MBR(DSP)

IMG1 IMG2 IMG3

CPUOPEWDT IMG0

12345678

OFF

12345678

OFF

1234

OFF

MBR

FRONT VIEW

DSP

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 4

Page 279

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

Circuit Card Installation Into New CPR

This procedure shows how to install the new CPR into the LPM.

(1) Detach the front panel of the new CPR by using the Phillips screwdriver to remove

the four screws, as shown in Figure 4-4. Then, lift the top cover by removing the

eight screws.

Figure 4-4 Removal of Front Panel and Top Cover From CPR

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

Top Cover

CPR

Front Panel

CHAPTER 4 NDA-24307

Page 280

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

(2) Insert the ISAGT (PZ-GT13/PZ-GT20) and LANI (PZ-PC19) cards into the

following slots of the new CPR (refer to Figure 4-5):

ISAGT (PZ-GT13) →Slot 6 (ISA)

ISAGT (PZ-GT20) →Slot 5 (ISA) (When LN has more than two IMGs) Note

LANI (PZ-PC19) →Slot 0 (PCI) (For Fusion Link)

LANI (PZ-PC19) →Slot 1 (PCI) (When connecting MAT via 10-BASE T and PCI buses)

LANI (PZ-PC19) →Slot 3 (PCI) (When LANI for Fusion Link is in dual configuration)

Figure 4-5 shows how to insert the ISAGT and LANI cards into the PCI slots 5 and 6, 0 and 1 and 3 of the

CPR, respectively.

Note: This card is mounted in LN only.

Figure 4-5 Insertion of ISAGT and LANI Cards

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

CPR

Slot 6 (ISA)

ISAGT

LANI

Slot 5 (ISA)

Slot 3 (PCI)

Slot 1 (PCI)

Slot 0 (PCI)

Note: Actual installation of the LANI card may differ, depending on your system configuration.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 4

Page 281

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

(3) Reattach the top cover by fastening the removed eight screws. Then, reattach the

front panel by fastening the removed four screws. Refer to Figure 4-6).

Figure 4-6 Reattachment of CPR Top Cover and Front Panel

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

Top Cover

CPR

Front Panel

CHAPTER 4 NDA-24307

Page 282

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

(4) After turning ON the MBR key on the DSP of the new CPR, insert the new CPR into

the LPM as shown in Figure 4-7. Then, fasten the retained four screws.

Figure 4-7 Accommodation of New CPR Into LPM

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

CPR

LPM

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 4

Page 283

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

(5) Insert the new HFD (PZ-IO27) into the CPR. Then, fasten the two screws as shown in

Figure 4-8.

Figure 4-8 Insertion of New HFD Into CPR

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

LPM

HFD (PZ-IO27/PZ-IO28)

CHAPTER 4 NDA-24307

Page 284

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

(6) Make sure Switch 8 of SYSTEM SELECT 1 (DIP Switch) on each CPU Front Panel

is set to ON. (Do this for all LNs and ISW: Refer to Figure 4-9.)

Figure 4-9 Switch Setting on the CPU Front Panel

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

12345678

OFF

1234

OFF

MBR

FDD

OFF

PALM

OFF

OUT PWR

IN PWR

HDD

SW MB

SYSTEM SELECT0

SENSE

SYSTEM SELECT2 CPURST

SLOT No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6

STATUS

IMG1 IMG2 IMG3

CPUOPEWDT IMG0

SYSTEM SELECT1

12345678

OFF

12345678

OFF

12345678

OFF

1234

OFF

MBR

FDD

OFF

OUT PWR

IN PWR

HDD

SW MB

SYSTEM SELECT0

SENSE

SYSTEM SELECT1

SYSTEM SELECT2 CPURST

SLOT No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6

STATUS

IMG1 IMG2 IMG3

CPUOPEWDT IMG0

00 01 02 03 04

MMC (PH-M22)

MISC/IOC

IOC(PH-IO24)

EMA(PH-PC49)

MISC

LPM

CPR1

LANI(PZ-PC19) ISAGT(PZ-GT13)

ISAGT(PZ-GT20)

Note

PALM

CPR0

FRONT VIEW

Note: PZ-GT20 card is mounted in LN only.

SYSTEM SELECT1

12345678

OFF

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 4

Page 285

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

1.3.2 EMA Card Replacement Procedure

The EMA (PH-PC40) card is mounted in slot No. 04 of the LPM. The main

functions of the card are as follows:

•Designation of ACT/STBY status of the CPU and forced changeover of the

system

•Shutoff of the system’s power supply and detection of rising temperature within the system

•Control of the NCU (PA-M53) card

Replacement Procedure

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

Before replacing the EMA card, check the CPU 0’s ACT mode. Attempting to replace the card

when the CPU 1 is active will result in the system being initialized.

WARNING

•Check the CPU OPE lamp of DSP 1.

When the lamp is steady-green,

perform the system changeover.

•OPE/MB Lamp on the EMA card

lights red from green.

•When NCU (PA-M53) cards are

mounted, Power Failure Transfer

(PFT) is activated.

Turn ON the MB key on the EMA (PH-PC40) card.

Flip the MBR key on the DSP 1 (ON

(System Changeover of CPU 1: ACT STBY)

Extract the EMA card from the LPM.

CPU 1 is Active?

YES

OFF ON

CHAPTER 4 NDA-24307

Page 286

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

•OPE/MB Lamp on the EMA card

lights steady-green.

•The PFT service is cancelled:

resumption of normal operation.

Turn ON the MB and EMA SUP keys on the

new card.

Turn OFF the MB and EMA SUP keys on the card.

Assign the time data by using the ATIM/ATIMN

END

Set the keys on the new card by referring to the

Insert the new card into the LPM.

card being replaced.

command.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 4

Page 287

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

1.3.3 IOC Card Replacement Procedure

The IOC (PH-IO24) card is mounted in slot No. 02 and/or 03 of the LPM. The

card’s main function is to provide a serial interface between the system and its

external equipment, such as the Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT),

Station Message Detail Recording System (SMDR), Message Center Interface

(MCI), Property Management System (PMS), etc.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

•OPE lamp on the IOC card first

flashes and then lights red.

•All I/O ports are closed and the

equipment, such as MAT and SMDR,

loses connections.

Note: The text data (such as bill-

ing information), registered

before this step, will be

safely transmitted later.

However, the data, recorded

after this step, will not be

sent out, and instead is

stored in the buffer.

•OPE lamp on the IOC card goes OFF.

Extract the card from the LPM.

Turn ON the MB key on the card.

Turn ON the MBR key on the IOC (PH-IO24)

card to be replaced.

Set the keys on the new card, referring to the

card to be replaced.

START

The equipment connected to the I/O ports of each card (MAT, SMDR, etc.) cannot be used while

replacing the IOC card.

ATTENTION

CHAPTER 4 NDA-24307

Page 288

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

•OPE lamp on the IOC card lights

red.

•Release of I/O ports: new IOC card

is initialized, and I/O port channels

reopens.

•OPE lamp lights green.

Turn OFF the MB key on the card.

END

Insert the new card into the LPM.

Turn ON the MB and MBR keys on the

new card.

Turn OFF the MBR key on the card.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 4

Page 289

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

1.3.4 Power Supply Unit Replacement Procedure

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

•CPU System

Changeover

Refer to Section 12,

Chapter 6.

Cable to be disconnected from OUTPWR

CPU 0: 6P-(4P-3P) PWR CA-A

CPU 1: 6P-(4P-3P) PWR CA-B

START

Set the mode of the PWR UNIT (PZ-PW92)

to be replaced into STBY mode.

On the EMA (PH-PC40) card, set EMA SUP

switch UP.

Turn OFF the SW key on the PWR UNIT.

Disconnect the power cables from the OUTPWR

connector and INPWR connector on the PZ-PW92.

Disconnect the power alarm cable from the

PALM connector on the PZ-PW92.

Cable Name to be disconnected

CPU 0: 10AL-(110) FLT CA

CPU 1: 10AL-(130) FLT CA

Cable to be disconnected from INPWR

CPU 0: 4P-2P PWR CA-A

CPU 1: 4P-2P PWR CA-B

PWR (PZ-PW92)

FRONT VIEW

OFF

PALM

-48V

ALM

OUTPWR

INPWR

CHAPTER 4 NDA-24307

Page 290

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

END

Insert the new PWR UNIT into the CPR.

Unscrew the PWR UNIT from the CPR.

Turn ON the SW key on the PWR UNIT.

On the EMA card, set EMA SUP switch DOWN.

Reattach power alarm cable to the PALM

connector on the PZ-PW92.

Reattach power cables to OUTPWR

and INPWR connectors on the PZ-PW92.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 4

Page 291

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

1.3.5 MISC Card Replacement Procedure

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

•Keep MB switch UP.

END

Extract the MISC card from its mounting slot.

On the MISC card, set MB switch UP.

On the MISC card, set MB switch DOWN.

START

Insert the new circuit card into the same

mounting slot.

CHAPTER 4 NDA-24307

Page 292

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

1.3.6 MMC Card Replacement Procedure

The MMC (PH-M22) card is mounted in slot No. 00 of the LPM. The card’s main

functions are:

•To collect key setting information on the TOPU of each LN/ISW. Note

•To collect alarm information on LN or the entire system (in case of MMC in

ISW), thereby activating MJ/MN LED on the TOPU display.

Note: If the key setting affects the entire system (i.e. the SYSTEM side is selected by the INITIAL SELECT key

on the ISW TOPU). The information is broadcast to the MMC of ISW including the MMC of all existing

LNs.

Replacement Procedure

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

•OPE lamp on the MMC goes off.

Disconnect the cable from the KEY connector

Set the MB key to UP on the MMC (PH-M22)

START

card the be replaced.

on the MMC card.

Cable to be disconnected

10AL-(400) FLT CA

Disconnect the whole cable(s) from the CNx

connector(s) on the MMC card.

Cable to be disconnected

MT24 MISC CA-n

Extract the MMC card from the LPM.

Note: The connector and cable

names vary depending on

it’s connecting conditions.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 4

Page 293

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

END

Insert the MMC card into the LPM.

Set the MB key on the MMC card UP.

Set the MB key on the MMC card DOWN.

Connect the disconnected cable to the KEY

connector on the MMC card.

Connect the disconnected cable(s) to the

CNx connector(s) on the MMC card.

•OPE lamp on the MMC card goes

OFF.

•OPE lamp on the MMC card lights a

steady green.

CHAPTER 4 NDA-24307

Page 294

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

2. TSWM ACCOMMODATING CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

This section explains the procedure for replacing circuit cards mounted in the TSWM (TSWM0 in IMG1,

TSWM1 in IMG2).

2.1 Precautions

•Use this procedure to replace a faulty circuit card with a spare or to check a spare card.

•There are the functional switches (having set the default switch) on some of the circuit cards to be

replaced. As for switch setting on the circuit cards, confirm the circuit card mounting face layout for

the TSWM. When a circuit card with a default switch setting is replaced with a spare card, always

make the switch setting on the new circuit card the same as on the replaced card. Otherwise, electronic

components on the circuit card may be destroyed, or the circuit card itself may fail to function

normally.

•When handling a circuit card, always use the field service kit for countermeasures against static

electricity. Touching a circuit card without using the field service kit may destroy the card due to static

electricity on the human body.

2.2 Circuit Card Mounting Face Layout

Figure 4-10 shows the face layout of the circuit cards mounted in the TSWM. The circuit cards marked

with * are optional.

Figure 4-10 Circuit Card Mounting Face Layout of TSWM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

MISC

DLKC0 Note 1

DLKC1 Note 1

GT0

GT1

TSW00

TSW01

TSW02

TSW03

TSW10

TSW11

TSW12

TSW13

PWR SW0

TSWM0/1

Slot No.

PWR SW1

MISC

PLO0/CLK0

Note 2

PLO1/CLK1 Note 2

PWRSW: PH-PW14 DLKC: PH-PC20 GT: PH-GT09 TSW: PH-SW12 PLO: PH-CK16-A CLK: PH-CK18

FRONT VIEW

Note 1: This card is mounted in TSWM0 only.

Note 2: PLO is mounted in TSWM0, and CLK is mounted in TSWM1.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 4

Page 295

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

2.3 Operating Procedures

The following paragraphs explain the operating procedures to replace unit/circuit cards located in the

TSWM. Perform the operations corresponding to each Reference Item specified in Table 4-2.

Table 4-2 TSWM Circuit Cards and Reference Items

CIRCUIT CARD

FUNCTION NAME REFERENCE ITEM REMARKS

GT Section 2.3.1, GT Card Replacement Procedure

TSW Section 2.3.2, TSW Card Replacement Procedure

DLKC Section 2.3.3, DLKC Card Replacement Procedure

PLO Section 2.3.4, PLO Card Replacement Procedure

CLK Section 2.3.5, CLK Card Replacement Procedure

PWR SW Section 2.3.6, PWR SW Card Replacement Procedure

MISC Section 2.3.7, MISC Card Replacement Procedure

Improper key operations may result in a system down. Operate the key using extreme care.

During replacement of a circuit card, the system issues system messages and activates the related

alarm. Reset the indicated alarm after completing the replacement procedure.

If the indicated alarm is cleared via the RALM/RALMN command, the system also clears the

contents of the system message. Before using the RALM/RALMN command, print the messages

using the DFTD command.

Use the ALM RST button on the TOPU only to reset the alarm lamps.

WARNING

CHAPTER 4 NDA-24307

Page 296

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

2.3.1 GT Card Replacement Procedure

The GT (PH-GT09) card is mounted in Slot No. 10 or 11 within the TSWM0 and TSWM1. The card’s

main function is to provide both MISC and I/O Local bus interface between the microprocessor of

CPU and other lower echelons, such as DLKC, TSW and MUX cards. Follow the procedures below to

replace a GT card with a spare.

Note: To replace the GT card, the ACT/STBY status of GT must be changed over first. This must be done by

operating the MBR key (or by using the CMOD/CMOD1 command) on the DSP of active CPR. Figure

4-11 shows a system block diagram centering upon the CPU and its controlling GT. If the ACT/STBY

of GT is to be changed over, the system of CPU must be manually changed over. For more details on the

GT changeover, refer to Section 12, Chapter 6.

Figure 4-11 System Block Diagram (Connections Between GT and CPU)

ISAGT-A: PZ-GT13 ISAGT-B: PZ-GT20 LANI: PZ-PC19 GT: PH-GT09 TSW: PH-SW12

MUX: PH-PC36 DLKC: PH-PC20 PLO: PH-CK16-A EMA: PH-PC40 IOC: PH-IO24 CLK: PH-CK18

LANI LANI

GT 0

TSW 00 TSW 10 TSW 01 TSW 11

GT 1

EMA IOC/

MISC

DLKC 0

DLKC 1

PLO 0

PLO 1

CPR 0

LANILANI CPR 1

MISC BUS

TSW I/O BUS

Line/Trunk PM

IMG 0

PM BUS

PCM HW

MUXMUXMUXMUX

ISAGT-B

To GT0 in TSWM1

Line/Trunk PM

IMG 1

PCM HW

PM BUS

PCM HW

MUXMUXMUXMUX

TSWM0

To GT1 in TSWM1

From PLO

of ISWM To CLK of

TSWM1

ISAGT-A ISAGT-A

TSW 02 TSW 03

TSW 12 TSW 13

External Cables

(ISW-LN TSW CA-n)

External Cables

(ISW-LN PLO CA-n)

External Cables

(PLO-CLK CA-n)

To/From TSW of ISWM

LN0/1/2/3

Fusion Link

CPU 0 CPU 1

Note 1: CLK (PH-CK18) card is mounted in TSWM1 in place of PLO card.

Note 2: DLCK (PH-PC20) card is not mounted in TSWM1.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 4

Page 297

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

GT Card Replacement Procedure

Use extreme care when operating the keys on the DSP of CPR and PH-GT09 card.

WARNING

•System Changeover of GT from

ACT to STBY mode.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

Check the following lamp indications

on the GT card to be replaced and on

the DSP CPR that controls the GT:

•OPE/MB (GT card) = OFF

•CPU OPE (CPU DSP) = OFF

•IMG0 (CPU DSP) = Flash (green)

•IMG1-3 (CPU DSP) = OFF

Check the following lamp indications

on the mate GT card and the DSP of

the mate CPR:

•OPE/MB (GT card) = Steady-green

•CPU OPE (CPU DSP) = Steady-

green

•IMG0-3 (CPU DSP) = Flash

(green)

Note: Lamp indications of IMG

2-3 vary depending on the

system configuration.

EMA SUP lamp on the EMA card

lights steady-green.

GT (PH-GT09)

OPE/MB

MBR

IMG1 IMG2 IMG3

CPUOPE WDT IMG0

12345678

OFF

12345678

OFF

1234

OFF

MBR

FRONT VIEW

DSP

Confirm the mate GT's ACT mode.

START

On the EMA (PH-PC40) card, set the

EMA SUP key UP.

On the DSP of active CPR in the LN, turn ON the

MBR key. Turn OFF the MBR key again.

CHAPTER 4 NDA-24307

Page 298

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

•OPE/MB lamp on the GT card

remains OFF.

•OPE/MB lamp on the new card is

OFF.

•OPE/MB lamp on the new card

remains OFF.

Set the MBR and MB keys on the new card UP.

Set the MB key on the new card DOWN.

Insert the new GT card into the TSWM.

Extract the GT card to be replaced

from the TSWM0/1.

Set the MBR Key on the new card DOWN.

On the GT card to be replaced,

set the MB switch UP.

On the GT card to be replaced,

set the MBR switch UP.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 4

Page 299

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

•EMA SUP lamp on the EMA card goes

OFF.

System Changeover

•Replaced GT: STBY to ACT

•Mate GT: ACT to STBY

Check the following lamp indications on

the new GT card and the DSP of the CPR

which controls the GT.

•OPE/MB (GT card) = Steady-green

•CPU OPE (CPU DSP) = Steady-green

•IMG0 (CPU DSP) = Flash (green)

•IMG1-3 (CPU DSP) = Flash (green)

Note: IMG2-3 lamp indications may

vary depending on the system

configuration.

Check the following lamp indications on

the mate GT card and the DSP of the

mate CPR:

•OPE/MB (GT card) = OFF

•CPU OPE (CPU DSP) = OFF

•IMG0 (CPU DSP) = Flash (green)

•IMG1-3 (CPU DSP) = OFF

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

END

Flip the MBR key on the DSP of CPU which controls

the mate GT. Confirm the new GT functions normally.

On the EMA card, set the EMA SUP switch DOWN.

CHAPTER 4 NDA-24307

Page 300

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

2.3.2 TSW Card Replacement Procedure

The TSW (PH-SW12) card is mounted in the Slot Nos. ranging from 12 to 19 within the TSWM0/1.

Equipped with the Time Division Switch (TSW) and Speech Path Controlling Interface (INT), the

card’s main function is to provide the Time Slot (TS) switching for a specific IMG or to provide the

PCM data link with the ISW. If the TSW card is used in a dual configuration, the card’s replacement

procedures are as follows:

Note: To replace a TSW card in dual configuration, the system of the card must be changed over from ACT to

STBY mode. The changeover can be done by flipping the MBR key on the active IOGT (PH-GT10) card

in ISWM or by using the CMODI command. For more details, refer to Section 12, Chapter 6.

Figure 4-12 provides the system block diagram centering upon the speech path between ISW and LN.

If the system of TSW in ISW is changed over, the ACT/STBY of IOGT, HSW (mounted in ISW) and

TSW, DLKC and MUX (mounted in the LN) in the same switching block are also changed over.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 4

Page 301

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

Figure 4-12 System Block Diagram (TSW and Other Speech Path Echelons)

< ISW (Inter-node Switch) >

ISAGT: PZ-GT13 LANI: PZ-PC19 IOGT: PH-GT10 TSW: PU-SW00

HSW: PU-SW01 PLO: PH-CK16-A/17-A EMA: PH-PC40 IOC: PH-IO24

< LN (Local Node) >

ISAGT-A: PZ-GT13 ISAGT-B: PZ-GT20 LANI: PZ-PC19 GT: PH-GT09 TSW: PH-SW12 MUX: PH-PC36

DLKC: PH-PC20 PLO: PH-CK16-A CLK: PH-CK18 EMA: PH-PC40 IOC: PH-IO24

TSWM0 TSWM1

MISC IOC EMA

PLO

TSW00 TSW01 TSW02 TSW03

ISAGT-A

CPU

LANI

Fusion Link

ISW LN0

To PLO of

LN1 through 3

DLKC

PLO

IOGT

ISAGT

CPU

LANI

To MUX

(IMG1)

To MUX

(IMG2)

To MUX

(IMG3)

CLK

TSW01 TSW02 TSW03 HSW00

To TSW

of LN3

To TSW

of LN1 To TSW

of LN2

To LANI of

LN1 through 3

HSW01

TSW00

Line/Trunk PM

IMG 0

PM BUS

PCM HW

PM BUS

PCM HW

PM BUS

PCM HW

PM BUS

PCM HW

MUX MUX MUX MUX

MISC IOC EMA

TSW00 TSW01 TSW02 TSW03

ISAGT-B

Note : ISW-LN TSW CA-n Cables

Note

CHAPTER 4 NDA-24307

Page 302

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

TSW Card Replacement Procedure

Use extreme care when operating the keys on the circuit card.

WARNING

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

System Changeover. Check the following

lamp indications on the circuit cards to be

affected and ensure that they are all OFF:

At the ISW:

•TSW ACT (IOGT cards)

•TSW ACT (TSW cards)

•HSW ACT (HSW cards)

At the LN:

•TSW ACT (TSW cards)

•OPE/MB (DLKC card) Note

•MUX ACT (MUX cards)

Note: If the TSW card to be replaced

represents system status 0, all

the circuit cards with 0 status

are totally affected. Check the

whole cited cards' lamp

indications. (See Figure 4-12

and Figure 4-13.)

Check the following lamp indications on

the mate Speech Path block and ensure that

they are all steady-green:

At the ISW:

•TSW ACT (IOGT cards)

•TSW ACT (TSW cards)

•HSW ACT (HSW cards)

At the LN:

•TSW ACT (TSW cards)

•OPE/MB (DLKC card)

•MUX ACT (MUX cards)

START

Check the ACT mode of the mate

Speech Path System.

On the active IOGT (PH-GT10) card in ISWM, set

the MBR key UP. Then, return the key DOWN.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 4

Page 303

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

Figure 4-13 LEDs and Switches for TSW Changeover

MUX (PH-PC36)

MUX ACT

IOGT (PH-GT10)

TSW ACT

MBR

DLKC (PH-PC20)

OPE/MB

HSW (PU-SW01)

HSW ACT

FRONT VIEW

TSW (PH-SW12)

TSW ACT

TSW MBR

TSW (PU-SW00)

TSW ACT

TSW MBR

TSW MB

ISW LN

CHAPTER 4 NDA-24307

Page 304

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

•TSW ACT lamp on the TSW card

remains OFF.

•TSW ACT lamp on the TSW card

lights red.

•TSW ACT lamp on the new card

lights red.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

Set TSW MBR and MB keys on the new card UP.

Insert the new TSW card into the TSWM.

Set the keys on the new card,

referring to the card replaced.

Extract the TSW card to be replaced

from the TSWM.

On the TSW (PH-SW12) card to be replaced,

set the TSW MBR switch UP.

Confirm M0SY, M1SY, M2SY and M3SY

LEDs on the new card are all lighting green.

On the TSW card to be replaced,

set the MB switch UP.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 4

Page 305

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

Note: This procedure assumes the Speech Path mode change is executed totally on a system basis. If the

change is required on a node basis, use the MBR key on that node’s GT (PH-GT09) card or CMODI/

CMOD command. For more details, refer to Section 12, Chapter 6.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

•TSW ACT lamp on the new card goes

OFF.

•TSW ACT lamp on the new card

remains OFF.

System Changeover

•Replaced TSW: STBY to ACT

•Mate TSW: ACT to STBY

Check the following lamp indications on the

Speech Path block to which the new TSW card

belongs and ensure that they are all steady-

green:

At the ISW:

•TSW ACT (IOGT cards)

•TSW ACT (TSW cards)

•HSW ACT (HSW cards)

At the LN:

•TSW ACT (TSW cards)

•OPE/MB (DLKC card)

•MUX ACT (MUX cards)

Check the following lamp indications on the

mate Speech Path block and ensure that they

are all OFF:

At the ISW:

•TSW ACT (IOGT cards)

•TSW ACT (TSW cards)

•HSW ACT (HSW cards)

At the LN:

•TSW ACT (TSW cards)

•OPE/MB (DLKC card)

•MUX ACT (MUX cards)

(Refer to Figure 4-12 and Figure 4-13.)

END

Set the MB key on the new card DOWN.

Flip the MBR key on the active IOGT card. Confirm

the new TSW card functions normally.

Set the TSW MBR key on the new card DOWN.

MBR (on the active IOGT card of ISW)

CHAPTER 4 NDA-24307

Page 306

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

2.3.3 DLKC Card Replacement Procedure

The DLKC (PH-PC20) card is mounted in Slot No. 08 or 09 within the TSWM0. The card’s main

function is to provide all the Attendant/Desk Consoles with information such as termination/answer/

release (abandoned) of ATT calls or idle/busy status of a station via the link of the TSW system. Use

the following procedures to replace the DLKC card with a spare.

Note: The system changeover of DLKC must be executed by the MBR key operation on the active IOGT (PH-

GT10) card or by using the CMODI command. Before starting this work, confirm the system block

diagram shown in Figure 4-12, or Section 12, Chapter 6.

Replacement Procedure

Use extreme care when operating the keys on the circuit card.

WARNING

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

System Changeover. Check the following

lamp indications on the circuit cards to be

affected and ensure that they are all OFF:

At the ISW:

•TSW ACT (IOGT cards)

•TSW ACT (TSW cards)

•HSW ACT (HSW cards)

At the LN:

•TSW ACT (TSW cards)

•OPE/MB (DLKC card) Note

•MUX ACT (MUX cards)

Note: If the DLKC card to be replaced

represents system status 0, all

the circuit cards with 0 status

are totally affected. Check the

whole cited cards' lamp

indications. (See Figure 4-12

and Figure 4-13.)

Check the following lamp indications on the

mate Speech Path block and ensure that at

ISW they are all OFF and at LN all are a

steady green:

At the ISW:

•TSW ACT (IOGT cards)

•TSW ACT (TSW cards)

•HSW ACT (HSW cards)

At the LN:

•TSW ACT (TSW cards)

•OPE/MB (DLKC card)

•MUX ACT (MUX cards)

OPE/MB lamp on the DLKC card lights red.

START

Check the ACT mode of the mate

Speech Path System.

On the active IOGT (PH-GT10) card in ISWM, set the

MBR key UP. Then, return the key DOWN.

On the DLKC (PH-PC20) card to be

replaced, Set the MB switch UP.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 4

Page 307

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

Note: The changeover of Speech Path system can be performed also by using the CMODI command. For

details, refer to Chapter 8, Maintenance Commands.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

•OPE/MB lamp on the new card lights red.

•OPE/MB lamp on the new card goes OFF.

System Changeover

•Replaced DLKC: STBY to ACT

•Mate DLKC: ACT to STBY

Check the following lamp indications on the

Speech Path block to which the new DLKC card

belongs and ensure that they are all steady-green:

At the ISW:

•TSW ACT (IOGT cards)

•TSW ACT (TSW cards)

•HSW ACT (HSW cards)

At the LN:

•TSW ACT (TSW cards)

•OPE/MB (DLKC card)

•MUX ACT (MUX cards)

Check the following lamp indications on the mate

Speech Path block and ensure that they are all

OFF:

At the ISW:

•TSW ACT (IOGT cards)

•TSW ACT (TSW cards)

•HSW ACT (HSW cards)

At the LN:

•TSW ACT (TSW cards)

•OPE/MB (DLKC card)

•MUX ACT (MUX cards)

(Refer to Figure 4-12 and Figure 4-13.)

END

On the new DLKC card, set the MB key DOWN.

Extract the DLKC card to be replaced

from the TSWM.

Flip MBR key on the active IOGT card. Confirm the

new DLKC card functions normally.

On the new DLKC card, set the MB switch UP.

Insert the new DLKC card into the TSWM.

MBR (on the active IOGT card of ISW)

CHAPTER 4 NDA-24307

Page 308

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

2.3.4 PLO Card Replacement Procedure

The PLO (PH-CK16-A) card is mounted in Slot No. 21 or 23 within the TSWM0. Used together with

a direct digital interface circuit card, the card’s main function is to set up the clock synchronization on

the network. With this circuit card, the Local Node can be a clock subordinate office of the digital

network. Use the procedures below to replace the PLO card with a spare.

Note: The ACT/STBY of PLO can be changed over via a single MB key operation on the circuit card (ACT

side). Though its circuit is controlled by the GT (PH-GT09) card in TSWM0 via TSW I/O bus, the

switching system of PLO (LN) is not affected by the speech path system changeover, differing from other

echelons such as TSW, MUX, DLKC. Refer to Section 12, Chapter 6. If the system of PLO in TSWM0

is once changeover, the ACT/STBY of CLK in TSWM1 is also changed over.

Replacement Procedure

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

•PLO system is changed over from

ACT to STBY mode.

•OPE lamp on the PLO and CLK

cards in the same LN goes OFF.

Check the following lamp indications

on the mate PLO and CLK cards in the

same LN.

•OPE = Steady-green

START

Extract the PLO card to be replaced

from the TSWM0.

Check the mate PLO's ACT mode.

On the active PLO (PH-CK16-A) card, set the

MB key UP.

Set the keys on the new card according to

the card replaced.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 4

Page 309

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

•OPE lamp on the new card is OFF.

•OPE lamp on the new card remains

OFF.

(Mate PLO = ON [green])

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

END

Insert the new PLO card into the TSWM0.

On the new PLO card, set the MB key UP.

Set the MB key on the new card DOWN.

CHAPTER 4 NDA-24307

Page 310

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

2.3.5 CLK Card Replacement Procedure

The CLK (PH-CK18) card is mounted in Slot No. 21 or 23 within the TSWM1. The card’s main

function is to supply basic clock signals to IMG2/3. This card receives clock signs from the PLO

located in TSWM0, thereby distributing the supplied 32,768 MHz CLK, 8 KHz FH (5msec x “n” FH

[for Wireless system]), PLO ACT signals and Hold tone to the TSW located in TSWM1. Use the

procedures below to replace the CLK card with a spare.

Note: The ACT/STBY of CLK(s) can be changed over when the PLO in TSWM0 is changed over (by flipping

the MB key on the active PLO card).

Replacement Procedure

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

•OPE lamps on the CLK and PLO

cards goes OFF.

•OPE lamps on the mate CLK and

PLO cards are steady green.

START

On the CLK (PH-CK18) card to be replaced,

set the MB key UP.

Check the mate CLK's ACT mode.

On the active PLO (PH-CK16-A) card located in

TSWM0, set theMB key UP and then DOWN.

Extract the CLK card to be replaced from the

TSWM1.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 4

Page 311

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

•OPE lamp on the new card is OFF.

•OPE lamp on the new card remains

OFF.

(Mate CLK = ON [green])

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

END

Insert the new CLK card into the TSWM1.

On the new CLK card, set the MB key UP.

Set the MB key on the new card DOWN.

CHAPTER 4 NDA-24307

Page 312

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

2.3.6 PWR SW Card Replacement Procedure

The PWR SW (PH-PW14) card is mounted in Slot No. 00 or 01 within the TSWM0/1. The card’s main

function is to supply DC -48V operating power to the same TSWM circuit cards and also DC +5, -5 V

and +12 V output power to the MISC slots. Use the following procedures to replace the card with a

new one.

Replacement Procedure

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

•P-ON lamp on the PWR SW card

goes OFF.

•ALM lamp on the PWR SW card

lights red.

•P-ON lamp on the new card is OFF.

•ALM lamp on the PWR SW card

lights red.

•P-ON lamp on the new card lights

steady-green.

•ALM lamp on the PWR SW goes

OFF.

END

START

Extract the PWR SW card to be replaced

from the TSWM.

On the new PWR SW card, set the SW key DOWN.

On the PWR SW (PH-PW14) card, set the

SW key DOWN.

Insert the new PWR SW card into the TSWM.

On the new PWR SW card, set the SW key UP.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 4

Page 313

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

2.3.7 MISC Card Replacement Procedure

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

•Keep MB switch UP.

END

START

Extract the MISC card from its mounting slot.

Insert the new circuit card into the same

mounting slot.

On the MISC card, set MB switch DOWN.

On the MISC card, set MB switch UP.

CHAPTER 4 NDA-24307

Page 314

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

3. PIM ACCOMMODATING CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

This Section covers the procedures for replacing circuit cards accommodated in the PIM (IMG0/1/2/3).

3.1 Precaution

•This procedure is applied when replacing a faulty circuit card with a spare. It is also able to be applied

when checking a spare card.

•There are functional switches (having set the default switch) on some of the circuit cards to be

replaced. As for switch setting on the circuit cards, confirm the circuit card mounting face layout for

the PIM. When a circuit card which has default switch setting has been replaced with a spare card, be

sure to make switch setting on the new circuit card in the same way as on the replaced card. Otherwise,

electronic components on the circuit card may be destroyed or the circuit card itself may fail to

function normally.

•When handling a circuit card, be sure to use the field service kit as countermeasures against static

electricity. If you touch a circuit card without using the field service kit, electronic components like

an IC on the card may be destroyed by the static electricity electrified on the human body.

3.2 Circuit Card Mounting Face Layout

The face layout of circuit cards mounted in the PIM is shown in Figure 4-14.

Figure 4-14 Circuit Card Mounting Face Layout of PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

LC/TRK

MUX0

MUX1

LC/TRK

PWR1

PWR0

PIM

Slot No.

Universal Slots Universal Slots

Note: This Section also covers the procedure to replace the SDT (PA-SDTA/PA-SDTB) card. The card can

be mounted in any of the universal slots (slots 04-12 or 15-23).

Improper key operations may result in a system down. Operate the keys with extreme care.

By replacing a circuit card, the system will issue system messages and activate the related

alarm. Be sure to reset the indicated alarm after the replacement procedure is complete.

If the indicated alarm is cleared via the RALM/RALMN command, the system also clears

the whole contents of the system message. Be sure to print out the messages (by using the

DFTD command) BEFORE using the RALM/RALMN command.

ALM RST button on the TOPU is used to reset the alarm lamps only.

WARNING

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 4

Page 315

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

3.3 Operating Procedures

The following sections provide operating procedures to replace circuit cards mounted in the PIM. Perform

the operations corresponding to each Reference Item specified in Table 4-3. The procedures assume that

the system adopts the dual configuration.

Table 4-3 PIM Circuit Cards and Reference Items

CIRCUIT CARD

FUNCTION NAME REFERENCE ITEM REMARKS

LC/TRK Section 3.3.1, LC/TRK Circuit Card Replacement

Procedure

MUX Section 3.3.2, MUX Card Replacement Procedure

PWR Section 3.3.3, PWR Card Replacement Procedure

HUB Section 3.3.4, HUB Circuit Card Replacement

Procedure

SDT Section 3.3.5, SDT Card Replacement Procedure

CHAPTER 4 NDA-24307

Page 316

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

3.3.1 LC/TRK Circuit Card Replacement Procedure

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

•Keep MB switch set at UP.

END

START

Extract the circuit card from its mounting slot.

On the circuit card to be replaced,

set the MB switch UP.

Insert the new card into its mounting slot.

On the new card, set MB switch DOWN.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 4

Page 317

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

3.3.2 MUX Card Replacement Procedure

The MUX (PH-PC36) card is mounted in Slot No. 13 and/or 14 of each Port Interface Module (PIM).

The card’s main function is to provide an interface between the CPR and Port Microprocessor (PM) of

the line/trunk circuit, and also to provide an interface for multiplexing/de-multiplexing of voice Pulse

Code Modulation (PCM) information and digital data information. Use the procedures below to

replace the MUX card with a spare:

Note: Execute the system changeover of MUX by using the MBR key operation on the active IOGT (PH-GT10)

card or by using the CMODI command. Before starting this task, be sure to confirm the system block

diagram shown in Figure 4-12, or Section 12, Chapter 6.

MUX Card Replacement Procedure

Apply extreme care when operating the keys on the circuit cards.

WARNING

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

System Changeover. Check the following

lamp indications on the circuit cards to be

affected and ensure that they are all OFF:

At the ISW:

•TSW ACT (IOGT cards)

•TSW ACT (TSW cards)

•HSW ACT (HSW cards)

At the LN:

•TSW ACT (TSW cards)

•OPE/MB (DLKC card) Note

•MUX ACT (MUX cards)

Note: If the MUX card to be replaced

represents system status 0, all

the circuit cards with 0 status

are totally affected. Check the

whole cited cards' lamp

indications. (See Figure 4-12

and Figure 4-13.)

Check the following lamp indications on the

mate Speech Path block and ensure that they

are all a steady green:

At the ISW:

•TSW ACT (IOGT cards)

•TSW ACT (TSW cards)

•HSW ACT (HSW cards)

At the LN:

•TSW ACT (TSW cards)

•OPE/MB (DLKC card)

•MUX ACT (MUX cards)

MUX ACT lamp on the MUX card lights

red.

START

On the active IOGT (PH-GT10) card in ISWM, set

the MBR key UP. Then, return the key DOWN.

Check the ACT mode of the mate Speech Path

On the MUX (PH-PC36) card to

be replaced, Set the MB switch UP.

System.

CHAPTER 4 NDA-24307

Page 318

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

•MUX ACT lamp on the new card

lights red.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

Insert the new card into the PIM.

On the new card, set the MB key UP.

Extract card to be replaced from the mounted PIM.

Disconnect the cable for the MUX front

connector on the card to be replaced.

Connect the disconnected cable to the

MUX front connector on the new card.

Referring to the replaced card, set the keys on

the new card.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 4

Page 319

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

Note: This procedure assumes the Speech Path mode change is executed totally on a system basis. If the

change is required on a node basis, use the MBR key on that node’s GT (PH-GT09) card or CMODI/

CMOD command. For more details, refer to Section 12, Chapter 6.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

System Changeover

•Replaced MUX: STBY to ACT

•Mate MUX: ACT to STBY

Check the following lamp indications on the

Speech Path block to which the new MUX

card belongs and ensure that they are all

steady-green:

At the ISW:

•TSW ACT (IOGT cards)

•TSW ACT (TSW cards)

•HSW ACT (HSW cards)

At the LN:

•TSW ACT (TSW cards)

•OPE/MB (DLKC card)

•MUX ACT (MUX cards)

Check the following lamp indications on the

mate Speech Path block and ensure that they

are all OFF:

At the ISW:

•TSW ACT (IOGT cards)

•TSW ACT (TSW cards)

•HSW ACT (HSW cards)

At the LN:

•TSW ACT (TSW cards)

•OPE/MB (DLKC card)

•MUX ACT (MUX cards)

(Refer to Figure 4-12 and Figure 4-13.)

END

Flip the MBR key on the active IOGT card. Confirm

the new MUX card functions normally.

On the new MUX card, set the MB key DOWN.

Verify that the SYNC LED on the new card

lights green.

MBR (on the active IOGT card of ISW)

CHAPTER 4 NDA-24307

Page 320

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

3.3.3 PWR Card Replacement Procedure

The PWR (PA-PW55-A/PA-PW55-B) and DPWR (PA-PW54-A/PA-PW54-B) cards are mounted re-

spectively in Slot No. 1 and Slot No. 3 of each PIM. The card’s main function is to provide operating

power to the circuit cards accommodated in the PIM. The procedures to replace the PWR/DPWR card

are as follows.

Replacement Procedure

•OPE lamp on the card goes OFF.

Turn OFF the -48V SW on the card to be replaced.

Turn ON the MB key on the PWR/DPWR card

to be replaced.

Turn OFF the -48V SW on the new card.

Extract the card to be replaced.

Disconnect the power cable from the -48V IN

connector.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 4

Page 321

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

•OPE lamp on the new card is OFF.

•OPE lamp on the new card lights

green.

END

Insert the new card into the PIM.

Turn OFF the MB key on the card.

Turn ON the -48V SW on the new card.

Connect the power cable to the -48V IN

connector.

Turn ON the MB key on the new card.

CHAPTER 4 NDA-24307

Page 322

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

3.3.4 HUB Circuit Card Replacement Procedure

The HUB (PA-M96) card is mounted in any universal slot of the PIM. This card provides the repeater

function based on ANSI/IEEE820.3.8. This card is also equipped with eight ports for 10 BASE-T cable

connection used for establishing Ethernet Link and/or connecting the MAT.

HUB Card Replacement Procedure

Replacement of a HUB card may result in a temporary shutoff of the Ethernet link. If this is

the case, take appropriate measures, such as CPU mode changeover, arrangement of 10 BASE-

T cable connection, etc, may be necessary.

WARNING

Use extreme care when operating the keys on the circuit cards.

WARNING

•CPU mode change: Refer to

Section 12, Section 6.

START

Check the lamp indication of the mate HUB card.

If replacement affects current Ethernet status,

Disconnect the 10 BASE-T cables from the front

connectors of the HUB card to be replaced

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

On the HUB (PA-M96) card to be replaced,

set the MB key up.

•OPE lamp on the card goes OFF.

ensure CPU mode change or arrangement of

10 BASE-T cable connection.

•OPE lamp on the mate HUB card

lights steady-green.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 4

Page 323

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

•OPE lamp on the new card goes

OFF.

•OPE lamp on the new card lights

green.

END

Set the key on the new card, referring to the

Connect the disconnected 10 BASE-T cable(s) to

Insert the new card into the PIM.

Set the MB key on the new card UP.

Extract the HUB card from the universal slot of

the PIM.

card replaced.

the connector(s) on the new card.

Confirm STxx lamp(s) on the new card

Set the MB key on the new DOWN.

is lighting green.

CHAPTER 4 NDA-24307

Page 324

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

3.3.5 SDT Card Replacement Procedure

The SDT (PA-SDTA/PA-SDTB) card, mounted in a universal slot of a PIM, is used

to provide a 52M interface for the optical fiber lines. Use the following procedure

to replace the SDT card with a spare.

Optical Fiber Cable Replacement Procedure

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

While this card is being replaced, the connected optical fiber line cannot be used.

WARNING

•ACT lamp on the PA-SDTA card goes

OFF. (When the card is provided in a

dual configuration, the card becomes

stand-by.)

The following occurs in call processing:

When card is provided in dual

configuration

All calls (including already established

calls plus newly attempted calls) can

normally be handled by the mate card.

When card is in single configuration,

or mate card is faulty in dual

configuration

Though any call attempt is rejected,

already established calls are not

affected. When any connection link

exists, the link is still maintained.

•OPE lamp on the PA-SDTA card lights

red.

The following occur in call processing:

When card is in single configuration,

or mate card is faulty in dual

configuration

Already established calls (while in

speech) lose voice/tone. Any

connection link is severed after a few

seconds.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

START

On the PA-SDTA card, turn ON Switch 4

of the P-SW key.

On the PA-SDTA card, set the MB key UP (=ON).

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 4

Page 325

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

•OPE lamp on the PA-SDTA card

lights steady-green.

END

Remove the optical fiber cable from the front

connector on the PA-SDTA card.

Connect the new optical fiber cable to the front

connector on the PA-SDTA card.

On the PA-SDTA card, set the MB key DOWN

(=OFF) and turn OFF Switch 4 of the P-SW key.

CHAPTER 4 NDA-24307

Page 326

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

PA-SDTA/PA-SDTB Card Replacement Procedure

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

•ACT lamp on the PA-SDTA card

goes OFF.

•Though any call attempt is rejected,

already established calls are safely

maintained. When any connection

link exists, the link is maintained.

Note: When the card is in a dual

configuration, perform this

for both system sides, in the

order of STBY

→

ACT.

•OPE lamp on the PA-SDTA card

lights red.

•When already established calls exist,

the connections lose voice/tone.

When any connection link exists, the

link is severed after a few seconds.

Note: When the card is in a dual

configuration, perform this

for both system sides ( ACT

and STBY).

START

On the PA-SDTA card, turn ON Switch 4

of the P-SW key.

On the PA-SDTA card, set the MB key UP (=ON).

By using the SPTS command, verify that no calls

are being handled by the SDT card.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 4

Page 327

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

•OPE lamp on the PA-SDTB card

lights red.

•When any connection link exists, the

nailed-down connection between the

FCH (PA-FCHA) and SDT (PA-

SDTB) cards is cut off. Already

established calls, while in speech,

are all disconnected.

•Confirm that the MB key on the new

card is set UP (=ON). If the new card

is PA-SDTA, also confirm that

Switch 4 of the P-SW key is ON.

Referring to the card removed, perform

the switch settings on the new card.

On the PA-SDTB card, set the MB key UP (=ON).

Remove the flat cables from the front connectors, I/O

and PCM, on both PA-SDTB and PA-SDTA cards.

When replacing the PA-SDTB, also remove MT24

TSW cables from all the front connectors on the card.

Extract both PA-SDTA/PA-SDTB cards,

simultaneously.

CHAPTER 4 NDA-24307

Page 328

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

•OPE lamp on the new card lights

red.

•OPE lamp on the new card lights

steady-green.

END

On the PA-SDTA card, turn OFF Switch 4 of the

P-SW key.

Insert both PA-SDTA/PA-SDTB cards (including new

card) simultaneously into the same slots of the PIM.

When the new card is PA-SDTB, also connect the MT

24 TSW cables to all the required front connectors.

On the PA-SDTB card, set the MB key DOWN (=OFF).

On the PA-SDTA card, set the MB key DOWN (=OFF).

Connect the disconnected flat cables to the connectors

on the new card and other PA-SDTA/PA-SDTB cards.

Note: When the card is in a dual

configuration, perform this

action for both system sides (

ACT and STBY).

Note: When the card is in a dual

configuration, perform this

action for both system sides, in

the order of STBY → ACT.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 4

Page 329

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

3.3.6 DLMX Card Replacement Procedure

The DLMX (PA-PC94) card, accommodated in a universal slot of a PIM, is used to

collect the BLF information (associated with Attendant/Desk Console operation)

from DLKC cards of all nodes in the IPX-U system, and to send the collected data

to ATI cards of all nodes. When replacing this card, take the procedure below:

Replacement Procedure

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

•ACT lamp on the card goes/

remains OFF.

(When the card is formally

active in a dual configuration,

the card is placed to ST-BY

•OPE lamp on the card goes

OFF.

ACT lamp on the mate card

lights steady-green.

Is the DLMX card

in a dual configuration?

On the DLMX (PA-PC94) card to be replaced,

set Element 3 of "MNT" switch DOWN (=ON).

On the DLMX (PA-PC94) card to be

replaced, set the MB key UP.

Check the mate DLMX card's "ACT" mode.

YES

START

CHAPTER 4 NDA-24307

Page 330

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

END

On the new DLMX (PA-PC94) card, set the

switch setting, referring to the card replaced.

On the new DLMX (PA-PC94) card,

set the MB key UP.

Insert the new DLMX (PA-PC94) card into the PIM.

Set the MB key on the new card DOWN.

Extract the DLMX card to be replaced

from the universal slot of the PIM.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

•OPE lamp on the card lights

steady-green.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 4

Page 331

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

4. ISWM ACCOMMODATING CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

This section explains the procedure for replacing circuit cards mounted in the ISWM.

4.1 Precautions

•Use this procedure to replace a faulty circuit card with a spare or to check a spare card.

•There are the functional switches (having set the default switch) on some of the circuit cards to be

replaced. As for switch setting on the circuit cards, confirm the circuit card mounting face layout for

the PIM. When a circuit card with a default switch setting is replaced with a spare card, always make

the switch setting on the new circuit card the same as on the replaced card. Otherwise, electronic

components on the circuit card may be destroyed, or the circuit card itself may fail to function

normally.

•When handling a circuit card, always use the field service kit for countermeasures against static

electricity. Touching a circuit card without using the field service kit may destroy the card due to static

electricity on the human body.

4.2 Circuit Card Mounting Face Layout

Figure 4-10 shows the face layout of the circuit cards mounted in the TSWM. The circuit cards marked

with * are optional.

Figure 4-15 Circuit Card Mounting Face Layout of ISWM

0 01020304050607080910111213141516171819

TSW00

TWS01

TSW02

TSW03

PLO0

IOGT0

IOGT1

PLO1

TSW10

TSW11

TSW12

TSW13

HSW10

HSW11

HSW00

PWR0

ISWM

Slot No.

PWR1

HSW01

PWRSW: PH-PW14 HSW: PU-SW01 TSW: PU-SW00 PLO: PH-CK16-A17-A IOGT: PH-GT10

FRONT VIEW

CHAPTER 4 NDA-24307

Page 332

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

4.3 Operating Procedures

The following section provide operating procedures to replace circuit cards mounted in the ISW. Perform

the operations corresponding to each reference item specified in Table 4-4. The procedures assume that

the system adopts the dual configuration.

Table 4-4 ISW Circuit Cards and Reference Items

CIRCUIT CARD

FUNCTION NAME REFERENCE ITEM REMARKS

IOGT Section 4.3.1, IOGT Card Replacement Procedure

TSW Section 4.3.2, TSW Card Replacement Procedure

HSW Section 4.3.3, HSW Card Replacement Procedure

PLO Section 4.3.4, PLO Card Replacement Procedure

PWR SW Section 4.3.5, PWR SW Card Replacement Procedure

Improper key operations may result in a system down. Operate the key using extreme care.

During replacement of a circuit card, the system issues system messages and activates the related

alarm. Reset the indicated alarm after completing the replacement procedure.

If the indicated alarm is cleared via the RALM/RALMN command, the system also clears the

contents of the system message. Before using the RALM/RALMN command, print the messages

using the DFTD command.

Use the ALM RST button on the TOPU only to reset the alarm lamps.

WARNING

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 4

Page 333

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

4.3.1 IOGT Card Replacement Procedure

The IOGT (PH-GT10) card is mounted in Slot No. 10 or 11 within the ISWM. This card provides

MISC/TSW I/O bus interfaces between the CPU and TSW, HSW, PLO cards within the ISWM. Figure

4-16 shows a system block diagram centering upon the CPU and it’s controlling IOGT. If the ACT/

STBY of IOGT is changed over, those of TSW, HSW (in ISW) and TSW, MUX, DLKC (in all LNs)

are also totally changed over. Follow the procedures below to replace an IOGT card with a spare.

Note: To replace the IOGT card, the STBY mode of the card (to be replaced) must be first confirmed. The mode

changeover is available by using the MBR key on the active IOGT card or by using the CMODI

command. See Figure 4-16.

Figure 4-16 System Block Diagram (IOGT and Other Speech Path Echelons)

< ISW (Inter-node Switch) >

ISAGT: PZ-GT13 LANI: PZ-PC19 IOGT: PH-GT10 TSW: PU-SW00

HSW: PU-SW01 PLO: PH-CK16-A/17-A EMA: PH-PC40 IOC: PH-IO24

< LN (Local Node) >

ISAGT-A: PZ-GT13 ISAGT-B: PZ-GT20 LANI: PZ-PC19 GT: PH-GT09 TSW: PH-SW12 MUX: PH-PC36

DLKC: PH-PC20 PLO: PH-CK16-A CLK: PH-CK18 EMA: PH-PC40 IOC: PH-IO24

TSWM0 TSWM1

MISC IOC EMA

PLO

TSW00 TSW01 TSW02 TSW03

ISAGT-A

CPU

LANI

Fusion Link

ISW LN0

To PLO of

LN1 through 3

DLKC

PLO

IOGT

ISAGT

CPU

LANI

To MUX

(IMG1)

To MUX

(IMG2)

To MUX

(IMG3)

CLK

TSW01 TSW02 TSW03 HSW00

To TSW

of LN3

To TSW

of LN1 To TSW

of LN2

To LANI of

LN1 through 3

HSW01

TSW00

Line/Trunk PM

IMG 0

PM BUS

PCM HW

PM BUS

PCM HW

PM BUS

PCM HW

PM BUS

PCM HW

MUX MUX MUX MUX

MISC IOC EMA

TSW00 TSW01 TSW02 TSW03

ISAGT-B

CHAPTER 4 NDA-24307

Page 334

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

IOGT Card Replacement Procedure

Use extreme care when operating the keys on the DSP of CPR and PH-GT09 card.

WARNING

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

System Changeover: Check the following

lamp indications on the IOGT and other

circuit cards in the same Switching block

and ensure they are all OFF:

At the ISW:

•TSW ACT (IOGT cards)

•TSW ACT (TSW cards)

•HSW ACT (HSW cards)

At the LN:

•TSW ACT (TSW cards)

•OPE/MB (DLKC card)

•MUX ACT (MUX cards)

Check the following lamp indications on

the mate IOGT card and other circuit

cards in the same mate block and ensure

they are all a steady green:

At the ISW:

•TSW ACT (IOGT cards)

•TSW ACT (TSW cards)

•HSW ACT (HSW cards)

At the LN:

•TSW ACT (TSW cards)

•OPE/MB (DLKC card)

•MUX ACT (MUX cards)

TSW ACT lamp on the IOGT card

remains OFF.

Confirm the mate IOGT's ACT mode.

START

On the IOGT card to be replaced, set the

MBR key UP.

If the card to be replaced is active, flip the MBR

key on the card OFF OFFON

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 4

Page 335

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

•TSW ACT lamp on the IOGT card

lights red.

•TSW ACT lamp on the new card

lights red.

•TSW ACT lamp on the IOGT card

goes OFF.

•TSW ACT lamp on the IOGT card

goes OFF.

Insert the new card into the ISWM.

Set the MBR key on the new card DOWN.

Set the MB key on the new card DOWN.

Extract the IOGT card to be replaced

from the ISWM.

On the new IOGT card, set the MB/MBR key UP,

On the IOGT card to be replaced,

set the MB key UP.

CHAPTER 4 NDA-24307

Page 336

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

Note: The system changeover of Speech Path system can be executed also by using the CMODI command. For

details, refer to Chapter 8, Maintenance Commands.

System Changeover: Check the following lamp

indications on the IOGT and other circuit cards

in the same Switching block are all steady

green:

At the ISW:

•TSW ACT (IOGT cards)

•TSW ACT (TSW cards)

•HSW ACT (HSW cards)

At the LN:

•TSW ACT (TSW cards)

•OPE/MB (DLKC card)

•MUX ACT (MUX cards)

Check the following lamp indications on the

mate IOGT card and other circuit cards in the

same mate block are all OFF:

At the ISW:

•TSW ACT (IOGT cards)

•TSW ACT (TSW cards)

•HSW ACT (HSW cards)

At the LN:

•TSW ACT (TSW cards)

•OPE/MB (DLKC card)

•MUX ACT (MUX cards)

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

END

Flip the MBR key on the active IOGT card.

Confirm the new IOGT functions normally.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 4

Page 337

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

4.3.2 TSW Card Replacement Procedure

The TSW (PH-SW00) card is mounted in the Slot Nos. ranging from 04 to 07 and Slot Nos. 14 to 17

within the ISWM. Equipped with the Time Division Switch (TSW) and INT function, each circuit card

provides Time Slot (TS) switching for one Local Node (LN). In addition, used together with two PU-

SW01 (HSW) cards in pair, four PU-SW00 (TSW) cards achieve a maximum of 32,768 TS switching

for four LNs.

Note: To replace the TSW card, the STBY mode of the card (to be replaced) must be first confirmed. The mode

changeover is available by using the MBR key on the active IOGT card or by using the CMODI

command. See Figure 4-16.

TSW Card Replacement Procedure

Use extreme care when operating the keys on the circuit card.

WARNING

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

System Changeover: Check the following lamp

indications on the TSW and other circuit cards in the

same Switching block are all OFF:

At the ISW:

•TSW ACT (IOGT cards)

•TSW ACT (TSW cards)

•HSW ACT (HSW cards)

At the LN:

•TSW ACT (TSW cards)

•OPE/MB (DLKC card)

•MUX ACT (MUX cards)

Check the following lamp indications on the mate

TSW card and other circuit cards in the same mate

block are all a steady green:

At the ISW:

•TSW ACT (IOGT cards)

•TSW ACT (TSW cards)

•HSW ACT (HSW cards)

At the LN:

•TSW ACT (TSW cards)

•OPE/MB (DLKC card)

•MUX ACT (MUX cards)

•TSW ACT lamp on the TSW card remains OFF.

•TSW ACT lamp on the TSW card lights red.

START

Check the ACT mode of the mate

Speech Path System.

If the card to be replaced is active, flip the

MBR key on the active IOGT (PH-GT10)

OFFONcard OFF

On the TSW card to be replaced,

set the TSW MBR key UP.

On the TSW card to be replaced,

set the TSW MB key UP.

CHAPTER 4 NDA-24307

Page 338

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

•TSW ACT lamp on the TSW card

lights red.

•TSW ACT lamp on the TSW card

goes OFF.

•TSW ACT lamp on the TSW card

goes OFF.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

Set the TSW MB key on the new card DOWN.

Insert the new card into the ISWM.

Set the TSW MBR and TSW MB keys on the

new card UP.

Extract the TSW card from the ISWM.

Set the key on the new card, referring to

the card replaced.

Confirm LN00~LN03, LN10~LN13, LN20~23, and

LN30~LN33 LEDs on the new card are lighting green.

Set the TSW MBR key on the new card DOWN.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 4

Page 339

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

Note: The system changeover of Speech Path system can be executed also by using the CMODI command. For

details, refer to Chapter 8, Maintenance Commands.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

System Changeover: Check the following

lamp indications on the TSW and other

circuit cards in the same Switching block

are all steady green:

At the ISW:

•TSW ACT (IOGT cards)

•TSW ACT (TSW cards)

•HSW ACT (HSW cards)

At the LN:

•TSW ACT (TSW cards)

•OPE/MB (DLKC card)

•MUX ACT (MUX cards)

Check the following lamp indications on

the mate TSW card and other circuit cards

in the same mate block are all OFF:

At the ISW:

•TSW ACT (IOGT cards)

•TSW ACT (TSW cards)

•HSW ACT (HSW cards)

At the LN:

•TSW ACT (TSW cards)

•OPE/MB (DLKC card)

•MUX ACT (MUX cards)

END

Flip the MBR key on the active IOGT card. Confirm

the new card functions normally.

CHAPTER 4 NDA-24307

Page 340

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

4.3.3 HSW Card Replacement Procedure

The HSW (PH-SW01) card is mounted in the Slot Nos. 03, 04 and Slot Nos. 18 and 19. The main

functions of this card are as follows:

(a) The swithc omposition is T-T-S-T (T:Time division, S: Space division, T: Time division), and the

space division is composed with this circuit card.

(b) This circuit card collects the 16 highways of PCM data from TSW cards and sends 8 highways to

TSW cards by one card. It is used to perform 16 highways switching by two PU-SW01 cards.

Note: To replace the HSW card, the STBY mode of the card (to be replaced) must be first confirmed. The mode

changeover is available by using the MBR key on the active IOGT card or by using the CMODI com-

mand. See Figure 4-16.

HSW Card Replacement Procedure

Use extreme care when operating the keys on the circuit card.

WARNING

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

System Changeover: Check the following lamp

indications on the HSW and other circuit cards in the

same Switching block are all OFF:

At the ISW:

•TSW ACT (IOGT cards)

•TSW ACT (TSW cards)

•HSW ACT (HSW cards)

At the LN:

•TSW ACT (TSW cards)

•OPE/MB (DLKC card)

•MUX ACT (MUX cards)

Check the following lamp indications on the mate

HSW card and other circuit cards in the same mate

block are all a steady green:

At the ISW:

•TSW ACT (IOGT cards)

•TSW ACT (TSW cards)

•HSW ACT (HSW cards)

At the LN:

•TSW ACT (TSW cards)

•OPE/MB (DLKC card)

•MUX ACT (MUX cards)

START

Check the ACT mode of the mate

Speech Path System.

If the card to be replaced is active, flip the

MBR key on the active IOGT (PH-GT10)

OFFONcard OFF

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 4

Page 341

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

•HSW ACT lamp on the HSW card

lights red.

•HSW ACT lamp on the HSW card

goes OFF.

•HSW ACT lamp on the HSW card

goes OFF.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

Set the HSW MB keys on the new card DOWN.

Insert the new card into the ISWM.

Set the HSW MB keys on the new card UP.

Extract the HSW card from the ISWM.

On the HSW card to be replaced, set the

MB key UP.

CHAPTER 4 NDA-24307

Page 342

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

Note: The system changeover of Speech Path system can be executed also by using the CMODI command. For

details, refer to Chapter 8, Maintenance Commands.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

System Changeover: Check the following

lamp indications on the TSW and other

circuit cards in the same Switching block

are all steady green:

At the ISW:

•TSW ACT (IOGT cards)

•TSW ACT (TSW cards)

•HSW ACT (HSW cards)

At the LN:

•TSW ACT (TSW cards)

•OPE/MB (DLKC card)

•MUX ACT (MUX cards)

Check the following lamp indications on

the mate TSW card and other circuit cards

in the same mate block are all OFF:

At the ISW:

•TSW ACT (IOGT cards)

•TSW ACT (TSW cards)

•HSW ACT (HSW cards)

At the LN:

•TSW ACT (TSW cards)

•OPE/MB (DLKC card)

•MUX ACT (MUX cards)

END

Flip the MBR key on the active IOGT card in the

same block. Confirm the new card functions normally.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 4

Page 343

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

4.3.4 PLO Card Replacement Procedure

The PLO (PH-CK16-A/17-A) card is located in Slot No. 09 or 13 within the ISWM. Used together

with a different direct digital interface circuit card, the card’s main function is to set up the clock

synchronization on the network. Use the procedures below to replace the PLO card with a spare.

Note: The ACT/STBY of PLO can be changed over via a single MB key operation on the circuit card (ACT

side). Though its circuit is controlled by the IOGT (PH-GT10) card via TSW I/O bus, the switching

system of PLO (ISW) is not affected by the Speech Path system changeover, differing from other

echelons such as IOGT, TSW, and HSW. Refer to Section 12, Chapter 6.

Replacement Procedure

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

•PLO system is changed over from

ACT to STBY mode.

•OPE lamp on the PLO card goes

OFF.

Check the following lamp indications

on the mate PLO cards:

•OPE = Steady-green

START

Extract the PLO card to be replaced

from the ISWM.

Check the mate PLO's ACT mode.

On the active PLO (PH-CK16-A/17-A) card, set the

MB key UP.

Set the keys on the new card according to

the card replaced.

CHAPTER 4 NDA-24307

Page 344

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

•OPE lamp on the new card is OFF.

•OPE lamp on the new card remains

OFF.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

END

Insert the new PLO card into the ISWM.

On the new PLO card, set the MB key UP.

Set the MB key on the new card DOWN.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 4

Page 345

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

4.3.5 PWR SW Card Replacement Procedure

The PWR SW (PH-PW14) card is mounted in Slot No. 00 or 01 within the ISWM. The card’s main

function is to supply DC -48V operating power to the same ISWM circuit cards and also DC +5, -5 V

and +12 V output power to the PLO cards. Use the following procedures to replace the card with a new

one.

Replacement Procedure

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

•P-ON lamp on the PWR SW card

goes OFF.

•ALM lamp on the PWR SW card

lights red.

•P-ON lamp on the new card is OFF.

•ALM lamp on the PWR SW card

lights red.

•P-ON lamp on the new card lights

steady-green.

•ALM lamp on the PWR SW goes

OFF.

END

START

Extract the PWR SW card to be replaced

from the ISWM.

On the new PWR SW card, set the SW key DOWN.

On the PWR SW (PH-PW14) card, set the

SW key DOWN.

Insert the new PWR SW card into the ISWM.

On the new PWR SW card, set the SW key UP.

CHAPTER 4 NDA-24307

Page 346

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

5. FAN UNIT REPLACEMENT

This section explains how to replace the Fan Unit (FANU), which is fastened on the TOPU or inside the

dedicated fan box within the system. Because the fan is a vital device to protect the system from heated air, it

is recommended that the fan (a total of three per unit) be replaced at least every two years to guarantee its high

performance.

The mounting location of FANU differs, depending on the module configuration of each cabinet. When the

system consists of a total of three modules or less, the FANU is mounted on the TOPU of the cabinet.

Otherwise, the FANU is housed in the dedicated fan box in the center of the cabinet.

Figure 4-17 FANU Locations

Replacement Procedure: FANU on TOPU

When the FANU is mounted on the TOPU, perform the following replacement procedure. (Refer to Figure 4-

18.):

STEP 1 Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove the four screws. Lift away the top cover.

STEP 2 Turn OFF the PWR SW on the PZ-M369.

STEP 3 Remove the fan fuse (5A) on the PZ-M369.

STEP 4 Remove the fan cables from the fan connector and the connector(s) corresponding to the fan to

be replaced (for example, when replacing fan 0, disconnect the FC0 connector together with

the fan connector).

/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

NEC

NEAX 2400 IMX

TOPU

NEC

NEAX 2400 IMX

TOPU

FAN BOX

located here.

FANU is

When FANU is mounted on TOPU When FANU is mounted in FAN BOX

FRONT VIEW

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 4

Page 347

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

Figure 4-18 Preparation for FANU Replacement (Fans on TOPU)

STEP 5 Remove the four screws fastening the fan to be replaced. Refer to Figure 4-19.

Note: The removed screws are used in STEP 7 again. Do not dispose of them when unscrewing the fan here.

PBX

NEC

NEAX 2400 IMS

NEC

Top Cover

Unscrew the top cover by using

a Phillips Screwdriver and

remove it from the TOPU.

...

.........

..............

.............. ...................

...................

........

.....

FANU

PZ-M369

TH2 FAN TALM1 TALM0

TH1 TH0 FC0 FC1 FC2

PZ-M369

OFF

Auto

FC2 FC1 FC0

OFF

1 Turn PWR SW "OFF"

3 Disconnect the cable(s) and

the connector(s) here used for

the FAN to be replaced.

2 Remove this FAN fuse.

3 Disconnect the FAN cable

from this power connector.

CHAPTER 4 NDA-24307

Page 348

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

STEP 6 Remove the unscrewed fan from the FANU.

STEP 7 Fasten the new fan with the removed screws.

STEP 8 Connect the new fan cables to the fan connector and the connector(s) disconnected in STEP 4.

STEP 9 Fix the fan fuse (5A) onto the PZ-M369.

STEP 10 Set the PWR SW on the PZ-M369 to the AUTO position.

Note: The switch setting of the PWR SW can be ON, depending on the location conditions of the system.

STEP 11 Attach the top cover again to the original location.

Figure 4-19 How to Replace FANU (Fans on TOPU)

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

.........

..............

.............. ...................

...................

........

.....

FANU

(FAN)

TOPU

PBX

PZ-M369

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 4

Page 349

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

Replacement Procedure: FANU in Fan Box

When the FANU is mounted in the fan box, perform the following replacement procedures:

STEP 1 Remove the front cover of the fan box. Then, extract the FANU.

STEP 2 Turn OFF the PWR SW on the PZ-M369. (Refer to Figure 4-20.)

STEP 3 Remove the fan fuse (5A) on the PZ-M369.

STEP 4 Remove the fan cables from the fan connector and the connector(s) corresponding to the fan to

be replaced (for example, when replacing Fan 1, disconnect the FC0 connector together with

the fan connector).

Figure 4-20 Preparation for FANU Replacement (Fans in Fan Box)

NEC

NEAX 2400 IMS

PBX

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

FAN BOX

Front Cover

Remove the Front Cover

and pull out the FANU.

PZ-M369

TH2 FAN TALM1 TALM0

TH1 TH0 FC0 FC1 FC2

These dotted squares indicate the fans.

They reside in the back side of PZ-M369. PZ-M369

OFF

Auto

FC0 FC1 FC2

OFF

1 Turn PWR SW OFF

3 Disconnect the FAN cable(s) and

the connector(s) here used for the

FAN to be replaced.

3 Disconnect the FAN cable

from this connector.

2 Remove this FAN fuse.

CHAPTER 4 NDA-24307

Page 350

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

STEP 5 Take off the four screws fastening the fan to be replaced. (Refer to Figure 4-21.)

Note: The removed screws are used in STEP 7 again. Do not dispose of them when unscrewing the fan here.

STEP 6 Remove the unscrewed fan from the FANU.

STEP 7 Fasten the new fan with the removed screws.

STEP 8 Connect the new fan cables to the fan connector and the connector(s) disconnected in STEP 4.

STEP 9 Fix the fan fuse (5A) again onto the PZ-M369.

STEP 10 Insert the FANU into the fan box and fasten it with the two screws.

STEP 11 Set the PWR SW on the PZ-M369 to the AUTO position.

Note: The switch setting of the PWR SW can be ON, depending on the location conditions of the system.

STEP 12 Attach the front cover to the original location.

Figure 4-21 How to Replace FANU (Fans in Fan Box)

FAN BOX

(FAN)

FAN power cable

FAN BOX

PBX

FAN power cable

(FAN)

PZ-M369

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 4

Page 351

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

6. CPR COOLING FAN REPLACEMENT

This section explains how to replace a Cooling Fan in the back side of the CPR. This procedure is necessary

when a fault is detected in the Cooling Fan. Because the fan is a vital device to protect the CPR from heated

air, it is also recommended that the fan be replaced at least every two years, even if a fault is not detected.

STEP 1 Set the CPU, whose rack houses the fan to be replaced, in STBY mode via the MBR key on

the DSP (Refer to Figure 4-22.) Note

Note: For the ACT/STBY changeover of the CPU, see Chapter 6.

STEP 2 Disconnect the power alarm cable from the PALM connector on PZ-PW92.

STEP 3 Turn OFF the PWR SW on the PZ-PW92 (Refer to Figure 4-22.)

Figure 4-22 CPR Face Layout

STEP 4 Disconnect the power, bus, and Ethernet cables from the relevant connectors.

•Power cables from OUTPWR, INPWR connectors on PZ-PW92

•Bus cables from the front connectors on PZ-GT13/PZ-GT20

•Ethernet (UTP CTG5 ST CA-n) cables from the front connectors on the PZ-PC19.

STEP 5 Remove the front bracket, and then take off the four screws fastened onto the CPU. (Refer to

Figure 4-23.)

STEP 6 Extract the CPR from the LPM. (Refer to Figure 4-23.)

12345678

OFF

12345678

OFF

1234

OFF

MBR

FDD

OFF

OUT PWR

IN PWR

HDD

SW MB

SYSTEM SELECT0

SENSE

SYSTEM SELECT1

SYSTEM SELECT2 CPURST

SLOT No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6

STATUS

IMG1 IMG2 IMG3

CPUOPE WDT IMG0

PZ-IO27

PZ-PW92 PZ-PC19 (LANI) PZ-GT20 (ISAGT)

PZ-GT13 (ISAGT)

PALM

Note 1

Note 2

Note 1: PZ-GT20 is located in LN only.

Note 2: In place of PZ-I027, the CPR may be equipped with PZ-I028 which does not have the MB key.

CHAPTER 4 NDA-24307

Page 352

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

Figure 4-23 Extraction of CPR from LPM

STEP 7 Disconnect the fan cable from the connector in the backbone of CPR.

Note: The Cooling Fan is located in the backbone of CPR and the cable connector lies in its right side. Refer

to Figure 4-24.

Figure 4-24 Rear View of CPR

STEP 8 Loosen the two screws fastening the box that contains the fan inside. Slightly lift the box and

remove it from the CPR. Refer to Figure 4-24 and Figure 4-25.

..........

12345678

1234

SLOT No. 0123456

..........

12345678

1234

SLOT No. 0123456

CPR

LPM

PBX

By using the Phillips screwdriver, remove the four screws. Then, extract the CPR with particular care.

Connector for Cooling FAN Cable

CPR

PZ-M14

Cooling FAN

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 4

Page 353

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

STEP 9 Take off the four screws and remove the Cooling Fan from the CPR. Refer to Figure 4-25.

STEP 10 Fasten the new Cooling Fan and CPR with the removed screws. Then, connect the fan cable

again. Refer to Figure 4-25.

STEP 11 Connect the fan cable again and insert the CPR back into the LPM. Refer to Figure 4-23 and

Figure 4-24.

STEP 12 Fasten the CPR and LPM with the four screws.

STEP 13 Connect the disconnected power, bus, and Ethernet cables to the relevant connectors.

STEP 14 Turn ON the SW key on the PZ-PW92.

STEP 15 Connect the disconnected power alarm cable to the PALM connector on the PZ-PW92.

STEP 16 Analyze the indicated system message. The message displayed when the PWR SW on the PZ-

PW92 was turned OFF.

STEP 17 Clear the indicated ALM and confirm that the ALM lamp is lit again, indicating that the

Cooling Fan is replaced securely.

Figure 4-25 How to Remove the Cooling Fan

CPR

FRONT

REAR

Loosen, not remove, the screws.

CHAPTER 4 NDA-24307

Page 354

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

7. FUSE REPLACEMENT

The system uses the fuses shown in Figure 4-26 as a protection against an overload resulting from a short

circuit.

Figure 4-26 Kind of Fuse

When excessive current is applied to a PWR circuit card, the related fuse is blown. The blown fuse after a fault

can be confirmed as shown in Figure 4-27.

Figure 4-27 Fuse After Blown Fault

The purpose of fuses is to let them blow before the components are damaged. If any fuse gets blown, replace

it immediately with a new one using the following procedure:

(1) Confirm the blown fuse via the system message [6-A] or MJ lamp on the top of IMG 0/ISW.

(2) Replace the fuse with a new one, referring to Figure 4-28 and Figure 4-29.

(3) Determine the cause of the blown fault, referring to Figure 4-30 (case of RGU fuse) or Figure 4-31 (DC-

48V fuse.)

1.5A

12.5V

25A

If a fuse is blown,

this area turns white.

A normal fuse A fuse after blown fault

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 4

Page 355

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

The following figures show the location of fuses within the system. In the figures, the fuses are indicated

by or .

Figure 4-28 Fuse Locations in LPM/PIM/FANU/BASEU

PIM

LPM

Note

NEC

NEAX 2400 IMS

PZ-M377

3.2A 5.0A

PZ-M369

5.0A

..........

PZ-PW92

5.0A

25A

PA-PW54-A/

PA-PW55-A/

5.0A

0.5A

25A

PBX [Front View]

PA-PW54-B

PA-PW55-B

5.0A

0.5A

25A

CHAPTER 4 NDA-24307

Page 356

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

In the TSWM, the fuse shown in Figure 4-29 is used for the PWR SW (PH-PW14) card, which is housed in

Slot No. 00 and/or 01.

Note: The PH-PW14 card is also used in Slot No. 00 and/or 01 of ISWM.

Figure 4-29 Fuse Location on PWR SW Card (TSWM/ISWM)

PH-PW14

(PWR SW)

FUSE: 15A

TSWM

PBX (IMG1/2)

Front View

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 4

Page 357

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

Perform the procedure in Figure 4-30 to confirm the cause of the RGU fuse blown fault.

Figure 4-30 RGU Fuse Blown Fault Flowchart

Start

Visual check: No pin contacting

or backboard melting?

OPE Lamp (green) of

each LC card remains lit?

Replace the blown fuse with a new

one. The fuse is blown again?

Yes

1. Turn ON (UP) the MB key

on the LC card.

2. Remove the card from the PIM.

3. Replace the fuse with a new one.

Turn ON (UP) the MB

keys on all LC cards,

and remove them from the

PIM. (Only PWR cards are

inside the PIM) Turn ON (UP) the MB

keys on the whole LC cards,

and remove them from the

PIM. (Only PWR cards are

inside the PIM)

The replaced fuse

is blown again?

Perform station-to-station

connections within the PIM.

Is any fuse blown?

Perform station-to-station

connections within the PIM.

Is any fuse blown?

Yes

Fault in LC card that accompanied

the fuse blowing.

Fault of LC card that accompanied

the fuse blowing.

Probable Cause: Not confirmed.

Needs further observation of the fault

There is a short circuit

on the backboard of the PIM.

Fault in LC card that accompanied

the fuse blowing.

Fault of PWR card.

Perform system initialization

after inserting all removed cards.

Fault of LC card

that was removed

Replace the blown fuse

with a new one.

Replace the blown fuse

with a new one.

Replace the PWR card

Yes

Insert the removed cards

one by one (into the PIM).

Is any fuse blown?

The replaced fuse is

blown again?

Fuse is still blown?

No Yes

The replaced fuse

is blown again?

CHAPTER 4 NDA-24307

Page 358

Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

Perform the procedure in Figure 4-31 to confirm the cause of the DC-48V fuse blown fault.

Figure 4-31 DC -48V Fuse Blown Fault Flowchart

Start

Visual check: No pin contacting

or backboard melting?

OPE Lamps (green) of

LC/TRK/NCU cards remain lit?

Make sure in which module

the fuse has blown

1. Turn ON (UP) the MB key

on the circuit card.

2. Remove the card from the PIM.

3. Replace the fuse with a new one.

Turn ON (UP) the MB

keys on the whole circuit

cards, and remove them from

the PIM. (Only PWR cards

are inside the PIM)

Turn ON (UP) the MB

keys on the whole circuit

cards, and remove them from

the PIM. (Only PWR cards

are inside the PIM)

The replaced fuse

is blown again? No

Fault of circuit card that

accompanied the fuse blown.

Perform system initialization

after inserting all removed cards.

Fault of circuit card

that was removed

Replace the blown fuse

with a new one.

Replace the blown fuse

with a new one.

Yes

Insert the removed cards

one by one (into the PIM).

Is there any fuse blowing?

The replaced fuse

is blown again?

The fuse is still blown?

There is a short circuit on the

backboard of the PIM.

Fault of PWR card.

Replace the PWR card

Yes

LPM / TSWM / ISWM / PIM

Fault of circuit card that

accompanied the fuse blown.

Perform system initialization

after inserting all removed cards.

Yes

Insert the removed cards

one by one (into the PIM).

Is any fuse blown?

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 5

Page 359

Issue 1

CHAPTER 5 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

This chapter provides information on how to repair the fault(s) within the system. If any of the components or

equipment listed in Table 5-1 has a failure, move on to the repair procedure explained for each faulty condition.

Table 5-1 Fault Repair Procedure Quick Referenc e

FAULTY ITEM FAULTY SITUATION REFERENCE SECTION

Line Fault DP/PB Telephone Dial tone is not heard. Section 1.3, Line Fault - When Dial

Tone (DT) Cannot Be Heard

Dialing results in a wrong

connection. Section 1.4, Line Fault - When

Dialing Results in a Wrong

Connection

Bell does not ring. Section 1.5, Line Fault - When Bell

Does Not Ring

Answer/speech cannot be

made. Section 1.6, When Call Cannot Be

Answered and Speech Cannot Be

Made

Dterm •Dterm cannot be operated.

•Operations are abnormal.

Section 1.7, Dterm Fault

Trunk Fault •No connections can be set up.

•PB/DP signals are erroneously received or set out

from ORT/SND.

•No three-way calling can be made on CFT, or noise

gets in a established connection.

•A connection results in no speech.

•Noise gets in a established connection.

Section 2.3, Trunk (ORT, SND,

CFT) Fault and Section 2.4, Trunk

(COT, TLT, DTI) Fault

ATTCON/DESKCON •No speech can be made.

•No control operations can be made.

Section 3.3, ATTCON/DESKCON

Fault

Unit Fault Faults related to speech. Section 4.2, Unit Fault - Fault

Related to Speech

Dial tone is not heard. Section 4.3, Unit Fault - When Dial

Tone (DT) Cannot Be Heard

The ACT MUX card side has become faulty and system

changeover has been executed. Section 4.4, Unit Fault - ACT-Side

MUX Card Is Faulty and System

Has Changed Over

CHAPTER 5 NDA-24307

Page 360

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

Speech System Fault

(LN) Faults related to speech. Section 5.2, Speech Path System

Fault - Fault Related to Speech

Dial tone is not heard. Section 5.3, Speech Path System

Fault - When Dial Tone (DT)

Cannot Be Heard

STBY side is faulty. Section 5.4, Speech Path System

Fault (LN) - STBY Side Has

Become Faulty

Speech Path System Fault

(Whole System/ISW) Fault related to speech. Section 6.2, Speech Path System

Fault (Whole System/ISW) - Fault

Related to Speech

ACT side becomes faulty intermittently. Section 6.3, Speech Path System

Fault (Whole System/ISW) - ACT

side becomes Faulty Intermittently

STBY side becomes faulty intermittently. Section 6.4, Speech Path System

Fault (Whole System/ISW) - STBY

side becomes Faulty Intermittently

Clock is faulty. Section 6.5, PLO Fault

Control System Fault Fault occurs occasionally at the ACT side. Section 7.2, Control System Fault -

Fault Occurs Intermittently

STBY side is faulty. Section 7.3, Control System Fault -

STBY Side is Faulty

Alarm Indication Fault No fault indication is made on the Alarm Indicator

Panel. Section 8.2, Fault of Alarm

Indicating Panel

Fault is not detected. Section 8.3, Fault That Cannot Be

Detected

Power Supply Fault Fuse for RGU/-48V has blown. Section 9.2, Fuse Blown Fault

The circuit breaker of PWR supply is off. Section 9.3, Circuit Breaker OFF

Fault in PWR Supply

Alarm lamp on the PWR supply is lit. Section 9.4, Fault of Alarm Lamps

on PWR Supply

Fan Unit (FANU) Fault •Fans are not activated even if the temperature has

risen higher than a predetermined degree.

•Fans are not activated even if the FAN START switch

is set to AUTO position.

Section 10.2, Fan Unit Fault

Tone Fault Tone is distorted. Section 11.2, Tone Fault

Table 5-1 Fault Repair Procedure Quick Reference (Continued)

FAULTY ITEM FAULTY SITUATION REFERENCE SECTION

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 5

Page 361

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

System Down Fault Cause for the fault cannot be identified. Section 12.1, When Cause for Fault

Cannot Be Identified

The faulty circuit card can be detected. Section 12.2, When Faulty Circuit

Cards Can Be Assumed From

System Message

CCIS Line Fault •A Specific CCH/CCT card is faulty. When the signal

transmission line is a digital line, transmission/

receiving of control signals cannot be performed.

•When the signal transmission line is an analog line,

transmission/receiving of control signals cannot be

performed.

Section 13.3, Specific CCH/CCT

Card Is Faulty and

Section 13.4, Fault of CCH, DTI

and Related Flat Cable

ISDN Line Fault •A specific DCH/PRT card is faulty.

•When the signal transmission line is a digital line,

transmission/receiving of control signals cannot be

performed.

Section 14.3, Specific DCH/PRT

Card Is Faulty

Section 14.4, Fault of DCH, DTI

and Related Flat Cable

Hard Time Clock Fault EMA card is faulty. Section 15, Hard Time Clock Fault

Table 5-1 Fault Repair Procedure Quick Reference (Continued)

FAULTY ITEM FAULTY SITUATION REFERENCE SECTION

CHAPTER 5 NDA-24307

Page 362

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

1. LINE FAULT

This section explains the fault repair procedure in a case where only one specific station line is in any of the

faulty conditions listed in Table 5-2.

Table 5-2 Line Fault Situation

FAULTY SITUATION REFERENCE SECTION

When Dial Tone cannot be heard Section 1.3, Line Fault - When Dial Tone (DT) Cannot Be Heard

When dialing results in a wrong connection Section 1.4, Line Fault - When Dialing Results in a Wrong

Connection

When the bell does not ring Section 1.5, Line Fault - When Bell Does Not Ring

When call cannot be answered and speech cannot be

made Section 1.6, When Call Cannot Be Answered and Speech

Cannot Be Made

Dterm Fault Section 1.7, Dterm Fault

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 5

Page 363

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

1.1 Check Point

When repairing a line fault, consider the following items:

(1) Check alarm lamps on line circuit cards.

(2) When an outgoing call cannot be originated to a specific line/trunk or when an incoming call cannot be

terminated from a specific line/trunk, check Tenant Restriction Data (assigned via ATNR command) and

Route Restriction Data (assigned via ARSC/ARSCN command).

1.2 Line Control

Each line in a specific Line circuit (LC/ELC) card is controlled by the PM in that line circuit card. The

line circuit cards are controlled from the CPU via the MUX. Figure 5-1 shows the control route of line

circuit cards.

CHAPTER 5 NDA-24307

Page 364

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

Figure 5-1 Controlling LC/ELC Circuit Cards and Speech Path

Control Signal

MDF

Ordinary Telephone/D

Control Signal LT Cable

LT Cable

LC/ELC

LT Cable

Ordinary Telephone/D

Control Signal

LC/ELC

Ordinary Telephone/D

LT Cable

LC/ELC

Ordinary Telephone/D

Control Signal LT Cable

LT Cable

LC/ELC

CPR

(LN0)

LANI

CPU

To LN1 To LN2 To LN3

CPR

ISAGT

LANI

CPU

HSW

ISW

IMG0/1 (LN0)

IMG2/3 (LN0)

MUX

TSW00/TSW01

(TSW10/TSW11)

TSW02/TSW03

(TSW12/TSW13)

TSW02/TSW03

(TSW12/TSW13)

TSW00/TSW01

(TSW10/TSW11)

TSW01(11) TSW02(12) TSW03(13)

IOGT

TSW00(10)

Ether

ISAGT-A ISAGT-B

Control Signal

ISW-LN TSW CA-n

Cables

Control Signal

: Circuit Card

: Speech Path

< LN: Local Node >

TSW

MUX

ISAGT-A

ISAGT-B

LANI

< ISW: Inter-node Switch >

TSW

HSW

IOGT

ISAGT

LANI

: PH-SW12

: PH-PC36

: PH-GT09

: PZ-GT13

: PZ-GT20

: PZ-PC19

: PU-SW00

: PU-SW01

: PH-GT10

: PZ-GT13

: PZ-PC19

term

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 5

Page 365

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

1.3 Line Fault - When Dial Tone (DT) Cannot Be Heard

Note: If a circuit card is replaced because only one line is

faulty, no other lines in that circuit card can be used

until the replacement is complete.

When OPE lamp on the LC circuit card

does not illuminate Confirm MB switch of the LC circuit card is in

ON position (UP).

Use ASDT command to confirm that station

data in the LC circuit card is assigned.

Replace the LC circuit card with a spare.

When BL lamp for each line is flashing or

illuminating on the LC circuit card Confirm MB switch of the LC circuit card is in

ON position (UP side).

Use MBST command to confirm LC circuit

card has not been placed into make-busy state.

Use ASDT command to check the station data

assignment.

Replace the LC circuit card with a spare.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

START

CHAPTER 5 NDA-24307

Page 366

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

Check the faulty line on the MDF. Isolate the faulty line to the in-house wiring

side and to the system side.

Connect the test telephone to the system side

and check to see if dial tone can be heard.

When Dial Tone (DT) is heard Check the in-house wirings.

Replace the station telephone set with a spare.

When no DT or side tone is

heard Check LT cables.

Replace the LC circuit card with a spare.

When DT is not heard, but side

tone can be heard. Replace the LC circuit card with a spare.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

END

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 5

Page 367

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

1.4 Line Fault - When Dialing Results in a Wrong Connection

Note: If a circuit card is replaced because only one line is

faulty, no other lines in that circuit card can be used

until the replacement is complete.

When a call addressed to a specific station

has terminated to another station Check to see if Call Forwarding-All Calls data

has been deleted.

Check the faulty line on the MDF. On the MDF, isolate the faulty line to the in-

house wiring side and to the system side.

Connect the test telephone to the system side.

Repeat station-to-station connections and

check to see if the connection is established

normally.

When the dialed station is called The station telephone set is faulty. Replace the

station telephone set with a spare.

When a wrong connection

occurs Replace the LC circuit card with a spare.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

START

END

CHAPTER 5 NDA-24307

Page 368

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

1.5 Line Fault - When Bell Does Not Ring

Note: If a circuit card is replaced because only one line is

faulty, no other lines in that circuit card can be used

until the replacement is complete.

Call the faulty station line by Station-to-

Station calling and check to see if the bell

of the telephone rings.

Replace the telephone set and check to see if

its bell rings.

Check the faulty line on the MDF. Isolate the faulty line to the in-house wiring

side and to the system side.

Connect the test telephone to the system side.

Call the faulty line by station-to-station

calling and check to see if the bell rings.

When the bell does not ring Replace the LC circuit card with a spare.

When the bell rings The in-house wiring side is faulty. Confirm

that the A wire is not short-circuiting with

ground.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

START

END

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 5

Page 369

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

1.6 When Call Cannot Be Answered and Speech Cannot Be Made

Note: If a circuit card is replaced because only one line is

faulty, no other lines in that circuit card can be used

until the replacement is complete.

Check the faulty line on the MDF. Isolate the faulty line to the in-house wiring

side and to the system side.

Connect the test telephone to the system side.

Call the faulty line by station-to-station

calling.

When speech can be made Replace the telephone set with a spare.

When speech cannot be made Replace the LC circuit card with a spare.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

START

END

CHAPTER 5 NDA-24307

Page 370

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

1.7 Dterm Fault

Note 1: If a circuit card is replaced because only one line

is faulty, no other lines in that circuit card can be

used until the replacement is complete.

When OPE lamp on the ELC circuit card

does not illuminate Confirm that MB switch of the ELC circuit

card is in ON position (UP).

Use ASDT command to confirm that station

data in the ELC circuit card is assigned.

Replace the ELC circuit card with a spare.

When BL lamp for each line is flashing or

illuminating on the ELC circuit card Confirm that MB switch of the ELC circuit

card is in ON position (UP).

Use MBST command to confirm that ELC

circuit card has not been placed into make-

busy state.

Use ASDT command to check the station data

assignment.

Replace the ELC circuit card with a spare.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

END

START

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 5

Page 371

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

Check the faulty line on the MDF. Isolate the faulty line to the in-house wiring side

and to the system side.

Connect the test Dterm to the system side.

Confirm speech by Station to Station calling.

When no speech can be made Check LT cables.

Replace ELC circuit card with a spare.

When speech can be made Check to see if the modular plug is firmly

connected with the Dterm.

Check the wiring inside the rosette.

Check the in-house wiring for any abnormality.

Replace the Dterm with a spare.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

END

CHAPTER 5 NDA-24307

Page 372

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

2. TRUNK FAULT

This paragraph explains the fault repair procedure when a fault, shown in Table 5-3, has occurred to a specific

trunk.

2.1 Check Point

When repairing a trunk fault, consider the following items:

(1) Check alarm lamps on trunk circuit cards.

(2) When an outgoing call cannot be originated to a specific trunk or when an incoming call cannot be

terminated from a specific trunk, check Tenant Restriction Data (assigned via ATNR command) and

Route Restriction Data (assigned via ARSC/ARSCN command).

(3) Three-Way Conference Trunk (CFT) is on the MUX (PH-PC36) circuit cards. If a three-way conference

call cannot be established, check the MUX cards.

(4) If the present timing for supervising the trunk/sender status is considered to be responsible for the fault,

change the timing. The specifications for timings that can be changed with respect to trunks and senders

are shown in Table 5-4 and Table 5-5.

Table 5-3 Trunk Fault Situation

TRUNK FAULTY SITUATION REFERENCE SECTION

ORT No connection can be set up.

PB/DP signals are erroneously received or cannot be received. Section 2.3, Trunk (ORT, SND,

CFT) Fault

SND No connections can be set up.

PB/DP signals are erroneously sent out or cannot be sent out.

CFT No connections can be set up.

No three-way calling can be made.

Noise gets in a established connection.

COT

TLT

DTI

No connections can be set up.

A connection results in no speech.

Noise gets in an established connection.

Section 2.4, Trunk (COT, TLT, DTI)

Fault

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 5

Page 373

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

Table 5-4 Timings for Trunks

ITEMS FOR STATUS

SUPERVISION CONDITIONS FOR SUPERVISION TIMING SPECIFICATIONS

1 Detection of Call

Termination •Ring Down System

Detection by ringing signal (20Hz) from

the opposite office.

•Loop System

Detection by loop from the opposite office.

•E&M System

Detection by incoming signal (ground or

–48V) on E (RG2) lead.

Ringing signal of more than four

cycles is detected within 800 ms.

Detection within 16 ms after call

termination.

2 Acknowledge Signal

Sending •Wink Signal

•Delay Start

160 ms (standard)

Timing can be assigned using ARTD/

ARTDN command.

3 Detection of Release at the

time of Incoming

Connection

•E&M System

•Loop System

288 ms (standard)

160 ms (standard)

Timing can be assigned using ARTD/

ARTDN command.

4 Timing for Restricting Call

Origination after Release After release of the user’s trunk or the trunk at

the opposite office has been detected, a new

call origination is restricted.

3070 ms (standard)

Timing can be assigned using ARTD/

ARTDN command.

5 Seizure of Opposite Office •Loop System

Closure of DC loop.

•E&M System

Supply of outgoing call signal (ground or

–48V) onto M (DL) lead.

6 Detection of Acknowledge

Signal •Wink Signal

•Delay Start

Timing is assigned using ARTD/

ARTDN command.

7 Trunk Hold Time Even if answer signal has not reached from the

opposite office, the call is regarded as

answered.

•If DP Signal is 10 sec. (standard)

after dial pulses are sent out

Timing can be assigned using

ARTD/ARTDN command.

•If PB Signal is 30 sec. (standard)

after seizure of the trunk

Timing can be assigned using

ASYD SYS 1 Index 156 (only

when 2nd Dial Tone System).

8 Detection of Release at the

time of Outgoing

Connection

•Loop System

Detection of polarity reversal across tip and

ring.

•E&M System

Detection of Release Signal (ground or

–48V) on E lead.

608 ms (standard)

Timing can be assigned using ARTD/

ARTDN command.

CHAPTER 5 NDA-24307

Page 374

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

Table 5-5 Timings for Senders

ITEMS FOR STATUS

SUPERVISION CONDITIONS FOR SUPERVISION TIMING SPECIFICATIONS

1 Sender Acknowledge Wait

Timer Timing limit for waiting to receive connection

acknowledgement signal from the opposite

office after seizing the opposite office.

4 sec. (standard)

Timing can be assigned using ASYD

SYS 1 Index 130 command.

2 Sender Prepause Timer Time from sender seizure till sending of the

1st digit where connection acknowledgment is

made by interface with the opposite office.

DP: 3 sec. (standard)

PB: 2.5 sec. (standard)

Timing can be assigned using ASYD

SYS 1 Index 131 command.

3 Sender Inter-digit Timer Inter-digit timing for the numbers to be sent

out by the sender. •For DP

10 pps: 860 ms (standard)

20 pps: 460 ms (standard)

Timing can be assigned using

ASYD SYS 1 Index. 132

command.

•For PB

60 ms/120 ms (to be selected by

ONSG of ARTD/ARTDN

command.)

Timing can be changed using

ASYD SYS 1 Index 133

command.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 5

Page 375

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

2.2 Trunk Control

Trunk circuit cards are controlled from the CPU via the MUX. Each trunk line in a specific trunk circuit

card is controlled by the Port Microprocessor (PM) in a trunk circuit card. Figure 5-2 shows the control

route of the trunk circuit card.

Figure 5-2 Controlling Trunk Circuit Cards and Speech Path

Control Signal

MDF

TRK

Control Signal

ORT/SND

LT Cable

TRK

Control Signal

COT/TLT

TRK

ORT/SND

TRK

Control Signal LT Cable

LT Cable

COT/TLT

CPR

(LN0)

LANI

CPU

To LN1 To LN2 To LN3

CPR

ISAGT

LANI

CPU

HSW

ISW

IMG0/1 (LN0)

IMG2/3 (LN0)

MUX

TSW00/TSW01

(TSW10/TSW11)

TSW02/TSW03

(TSW12/TSW13)

TSW02/TSW03

(TSW12/TSW13)

TSW00/TSW01

(TSW10/TSW11)

TSW01(11) TSW02(12) TSW03(13)

IOGT

TSW00(10)

Ether

ISAGT-A ISAGT-B

Control Signal

ISW-LN TSW CA-n

Cables

Control Signal

: Circuit Card

: Speech Path

< LN: Local Node >

TSW

MUX

ISAGT-A

ISAGT-B

LANI

< ISW: Inter-node Switch >

TSW

HSW

IOGT

ISAGT

LANI

: PH-SW12

: PH-PC36

: PH-GT09

: PZ-GT13

: PZ-GT20

: PZ-PC19

: PU-SW00

: PU-SW01

: PH-GT10

: PZ-GT13

: PZ-PC19

Network

CFT

Note

Note: Eight CFTs are provided on the MUX

(PH-PC36) cards.

CHAPTER 5 NDA-24307

Page 376

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

2.3 Trunk (ORT, SND, CFT) Fault

Note: If a circuit card is replaced because only one line is faulty, no

other lines in that circuit card can be used until the

replacement is complete.

When only one line is faulty Place the faulty line into make-busy state.

For ORT/SND, set MB switch of

each circuit to ON position.

For CFT, place it into make-busy

state using command MBTK.

Replace the circuit card with spare. Set MB switch UP and extract the circuit card

from its mounting slot.

Set MB switch of the new circuit card UP and

insert the circuit card into its mounting slot.

Set MB switch DOWN.

If the line is under make-busy state, cancel it.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

START

END

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 5

Page 377

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

2.4 Trunk (COT, TLT, DTI) Fault

Note 1: If a circuit card is replaced because only one line

is faulty, any other lines in that circuit card cannot

be used until the replacement is complete.

Note 2: If the polarities of the external line is reversed, it

is detected in the form of Trunk Ineffective Hold.

When OPE lamp on the trunk circuit card

does not illuminate Confirm that MB switch of the trunk circuit

card is in ON position (UP side).

Use ATRK command to confirm that trunk

data in the trunk circuit card is assigned.

Replace trunk circuit card with a spare.

When BL lamp is flashing or illuminating

on the trunk circuit card Confirm that MB switch of trunk circuit card

is in ON position (UP side).

Use MBTK command to confirm that trunk

circuit card has not been placed into make-

busy state.

Use ATRK command to check trunk data

assignment.

Replace trunk circuit card with a spare.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

START

CHAPTER 5 NDA-24307

Page 378

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

Check the faulty line on the MDF. If the C.O./Tie Line is in Loop Start system:

Isolate the faulty line to C.O. side and

to the system side.

Connect the test telephone to the C.O.

side.

Note 3: Check can be made

only on temporarily

opened C.O./Tie Lines.

Confirm that Dial Tone (DT) is heard

and the call is connected to the

destination party at the opposite

office.

Note 4: Cross connection

methods are explained

on the following pages.

If C.O./Tie Line is any other type than Loop

Start:

By cross connections on the MDF,

connect the faulty line to a normal

trunk.

By a designated connection from the

ATTCON/DESKCON, seize the

trunk connected with the faulty line.

When the connection is not set up,

the C.O./Tie Line is faulty After the trunk has been seized, check

to see if a call can be originated.

When the connection is set up Replace the Dterm with a spare.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

END

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 5

Page 379

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

Note: When performing loop-back connection tests on the trunks at the user’s office,

provide cross connection as follows:

(1) For a COT

•Set up a loop-back connection between the C.O. Trunk (COT) to be tested and station line.

•The trunk route must be assigned for Loop Start.

(2) For a TLT (for DID)

•Set up a loop-back connection between the Tie Line Trunk (TLT) to be tested and another TLT.

•If the TLT is a Direct Inward Dialing (DID) Trunk, connect the related leads as shown below:

•If the TLT is a 4-wire E & M System, connect the related leads as shown below:

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

COT

ATLT

BTLT

TLT RTLT

TLT

R R

Receive

Send TLT

Receive

Send

CHAPTER 5 NDA-24307

Page 380

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

•If the TLT is a 2W E & M System, connect the related leads as shown below:

(3) For a DTI

•Set up a loop-back connection between the DTI Trunk to be tested and another DTI Trunk as shown

below:

•When the loop-back test is performed at the time of PCM LOSS, FRM LOSS, or MERM LOSS alarm

lamp (red) illuminates. If the alarm lamp goes out, the DTI circuit card side is normal.

•When only one DTI circuit card is to be checked, make the following connections and confirm that

no alarm lamps illuminates.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

TLT RTLT

M M

ADTI

BDTI

DTI R R

Receive

Send

DTI

Receive

Send

DTI RB

Receive

Send

Loop-back

Cross Connection

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 5

Page 381

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

3. ATTCON/DESKCON FAULT

This section explains the fault repair procedure when a specific Attendant/Desk Console is in any of the

following faulty conditions.

•No speech can be made.

•No operations can be made.

3.1 Check Point

When repairing an ATTCON/DESKCON fault, consider the following items:

(1) Check the cable connections on the backplane.

(2) When replacing the ATI circuit card for master ATTCON/DESKCON, the system is placed under Night

Mode during replacement procedure.

(3) When replacing the master ATTCON/DESKCON, the system is placed under Night Mode during

replacement procedure.

3.2 ATTCON/DESKCON Control

Each ATTCON/DESKCON is controlled from an ATI (PA-CS33) circuit card. The ATI circuit card is

controlled from the CPU card via the INT on the TSW card. Figure 5-3 shows the control route of the ATI

circuit card.

The ATI (PA-CS33) circuit card is used as an interface card between the PBX and ATTCON/DESKCON.

The card is mounted in slot numbers 12 or 23.

CHAPTER 5 NDA-24307

Page 382

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

Figure 5-3 ATT Connector Cabling and Connector Leads Accommodation

LT5

LT11

PIM backplane

MDF ATTCON/

DESKCON

LT11 is used when PA-CS33 is mounted in slot 23.

LT5 is used when PA-CS33 is mounted in slot 12.

BN4801BN4800

BN4820 BN4821

TAS1B TAS1A

BN4810

BN4830 BN4831

BN4811

TAS0B TAS0A

B2 A2

B3 A3

PA-CS33 Pin Assignment

Installation Cable

for

ATTCON/

DESKCON 0

for

ATTCON/

DESKCON 1

for

ATTCON/

DESKCON 0

for

ATTCON/

DESKCON 1

0 - 1

Rosette

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 5

Page 383

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

3.3 ATTCON/DESKCON Fault

Note: No speech can be made. While replacement of the ATI circuit card for the master ATTCON/DESKCON is in progress,

the system is placed under Night Mode.

On the ATTCON/DESKCON, Lamp Check

(LCHK) key has been pressed but no lamps

have illuminated.

Check the ATT connector cable between the

ATTCON/DESKCON and the PBX.

When OPE lamp of the ATI (PA-CS33)

circuit card does not illuminate Check to see if MB switch of the ATI circuit

card is at ON position (UP side).

Use ATRK command to confirm that the trunk

data in the ATI circuit card are assigned.

Replace the ATI circuit card with a spare.

When BL lamp of the ATI circuit card is

flashing or illuminating Check to see if MB switch of the ATI circuit

card is at ON position (UP side).

Use MBTK command to see if ATI circuit card

is placed into MB state.

Use ATRK command to check ATI data

assignment.

Replace the ATI circuit card with a spare.

When keys cannot be operated Replace the operators headset.

Replace the ATI circuit card with a spare.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

START

END

CHAPTER 5 NDA-24307

Page 384

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

Note: No operations can be made.

Replace the ATTCON/DESKCON with a

spare. Set the MB switch of ATI PA-CS33 circuit

card UP.

If the circuit card is equipped with a fuse,

remove the fuse.

Disconnect the CHAMP connector of the

ATTCON/DESKCON and replace the

ATTCON/DESKCON.

If the circuit card is equipped with a fuse,

insert the fuse into its position.

Set the MB switch of the ATI circuit card

DOWN.

Confirm the PA lamp illuminates on the

ATTCON/DESKCON.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

START

END

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 5

Page 385

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

4. UNIT FAULT

This section explains the fault repair procedure in a case where any of the faults shown in Table 5-6, has

occurred to all the line/trunk circuit cards mounted in a specific unit. Figure 5-4 shows the range of units.

Figure 5-4 Range of Units (LN0/1/2/3)

Table 5-6 Unit Fault Situation

FAULT SITUATION REFERENCE SECTION

•Noise, one-way speech, no tone.

•Even if dialing has been made, dial tone does not stop. Section 4.2, Unit Fault - Fault Related to Speech

Dial Tone cannot be heard. Section 4.3, Unit Fault - When Dial Tone (DT)

Cannot Be Heard

The MUX card has become faulty and, as a result the CPU has been

changed over. Section 4.4, Unit Fault - ACT-Side MUX Card Is

Faulty and System Has Changed Over

FRONT VIEW

TOPU

IMG0

FANU

BASEU

LPM

MG01

MG00

TOPU

IMG2

FANU

BASEU

TSWM1

Unit 2 Unit 3

Unit 0 Unit 1

MG05

MG04

TOPU

IMG3

FANU

BASEU

DUMMY

Unit 2 Unit 3

Unit 0 Unit 1

MG07

MG06

TOPU

IMG1

FANU

BASEU

TSWM0

MG03

MG02

PIM3

PIM2

PIM1

PIM0

MUX (PH-PC36) 0

MUX (PH-PC36) 1

PWR

Unit No. = 0/2 Unit No. = 1/3

Slot No.

PIM

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Unit 2 Unit 3

Unit 0 Unit 1

Unit 2 Unit 3

Unit 0 Unit 1

Unit 2 Unit 3

Unit 0 Unit 1

Unit 2 Unit 3

Unit 0 Unit 1

Unit 2 Unit 3

Unit 0 Unit 1

Unit 2 Unit 3

Unit 0 Unit 1

LN0/1/2/3

CHAPTER 5 NDA-24307

Page 386

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

4.1 Check Point

When repairing a unit fault, consider the following items:

(1) Speech paths and control paths in the unit are connected to line/trunks via the MUX circuit cards. Be sure

to check the alarm lamps on the MUX circuit cards, and check to see if the front cable between each MUX

circuit card and TSW circuit card is connected correctly. Figure 5-5 and Figure 5-6 show the block

diagram within the unit.

(2) The MUX circuit cards are operating in the ACT/STBY modes under control of the CPU circuit. When

the ACT-side CPU has detected a fault in the ACT-side MUX circuit card, CPU changeover is executed

and the ACT/STBY mode of the Speech Path System is also changed over. When both of the MUX circuit

cards have become faulty, all the lines/trunks in that unit are placed into make-busy state. (If a PFT circuit

card is located in that specific unit, the PFT is activated.) Figure 5-7 shows the location of the MUX cards.

(3) When both units in a specific PIM are faulty, it is possible that the PWR circuit card mounted in that

specific PIM is faulty. In such a case, refer to Section 9, Power Supply Fault.

Figure 5-5 Unit Control Block Diagram (Dual Configuration)

MUX0

Clock

(B)

(A)

Speech

Path

TSW/INT

MUX1

LC/TRK

Line/

Trunk

Circuit Card

Control of

CPU No. 0

ACT/STBY of

CPU No. 0

Clock

(B)

Speech

Path

(A)

TSW/INT

Control of

CPU No. 1

ACT/STBY of

CPU No. 1

SYMBOLS

: Circuit Card

: Control on ACT/STBY of Speech Path Systems

: Control on ACT/STBY of Clock Systems

(A)

(B)

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 5

Page 387

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

Figure 5-6 Unit Control Block Diagram (Single Configuration)

Figure 5-7 MUX Card Locations (LN0/1/2/3)

LC/TRK

Line/

Trunk

Circuit Card

MUX X

TSW/

Clock

Speech

Path

(A)

Control of

CPU

MUX

MUX (PH-PC36) card is mounted

in Slot No. 13 and/or 14 of each

PIM.

MUX 0

MUX 1

UNIT = 2 UNIT = 3

PIM 3

IMG0/1/2/3

Front View

MUX 0

MUX 1

UNIT = 0 UNIT = 1

PIM 2

13 14

MUX 0

MUX 1

UNIT = 2 UNIT = 3

PIM 1

13 14

MUX 0

MUX 1

UNIT = 0 UNIT = 1

PIM 0

13 14

CHAPTER 5 NDA-24307

Page 388

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

4.2 Unit Fault - Fault Related to Speech

Faulty Situation:

•Noise, one-way speech, no tone, etc. occurs only within a unit.

•Even if dialing has started, dial tone does not stop.

(1) For Dual Configuration

Check by replacing the MUX (PH-PC36)

circuit card.

Replace the MUX circuit card referring to

Section 3.3.2, MUX Card Replacement

Procedure, Chapter 4.

After replacement of the MUX

circuit card, make a station-to-

station call in the faulty unit and

see if speech is normal.

Place the MUX circuit card into ACT mode.

Refer to Section 12, Chapter 6.

Check by replacing the TSW circuit card. Replace the TSW circuit card by referring to

Section 2.3.2, TSW Card Replacement

Procedure, Chapter 4.

After replacement of the TSW

circuit card, make a station-to-

station call in the faulty unit and

see if speech is normal.

Place the TSW circuit card into ACT mode.

Refer to Section 12, Chapter 6.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

START

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 5

Page 389

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

Check the line/trunk circuit cards mounted

in the unit to see if t ey are faulty.

Perform this check on an individual basis.

Set the MB switch of the line/trunk circuit card

UP and extract it from its mounting slot.

Make a station-to-station call and see if a fault

occurs.

If the fault has stopped occurring,

the circuit card extracted at that

time is faulty. Replace the circuit

card with a spare.

If the fault continues, check the

next circuit card.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

END

CHAPTER 5 NDA-24307

Page 390

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

(2) For Single Configuration

Check by replacing the MUX (PH-PC36)

circuit card. Replace the MUX circuit card by referring to

Section 3.3.2, MUX Card Replacement

Procedure, Chapter 4.

After replacement of the MUX

circuit card, make a station-to-

station call in the faulty unit and

see if speech is normal.

Check by replacing the TSW circuit card. Replace the TSW circuit card referring to

Section 2.3.2, TSW Card Replacement

Procedure, Chapter 4.

After replacement of the TSW

circuit card, make a station-to-

station call in the faulty unit and

see if speech is normal.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

START

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 5

Page 391

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

Check the line/trunk circuit cards mounted

in the unit to see if they are faulty.

Perform this check on an individual basis.

Set the MB switch of the line/trunk circuit

card UP and extract it from its mounting slot.

Make a station-to-station call and see if a fault

occurs.

If the fault has stopped, the

circuit card extracted at that time

is faulty. Replace the circuit card

with a spare.

If the fault continues, check the

next circuit card.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

END

CHAPTER 5 NDA-24307

Page 392

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

4.3 Unit Fault - When Dial Tone (DT) Cannot Be Heard

Faulty Situation:

•Dial Tone (DT) cannot be heard except within a unit.

•[4-T] Both MUX Failure / [4-S] MUX Ready Failure

•[23-Y] MUX Clock Failure

Note: For dual system configuration, if a system message indicates that both systems are faulty, first repair

the fault in the indicated system and then proceed to repair the PIM in the other system.

(1) For Dual Configuration

Check to see if the MUX (PH-PC36) circuit

card is making poor contact. Set the faulty MUX circuit card into STBY

mode. Refer to Section 12, Chapter 6.

Set the MB switch of the MUX circuit card UP.

Extract the MUX circuit card from its mounting

slot and clean the contact portion.

If cleaning cannot be done, repeat insertion and

extraction of the circuit card two or three times.

Set the MB switch of the MUX circuit card UP

and insert the circuit card into its mounting slot.

Set the MB switch of the MUX circuit card

DOWN.

Check to see if a station-to-station connection

can be set up within the faulty unit.

Check by replacing the MUX circuit card

with a spare. Place the faulty MUX circuit card into STBY

mode. Refer to Refer to Section 12, Chapter 6.

Replace the MUX circuit card. Refer to Section

3.3.2, MUX Card Replacement Procedure,

Chapter 4.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

START

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 5

Page 393

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

Place the MUX circuit card into ACT mode.

Refer to Section 12, Chapter 6.

Check to see if a station-to-station connection

can be set up to identify the circuit card

responsible for the fault.

Extract all the line/trunk circuit cards from

their mounting slots in the unit. Insert the

cards back into their slots one after another

and see if the dial tone is heard each time.

Extract all the line/trunk circuit cards from their

slots.

Note: Set the MB switch of the line/trunk

circuit card UP and extract.

Confirm the MUX ACT lamp on the MUX

circuit card illuminates.

Set the MB switch of an extracted line/trunk

circuit card UP and insert the circuit cards into

their mounting slots one by one.

Confirm the OPE lamp of the inserted circuit

card illuminates by setting the MB switch

DOWN.

If Dial Tone (DT) is heard, check

the next circuit card.

Make a station-to-station call and see if DT can

be heard.

Note: Perform this check on the rest of the

circuit cards by inserting them into

their slots individually.

If DT is not heard, replace the

circuit card with a spare.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

END

CHAPTER 5 NDA-24307

Page 394

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

(2) For Single Configuration

Check to see if the MUX (PH-PC36)

circuit card is making poor contact. Set the MB switch of the MUX circuit card UP.

Extract the MUX circuit card from its mounting

slot and clean the contact portion.

If cleaning cannot be done, repeat insertion and

extraction of the circuit card two or three times.

Set the MB switch of the MUX circuit card UP

and insert the circuit card into its mounting slot.

Set the MB switch of the MUX circuit card

DOWN.

Check to see if a station-to-station connection

can be set up within the faulty unit.

Check by replacing the MUX circuit card

with a spare. Replace the MUX circuit card referring to Sec-

tion 3.3.2, MUX Card Replacement Procedure,

Chapter 4.

Place the MUX circuit card into ACT mode.

Refer to Section 12, Chapter 6.

Check to see if a station-to-station connection

can be set up to identify a circuit card

responsible for the fault.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

START

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 5

Page 395

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

Extract all the line/trunk circuit cards from

their mounting slots in the unit. Insert the

cards back into their slots one after

another and see if the dial tone is heard

each time.

Extract all the line/trunk circuit cards from

their slots.

Note: Set the MB switch of the line/trunk

circuit card UP and extract.

Confirm the MUX ACT lamp on the MUX

circuit card illuminates.

Set the MB switch of an extracted Line/Trunk

circuit card UP and insert the circuit cards

into their mounting slots one by one.

Confirm the OPE lamp of the inserted circuit

card illuminates by setting the MB switch

DOWN.

Make a station-to-station call and see if DT is

heard.

Note: Perform this check on the reset of

the circuit cards by inserting them

into their slots individually.

If DT is heard, check the next

circuit card.

If DT is not heard, replace the

circuit card with a spare.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

END

CHAPTER 5 NDA-24307

Page 396

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

4.4 Unit Fault - ACT-Side MUX Card Is Faulty and System Has Changed Over

Faulty Situation:

•The ACT side has become faulty and the system changeover has executed in the

dual configuration system.

•[4-S] MUX Ready Failure / [4-T] Both MUX Failure

•[23-Y] MUX Clock Failure

Check to see if the MUX (PH-PC36)

circuit card of the STBY side is making

poor contact.

If the connection is set up, set the

faulty system into STBY side.

Refer to Section 12, Chapter 6.

Set the MB switch of the MUX circuit card

UP.

Extract the MUX circuit card from its

mounting slot and clean the contact portion.

If cleaning cannot be done, repeat insertion

and extraction of the circuit card two or three

times.

Set the MB switch of the MUX circuit card

UP and insert the circuit card into its

mounting slot.

Set the MB switch of the MUX circuit card

DOWN.

Set the faulty system to ACT side. Refer to

Section 12, Chapter 6.

Check to see if a station-to-station connection

can be set up within the faulty unit.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

START

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 5

Page 397

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

Replace the MUX circuit card with a

spare, and check it. Replace the MUX circuit card referring to

Section 3.3.2, MUX Card Replacement

Procedure, Chapter 4.

Place the MUX circuit card into ACT mode.

Refer to Section 12, Chapter 6.

Check to see if a station-to-station connection

can be set up and identify a circuit card

responsible for the fault.

If the connection is set up, set

the faulty system into STBY

side. Refer to Section 12,

Chapter 6.

Perform the above check by extracting each

MUX circuit card individually.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

END

CHAPTER 5 NDA-24307

Page 398

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

5. SPEECH PATH (TSW) SYSTEM FAULT (LN)

This paragraph explains the fault repair procedure when any of the faults shown in Table 5-7 has occurred in

a LN.

5.1 Check Point

When repairing a speech path fault, consider that when any of the faults shown in Table 5-7 have occurred

in a LN, it is possible that the TSW circuit card is at fault. Always check the alarm lamps on the TSW

circuit card. Refer to Figure 5-8.

Table 5-7 Speech Path (TSW) System Fault Situation (LN)

FAULTY SITUATION REFERENCE SECTION

•Noise, one-way speech, no tone

•Even if dialing has been made, dial tone does not stop.

Section 5.2, Speech Path System Fault - Fault

Related to Speech

Dial tone cannot be heard. Section 5.3, Speech Path System Fault - When Dial

Tone (DT) Cannot Be Heard

A fault occurring in the STBY side TSW is indicated by a system

message or an alarm lamp. Section 5.4, Speech Path System Fault (LN) - STBY

Side Has Become Faulty

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 5

Page 399

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

Figure 5-8 Speech Path Block Diagram (1/2)

ISWM

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM0

IMG0 of LN0

PIM1

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM2

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM3

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM0

IMG1 of LN0

PIM1

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM2

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM3

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM0

IMG2 of LN0

PIM1

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM2

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM3

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM0

IMG3 of LN0

PIM1

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM2

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM3

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

- Symbols -

: Cable

: Circuit card (ACT)

: Circuit card (ST-BY)

: Speech Path

TSW (in TSWM0/1) : PH-SW12

TSW (in ISWM) : PU-SW00

HSW: PU-SW01

MUX: PH-PC36

TSW/INT TSW 00

000 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 00A 00B 00C00D 00E 00F

TSW/INT TSW 10

100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 10A 10B 10C 10D 10E 10F

HSW

TSW/INT TSW 01

010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 01A 01B 01C 01D 01E 01F

TSW/INT TSW 11

110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 11A 11B 11C 11D 11E 11F

TSW/INT TSW/INT TSW/INT

00800900A

00B 00C00D00E00F

TSWM 0

( LN0)

TSW 00

TSW02

TSW/INT

TSW 10

TSW 12

TSW 01

TSW03

TSW 11

TSW 13

TSW/INT TSW/INT TSW/INT TSW/INT

000001002003 004005006007 104105106107

100101102103

10810910A10B 10C10D10E10F

TSWM 1

( LN0)

TSW 00

TSW02

TSW 10

TSW 12

TSW 01

TSW03

TSW 11

TSW 13

TSW/INT TSW/INT TSW/INT TSW/INT

000001002003 004005006007 104105106107

100101102103

00800900A

00B 00C00D00E00F

10810910A10B 10C10D10E10F

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM0

IMG0 of LN1

PIM1

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM2

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM3

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM0

IMG1 of LN1

PIM1

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM2

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM3

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM0

IMG2 of LN1

PIM1

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM2

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM3

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM0

IMG3 of LN1

PIM1

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM2

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM3

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

TSWM 0

( LN1)

TSW 00

TSW02

TSW/INT

TSW 10

TSW 12

TSW 01

TSW03

TSW 11

TSW 13

TSW/INT TSW/INT TSW/INT

TSW/INT TSW/INT TSW/INT TSW/INT

000001002003 004005006007

00800900A00B 00C00D00E00F

104105106107

100101102103

10810910A10B 10C10D10E10F

TSWM 1

( LN1)

TSW 00

TSW02

TSW 10

TSW 12

TSW 01

TSW03

TSW 11

TSW 13

TSW/INT TSW/INT TSW/INT TSW/INT

000001002003 004005006007 104105106107

100101102103

00800900A00B 00C00D00E00F

10810910A10B 10C10D10E10F

HSW

TSW/INT TSW 02

020021022023 024025026027 02802902A02B 02C02D02E02F

TSW/INT TSW 12

120121122123 124125126127 12812912A12B 12C12D12E12F

TSW/INT

TSW 03

030031032033 034035036037 03803903A03B 03C03D03E03F

TSW/INT TSW 13

130131132133 134135136137 13813913A13B 13C13D13E13F

To TSWM0

of LN2 To TSWM1

of LN2 To TSWM0

of LN3 To TSWM1

of LN3

To TSWM0

of LN2 To TSWM1

of LN2 To TSWM0

of LN3 To TSWM1

of LN3

This figure shows a block diagram of speech path.

CHAPTER 5 NDA-24307

Page 400

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

Figure 5-8 Speech Path Block Diagram (2/2)

ISWM

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM0

IMG0 of LN2

PIM1

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM2

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM3

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM0

IMG1 of LN2

PIM1

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM2

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM3

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM0

IMG2 of LN2

PIM1

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM2

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM3

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM0

IMG3 of LN2

PIM1

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM2

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM3

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

- Symbols -

: Cable

: Circuit card (ACT)

: Circuit card (ST-BY)

: Speech Path

TSW (in TSWM0/1) : PH-SW12

TSW (in ISWM) : PU-SW00

HSW: PU-SW01

MUX: PH-PC36

TSW/INT TSW 02

020

021

022

023024

025

026

027028029

02A

02B02C

02D

02E

02F

TSW/INT TSW 12

120121

122

123124125

126

127128

129

12A

12B12C

12D

12E

12F

HSW

TSW/INT TSW 03

030031

032

033034

035036

037038

039

03A

03B

03C

03D

03E

03F

TSW/INT TSW 13

130131

132133134

135

136

137138

139

13A

13B

13C

13D

13E

13F

TSW/INT TSW/INT TSW/INT

00800900A

00B 00C00D00E00F

TSWM 0

( LN2)

TSW 00

TSW02

TSW/INT

TSW 10

TSW 12

TSW 01

TSW03

TSW 11

TSW 13

TSW/INT TSW/INT TSW/INT TSW/INT

000001002003 004005006007 104105106107

100101102103

10810910A10B 10C10D10E10F

TSWM 1

( LN2)

TSW 00

TSW02

TSW 10

TSW 12

TSW 01

TSW03

TSW 11

TSW 13

TSW/INT TSW/INT TSW/INT TSW/INT

000001002003 004005006007 104105106107

100101102103

00800900A

00B 00C00D00E00F

10810910A10B 10C10D10E10F

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM0

IMG0 of LN3

PIM1

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM2

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM3

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM0

IMG1 of LN3

PIM1

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM2

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM3

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM0

IMG2 of LN3

PIM1

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM2

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM3

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM0

IMG3 of LN3

PIM1

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM2

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

PIM3

MUX MUX

LC/TRK

TSWM 0

( LN3)

TSW 00

TSW02

TSW/INT

TSW 10

TSW 12

TSW 01

TSW03

TSW 11

TSW 13

TSW/INT TSW/INT TSW/INT

TSW/INT TSW/INT TSW/INT TSW/INT

000001002003 004005006007

00800900A00B 00C00D00E00F

104105106107

100101102103

10810910A10B 10C10D10E10F

TSWM 1

( LN3)

TSW 00

TSW02

TSW 10

TSW 12

TSW 01

TSW03

TSW 11

TSW 13

TSW/INT TSW/INT TSW/INT TSW/INT

000001002003 004005006007 104105106107

100101102103

00800900A00B 00C00D00E00F

10810910A10B 10C10D10E10F

HSW

TSW/INT

TSW 00

000001002003 004005006007 00800900A00B 00C00D00E00F

TSW/INT

TSW 10

100101102103 104105106107 10810910A10B10C10D10E10F

TSW/INT

TSW 01

010011012013 014015016017 01801901A01B 01C01D01E01F

TSW/INT

TSW 11

110111112113 114115116117 11811911A11B11C11D11E11F

To TSWM0

of LN0 To TSWM1

of LN0 To TSWM0

of LN1 To TSWM1

of LN1

To TSWM0

of LN0 To TSWM1

of LN0 To TSWM0

of LN1 To TSWM1

of LN1

This figure shows a block diagram of speech path.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 5

Page 401

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

5.2 Speech Path System Fault - Fault Related to Speech

Faulty Situation:

•Fault related to speech such as noise, one-way speech, no-speed, etc. occurs.

•Even if dialing started, Dial Tone (DT) does not stop.

•[1-C] Both TSW Write Failure

•[1-D] TSW Write Failure

(1) For Dual Configuration

Check to see if fault occurs by replacing

TSW circuit cards one by one. Replace the TSW circuit card referring to

Section 2.3.2, TSW Card Replacement

Procedure, in Chapter 4.

Place the TSW circuit card into ACT mode.

Refer to Section 12, Chapter 6.

Check to see if a station-to-station connection

can be set up and identify a TSW circuit card

responsible for the fault.

Perform the above check by extracting the

TSW circuit cards individually.

Check to see if fault occurs by replacing

MUX circuit cards one by one. Replace the MUX circuit card referring to

Section 3.3.2, MUX Card Replacement

Procedure, Chapter 4.

Place the MUX circuit card into ACT mode.

Refer to Section 12, Chapter 6.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

START

CHAPTER 5 NDA-24307

Page 402

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

Check to see if a station-to-station connection

can be set up and identify a circuit card

responsible for the fault.

Perform the above check by extracting the

MUX circuit cards individually.

When the PLO (PH-CK16-A/17-A)/CLK

(PH-CLK18) circuit card is mounted for

digital interface, replace PLO/CLK circuit

card with a spare and check.

Set MB switch of the PLO/CLK circuit card to

UP side.

Confirm OPE lamp on the PLO/CLK circuit

card of the mate system illuminates.

Extract PLO/CLK circuit card from its

mounting slot.

Set MB switch UP and insert the new PLO/

CLK circuit card into its mounting slot.

Set MB switch DOWN.

Set MB switch of the ACT-side PLO/CLK

circuit card UP.

Confirm that the new PLO/CLK circuit card

becomes the ACT side (OPE lamp on the new

card lights green).

Set MB switch of the STBY side PLO/CLK

DOWN.

Confirm that speech can be carried out

normally by a station-to-station call.

Set the faulty speech path system to STBY

side. Refer to Section 12, Chapter 6.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

END

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 5

Page 403

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

(2) For Single Configuration

Check to see if the fault occurs by

replacing TSW circuit cards one by one. Replace the TSW circuit card referring to

Section 2.3.2, TSW Card Replacement

Procedure, Chapter 4.

Check to see if a station-to-station connection

can be set up and identify a TSW circuit card

responsible for the fault.

Perform the above check by extracting the TSW

circuit cards individually.

Check to see if the fault occurs by

replacing MUX circuit cards one by one. Replace the MUX circuit card referring to

Section 3.3.2, MUX Card Replacement

Procedure, Chapter 4.

Initialize the system by pressing the START

button on the TOPU.

Check to see if a station-to-station connection

can be set up and identify a TSW circuit card

responsible for the fault.

Perform the above check by extracting the TSW

circuit cards individually.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

START

CHAPTER 5 NDA-24307

Page 404

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

When the PLO (PH-CK16-A/17-A)/CLK

(PH-CK18) circuit card is mounted for

digital interface, replace the PLO circuit

card with a spare and check it.

Set MB switch of the PLO/CLK circuit card

to UP side.

Confirm OPE lamp on the PLO/CLK circuit

card goes out.

Extract PLO/CLK circuit card from its

mounting slot.

Set MB switch UP and insert the new PLO/

CLK circuit card into its mounting slot.

Set MB switch DOWN.

Confirm the OPE lamp on the new PLO/CLK

circuit card illuminates.

Confirm that speech can be carried out

normally by a station-to-station call.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

END

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 5

Page 405

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

5.3 Speech Path System Fault - When Dial Tone (DT) Cannot Be Heard

Faulty Situation:

•Dial Tone (DT) cannot be heard.

•[1-A] Both TSW Failure (Permanent)

•[1-E] Both TSW Clock Failure

•[4-C] Both TSW Ready Failure

•[23-Y] MUX Clock Failure

Note: For dual system configuration, if a system message indicates that both systems are faulty, first repair

the fault in the indicated system and then proceed to repair the PIM in the other system.

Check to see if the TSW circuit card is

making poor contact. Set TSW circuit card into STBY mode. Refer to

Section 12, Chapter 6.

Set TSW MBR switch on the TSW card UP.

Set MB switch of the TSW circuit card UP.

Extract the TSW circuit card from its mounting

slot and clean the contact portion.

If cleaning cannot be done, repeat insertion and

extraction of the circuit card two or three times.

Set TSW MBR and MB switches on the TSW

circuit card UP and insert the circuit card into

its mounting slot.

Set MB switch of the TSW circuit card DOWN.

Set TSW MBR switch DOWN.

Check if a station-to-station connection can be

set up.

Check PCM cables. Check the PCM cables. (See Figure 5-8).

Initialize the system by pressing the START

button on the TOPU and see if a station-to-sta-

tion connection can be set up.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

START

END

CHAPTER 5 NDA-24307

Page 406

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

5.4 Speech Path System Fault (LN) - STBY Side Has Become Faulty

Faulty Situation:

•A fault occurred in the STBY side of the dual configuration system.

•[1-B] TSW Failure (Permanent)

•[1-D] TSW Write Failure

•[1-F] TSW Clock Failure

•[4-D] TSW Ready Failure

Check to see if the TSW circuit card

(STBY) is making poor contact. Set the TSW MBR switch of the TSW circuit

card UP.

Set the MB switch of the TSW circuit card UP

and extract the circuit card from its mounting

slot.

Extract the TSW circuit card from its mounting

slot and clean the contact portion.

If cleaning cannot be done, repeat insertion and

extraction of the circuit card two or three times.

Set the TSW MBR and MB switches of the

TSW circuit card UP and insert the circuit card

into its mounting slot.

Set the MB switch of the TSW circuit card

DOWN.

Set the TSW MBR switch DOWN.

Check if a station-to-station connection can be

set up.

Check PCM cables. Check the PCM cables. See Figure 5-8.

Initialize the system by pressing the START

button on the TOPU and see if a station-to-

station connection can be set up.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

START

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 5

Page 407

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

Faulty Situation:

•Fault related to speech such as noise, one-way speech, no-speed, etc. occurs.

•Even if dialing started, Dial Tone (DT) does not stop.

•[1-C] Both TSW Write Failure

•[1-D] TSW Write Failure

Check to see if fault occurs by extracting

TSW circuit cards one by one.

Replace the TSW circuit card referring to

Section 2.3.2, TSW Card Replacement

Procedure, Chapter 4.

Set the TSW circuit card into ACT mode. Refer

to Section 12, Chapter 6.

Check to see if a station-to-station connection

can be set up to identify a TSW circuit card re-

sponsible for the fault.

Perform the above check by extracting the TSW

circuit cards individually.

Check to see if the fault occurs by

extracting MUX circuit cards one by one. Replace the MUX circuit card referring to

Section 3.3.2, MUX Card Replacement

Procedure, Chapter 4.

Set the MUX circuit card into ACT mode. Refer

to Perform the above check by extracting the

TSW circuit cards individually.

Check to see if a station-to-station connection

can be set up and identify a TSW circuit card

responsible for the fault.

Perform the above check by extracting the

MUX circuit cards individually.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

END

CHAPTER 5 NDA-24307

Page 408

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

6. SPEECH PATH SYSTEM FAULT (WHOLE SYSTEM/ISW)

This section explains the fault repair procedure when any of the fault shown in Table 5-8 has occurred in a

whole system.

6.1 Check Point

System messages pertaining to whole system fault are shown in Figure 5-9. Check the system messages.

Figure 5-9 System Messages Related to Speech Path System Fault (Whole System/ISW)

Table 5-8 Speech Path (TSW) System Fault Situation (LN)

FAULTY SITUATION REFERENCE SECTION

•Noise, one-way speech, no tone

•Even after dialing a digit, dial tone is still heard.

•Dial tone cannot be heard.

Section 6.2, Speech Path System Fault (Whole

System/ISW) - Fault Related to Speech

•The system message that indicates a fault occurrence to the active

Speech Path System (Whole System /ISW) is intermittently printed

out.

•The alarm lamp on the circuit card of the active Speech Path System

(Whole System /ISW) lights up intermittently.

Section 6.3, Speech Path System Fault (Whole

System/ISW) - ACT side becomes Faulty

Intermittently

•The system message that indicates a fault occurrence to the STBY

Speech Path System (Whole System /ISW) is intermittently printed

out.

•The alarm lamp on the circuit card of the STBY Speech Path

System (Whole System /ISW) lights up intermittently.

Section 6.4, Speech Path System Fault (Whole

System/ISW) - STBY side becomes Faulty

Intermittently

•Clock (CALK, PLOT) is faulty.

CPU TSW

PLO/CLK

HSW

•“1-G” ~ “1-J”HSW Write Failure

•“1-K” ~ “1-L”HSW Clock Failure

•“4-E” ~ “4-F”HSW Ready Failure

•“1-A” ~ “1-D”TSW Write Failure

•“1-E” ~ “1-F”TSW Clock Failure

•“4-C” ~ “4-D”TSW Ready Failure

•“1-O” ~ “1-P”PLO Clock Failure

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 5

Page 409

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

6.2 Speech Path System Fault (Whole System/ISW) - Fault Related to Speech

Replace the TSW card mounted in the

ISWM with a spare. Replace the TSW card by referring to Section

4.3.2, TSW Card Replacement Procedure,

Chapter 4.

Place the TSW circuit card on the ACT mode.

Refer to Section 12, Chapter 6.

After replacement of the TSW card,

make a station to station call and

check and see if a fault occurs.

When a fault occurs in the whole system,

replace the HSW card with a spare. Replace the HSW card by referring to Section

4.3.3, HSW Card Replacement Procedure,

Chapter 4.

Place the HSW card on the ACT mode.

Refer to Section 12, Chapter 6.

After replacement of the HSW card,

make a station to station call, and

check and see if a fault occurs.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

START

END

CHAPTER 5 NDA-24307

Page 410

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

6.3 Speech Path System Fault (Whole System/ISW) - ACT side becomes Faulty

Intermittently

Check by replacing related circuit cards of

the ACT mode with a spare. Related circuit cards:

IOGT (Section 4.3.1, Chapter 4)

TSW (Section 4.3.2, Chapter 4)

HSW (Section 4.3.3, Chapter 4)

Set the faulty system on the STBY mode.

Refer to Section 12, Chapter 6.

On the circuit card, set its MB switch UP and

extract the circuit card out of its mounting slot.

Make switch setting on the new circuit card.

On the new circuit card, set its MB switch UP

and insert the circuit card into its mounting slot.

Set MB switch DOWN.

If a fault occurs, set the faulty system on the

STBY mode. Refer to Section 12, Chapter

Set the faulty system on the ACT mode.

Refer to Section 12, Chapter 6.

Check and see if a fault indication is made.

Faulty Situation:

•ACT-side Speech Path System becomes faulty intermittently in ISW/Whole System.

•[1-I] HSW Write Temporary Failure (Both Systems)

•[1-J] HSW Write Temporary Failure (One System)

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

START

END

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 5

Page 411

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

6.4 Speech Path System Fault (Whole System/ISW) - STBY side becomes Faulty

Intermittently

Check by replacing related circuit cards of

the STBYmode with a spare. Related circuit cards:

IOGT (Section 4.3.1, Chapter 4)

TSW (Section 4.3.2, Chapter 4)

HSW (Section 4.3.3, Chapter 4)

Set the faulty system on the STBY mode.

Refer to Section 12, Chapter 6.

On the circuit card, set its MB switch UP and

extract the circuit card out of its mounting slot.

Make switch setting on the new circuit card.

On the new circuit card, set its MB switch UP

and insert the circuit card into its mounting slot.

Set MB switch DOWN.

If a fault occurs, set the faulty system on the

STBY mode. Refer to Section 12, Chapter

Set the faulty system on the ACT mode.

Refer to Section 12, Chapter 6.

Check and see if a fault indication is made.

Faulty Situation:

•STBY-side Speech Path System becomes faulty intermittently in ISW/Whole System.

•[1-I] HSW Write Temporary Failure (Both Systems) ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

START

END

CHAPTER 5 NDA-24307

Page 412

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

6.5 PLO Fault

Replace the faulty PLO circuit card with a

spare. Set MB switch of the PLO circuit card UP and

extract the circuit card from its mounting slot.

Make necessary switch settings on the new PLO

circuit card.

Set MB switch UP and insert the circuit card

into its mounting slot.

Set MB switch DOWN.

Confirm that no noise generates in a station-

to-station connection. If the system has been operated by the STBY

side, set MB switch on the ACT-side PLO

circuit card UP and execute system changeover.

Refer to Section 12, Chapter 6.

OPE lamp (Green) illuminates on the PLO

circuit card.

Confirm that digital interface connection can

be set up.

Faulty Situation:

•Both PLOs have become faulty, and the system is in operation by clocks from the

HSW.

•One of the two PLOs has become faulty and the other PLO has been set on the ACT

mode.

•[1-O], [1-P] PLO Clock Failure

•[1-K], [1-L] HSW Clock Failure

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

START

END

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 5

Page 413

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

7. CONTROL SYSTEM FAULT

This section explains the fault repair procedure for the control system listed in Table 5-9.

7.1 Check Point

When repairing the control system, check the status of the following lamps:

•CPR

•GT

•TSW

•MUX

•EMA

ISW

•CPR

•IOGT

•TSW

•HSW

•EMA

Figure 5-1 and Figure 5-2 shows a block diagram of the control system.

Table 5-9 Control System Fault Situation

FAULTY SITUATION REFERENCE SECTION

Fault occurs occasionally at the ACT side. Section 7.2, Control System Fault - Fault Occurs Intermittently

STBY side is faulty. Section 7.3, Control System Fault - STBY Side is Faulty

CHAPTER 5 NDA-24307

Page 414

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

7.2 Control System Fault - Fault Occurs Intermittently

Faulty Situation:

•Fault occurs intermittently at ACT side in the dual configuration system.

•Fault occurs intermittently in the single configuration system.

•[0-C] ~ [0-K] CPU Failure

•[1-C] Both TSW Write Failure

•[1-D] TSW Write Failure

•[3-D], [3-E] Lock-Up Failure (Permanent/Temporary)

(1) For Dual Configuration

Replace ACT-side related circuit card with

a spare, and check. Replace the circuit cards individually referring to the

following sections in Chapter 4:

LN•Section 1.3.1, CPR Replacement Procedure

•Section 1.3.2, EMA Card Replacement

Procedure

•Section 2.3.1, GT Card Replacement Procedure

•Section 2.3.2, TSW Card Replacement

Procedure

•Section 3.3.2, MUX Card Replacement

Procedure

ISW

•Section 1.3.1, CPR Replacement Procedure

•Section 1.3.2, EMA Card Replacement

Procedure

•Section 4.3.1, IOGT Card Replacement

Procedure

•Section 4.3.2, TSW Card Replacement

Procedure

•Section 4.3.3, HSW Card Replacement

Procedure

Place the replaced circuit card into ACT mode

individually by executing CPU or Speech Path System

changeover. Refer to Section 12, Chapter 6.

Check to see if a station-to-station connection can be

set up and identify a circuit card responsible for the

fault.

After all the steps are complete, place the whole circuit

card examined above to the ACT mode. Refer to

Section 12, Chapter 6.

When a fault is not indicated, set the

faulty system to STBY mode. Refer

to Section 12, Chapter 6.

Check to see if a fault is indicated.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

START

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 5

Page 415

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

(2) For Single Configuration

Replace the related circuit card with a spare,

and check. Replace the circuit cards individually by

referring to the following sections in Chapter 4:

LN•Section 1.3.1, CPR Replacement Procedure

•Section 1.3.2, EMA Card Replacement

Procedure

•Section 2.3.1, GT Card Replacement Procedure

•Section 2.3.2, TSW Card Replacement

Procedure

•Section 3.3.2, MUX Card Replacement

Procedure

ISW

•Section 1.3.1, CPR Replacement Procedure

•Section 1.3.2, EMA Card Replacement

Procedure

•Section 4.3.1, IOGT Card Replacement

Procedure

•Section 4.3.2, TSW Card Replacement

Procedure

•Section 4.3.3, HSW Card Replacement

Procedure

Initialize the system by pressing the START

button on the TOPU and check to see if a

station-to-station connection can be set up and

identify a circuit card responsible for the fault.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

END

CHAPTER 5 NDA-24307

Page 416

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

7.3 Control System Fault - STBY Side is Faulty

Faulty Situation:

•Fault has occurred in the STBY side of dual configuration system.

•[0-I] STBY CPU Failure

•The ACT side has become faulty, and system changeover has executed.

•[0-C], [0-H], [0-J] Processor Failure (ACT side)

Replace STBY side related circuit cards

with a spare, and check. Replace the circuit cards individually by

referring to the following paragraphs in Chapter

LN•Section 1.3.1, CPR Replacement Procedure

•Section 1.3.2, EMA Card Replacement

Procedure

•Section 2.3.1, GT Card Replacement Procedure

•Section 2.3.2, TSW Card Replacement

Procedure

•Section 3.3.2, MUX Card Replacement

Procedure

ISW

•Section 1.3.1, CPR Replacement Procedure

•Section 1.3.2, EMA Card Replacement

Procedure

•Section 4.3.1, IOGT Card Replacement

Procedure

•Section 4.3.2, TSW Card Replacement

Procedure

•Section 4.3.3, HSW Card Replacement

Procedure

Place the circuit cards into ACT mode by

executing CPU changeover. Refer to Section 12,

Chapter 6.

Check to see if a station-to-station connection

can be set up to identify the circuit card

responsible for the fault.

When a fault is not indicated, set

the faulty systems to STBYmode.

Refer to Section 12, Chapter 6.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

START

END

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 5

Page 417

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

8. ALARM INDICATION FAULT

This section explains the fault repair procedure where any of the faults shown in Table 5-10 occur.

8.1 Check Point

When repairing an alarm indication fault, check the alarm cable route shown in Figure 5-10 and Figure 5-

11.

8.2 Fault of Alarm Indicating Panel

Table 5-10 Alarm Indication Fault Situation

FAULTY SITUATION REFERENCE SECTION

A fault is indicated on the TOPU, but it is not indicated on the Alarm Indicating Panel

(External Alarm Indicating Panel). Section 8.2, Fault of Alarm

Indicating Panel

•A system message is indicated, but no alarm indication is made on the TOPU.

•An alarm lamp on the circuit card is lighting, but no alarm indication is made on the MAT

or on the TOPU.

Section 8.3, Fault That

Cannot Be Detected

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

Confirm lamps and power supply circuit of the Alarm Indicating Panel.

Confirm cross connections on the MDF.

Confirm that the connector of 16 PH EXMISC CA is firmly plugged in the MISC 0A connector on

the backplane of LPM.

START

END

CHAPTER 5 NDA-24307

Page 418

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

Figure 5-10 Cable Routing for Alarm Indications

Alarm

Indicating

Panel

KEY

DSP

DSPL

KEY

ALMA

ALMB

MISC0B MISC0A

EXALM

ALM1

CN3 CN2 CN1 CN0 KEY

(00)(04)

Alarm Lamps

TOPU

ISWM

TOPU

ISWM

LPM LPM

00 04030201

MMC

PH-M22

To CN0 connector of LN0

To CN0 connector of LN1

To CN0 connector of LN2

To CN0 connector of LN3

MDF

68PH EXMISC CA Cable

ISW (FRONT VIEW) ISW (REAR VIEW)

: CHAMP connector-ended cable: Internal alarm bus cable

: Connector : Circuit Card A: To alarm information of PWRSW, HSW, TSW, etc.

- Symbols =

EMA (PH-PC40)

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 5

Page 419

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

Figure 5-11 Cabling Related to Alarm Indicating Panel

Table 5-11 PIN Location of External Alarm

126

2MPALM 27

328

4 EXTAA 29

530

6 BELAA 31

732

8MNAA 33MNBA

9 SUPAA 34 SUPBA

10 MJAA 35 MJBA

11 36

12 37

Alarm

Indicating

Panel

LPM

Backplane

MISC0A

BELAA

MNAA

SUPAA

MJAA

BELBA

MNBA

SUPBA

MJBA

RPT1(G)

RPT0(-48V)

Fuse

-48V

MJ / MN / BELL

ISW

CHAMP Connector Cable

MDF

68PH EXMISC CA Cable

Power Receiving Terminal

CHAPTER 5 NDA-24307

Page 420

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

Figure 5-12 Distribution/Collection of Key/Alarm Information within the System

PZ-DK222

(TOP KEY)

PH-PC40

PH-M22

EMA

RELAY

RECEIVER

PZ-DK222

(TOP KEY)

PH-PC40

PH-M22

EMA

RELAY

RECEIVER

PZ-DK227

(TOP KEY)

PH-PC40

PH-M22

EMA

SEL

RELAY

RECEIVER

ISEL

ISW

AUDIBLE

AND

VISUAL

ALARM

INDICATING

PANEL

KEY INFORMATION

ALM INFORMATION

This figure shows the flow of alarm and key information between ISW and each LN.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 5

Page 421

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

Figure 5-13 Alarm Bus Cable Connections Diagram (1/2)

To MMC ( ) of LN3

To MMC ( ) of LN2

To MMC ( ) of LN1

ISWM

HSW0/1 TSW0/1 IOGT0/1 PLO0/1

PWRSW

0/1

ISWM

ALMA

ALMB

DSPL

TOPU PZ-DK227

This figure shows the alarm bus cable connections diagram.

IMG0 (LN0)

MUX 0 LC/TRK MUX 1

PWR

DPWR

PIM 3

ALMA

ALMB

DSPL

KEY

TOPU

MUX 0 LC/TRK MUX 1

PWR

DPWR

PIM 0

ALMA

ALMB

EMAFH

ALM EMA

CN0

MUX 0 LC/TRK MUX 1

PWR

DPWR

PIM 1

ALMA

ALMB

MUX 0 LC/TRK MUX 1

PWR

DPWR

PIM 2

ALMA

ALMB

PZ-DK222

IMG1 (LN0)

MUX 0 LC/TRK MUX 1

PWR

DPWR

PIM 3

ALMA

ALMB

DSPM

TOPU

MUX 0 LC/TRK MUX 1

PWR

DPWR

PIM 0

ALMA

ALMB

TSWM0 (REAR VIEW)

MUX 0 LC/TRK MUX 1

PWR

DPWR

PIM 1

ALMA

ALMB

MUX 0 LC/TRK MUX 1

PWR

DPWR

PIM 2

ALMA

ALMB

PZ-DK222

PALM

PWR1 LANI 1 ISAGT-1A

PWR0 LANI 0 ISAGT-0A

ISAGT-1B

ISAGT-0B

PZ-PW92

PALM

00 01 02 03 04

CN0 KEY

MMC

LPM (FRONT VIEW)

PALM

PWR1 LANI 1 ISAGT1

PWR0 LANI 0 ISAGT0

PZ-PW92

PALM

00 01 02 03 04

CN3 CN2 CN1 CN0 KEY

MMC

LPM (FRONT VIEW)

LED3 LED2 LED1 ALM3 MUSIC ALM2 ALM1 EXALM

DSP

ALM KEY

PALM1

MISC0B

PALM0

LPM (REAR VIEW)

Slot 00Slot 04

LED3 LED2 LED1 ALM3 MUSIC ALM2 ALM1 EXALM

DSP

ALM KEY

PALM1

MISC0B

PALM0

LPM (REAR VIEW)

Slot 00Slot 04

of IMG2

: Alarm-related connector : Circuit Card : External Cable

< ISW: Inter-node Switch >

MMC : PH-M22 EMA: PH-PC40 PWRSW: PH-PW14 HSW: PU-SW01 TSW: PU-SW00 LANI: PZ-PC19

ISAGT: PZ-GT13 IOGT: PH-GT10 PLO: PH-CK16-A/PH-CK17-A

< LN: Local Node >

MMC: PH-M22 EMA: PH-PC40 ISAGT-A: PZ-GT13 ISAGT-B: PZ-GT20 MUX: PH-PC36 LANI: PZ-PC19

EMA EMA

EMA

CHAPTER 5 NDA-24307

Page 422

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

Figure 5-13 Alarm Bus Cable Connections Diagram (2/2)

LED3 LED2 LED1 ALM3 MUSIC ALM2 ALM1 EXALM

DSP

ALM KEY

PALM1

MISC0B

PALM0

LPM of LN0 (REAR VIEW)

Slot 00Slot 04

EMA

This figure shows the alarm bus cable connections diagram.

: Alarm-related connector : Circuit Card : External Cable

EMA: PH-PC40 MUX: PH-PC36

IMG2 (LN0)

MUX 0 LC/TRK MUX 1

PWR

DPWR

PIM 3

ALMA

ALMB

DSPM

TOPU

MUX 0 LC/TRK MUX 1

PWR

DPWR

PIM 0

ALMA

ALMB

TSWM1 (REAR VIEW)

MUX 0 LC/TRK MUX 1

PWR

DPWR

PIM 1

ALMA

ALMB

MUX 0 LC/TRK MUX 1

PWR

DPWR

PIM 2

ALMA

ALMB

PZ-DK222

of IMG1

IMG3 (LN0)

MUX 0 LC/TRK MUX 1

PWR

DPWR

PIM 3

ALMA

ALMB

DSPM

TOPU

MUX 0 LC/TRK MUX 1

PWR

DPWR

PIM 0

ALMA

ALMB

MUX 0 LC/TRK MUX 1

PWR

DPWR

PIM 1

ALMA

ALMB

MUX 0 LC/TRK MUX 1

PWR

DPWR

PIM 2

ALMA

ALMB

PZ-DK222

ALM EMA

EMA

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 5

Page 423

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

8.3 Fault That Cannot Be Detected

Check the DSP flat cable (See Figure 5-13.).

If the EMA card is removed from the system while the system is in operation under

the control of the CPU 1, the system will reset and stop all call processing. See Section

1.3.2, EMA Card Replacement Procedure, Chapter 4 for detailed instructions.

Replace the EMA circuit card with a spare.

Set the MB switch of the EMA circuit card UP, and extract the circuit card from its

mounting slot.

Make necessary switch settings on the new circuit card, referring to the card extracted.

Set MB switch UP and insert the circuit card into its mounting slot.

Set the MB switch DOWN.

Check to see if a fault is detected.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

START

END

WARNING

CHAPTER 5 NDA-24307

Page 424

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

9. POWER SUPPLY FAULT

This section explains the fault repair procedure when any of the faults shown in Table 5-12 occur.

9.1 Check Point

When repairing a power supply fault, consider the following items:

(1) Before checking the system, check the rectifier, battery, and power cables.

(2) The PWR circuit card is equipped with the circuits to supply ringing signal and howler tone. When a fault

occurs that causes the bell of the telephone not to ring, or howler tone cannot be heard, etc., check the

alarm lamp on the PWR circuit card.

(3) Figure 5-14 through Figure 5-17 show the block diagrams for the power supply to each module.

Figure 5-14 Block Diagram of Power Supply System (ISW)

Table 5-12 PWR Supply Fault Situation

FAULTY SITUATION REFERENCE SECTION

Fuse Blown Fault Section 9.2, Fuse Blown Fault

Circuit Breaker OFF, Fault in PWR Supply Section 9.3, Circuit Breaker OFF Fault in PWR Supply

Fault of Alarm Lamps on PWR Supply Section 9.4, Fault of Alarm Lamps on PWR Supply

Note: PWR1 is mounted when power supply system is a dual system configuration.

ISWM

PWR

1Note

LPM

PWR

MISC

Note

EMA IOC

CPU ISAGT0

ISW

BASEU

LANI0

HSW00 HSW01 TSW00 TSW01 TSW02 TSW03 IOGT0 PLO0

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 5

Page 425

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

Figure 5-15 Block Diagram of Power Supply System (IMG0)

Note: PWR1 is mounted when power supply system is a dual system configuration.

PWR

1LC/TRK LC/TRK MUX0 MUX1 LC/TRK LC/TRK

PIM3

Note

PWR

1LC/TRK LC/TRK MUX0 MUX1 LC/TRK LC/TRK

PIM2

Note

PWR

1LC/TRK LC/TRK MUX0 MUX1 LC/TRK LC/TRK

PIM1

Note

PWR

1LC/TRK LC/TRK MUX0 MUX1 LC/TRK LC/TRK

PIM0

Note

PWR

LPM

Note

CPU0 MISC

BASEU

IMG1/2 (LN0/1/2/3)

LANI0

ISAGT-0BISAFT-0A

IOCEMA

CHAPTER 5 NDA-24307

Page 426

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

Figure 5-16 Block Diagram of Power Supply System (IMG1/IMG2)

PWR

1LC/TRK LC/TRK MUX0 MUX1 LC/TRK LC/TRK

PIM3

Note

PWR

1LC/TRK LC/TRK MUX0 MUX1 LC/TRK LC/TRK

PIM2

Note

PWR

1LC/TRK LC/TRK MUX0 MUX1 LC/TRK LC/TRK

PIM1

Note

PWR

1LC/TRK LC/TRK MUX0 MUX1 LC/TRK LC/TRK

PIM0

Note

PWR

1MISC

LPM

Note DLKC0

PLO0/CLK0

BASEU

IMG1/2 (LN0/1/2/3)

TSW03TSW02TSW01TSW00GT0

Note 1: PWR1 is mounted when power supply system is a dual system configuration.

Note 2: DLKC is not mounted in TSWM1 of IMG2.

Note 3: PLO for IMG1 (TSWM0); CLK for IMG2 (TSWM1)

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 5

Page 427

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

Figure 5-17 Block Diagram of Power Supply System (IMG3)

Note: PWR1 is mounted when power supply system is a dual system configuration.

PWR

1LC/TRK LC/TRK MUX0 MUX1 LC/TRK LC/TRK

PIM3

Note

PWR

1LC/TRK LC/TRK MUX0 MUX1 LC/TRK LC/TRK

PIM2

Note

PWR

1LC/TRK LC/TRK MUX0 MUX1 LC/TRK LC/TRK

PIM1

Note

PWR

1LC/TRK LC/TRK MUX0 MUX1 LC/TRK LC/TRK

PIM0

Note

DUMMY

BASEU

IMG3 (LN0/1/2/3)

CHAPTER 5 NDA-24307

Page 428

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

(4) Figure 5-18 shows the power supply system for PIM.

Figure 5-18 Power Supply to PIM

(5) Figure 5-19 shows the power supply system for LPM.

Figure 5-19 Power Supply to LPM (LN/ISW)

DC-DC

CONV

RGU

HOW

-48V

NFB

+80V

rel

RGU

REL

PWR0

-48V +80V Note

+5V, +12V, 5V

CR (for LC)

HOW (for LC)

-48V (for LC, TRK)

+80V

+80V -48V

DC-DC

CONV

RGU

HOW

-48 V

NFB

+80 V

rel

REL

PWR1

Note: +80V is for message waiting lamp.

+5V,+12V

(To EMA, MISC, Cards, etc.)

-48V

(To EMA, MISC, Cards, etc.)

PWR1PWR0

DC-DC

CONV

DC-DC

CONV

-48V

+80V

REL

-48V

+80V

(To CPR 0)

-48V

(To CPR 1)

-48V

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 5

Page 429

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

(6) Figure 5-20 shows the power supply system for TSWM/ISWM.

Figure 5-20 Power Supply to TSWM/ISWM

+5V, +12V, +5V

(To MISC Cards)

-48V

PWR1PWR0

DC-DC

CONV

DC-DC

CONV

-48V

+80V

REL

-48V

+80V -48V-48V

[TSWM]

To GT, TSW, DLKC, PLO cards

[ISWM]

To IOGT, TSW, HSW, PLO cards

CHAPTER 5 NDA-24307

Page 430

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

9.2 Fuse Blown Fault

Check the backplane of the PIM. Make a visual check on the backplane for pin

contacting, melting or burn, etc.

Extract all the circuit cards from the PIM,

and insert them back into their slots

individually to see if the fuse blows.

Set the MB switch of the PWR supply UP.

Set the circuit breaker of the PWR supply

DOWN.

Extract all the circuit cards from their mounting

slots, except PWR supply.

Replace the fuse with spare.

Set the circuit breaker of the PWR supply UP

side.

Set the MB switch of the PWR supply DOWN.

Insert the circuit cards into their mounting slots

individually, with their MB switch to UP side.

Check to see if the fuse blows when the MB

switch has been set to DOWN.

START

END

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 5

Page 431

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

9.3 Circuit Breaker OFF Fault in PWR Supply

Check the backplane of the PIM. Make a visual check on the backplane for pin

contacting, melting or burning, etc.

Extract all the circuit cards from the PIM,

and make a visual check of the circuit

cards.

Set MB switch of the PWR supply UP.

Set the circuit breaker of the PWR supply

DOWN.

Extract all circuit cards out of their mounting

slots.

Make a visual check of the extracted circuit

cards.

•Check ICs, resistors, and capacitors to see if

any are burned.

START

END

CHAPTER 5 NDA-24307

Page 432

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

9.4 Fault of Alarm Lamps on PWR Supply

Note: Insert each PWR supply with its MB switch to UP side, and then set it back to DOWN side.

Press RESET button of the PWR supply.

Alarm lamp goes out. FAULT SUPERVISION

Alarm lamp illuminates again. Set the MB switch on the PWR supply UP.

Turn circuit breaker OFF.

Set MB switch on all the circuit cards, except

PWR supply.

Extract all circuit cards from their mounting

slots.

Turn circuit breaker ON.

Set the MB switch to DOWN side.

Check to see if the alarm lamp illuminates.

If the alarm lamp illuminates,

replace the PWR supply with a

spare.

If the alarm lamp does not

illuminate, insert the circuit cards

into their mounting slot

individually to see if the alarm

lamp illuminates.

START

END

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 5

Page 433

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

10. FAN UNIT FAULT

This section explains the fault repair procedure where a fan in the Fan Unit (FANU) does not operate.

10.1 Check Point

(1) When repairing a FANU fault, exercise care about the following conditions. The fans (a total of 3) are

activated by operating the PWR SW key located on the PZ-M369. The conditions for starting the fan are

as follows:

•With PWR SW key for the fan set to ON position: Always operating

•With PWR SW key for the fan set to AUTO position: Starts operating if the in-frame

temperature is higher than 40°C (104°F);

stops operating at temperatures lower than

32°C (90°F). See Figure 5-21.

(2) When replacing the FANU with a spare, refer to Section 4, Chapter 4.

CHAPTER 5 NDA-24307

Page 434

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

10.2 Fan Unit Fault

Set the PWR SW key on the PZ-M369 to the ON position.

When the fan spins

Set PWR SW key to AUTO position, and short the thermal relay of the thermal

unit.

If the fan does not

operate Check the connector cable between

the FANU and the thermal unit.

If the fan operates Replace thermal relay with a spare.

Disconnect the fan

connector of the cable for

the thermal unit.

Replace thermal relay with

a spare.

Connect the fan connector.

If the fan does not operate

Check the voltage (DC -48 V) at connectors FC0 through FC2.

If the voltage is less

than -48 V Check the connector cable (fan

connector) between the FANU and

the PIM.

If the voltage is -48 V Replace the fan with a spare. Refer to

Section 4, Chapter 4.

After the fault is corrected, set PWR SW key to the AUTO position. If the fans are to continue operating

constantly, set PWR SW key to the ON position.

START

END

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 5

Page 435

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

Figure 5-21 Circuit Diagram of Fan Unit and Thermal Unit

FAN 0 FAN 1 FAN 2

Power

Filter

Fan Unit

FC0 FC1 FC2

POW

FUSE ALM

-48V

FUSE

FAN

To PIM/

OFF

AUTO rl

FAN START Switch

Thermal Unit

Thermal

Relay

32o C

89o F

Thermal

Relay

40o C

104o F

Thermal

Relay

70o C

158o F

Thermal

Relay

60o C

140o F

GFE FA

FAN

-48V EMNMJ

To PIM To Display

Section

of TOPU

ISWM

CHAPTER 5 NDA-24307

Page 436

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

11. TONE FAULT

This section explains the fault repair procedure when any of the various tones cannot be heard in the whole

system.

11.1 Check Point

When repairing a tone fault, consider that the tone generator circuit is equipped in the TSW circuit card

and supplies tone. Check the alarm lamps of the TSW circuit card.

Figure 5-22 shows an example of the related trunking for dial tone connection.

Figure 5-22 Dial Tone Connection

TSW DT

Dial

Tone

ORT

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 5

Page 437

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

11.2 Tone Fault

Replace the TSW circuit card with a spare

and check.

When only Hold Tone is faulty.

If External Hold Tone source is in

use. Check the external equipment which sends out

hold tone.

Check cross connections on the MDF. Figure 5-

23 shows a block diagram of external hold tone

supply (optional).

Replace the PLO circuit card with

a spare. Set the MB switch of the PLO circuit card to

UP side and extract the circuit card from its

mounting slot.

Make necessary switch settings on the new

circuit card, referring to the card extracted.

Set the MB switch of the new circuit card UP

and insert the circuit card into its mounting slot.

Set the MB switch DOWN.

Initialize the system and confirm the tone.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

START

END

CHAPTER 5 NDA-24307

Page 438

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

Figure 5-23 External Hold Tone Supply Block Diagram

External

Tone

Source

(Option)

To MUSIC

connector

for the EMA

card (IMG0)

MDF Note 2

PLO 1

TSW 00

TSW 10

TSW 03

TSW 13

TSW 02

TSW 12

TSW 01

TSW 11

TSWM0

PIM 0

PIM 2

PIM 3

PIM 1

CLK 0

CLK 1

TSW 00

TSW 10

TSW 03

TSW 13

TSW 02

TSW 12

TSW 01

TSW 11

TSWM1

PIM 0

PIM 2

PIM 3

PIM 1

This figure shows a block diagram of external hold tone supply (optional) in each Local Node (LN0 - LN3). Note 1

- Symbols -

: Circuit Card TSW: PH-SW12 PLO: PH-CK16-A CLK: PH-CK18 EMA: PH-PC40

: CHAMP connector-ended cable

EMAFH

PLOCLK0

EXCLK0

PLOCLK1

IMG1 IMG2

: Backplane connectors

ISW-LN PLO CA-A Cable PLO-CLK CA-A Cable

Melody

PLO 0

PLOCLK0

Melody

Note 1: External hold tone is supplied to the PLO of local nodes only (all LN0-LN3 except ISW)

Note 2: Multiple connection is provided on the MDF also between PLO No. 0 and No. 1 systems.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 5

Page 439

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

12. SYSTEM DOWN FAULT

This section explains the fault repair procedure when both the CPU and TSW systems are faulty. Figure 5-24

shows the sequence of repair for system down fault.

Figure 5-24 System Down Fault Repair Sequence

When cause for the fault cannot be identified:

Section 12.1 When faulty circuit cards can be assumed from

system message: Section 12.2

Check power supply.

Minimize system configuration.

Execute system initialization and see if the mode becomes ON-LINE.

Replace doubtful circuit card with a spare.

CHAPTER 5 NDA-24307

Page 440

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

12.1 When Cause for Fault Cannot Be Identified

Check power supply circuits. Check voltage (DC: -48 V ±5 V) at LOAD side

of the rectifier.

Confirm that NFB (circuit breaker) on all PWR

supplies is at ON position (UP side).

Check to see if there is any PWR supply to

which the alarm lamp illuminates.

System Initialization by loading office data

and program data from the hard disk (Refer

to Section 12, Chapter 6.)

Service connections such as

station-to-station connection

cannot be set up.

See “Check by Minimizing the System

Configuration” on the next page.

Service connections such as

station-to-station connection can

be set up.

The data in the memory has been temporarily

destroyed. Observe the situation for a while.

START

END

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 5

Page 441

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

(1) Check by minimizing the system configuration

Mount only the basic circuit cards in CPU

No. 0 system and initialize. Remove all circuit cards from CPU No. 0

system except the basic circuit cards.

The circuit cards to be mounted are as follows:

•LN

CPU, EMA, GT, TSW, MUX

•ISW

CPU, EMA, IOGT, TSW, HSW

On the CPU Display Panel (DSP), set its SENSE

switch to “1.”

Press Reset (RST) button on the DSP.

CPU OPE lamp should be illuminated on the

DSP.

Initialization cannot be made. Check by replacing the basic circuit cards

individually.

Set MB switch of the circuit card UP and

extract the circuit card from its mounting

slot.

Make necessary switch settings on the new

circuit card.

Set MB switch of the new circuit card UP

and insert the circuit card into its mounting

slot.

Set MB switch DOWN.

On the DSP (CPU), set SENSE switch to “1.”

Press RST button on the DSP.

CPU OPE lamp should illuminate on the DSP.

If CPU OPE lamp of the DSP does not

illuminate, replace next circuit card and check it.

(Repeat the above steps for all basic circuit

cards.)

CHAPTER 5 NDA-24307

Page 442

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

Initialize by loading the office data and Pro-

gram Data from hard disk using command

“MEM_HDD.”

Set SYSTEM DATA key on the TOPU to

LOAD position

Using “MEM_HDD,” load the office data and

Program Data from the Hard Disk into the data

memory.

Confirm the SENSE switch is set at “2” on the

DSP (CPU).

Press RST on the DSP.

Confirm OPE lamp illuminates on each basic

circuit card.

Insert removed control circuit cards of CPU

No. 0 and line/trunk circuit cards into their

slots and see if a fault occurs.

Set MB switch of the circuit card UP and insert it

into its mounting slot. (Repeat this for all the cir-

cuit cards.)

Set MB switch DOWN and see if a fault occurs.

Insert control circuit cards of CPU No. 1

system into their mounting slots, and see if

a fault occurs.

Insert the following control circuit cards of CPU

No. 1 system.

•LN

CPU, EMA, GT, TSW, MUX

•ISW

CPU, EMA, IOGT, TSW, HSW

Set MB switch of the circuit card UP and insert

the circuit card into its mounting slot. (Repeat

this for all the circuit cards.)

After the fault repair, mount all the circuit

cards into their mounting slots and execute

system initialization. Refer to Section 12,

Section 6.

Set MB switch DOWN and see if a fault occurs.

Confirm that service connections such as

Station to Station Connection can be set up

between LNs.

END

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 5

Page 443

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

12.2 When Faulty Circuit Cards Can Be Assumed From System Message

Faulty Situation:

•When the system is down with message [0-C] ~ [0-J] indicated, faulty circuit cards can be assumed from

the message detail data. Replace circuit cards with spares.

Replace faulty circuit card with a spare. Set MB switch UP and extract the circuit card

from its mounting slot.

Make necessary switch settings on the new

circuit card.

Set the MB switch UP and insert the circuit

card into its mounting slot.

Set the MB switch DOWN.

Confirm that service connections such as

station-to-station connection can be set up.

START

END

CHAPTER 5 NDA-24307

Page 444

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

13. COMMON CHANNEL INTEROFFICE SIGNALING (CCIS) LINE FAULT

This section explains the fault repair procedure when any of the faults shown in Table 5-13 occur to a specific

CCIS line.

13.1 Check Point

When repairing a CCIS Line fault, consider the following:

(1) Check alarm lamps on the CCH or CCT circuit card.

(2) Refer to Figure 5-25, and check the cable connection.

13.2 CCIS Line Control

The CCH/CCT circuit card controls the signal link (digital) of the interoffice common channel signaling

system and transmitting/receiving call processing information. The signal link controls permit normal

transmission and reception of call processing information.

A break in signal links is detected, then restored to establish signal links. The call processing information

is converted into No. 7 signal format for channel 1 (any channel) of the DTI before being transmitted to a

distant office. Figure 5-25 shows the CCIS line control route.

Figure 5-25 Controlling CCIS Line

Table 5-13 CCIS Line Fault Situation

FAULTY SITUATION REFERENCE SECTION

A specific CCH/CCT card is faulty. Section 13.3, Specific CCH/CCT Card Is Faulty

When the signal transmission line is a digital line, transmitting/

receiving of control signals cannot be performed. Section 13.4, Fault of CCH, DTI and Related Flat

Cable

CPU TSW

MUX

CCH

CCT

DTI

LT Cable

Front

Cable

MDF

To CCIS Line

LT Cable

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 5

Page 445

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

13.3 Specific CCH/CCT Card Is Faulty

Check by replacing CCH/CCT card with

a spare. On CCH/CCT card, set the MBR switch UP.

On CCH/CCT card, set MB switch UP and

extract the card from its mounting slot.

Make switch settings on a new CCH/CCT

card, referring to the card extracted.

On new CCH/CCT card, set MBR and MB

switches UP and insert the card into its

mounting slot.

On new CCH/CCT card, set MB switch

DOWN.

On new CCH/CCT card, set MBR switch

DOWN.

Check whether the fault is still indicated.

START

END

CHAPTER 5 NDA-24307

Page 446

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

13.4 Fault of CCH, DTI and Related Flat Cable

Check connectors and flat cables between

DTI and CCH. On DTI cards, set MB switch UP. On CCH

card, set MBR switch UP.

Check the connector. Check whether the connector is correctly

connected or not. If the connection is found

improper, plug and unplug the connector a few

times.

On DTI cards, set MB switch DOWN. On CCH

card, set MBR switch DOWN.

Check whether the fault is still indicated.

Check the flat cable. On DTI cards, set MB switch UP. On CCH

card, set MBR switch UP.

Test the continuity of the flat cable. If found to

be abnormal, replace the flat cable with a spare.

On DTI cards, set MB switch DOWN. On CCH

card, set MBR switch DOWN.

Check whether the fault is still indicated.

Check by replacing the DTI card with

spare. On DTI card, set MB switch UP and extract the

card from the mounting slot.

On a new DTI card, make the switch setting,

referring to the replaced card.

On new DTI card, set MB switch UP and insert

the card into the mounting slot.

On new DTI card, set MB switch DOWN.

Check whether the fault is still indicated.

START

END

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 5

Page 447

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

14. INTEGRATED SERVICE DIGITAL NETWORK (ISDN) LINE FAULT

This section explains the fault repair procedure when any of the faults shown in Table 5-14 occur to a specific

ISDN.

14.1 Check Point

When repairing an ISDN line fault, consider the following items:

(1) Check alarm lamps on the DCH or PRT circuit card.

(2) Refer to Figure 5-26, and check the cable connection.

14.2 ISDN Line Control

The DCH/PRT circuit card controls the signal link (digital) of the ISDN line and transmits/receives call

processing information.

The signal link controls permit normal transmission and reception of call processing information. Figure

5-26 shows the ISDN line control route.

Figure 5-26 Controlling ISDN Line

Table 5-14 ISDN Line Fault Situation

FAULTY SITUATION REFERENCE SECTION

A specific CCH/CCT card is faulty. Section 14.3, Specific DCH/PRT Card Is Faulty

When the signal transmission line is a digital line, transmitting/

receiving of control signals cannot be performed. Section 14.4, Fault of DCH, DTI and Related Flat

Cable

CPU TSW

MUX

DCH

PRT

DTI

LT Cable

Front

Cable

MDF

To ISDN Line

LT Cable

CHAPTER 5 NDA-24307

Page 448

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

14.3 Specific DCH/PRT Card Is Faulty

Check by replacing the DCH/PRT card with

a spare. On DCH/PRT card, set MBR switch UP.

On DCH/PRT card, set MB switch UP and

extract the card from its mounting slot.

Make switch setting on a new DCH/PRT card,

referring to extracted card.

On new DCH/PRT card, set MBR and MB

switches UP and insert the card into its

mounting slot.

On new DCH/PRT card, set MB switch

DOWN.

On new DCH/PRT card, set MBR switch

DOWN.

Check whether the fault is still indicated.

START

END

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 5

Page 449

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

14.4 Fault of DCH, DTI and Related Flat Cable

Check the connectors and flat cables

between DTI and DCH.

Check the connector. On DTI cards, set MB switch UP. On DCH

card, set MBR switch UP.

Check whether the connector is correctly

connected. If the connection is found improper,

plug and unplug the connector a few times.

On DTI cards, set MB switch DOWN. On DCH

card, set MBR switch DOWN.

Check whether the fault is still indicated.

Check the flat cable. On DTI cards, set MB switch UP. On DCH

card, set MBR switch UP.

Test the continuity of the flat cable. If abnormal,

replace the flat cable with spare.

On DTI cards, set MB switch DOWN. On DCH

card, set MBR switch DOWN.

Check whether the fault is still indicated.

Check by replacing the DTI card with a

spare. On DTI card, set MB switch UP and extract the

card from the mounting slot.

On a new DTI card, make switch setting.

On new DTI card, set MB switch UP and insert

the card into the mounting slot.

On new DTI card, set MB switch DOWN.

Check whether the fault is still indicated.

START

END

CHAPTER 5 NDA-24307

Page 450

Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

15. HARD TIME CLOCK FAULT

This section explains the procedure for repairing a hard time clock failure which occurs within the EMA card.

Replace the EMA card.

If the EMA card is removed from the

system while the system is in operation

under the control of the CPU 1, the

system will reset and stop all call

processing. See Section 1.3.2, EMA

Card Replacement Procedure, Chapter

4, for detailed instructions.

Replace the EMA card referring to Section

1.3.2, EMA Card Replacement Procedure,

Chapter 4.

START

END

WARNING

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 6

Page 451

Issue 1

CHAPTER 6 SYSTEM OPERATIONS

To maintain the system in a normal state, maintenance technicians need to monitor the servicing status of the

system. Figure 6-1 shows the flow of the system status monitor.

When trouble occurs in any part of the system or to any phase of system operations, maintenance technicians

are alerted by an alarm indication or by a report from a station user or an operator. When the system becomes

overloaded, maintenance technicians can execute Line Load Control.

Figure 6-1 System Status Monitor

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

1. ALARM INDICATIONS

•Alarm Lamps on Circuit Card

•Alarm Lamps on TOPU

•Alarm Lamps on ATTCON/DESKCON

2. COLLECTION OF SYSTEM MESSAGES

3. INDICATION OF LOCKOUT STATUS

4. LINE LOAD CONTROL

5. IOC LINE MONITOR

6. LINE MANAGEMENT

•Make-Busy/Make-Busy Cancel of Station

•Class/Number Change of Station and Data Terminal

•Make-Busy/Make-Busy Cancel of C.O./Tie Line

7. STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING SYSTEM (SMDR)

8. TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT

9. OFFICE DATA MANAGEMENT

10. TEST OPERATIONS OF VARIOUS KIND

11. ROUTINE DIAGNOSIS

12. SYSTEM CONTROL PROCEDURES

•Changeover/Make-Busy/Make-Busy Cancel of Equipment

•Initialization

•Power ON/OFF

•System Startup

CHAPTER 6 NDA-24307

Page 452

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

1. ALARM INDICATIONS

When trouble occurs in the system, the system activates an appropriate remedial action (system changeover,

make-busy shift of the circuit card, restart processing, etc.) by executing the automatic diagnostic function.

Results of the action taken and the faulty situation are displayed.

1.1 Kinds of Alarm Indications

Figure 6-2 shows the kinds of alarm indications.

Figure 6-2 Alarm Indications

1.2 How to Stop Alarm Indications

To stop the alarm indication, press ALM RST key on the TOPU or use the RALM/RALMN command.

Note: If the RALM/RALMN command is executed, the system messages that show the reason for the failure

will be cleared. Always print the indicated system message before using this command.

ALARM INDICATIONTROUBLE

SYSTEM MESSAGE

•TOPU

•CIRCUIT CARDS

•ATTCON/DESKCON

•MAT

•SYSTEM DEDICATED PRINTER

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 6

Page 453

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

1.3 Alarm Indications on TOPU

The system has alarm lamps on the TOPU as shown in Figure 6-3. Table 6-1 lists the meaning of each

lamp.

Figure 6-3 Alarm Indications on TOPU

Table 6-1 Description of Alarm Indications on TOPU

LAMP COLOR FUNCTION CONTENTS

PWR ON Green Power ON Indication Lights when the power is turned ON to the LPM (EMA card

mounted)

ALM MJ Red Alarm urgency level

indicating lamps for each

IMG/ISW

The kind of lamp indications are programmable by variable alarm

indication. Refer to Section 1.4, Variable Alarm Indication.

ALM MN Red

ALM SUP Yellow

SMJ Red Alarm urgency level

indicating lamps for

IMG0 of LN/ISW

LN: Lights when any abnormal state is detected within the node.

ISW: Lights when any abnormal state is detected with ISW.

SMN Red

SMN

PWRSMJ

MJMNSUP

ALM

NEC

NEAX 2400 IPX

PWR

MJ MN SUP

ALM

SYSTEM

CHAPTER 6 NDA-24307

Page 454

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

1.4 Variable Alarm Indication

This feature allows PBX users to make a flexible change of system message output grades which range 0

to 3 and alarm lamp grades which consist of MJ, MN, SUP and NONE. Thus, the PBX users can give a

proper alarm grade to each system message according to their requirements. When assigning no data, the

default alarm grades are automatically adopted.

COMMAND COMMAND FULL NAME

ALMG Assignment of Alarm Grade Data

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 6

Page 455

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

2. COLLECTION OF SYSTEM MESSAGES

System messages are collected in the following ways:

•Automatic printout to the system message dedicated printer

•Automatic printout to the MAT printer

•Printout by DFTD command

2.1 Automatic Printout to System Message Dedicated Printer

Figure 6-4 shows the operating procedure.

Figure 6-4 Automatic Printout to System Message Dedicated Printer Operating Procedure

2.2 Display on MAT

Set Scanning to Scanning ON (default) on the Scanning PBX form to collect system messages. If any

message is collected, the information is displayed in the text box on the DFTD command form.

COMMAND COMMAND FULL NAME

MBSM Make Busy of System Message Printout

Power ON to printer.

Automatic

Printout Status

Is printout

stopped

temporarily?

If a message is registered, the contents will

Set printer port to Make-Busy

status using MBSM command.

YES

print out.

CHAPTER 6 NDA-24307

Page 456

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

3. INDICATION OF LOCKOUT STATIONS

When a station is in lockout status (permanent signaling state, shorting across speech wires, etc.), it can quickly

be discovered, preventing the situation from developing into serious trouble.

3.1 Indicating Method

By entering the following commands from the MAT, information pertaining to the lockout station con-

cerned will display.

3.2 Recovery Procedure

Figure 6-5 Recovery Procedure From Lockout Station (1/2)

COMMAND COMMAND FULL NAME

DLSL Display of Lockout Station - LENS

DLSS Display of Lockout Station - Number

Confirm the state of the handset of

the displayed station.

On the MDF, connect the test

telephone to the displayed station

and confirm Dial Tone (DT).

Hear DT?

The in-house wiring (from the MDF to

the lockout station) is shorting.

Check the wiring.

Go on-hook and then go off-hook again.

LOCKOUT STATION

SEPARATING

MDF PBX

TEST TEL.

If dial tone is heard, the station is in permanent

signaling status.

YES

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 6

Page 457

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Figure 6-5 Recovery Procedure From Lockout Station (2/2)

COMMAND COMMAND FULL NAME

RLST Release Station/Trunk

RLST command

(Confirm: DT)

Hear DT?

Replace 16LC card

with a spare.

The circuit may be faulty temporarily.

Observe situation for a while.

Forcibly release the lockout station circuit.

Go off-hook again and confirm DT.

YES

CHAPTER 6 NDA-24307

Page 458

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

4. LINE LOAD CONTROL

In the PBX, Line Load Control can be activated automatically or manually as a countermeasure against

abnormal traffic congestion.

In the case of automatic control, the system automatically monitors an overloaded situation and restricts

outgoing calls from stations and incoming calls from trunks.

In the case of manual control, the operator at an Attendant/Desk Console or the MAT restricts outgoing calls

from stations and incoming calls from trunks.

This section covers the following methods to activate Line Load Control:

•Control by dialing an access code from the ATTCON/DESKCON

•Control by entering command data from the MAT

•System Automatic Monitoring

4.1 Operating Procedure

(1) Key operations on the Attendant Console (ATTCON)

By the operations on the ATTCON, restriction is effected on an outgoing call from a station having SFC

in which the SFI = 16 (Line Load Control) of ASFC command is set as RES=0 (incoming calls to that

station are allowed). For restricting incoming calls from a trunk, system data ASYD, SYS1, INDEX59,

b0=1 should be assigned.

•Setting

Figure 6-6 Line Load Control Operations on ATTCON—Setting

Press LOOP key.

Press CANCEL key.

•Lamp (Figure 6-8) on control

panel lights.

•System message [6-C] displays.

(SST)

Dial the access code for setting

Line Load Control.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 6

Page 459

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

•Cancelling

Figure 6-7 Line Load Control Operations on ATTCON—Cancelling

Figure 6-8 Line Control Indication (ATTCON)

Press LOOP key.

Press CANCEL key.

•Lamp (Figure 6-8) on control

panel lights.

•System message [6-D] displays.

(SST)

Dial the access code for cancelling

Line Load Control.

LAMP

NEC

CHAPTER 6 NDA-24307

Page 460

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

(2) Key Operations on the Desk Console (DESKCON)

By the operations on the Desk Console, restriction is applied on an outgoing call from a station having

SFC in which the SFI = 16 (Line Load Control) of ASFC command is set as RES=0 (incoming calls to

that station are allowed). For restricting incoming calls from a trunk, system data ASYD, SYS1,

INDEX59, b0=1 should be assigned.

•Setting

Figure 6-9 Line Load Control Key Operations on DESKON—Setting

•Cancelling

Figure 6-10 Line Load Control Key Operations on DESKON—Cancelling

Press LX (L1-L6) key.

Press CANCEL key.

•LLC displays on DESKCON

(Figure 6-11).

•System message [6-C] displays.

(SST)

Dial the access code for setting

Line Load Control.

Press LX (L1-L6) key.

Press CANCEL key.

•LLC displays on desk console

(Figure 6-11).

•System message [6-D] displays.

(SST)

Dial the access code for cancelling

Line Load Control.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 6

Page 461

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Figure 6-11 Line Load Control Indication (DESKCON)

(3) Operations on the MAT

By entering ALLC command from the MAT, Line Load Control executes. The station to be controlled and

the contents of the Line Load Control executed on the MAT are the same as those in Step (1), Key

operations on the Attendant Console (ATTCON).

(4) Automatic Setting

If the usage rate of the CPU exceeds the system data usage rate, Line Load Control is automatically set.

In this case, system message [6-C] displays. The station to be controlled and the contents of the Automatic

Line Load Control are the same as those in Step (1), Key operations on the Attendant Console (ATTCON).

If the usage rate of the CPU drops below the system data usage rate, the Line Load Control is automati-

cally cancelled. In this case, system message [6-D] displays. While the Line Load Control is set, the lamps

on the control panel of the ATTCON/DESKCON remain lit.

COMMAND COMMAND FULL NAME

ALLC Assignment of Line Load Control

Line Load indication

LLC is displayed on a Desk Console, when Line Load Control starts.

LLC

Desk Console

CHAPTER 6 NDA-24307

Page 462

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5. IOC LINE MONITOR

(1) Functional Outline

This function monitors the IOC port status. As a result of the monitoring by this function, the following

is executed:

•When the connection with a port has been disconnected, it is reported by a message.

•When the connection with a port is set up, it is reported by a message.

•The port status is stored in the memory and updated continuously.

(2) Message Judgment Criteria

Message Judgement Criteria are as described in Table 6-2.

Table 6-2 Message Judgment Criteria

MESSAGE CONTENT

Port Normal System data is assigned, and DR signal is ON.

Port Abnormal System data is assigned, and DR signal is OFF.

Output of Port Disconnected This message is output when Port Abnormal status has lasted for 30 seconds.

This message is immediately output if port abnormal occurs after the IOC card is

initialized.

Output of Port Status Restored This message is output when DR signal is ON for the port about which Output of Port

Disconnected message is output.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 6

Page 463

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

6. LINE MANAGEMENT

The following explanations apply to line management:

•Make-Busy/Make-Busy Cancel of Station and Data Terminal

•Class Change and Number Change of Station and Data Terminal

•Make-Busy/Make-Busy Cancel of C.O. Line/Tie Line

6.1 Make-Busy/Make-Busy Cancel of Station and Data Terminal

Stations can be put into make-busy state by the following operations:

(1) On each station basis using the MBST command.

•Assign the station number in the STN parameter and choose “1” for the MB box of the MBST com-

mand.

•For the make-busy cancellation, choose “0” for the MB box.

(2) On each circuit basis using the MBLE command.

•Assign LENS number in the LENS parameter and choose “1” for the MB box of the MBLE command.

•For the make-busy cancellation, choose “0” for the MB box.

(3) On each circuit card basis using the MBPM command or operating the MB (toggle) key on the card.

•Assign the required LENS number in the MG, UNIT and Group parameters and choose “3” for the

MB box of the MBPM command.

•For the make-busy cancellation, choose “2” for the MB box.

•Set to UP the MB key on the circuit card (= ON).

•For make-busy cancellation, return the MB key down (= OFF).

CHAPTER 6 NDA-24307

Page 464

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

6.2 Class Change and Number Change of Station and Data Terminal

Figure 6-12 shows the procedure for class change and number change of station and data terminal.

Figure 6-12 Class Change and Number Change of Station and Data Terminal Procedure

6.3 Make-Busy/Make-Busy Cancel of C.O. Line/Tie Line

Figure 6-13 shows the procedure to make-busy/make-busy cancel of C.O. line/tie line.

Figure 6-13 Make-Busy/Make-Busy Cancel of C.O. Line/Tie Line Procedure

Refer to Section 6.1.

• For changing class, use ASCL command Note 1

•For changing station number, use ASTN command

Note 2

•For changing telephone number, use ALGNN amd

ALGSN comands

Refer to Section 6.1.

START

Line Make-Busy

Class change and number

change

Line Make-Busy Cancel

END

Note 1: For guest station of Hotel System, use AGCL command.

Note 2: For guest station of Hotel System, use AGSN command.

END

• For make-busy/make-busy cancel by line basis, use

MBLE command

• For make-busy/make-busy cancel by route basis, use

MBRT command

• For make-busy/make-busy cancel by each circuit card,

use MBPM commands or MB (toggle) switch setting on

the circuit card

START

Make-Busy/Make-Busy Cancel of

C.O./Tie Line

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 6

Page 465

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

6.4 Line Management Commands

COMMAND COMMAND FULL NAME

AGCL Assignment of Guest Station Class

AGSN Assignment of Alternated Guest Station Number

ASCL Assignment of Station Class Data

ASTN Assignment of Station Number

ALGNN Assignment of Telephone Number Data for NDM

ALGSN Allocation of Telephone Number Data for NDM

MBLE Make Busy of LENS

MBPM Make Busy of Port Microprocessor

MBRT Make Busy of Route

MBST Make Busy of Station

MBTK Make Busy of Trunk

DLEN Display of LENS Data

CHAPTER 6 NDA-24307

Page 466

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

7. STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING SYSTEM (SMDR)

Billing information can be managed by connecting the PBX system and an external computer (SMDR

equipment).

Note: The SMDR equipment and its software must be provided by the user.

The PBX system provides the SMDR equipment with the following information:

•Calling Party Information

•Called Party Number

•Call Start Time

•Call End Time

•Authorization Code/Account Code

Upon receiving the above information from the PBX system, the SMDR equipment performs editing and

management of the information and outputs the resulting information.

7.1 Transmission Data to SMDR Equipment

(1) Transmission Format

As seen in the figure below, the basic information to be transmitted (Transmission Message) is a block

which begins with Start of Text (STX) and ends with End of Text (ETX). When the call ends, the whole

contents of this information is transmitted to the SMDR equipment.

(2) Transmission Message

One transmission message consists of 128 bytes of data. Each byte represents by ASCII codes the data to

be transmitted (Refer to Table 6-3). The contents of the data to be transmitted vary with the kind of call,

but the first byte is always transmitted by ASCII code K (4B hex.). The second byte to be transmitted is

the data which specifies the kind of call.

Note: In case the Fusion service is involved, the message can consist of more than 128 byte data.

STX: START OF TEXT

ETX: END OF TEST

SA: SYSTEM ADDRESS

UA: UNIT ADDRESS

TRANSMISSION MESSAGE

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 6

Page 467

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

(3) Text Format

Text formats can be selected by system data. For information on data assigment for SMDR, refer to the

“Feature Programming Manual.” Text formats used in the system are as follows:

•IPX format: This format used for both IOC and TCP/IP interface. Refer to Section 7.2

•ICS format: This format used for IOC interface. Refer to Section 7.3.

For detailed information on SMDR TCP/IP interface, refer to Section 7.4.9.

Table 6-3 ASCII Code

CHARACTER

ASCII CODE

REMARKS

HEX. BINARY DIGIT

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

0 30 00110000

1 31 00110001

2 32 00110010

3 33 00110011

4 34 00110100

5 35 00110101

6 36 00110110

7 37 00110111

8 38 00111000

9 39 00111001

SPACE 20 00100000Special Characters

Code

STX 02 00000010

ETX 03 00000011

SA 30 00110000

UA 21 00101011

* 2A00101010

# 23 00100011

CHAPTER 6 NDA-24307

Page 468

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

7.2 IPX Format (Text Format of Centralized Billing - Fusion)

Below is the IPX format of billing information to be transmitted to the SMDR equipment. Figure 6-14

shows the transmission message of an outgoing call. Figure 6-15 shows the transmission message of an

incoming call. Also, Figure 6-16 shows the transmission message of a station-to-station call.

STX : Start of Text ETX : End of Text

KK : Outgoing KL : Incoming

KM : Extension

Transmission Data

0! K

Kind

Data

Note

Data

Length

Kind

Data

Length Transmission Data

Note: For details on the Kind of Data, see Table 6-4.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 6

Page 469

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Note: Conditionally Provided: Information is provided when data is effective.

Provided: Information is provided on every call with no exception.

-: Not available.

Table 6-4 Kind of Data

KIND

DATA CONTENTS KK

(OUTGOING) KL

(INCOMING) KM

(STATION)

00 Not Used

01 Outgoing Trunk/Incoming Trunk Information Provided Provided -

02 Calling Party Information (Station Number) Provided - Provided

03 Calling Party Information (Telephone Number) Conditionally

Provided - Conditionally

Provided

04 Called Party Information (Station Number) - Provided Provided

05 Called Party Information (Telephone Number) - Conditionally

Provided Conditionally

Provided

06 Call Start/Call End Time Provided Provided Provided

07 Account Code Conditionally

Provided Conditionally

Provided

08 Condition B Information Provided Provided Provided

09 Alternate Routing Information/Incoming Route Number Provided Provided -

10 Dial Code Provided Conditionally

Provided -

11 Office Code Information (For CCIS) Conditionally

Provided Conditionally

Provided -

12 Authorization Code Conditionally

Provided Conditionally

Provided -

13 Condition C Information + Billing Info/Call Metalling

Info Provided Conditionally

Provided -

14 Condition D Information + Bill Notification Attendant

Console Number Conditionally

Provided --

15 Department Code Conditionally

Provided --

16 Automatic Number Indication Conditionally

Provided Conditionally

Provided -

17 Converted Number Conditionally

Provided --

18-99 Not Used

CHAPTER 6 NDA-24307

Page 470

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Figure 6-14 Message Format for Outgoing Call - IPX Format

Byte Data

STX

FPC

(3 digits)

Physical

Route No.

Trunk No.

Logical

Route No.

ORIG

Tenant

(3 digits)

STN No.

ATT CON

No.

RT/TK No.

(6 digits)

FPC

(3 digits)

User

Group

Number

Telephone

Number

(Max. 16

digits)

Logical

Route No.

(3 digits)

Year

Byte Data

100

110

105

115

125

120

130

135

Milli-Second

Account

Code

(Max. 16

digits)

FPC1

Outgoing

Tr u n k

Information

Calling

Party

Information

(Station No.)

Note

Calling

Party

Information

(Telephone No.)

Call

Start

Time

Minute

Second

Ye a r

Month

Milli-Second

Day

Hour

Minute

Second

Logical

RT No. 1

Physical

RT No. 1

Call End

Time

Account

Code

Condition B

Information

Note

Alternate

Routing

Information

Note

150

155

165

160

170

180

175

185

195

190

200

205

Dial Code

(Max. 32

digits)

Dial Code

Office Code

Information

Authorization

Code

Byte Data

Office

Code of

Calling

Party

Office Code

of Billing

Process

Office

Authoriza-

tion Code

(Max 16

digits.)

220

225

235

230

240

250

245

255

265

260

270

275

Condition

D Informa-

tion

Automatic

Number

Indication

Note

Department

Code

Billing

Information

Call

Metering

Bill Notifi-

cation ATT

CON No.

Condition

C Informa-

tion

Depart-

ment Code

ETX

Note: See Reference 1.

Day

Hour

Month

140

145

Logical

RT No. 2

Physical

RT No. 2

Byte Data

280

285

Automatic

Number

Indication

(Max. 32

digits)

Converted

Number

(Max. 6

digits)

FPC2

0, 0, 0

210

215

Con-

verted

Number

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 6

Page 471

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Figure 6-15 Message Format for Incoming Call - IPX Format

Office Code

of Billing

Process

Office

Byte Data

STX

FPC

(3 digits)

Physical

Route No.

Trunk No.

Logical

Route No.

ORIG

Tenant

(3 digits)

STN No.

ATT CON

No.

RT/TK No.

(6 digits)

FPC

(3 digits)

User Group

Number

(3 digits)

Telephone

Number

(Max. 16

digits)

Logical

Route No.

(3 digits)

Year

Byte Data

100

110

105

115

125

120

130

Milli-Second

Account

Code

(Max. 16

digits)

FPC1

Incoming

Tr u n k

Information

Called

Party

Information

(Station No.)

Called

Party

Information

(Telephone No.)

Call

Start

Time

Day

Hour

Minute

Second

Year

Month

Milli-Second

Day

Hour

Minute

Second

Logical

RT No. 1

Physical

RT No. 1

Call End

Time

Account

Code

Condition B

Information

Note

Incoming

Route

Number Note

140

150

145

155

165

160

170

180

175

185

195

190

200

Dial Code

(Max. 32

digits)

FPC2

Logical

RT No. 2

Physical

RT No. 2

Dial Code

Office Code

Information

Byte Data

Office

Code of

Calling

Party

210

220

215

225

235

230

240

250

245

255

Automatic

Number

Indication

(Max. 32

digits)

Automatic

Number

IndicationNote

Byte Data

Condition C

Information

Note

ETX

Month 135

205

Call

Metering

Authoriza-

tion Code

(Max. 16

digits)

Authorization

Code

Note: See Reference 1.

CHAPTER 6 NDA-24307

Page 472

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Figure 6-16 Message Format for Station-to-Station Call - IPX Format

Byte Data

STX

FPC

(3 digits)

ORIG

Tenant

(3 digits)

STN No.

ATT CON

No.

(6 digits)

FPC

(3 digits)

User Group

Number

(3 digits)

Telephone

Number

(Max. 16

digits)

Byte Data

100

110

105

115

125

120

130

Milli-Second

Account

Code

(Max. 16

digits)

Calling

Party

Information

(Station No.)

Note

Calling

Party

Information

(Telephone No.)

Call

Start

Time

Day

Hour

Minute

Second

Year

Month

Milli-Second

Day

Hour

Minute

Second

Call End

Time

Account

Code

140

145

Byte Data

3Condition B

Information

Note

ETX

Month

135

Note: See Reference 1.

ORIG

Tenant

(3 digits)

STN No.

ATT CON

No.

(6 digits)

User Group

Number

(3 digits)

Telephone

Number

(Max. 16

digits)

Year

Called

Party

Information

(Station No.)

Note

Called

Party

Information

(Telephone No.)

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 6

Page 473

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Reference 1

Data = 02: Calling Party Information (Station Number)

Data = 04: Called Party Information (Station Number)

Data = 08: Condition B Information

Tenant

(3 digits)

Station No.

ATTC O N N o.

RT / TK No.

(6 digits)

ORIG: Originating Source Identification

ORIG = 0: Information on Station

ORIG = 1: Information on Attendant Console

ORIG = 2: Information on Trunk

08 03 C

C0 = 0: Call Origination - Direct

1: Call Origination - via ATTCON

2: Call Origination - Direct (Alternate Routing)

3: Call Origination - via ATTCON (Alternate Routing)

4: Call Origination - Direct (LCR Routing)

5: Call Origination - via ATTCON (LCR Routing)

6: Call Origination - Direct (Called No. - first 6 digits of change code)

7: Call Origination - via ATTCON (Called No. - first 6 digits of change code)

C1 = 0: -

1: Call Origination by OG Queuing

2: Call Origination by dialing with Accounted Code

3: Call Origination by OG Queuing & dialing with Accounted Code

4: Call Origination by Call Forwarding Outside

5: -

6: Call Origination by Call Forwarding Outside & dialing with Accounted Code

C2 = 0: -

1: Call was transferred

2: Billing is continued

3: Call was transferred & billing is continued

4: Call was transferred to last called party

CHAPTER 6 NDA-24307

Page 474

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Data = 09: Alternate Routing Information (KK) / Incoming Route Number (KL)

Data = 13: Condition C Information + Billing Info / Call Metering Info.

09 18 FPC1

(3 digits)

FPC1: FPC actually used

Physical Route No. 1: Physical route actually used

Logical Route No. 1: Logical route actually used

FPC2: FPC first selected

Physical Route No. 2: Physical route first selected

Logical Route No. 2: Logical route first selected

Physical

RT No. 1

Logical

RT No. 1

FPC2

(3 digits)

Physical

RT No. 2

Logical

RT No. 2

•

Billing Info

Call Metering

In case of

Billing Information

Charge Data (Basic Charge Unit x 100)

Charge Data (Basic Charge Unit x 101)

Charge Data (Basic Charge Unit x102)

Charge Data (Basic Charge Unit x103)

Charge Data (Basic Charge Unit x104)

Charge Data (Basic Charge Unit x105)

0: No Charge Information

1: Charge Information for 1 cent unit

2: Charge Information for 0.1 cent unit

3: Charge Information for 10 cent unit

4: Charge Information for $1 unit

5: Charge Information for $10 unit

6: Calling Metering (4 digits)

F: Charge Information Error

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 6

Page 475

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Data = 14: Condition D Information + Bill Notification ATTCON Number

Data = 16: Automatic Number Indication

•

Bill

Notification

AT T C O N

Number

D - : Bill Notification (by ATTCON) Not Available

0 : Bill Notification (by ATTCON) Not Applied

1 : Bill Notification (by ATTCON) Available

* Information Element Identifier = 0: Unable to Output

1: Display

2: Unable to Notify

3: Out of Service (Out of Area)

4: Public Telephone Origination

Automatic Number Indication (Max. 32 digits)

CHAPTER 6 NDA-24307

Page 476

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

7.3 ICS Format

Below is the ICS format to be transmitted to the SMDR equipment. Figure 6-18 shows the Transmission

Message of an outgoing call, and Figure 6-17 shows the Transmission Message of an incoming call. Also,

Figure 6-19 shows the Transmission Message of a station-to-station call.

Figure 6-17 Message Format for Incoming Call - ICS Format

BYTE DATA

CALLED

NUMBER

CALL

OFFICE

100

ONLY FOR

NO. 7 CCIS

Note

MONTH

BYTE DATA

DAY

HOUR

MINUTE

SECOND

ROUTE

BYTE DATA

ROUTE

NUMBER

TRUNK

NUMBER

ORIG

STATION

ATTEND-

ANT

ROUTE

TRUNK

NUMBER

TENANT

MONTH

DAY

HOUR

MINUTE

SECOND

CALLED

PARTY

INFORMATION

Note

CALL START

TIME

Note

ROUTE

NUMBER

ACCOUNT

CODE

CONDI-

TION

CALLED

PARTY

TENANT

ADVANCE

INFORMATION

Note

CALL END

TIME

Note

METER-

ING

CODE

CALLED

PARTY

OFFICE

CODE OF

BILLING

PROCESS

OFFICE

BYTE DATA

AUTHORI-

SPACE

YEAR

128

118

(20 Hex.)

YEAR

116

114

ZATION

CODE

104

TERMINAT-

ING

TRUNK

INFORMATION

Note

Note: See Reference 2.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 6

Page 477

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Figure 6-18 Message Format for Outgoing Call - ICS Format

BYTE DATA

CALLED

NUMBER

CALL

OFFICE

100

ONLY FOR

NO. 7 CCIS

Note

MONTH

BYTE DATA

ROUTE

NUMBER

DAY

HOUR

MINUTE

SECOND

ROUTE

BYTE DATA

ROUTE

NUMBER

TRUNK

NUMBER

ORIG

STATION

ATTEND-

ANT

ROUTE

TRUNK

NUMBER

TENANT

MONTH

DAY

HOUR

MINUTE

SECOND

CALLING

PARTY

INFORMATION

Note

CALL START

TIME

Note

ROUTE

NUMBER

ACCOUNT

CODE

CONDI-

TION

CALLING

PARTY

TENANT

ADVANCE

INFORMATION

Note

CALL END

TIME

Note

METER-

ING

CODE

CALLING

PARTY

OFFICE

CODE OF

BILLING

PROCESS

OFFICE

BYTE DATA

AUTHORI-

SPACE

YEAR

128

118

(20 Hex.)

YEAR

116

114

ZATION

CODE

104

ORIGINATING

TRUNK

INFORMATION

Note

Note: See Reference 2.

CHAPTER 6 NDA-24307

Page 478

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Figure 6-19 Message Format for Station-to-Station Call - ICS Format

BYTE DATA

MONTH

BYTE DATA

DAY

HOUR

MINUTE

SECOND

BYTE DATA

SPACE

(20 Hex.)

ORIG

STATION

ATTEND-

ANT

TENANT

MONTH

DAY

HOUR

MINUTE

SECOND

CALLING

PARTY

INFORMATION

CALL START

TIME

ACCOUNT

CODE

CONDI-

TION

CALLING

PARTY

TENANT

CALL END

TIME CALLED

PARTY

INFORMATION

BYTE DATA

AUTHORI-

SPACE

YEAR

128

118

(20 Hex.)

YEAR

116

114

ZATION

CODE

104

SPACE

(20 Hex.)

TENANT

STATION

ATTEND-

ANT

TENANT

SPACE

(20 Hex.)

SPACE

(20 Hex.)

SPACE

(20 Hex.)

Note

Note: See Reference 2.

Note

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 6

Page 479

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Reference 2

7.4 Details on Transmission Data

7.4.1 Calling Party Information/Called Party Information

•The 9th byte indicates the type of the calling (or called) party. The 10th through 17th bytes are data

pertaining to this calling (or called) party.

ORIG (Originating Source Identification):

0 = Calling (or called) Party is a station

1 = Calling (or called) Party is an Attendant

2 = Calling (or called) Party is an outside (inside) party

•The contents of 12th through 17th bytes vary with the type of the calling (or called) party.

(1) For a station (ORIG = 0): Data showing Station Number

(2) For an Attendant (ORIG = 1): Data showing Attendant Number

(3) For a trunk (ORIG = 2): Data showing Route Number and Trunk Number

SPACE

1st DIGIT

2nd DIGIT

3rd DIGIT

4th DIGIT

5th DIGIT

6th DIGIT

EXAMPLEDATA

BYTE

SPACE

1st DIGIT

2nd DIGIT

3rd DIGIT

4th DIGIT

5th DIGIT

6th DIGIT

EXAMPLEDATA

BYTE

TR No. = 50

Data

Byte

1st DIGIT

2nd DIGIT

3rd DIGIT

1st DIGIT

2nd DIGIT

3rd DIGIT

RT No. = 1

Example

Route

Number

Trunk

Number

CHAPTER 6 NDA-24307

Page 480

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

7.4.2 Call Start/Call End Time Information

•The data which indicates Call Start Time is as follows:

•The data which indicates Call End Time is as follows:

THIS INFORMATION SHOWS THAT THE CALL

BYTE

114

115

DATA

MONTH

(01-12)

DAY

(01-31)

HOUR

(00-23)

MINUTE

(00-59)

SECOND

(00-59)

YEAR

(00-99)

EXAMPLE

STARTED AT 1 O’CLOCK P.M. ON JUNE 1st,

1998

YEAR INFORMATION IS SENT OUT ONLY BY

THE LAST TWO DIGITS AS IN ‘98 FOR 1998.

THIS INFORMATION SHOWS THAT THE CALL

BYTE

116

117

DATA

MONTH

(01-12)

DAY

(01-31)

HOUR

(00-23)

MINUTE

(00-59)

SECOND

(00-59)

YEAR

(00-99)

EXAMPLE

ENDED AT 9 O’CLOCK 10 MIN. 30 SEC. A.M.

ON OCT. 20, 1998.

YEAR INFORMATION IS SENT OUT ONLY BY

THE LAST TWO DIGITS AS IN ‘98 FOR 1998.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 6

Page 481

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

7.4.3 Called Number

•The data which indicates the Called Number is as follows:

9-0471-83-0351 HAS BEEN DIALED.

BYTE

EXAMPLE

SPACE

DATA

1st DIGIT

2nd DIGIT

3rd DIGIT

4th DIGIT

5th DIGIT

12th DIGIT

30th DIGIT

32nd DIGIT

9: OG ACCESS CODE

CHAPTER 6 NDA-24307

Page 482

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

7.4.4 Account Code/Authorization Code

•The data which indicates the Account Code is as follows:

•The data which indicates the Authorization Code is as follows:

Note: An Account Code is a numerical code to be dialed (up to 10 digits) by a station user with the

capability to enter a cost accounting.

BYTE

ACCOUNT CODE: 1115 HAS BEEN DIALED.

EXAMPLE

SPACE

DATA

1st DIGIT

2nd DIGIT

3rd DIGIT

4th DIGIT

5th DIGIT

9th DIGIT

10th DIGIT

Note: An Authorization Code is a numerical code to be dialed (up to 10 digits) by station users which will

override the station’s class (RSC or SFC) for facilities access restriction.

BYTE

104

105

106

107

108

112

113

AUTHORIZATION CODE: 4001 HAS BEEN DIALED

EXAMPLE

SPACE

DATA

1st DIGIT

2nd DIGIT

3rd DIGIT

4th DIGIT

5th DIGIT

9th DIGIT

10th DIGIT

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 6

Page 483

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

7.4.5 Route Advance Information

When a call has been originated by route advancing, the following data is transmitted.

7.4.6 Condition B Information

The 51st through 53rd bytes are Condition B Information. The Condition B Information indicates the

following data:

BYTE

THE CALL ORIGINATES

EXAMPLE

ROUTE

NUMBER 1

ROUTE

NUMBER 2

VIA NO. 3 ROUTE BECAUSE

NO. 30 ROUTE IS BUSY.

DATA

1st DIGIT

2nd DIGIT

3rd DIGIT

1st DIGIT

2nd DIGIT

3rd DIGIT

ROUTE NUMBER 1: The route which was actually used.

ROUTE NUMBER 2: The route which should have been selected first.

OUTPUT NUMBER

DATA

BYTE

0, 1 or SPACE

0–3 or SPACE

0–5 or SPACE

C2: 0 = Call is not transferred

1 = Call is transferred

C1: 0 = Normal Call

1 = Call originated by OG trunk queuing

2 = Call originated by dialing with Account Code

3 = Call originated by OG trunk queuing and dialing with Account Code

C0: 0 = Regular Call (Direct Dialing from a station)

1 = Regular Call (Call is made through an ATTCON/DESKCON)

2 = Call through route advance (Direct Dialing from a station)

3 = Call through route advance (Call is made through an ATTCON/DESKCON)

4 = Call through Least Cost Routing (Direct Dialing from a station)

5 = Call through Least Cost Routing (Call is made through an ATTCON/DESKCON)

CHAPTER 6 NDA-24307

Page 484

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

7.4.7 Call Metering Information

The value of call metering from the Central Office is transmitted via the data from the 92nd byte to

95th byte.

7.4.8 Office Code of Calling (Called) Party and Billing Process Office

The 96th byte through 99th byte indicates the Office Code of Calling (Called) Party terminated via

CCIS Line.

The 100th byte through 103rd byte indicates the Office Code of the office processing centralized

Billing for CCIS Network.

Note: Office Code includes the CCIS line access code.

BYTE

WHEN 5200 METERING PULSES

EXAMPLE

ARE RECEIVED FROM C.O.

DATA

1000

100

OFFICE CODE = 812

BYTE

100

101

102

103

DATA

1st DIGIT

2nd DIGIT

3rd DIGIT

4th DIGIT

1st DIGIT

2nd DIGIT

3rd DIGIT

4th DIGIT

EXAMPLE

SPACE

OFFICE CODE = 813

OFFICE CODE OF

BILLING PROCESS

OFFICE

OFFICE CODE OF

CALLING (CALLED)

PARTY

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 6

Page 485

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

7.4.9 Text Format of SMDR - TCP/IP Interface

When using SMDR - TCP/IP interface, billing information is output to the billing output devices

connected by an external LAN in the form of socket interface as shown in Figure 6-20.

Figure 6-20 SMDR—TCP/IP Interface Billing Output Devices

Details on the text format for SMDR - TCP/IP Interface are explained below.

(1) Identifier 1: Data Request Text

A text to be sent by the client when it requests the server to send billing data.

Text sending direction: Client Server

SMDR(A)

(Client)

SMDR(B)

(Client)

SMDR(C)

(Client)

SMDR(D)

(Client)

PBX(Server)

LAN

Billing Information

Note: A maximum of 4 clients can be designated as SMDR equipment for each LN.

Data length

(00002)

Text

identifier

(1)

Parity

Device

No.

CHAPTER 6 NDA-24307

Page 486

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

(2) Identifier 2: Sending Data Text

A text for sending billing data in response to “(1) Data Request Text” from the client.

Text sending direction: Client Server

The number of billing data records is 64 or less.

(3) Identifier 3: Server Response Text

A text to be sent to the client when there is no billing data to send in response to “(1) Data Request Text”

or as a response to a “(5) Status Monitoring Text.”

Text sending direction: Client Server

(4) Identifier 4: Client Response Text

A response text to be sent to the server by the client which has received the data by a “(2) Sending Data

Text.”

Text sending direction: Client Server

Data length

(XXXXX)

Text

identifier

(2)

Sequence

No.

Device

No. Billing data

(IPX Format) Parity

Note

Note: Text format of billing data is IPX format only. (Refer to Section 7.2.)

Data length

(00003)

Text

identifier

(3)

Parity

Device

No. Response

No.

Data length

(00002)

Text

identifier

(4)

Parity

Device

No. Response

No. ACK/

NAK

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 6

Page 487

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

(5) Identifier 5: Status Monitoring Text

A text for use in monitoring the server status from the client’s viewpoint or the client from the server’s

viewpoint. At the same time, the text is used to notify the server of the client status.

Text sending direction: Client Server

(6) Identifier 6: Connection Disconnect Text

A text to be sent from the client to the server to disconnect the connection. In response to this text, the

server promptly performs processing to disconnect the connection.

Text sending direction: Client Server

Data length

(00005)

Text

identifier

(5)

Parity

Device

No.

Client

device

information ACK/

NAK

Data length

(00003)

Text

identifier

(6)

Parity

Device

No. ACK/

NAK

CHAPTER 6 NDA-24307

Page 488

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

8. TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT

To obtain the value of common equipment usage, the system provides traffic measurement feature. It can

improve the system efficiency.

8.1 The Kind of Traffic Measurement

Table 6-5 shows the kinds of traffic measurements.

Table 6-5 Traffic Measurement Type s

TYPE KIND OF

MEASUREMENT DESCRIPTION

1* Terminal Traffic

Measurement Measurement of traffic on a per LENS basis, and measurement of the total traffic on

a PIM basis.

2* Route Traffic

Measurement Measurement of traffic on a per route basis.

3* Station Peg Count Measurement of the number of outgoing connections, intra-office calls, outgoing

C.O. line calls, Tie Line calls, etc. originated by each station.

4* ATTCON Peg Count Measurement of the number of each type of call handled at the ATTCON/

DESKCON.

5* Route Peg Count Measurement of the number of various types of call connections on a per route basis.

6 Service Peg Count Measurement of the number of times the following services are operated:

Call Hold

Call Back

Executive Right of Way

Call Waiting

Call Pickup - Group

Call Pickup - Direct

Call Forwarding - All Calls

Call Forwarding - Busy Line

Call Forwarding - Don’t Answer

Speed Calling - System

Speed Calling - Station

Off-Hook Outgoing Trunk Queuing

Outgoing Trunk Queuing

Consultation Hold - All Call

Call Transfer - All Calls

Three-Way Calling

8 UCD Route Peg Count Measurement of the number of incoming calls, answered calls, and abandoned calls

handled at UCD Groups on a per route basis.

9 UCD Group Peg Count Measurement of the number of incoming calls, answered calls and abandoned calls

on a UCD Group basis.

10 UCD Station Peg Count Measurement of the number of incoming calls, answered calls and abandoned calls

for each station on a UCD Group basis.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 6

Page 489

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Note: Asterisk(*) identifies the traffic measurements that can be saved on the HD of the MAT.

15 ATT Answer Peg Count Measurement of the number of answered calls handled by each attendant.

18 Connection Route Peg

Count Measurement of the number of various type of call connection on a connection route

basis.

19 Connection Route Traffic Measurement of traffic on a connection route basis.

Table 6-5 Traffic Measurement Types (Continued)

TYPE KIND OF

MEASUREMENT DESCRIPTION

CHAPTER 6 NDA-24307

Page 490

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

8.2 Operating Procedure

8.2.1 Procedure for Set-up and Start

The procedure to set up and start the traffic measurement is as follows:

(1) By using the ASYD/ASYDN command, assign the necessary system data as follows:

START

When performing traffic measurement on a node basis:

•SYS1, INDEX8 (Number of Tenants)

•SYS1, INDEX9 (Number of Attendant Consoles)

•SYS1, INDEX47, bit 0 (Unit of Traffic Measurement): 0/1 = CCS/Erlang

•SYS1, INDEX47, bit 7 (Traffic Measurement Service): 0/1 = Out/In Service Assign “1.”

When performing traffic measurement on a network basis (via TCP/IP):

•SYS1, INDEX8 (Number of Tenants)

•SYS1, INDEX9 (Number of Attendant Consoles)

•SYS1, INDEX47, bit 0 (Unit of Traffic Measurement): 0/1 = CCS/Erlang

•SYS1, INDEX47, bit 7 (Traffic Measurement Service): 0/1 = Out/In Service Assign “1.”

END

(2) By using the ATRF/ATRFN command, assign the traffic measurement programs as follows:

START

When performing traffic measurement on a node basis:

•Assign traffic measurement “TYPE” (Note 1), “PORT” number to be used, and the output

“INTERVAL” and “Time (HOUR/MINUTE),” etc. For more details, see the ATRF command in

CHAPTER 8.

When performing traffic measurement on a network basis (via TCP/IP):

•Assign traffic measurement “TYPE” (Note 1), “PORT” number to be used, and the output

“INTERVAL” and “Time (HOUR/MINUTE),” etc. For more details, see the ATRFN command

in CHAPTER 8.

END

Note 1: You can select one measurement “TYPE” at a time. If you need two or more measurement “TYPE,”

repeat the same steps, following the entry of this command.

(3) Terminate all the MAT commands.

An image of IPX “MAT Menu” is shown in Figure 6-21. Terminate all MAT commands, and make sure

no commands are currently running via the “Processes” button.

(4) Set the programmed Traffic Measurement in routine operation.

Click the “Scan New Alarms/Traffic” and “Collect New Alarms” buttons on the IPX “MAT Menu”

(confirm the clicked buttons remain in the pressed state). Then, the Traffic Measurement is activated as

programmed.

ASYD

ATRFN

ATRF

ASYDN

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 6

Page 491

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Figure 6-21 IPX “MAT Menu” Display Image (Example)

Office Name (assigned by ASYD/AOFC command)

Scan New Alarms/Traffic

Collect New Alarms

Collect New Traffic

Abort Data Collection

View Scanning Log

About

Log Manager

Log out

Configure

Processes

Major Alarm Indicator

Minor Alarm Indicator

Supervisory Message Indicator

Traffic Data Indicator

Command Name Input Text Box

This Figure shows the IPX “MAT Menu” display image. The display should look similar to the following:

CHAPTER 6 NDA-24307

Page 492

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

8.2.2 Data Output - Details on DTFD/DTFDN Command

To obtain the collected Traffic data, you can use the “DTFxxx” or “DTFxxxN” command as shown below. The

commands can be activated by your direct log-in operation onto the MAT, but in normal cases, the commands

are to be activated automatically at predetermined intervals assigned by the ATRF/ATRFN command.

Also, each command below corresponds to the Traffic Measurement “TYPE” assigned by the ATRF/ATRFN

command.

When performing traffic measurement on a node basis:

When performing traffic measurement on a node network basis :

Note: For information on the command display images, see Figure 6-22, Figure 6-23, and Figure 6-24.

Measurement “TYPE”

(by ATRF Command) Command

Name Full Command Name

1 Terminal Traffic DTF101 Display of Terminal Traffic Data

2 Route Traffic DTF102 Display of Route Traffic Data

3 Station Peg Count DTF103 Display of Station Peg Count Data

4 ATTCON Peg Count DTF104 Display of Attendant Peg Count Data

5 Route Peg Count DTF105 Display of Route Peg Count Data

6 Service Peg Count DTF201 Display of Service Peg Count Data

8 UCD Route Peg Count DTF301 Display of UCD Route Peg Count Data

9 UCD Group Peg Count DTF302 Display of UCD Group Peg Count Data

10 UCD Station Peg Count DTF303 Display of UCD Station Peg Count Data

15 ATT Answer Peg Count DTF501 Display of Attendant Answering Peg Count Data

18 Connection Route Peg Count DTF601 Display of Connection Route Peg Count Data

19 Connection Route Traffic DTF602 Display of Connection Route Traffic Data

Measurement “TYPE”

(by ATRFN Command) Command

Name Full Command Name

1 Terminal Traffic DTF101N Display of Terminal Traffic Data for Fusion Network

2 Route Traffic DTF102N Display of Route Traffic Data for Fusion Network

3 Station Peg Count DTF103N Display of Station Peg Count Data for Fusion Network

4 ATTCON Peg Count DTF104N Display of Attendant Peg Count Data for Fusion Network

5 Route Peg Count DTF105N Display of Route Peg Count Data for Fusion Network

6 Service Peg Count DTF201N Display of Service Peg Count Data for Fusion Network

8 UCD Route Peg Count DTF301N Display of UCD Route Peg Count Data for Fusion Network

9 UCD Group Peg Count DTF302N Display of UCD Group Peg Count Data for Fusion Network

10 UCD Station Peg Count DTF303N Display of UCD Station Peg Count Data for Fusion Network

15 ATT Answer Peg Count DTF501N Display of Attendant Answering Peg Count Data for Fusion Network

18 Connection Route Peg Count DTF601N Display of Connection Route Peg Count Data for Fusion Network

19 Connection Route Traffic DTF602N Display of Connection Route Traffic Data for Fusion Network

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 6

Page 493

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Figure 6-22 DTFD Command Display Image (Example)

Traffic Data

Check box to specify the “Traffic Data” TYPE.

Data Collecting Log

This area displays the current Traffic

Measurement data, based on the selected

“Traffic Data” TYPE.

Collect Data

Used to collect the Traffic report with regard to the selected “Traffic Data” TYPE. The result text is shown

in the “Data Collection Log” display area.

Stop

Used to quit the currently performed Traffic Data collection.

Print Log

Used to print out the text data now displayed in the “Data Collection Log” area.

Clear Log

Used to delete (clear) the text data now in the display of the “Data Collection Log” area.

View Database

Used to view the whole data (based on the selected data “Traffic Data” TYPE), so far stored in the database.

More details are shown in Figure 6-11-3.

Clear Database

Used to delete (clear) the whole data (based on the selected “Traffic Data” TYPE), so far stored in the database.

Log Colors

Used to designate/change the text font color of the “Data Collection Log” display area.

Exit

Used to exit this command. (Note that the database contents are not cleared by pressing this button.)

This Figure shows the DTFD command display image (example). The DTFD/DTFDN command should look similar to this.

Tool Buttons

CHAPTER 6 NDA-24307

Page 494

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Figure 6-23 “Listup Report” Window when “View Database” Is Selected (Example)

Figure 6-24 “Export” Dialog for Traffic Report Text File Saving

This Figure shows a sample image of the “Listup Report” window for the DTFD/DTFDN command. This window appears

by taking the following operations, and is used to obtain a sequence of Traffic data, so far collected and stored in the data-

base. The window is also used to save the Traffic data text (now displayed in the window) onto your desired PC directory.

- To activate this window:

1. Designate a specific “Traffic Data” TYPE out of the DTFD/DTFDN command check boxes (see Figure 6-11-2).

2. Press the “View Database” button on the left-bottom part of the DTFD/DTFDN command (see Figure 6-11-2).

Note

Note: When thiswindow is activated, the initial text to appear is the newest file data, out of a sequence of Traffic reports.

Like this, the newest text (in the database) appears on the first page, and the next new, the next page.

CloseCancel

[ TROUBLE :: DTFA ]

Start Time: 12/25 12:00

End Time: 12/25 13:00

Module Group Unit Group Type Level 0 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Level 7

0 0 0 CCS 09252.000 09215.859 09179.718 09143.576 09107.435 09071.294 09035.153 08999.012

0 0 1 CCS 09252.000 09215.859 09179.718 09143.576 09107.435 09071.294 09035.153 08999.012

0 0 2 CCS 09252.000 09215.859 09179.718 09143.576 09107.435 09071.294 09035.153 08999.012

0 0 3 CCS 09252.000 09215.859 09179.718 09143.576 09107.435 09071.294 09035.153 08999.012

0 0 4 CCS 09252.000 09215.859 09179.718 09143.576 09107.435 09071.294 09035.153 08999.012

0 0 5 CCS 09252.000 09215.859 09179.718 09143.576 09107.435 09071.294 09035.153 08999.012

0 0 6 CCS 09252.000 09215.859 09179.718 09143.576 09107.435 09071.294 09035.153 08999.012

0 0 7 CCS 09252.000 09215.859 09179.718 09143.576 09107.435 09071.294 09035.153 08999.012

0 0 8 CCS 09252.000 09215.859 09179.718 09143.576 09107.435 09071.294 09035.153 08999.012

0 0 9 CCS 09252.000 09215.859 09179.718 09143.576 09107.435 09071.294 09035.153 08999.012

0 0 10 CCS 09252.000 09215.859 09179.718 09143.576 09107.435 09071.294 09035.153 08999.012

0 0 11 CCS 09252.000 09215.859 09179.718 09143.576 09107.435 09071.294 09035.153 08999.012

0 0 12 CCS 09252.000 09215.859 09179.718 09143.576 09107.435 09071.294 09035.153 08999.012

0 0 13 CCS 09252.000 09215.859 09179.718 09143.576 09107.435 09071.294 09035.153 08999.012

0 0 14 CCS 09252.000 09215.859 09179.718 09143.576 09107.435 09071.294 09035.153 08999.012

* Terminal Traffic Data (DTF101) *

ABCDE

Listup Report

1 / 2 69 of 69 Total: 69 100%

Save Text File

When saving the currently displayed text page, press this button.

Then, a dialog box, as shown in Figure 6-11-4, appears.

Page (UP)

Page (DOWN)

Any Traffic data, now in the database, can easily be found via these buttons. Select “UP”

or “DOWN”, according to the text display pattern: “the newest the first, the oldest the last.”

Display Area

This area displays the details on

the Traffic report, specified by

the “Page (UP)/Page (DOWN)”

buttons.

Shown here is an example of a

certain first page of “Terminal

Traffic Data (DTF101)”.

The dialog box, as shown below, appears, if the “Save Text File” button is selected on the “Listup Report” window

(see Figure 6-11-3 above). If the file is to be saved:

1. Select “Character-separated values” on the “Format”

list box.

2. Select “Disk file” on the “Destination” list box.

3. Click OK.

After these steps, a new dialog, asking the saved file name and directory, also appears. Then, complete the data saving by

filling out these necessary items.

Format: Destination:

OK Cancel

Disk file

Character separated values

Export

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 6

Page 495

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

8.2.3 Service Conditions (when performing Traffic Measurement via TCP/IP)

(a) The NDM (network-level) data for the traffic measurement order is replaced/updated, at each time

the system is initialized or data change is requested from the ATRFN command.

(b) When the network-level data is once assigned via the ATRFN command, the node-level data for

ATRF command cannot be changed or modified.

by the ATRF command is not cleared, but becomes ineffective.

(d) When a data transfer error occurs, the following are performed in order:

Traffic measurement is suspended momentarily and system message is displayed (notification

of fault)

Traffic measurement, concerning all the remaining data except for the fault-involved one, is re-

sumed

Retry is made repeatedly for the transfer of fault-involved data, until the fault has been eradi-

cated

If the fault hasn’t been eradicated still until the time of next measurement routine, the data is

finally discarded, and next traffic measurement routine starts

(e) When the same Individual ATT Numbers exist on the network, the traffic measurement concerning

the ATTCON/DESKCON cannot be performed correctly.

CHAPTER 6 NDA-24307

Page 496

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

9. OFFICE DATA MANAGEMENT

This section explains how to manage various kinds of data such as Call Forwarding Data, Individual Speed

Calling Data, and Office Data, etc.

9.1 Office Data Stored Locations

The office data is stored in the Memory (MEM) and on the Hard Disk (HD). While the system is in ser-

vice, it operates by the office data stored in the memory. Should the contents of the office data be destroyed

due to trouble, the system restarts its operations by loading the office data from the hard disk into the

memory. The office data of the system in operation is being backed up by the hard disk.

9.2 Office Data Preservation

Since the PBX keeps operating by the assigned office data, be sure to preserve the latest office data. If the

office data is not preserved, all office data must be reassigned if the contents of the data memory have been

destroyed, because of trouble occurrence, etc. The system will remain in a system down state until reas-

signment of the office data is complete.

Practice to verify and confirm the valid office data by routine maintenance is considered an effective

means to prevent loss of the office data and occurrence of trouble due to the office data. For this reason,

be sure to keep the following items near the system at all times so that they may be available when needed.

(1) Office Data Programming Sheets

As the most up-to-date data must be recorded in the sheets, be sure to make entries by pencil.

(2) Floppy Disks for Data Saving

To back up the office data stored on the HD, use floppy disks. The necessary number of Floppy Disks (FD)

is determined by the following factors:

•Mounting capacity of office data depends upon the system data (ASYD-SYS1, Index30, ASYDL-

SYS1, Index 513, 514).

•Each floppy disk can save 1MB of data. After a large-scale office data change, in particular which

includes system data, unpredictable failures might occur. To deal with such failures, prepare an FD

for saving the office data before the changing. In addition, prepare an FD for saving the latest office

data.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 6

Page 497

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

9.3 Office Data Management Procedure

The procedure generally taken when changing the office data is shown below.

Figure 6-25 Office Data Change Procedure

HDD_FDD command

System Select : HFD0/HFD1

Direction Select : Verify HDD against MAT

Data Type Select : Data Memory, etc.

MEM_HDD command

Direction Select : Verify HDD against MEM

Data Type Select : Data Memory, etc.

MEM_HDD_N command

Direction Select : Verify HDD against MEM

Data Type Select : Data Memory, etc.

Entry Into Office Data Programming Sheets

MEM_HDD command

Direction Select : Memory to Hard Disk

Data Type Select : Data Memory, etc.

MEM_HDD_N command

Direction Select : Memory to Hard Disk

Data Type Select : Data Memory, etc.

Entry Into Office Data Programming Sheets

HDD_FDD command

System Select : HFD0/HFD1

Direction Select : Hard Disk to Floppy Disk

Data Type Select : Data Memory, etc.

CREATION OF DATA CHANGE PLAN

DATA CHANGING

DATA SAVE FROM HDD INTO FD

DATA VERIFICATION

DATA SAVE FROM MEM INTO HDD

LISTING OFFICE DATA

CHAPTER 6 NDA-24307

Page 498

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Figure 6-26 shows the function of three backup commands: HDD to FDD, HDD to MAT, and MEM to

HDD. These commands are available when logging in to each Local Node.

Figure 6-26 Node-Level Commands for Data Management

NEC

NEAX 2400 IMS

MAT

HDD

FDD

HDD_MAT

MEM

IMG0 (LN0/1/2/3)

HDD_FDD

MEM_HDD

DM: Data Memory

NDM: Network Data Memory

LDM: Local Data Memory

ND: Name Display Data

RCF: Wireless Call Forwarding Data

CF: Call Forwarding Data

SPD: Speed Calling-System Data

USK: User Assign Soft Key Data

NS: Number Sharing Data Note

CBK: Call Block Data (for Release 5 or later)

: Command

NDM

LDM

RCF

SPD

USK

CBK

NDM

LDM

RCF

SPD

USK

CBK

NDM

LDM

RCF

SPD

USK

CBK

Note: The Number Sharing data load/back-up also affects the data load/back-up of Dual Station

Calling Over-FCCS.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 6

Page 499

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

In addition to the three backup commands on the previous page, the IPX-U system also can use

“MEM_HDD_N” and “HDD_MAT_N” commands, which are available at the NCN (Network Control

Node) only. Figure 6-27 shows the function of these network-level data management commands.

Note: Service conditions for these commands are shown on the next page.

Figure 6-27 Network-level Commands for Data Management

NEC

NEAX 2400 IMS

HDD

MEM

IMG0

(LN0)

NDM

LDM

RCF

SPD

USK

CBK

NDM

LDM

RCF

SPD

USK

CBK

NDM

LDM

RCF

SPD

USK

CBK

NDM

LDM

RCF

SPD

USK

CBK

MEM_HDD_N

NEC

NEAX 2400 IMS

HDD

MEM

IMG0

(LN1)

MEM_HDD_N

NEC

NEAX 2400 IMS

HDD

MEM

IMG0

(LN2)

MEM_HDD_N

NEC

NEAX 2400 IMS

HDD

MEM

IMG0

(LN3)

MEM_HDD_N

Centralized MAT

(at NCN only)

HDD

FDD

NEC

NEAX 2400 IMS

HDD

MEM

IMG0

(LN0)

HDD_MAT_N HDD_MAT_N HDD_MAT_N HDD_MAT_N

NEC

NEAX 2400 IMS

HDD

MEM

IMG0

(LN1)

NEC

NEAX 2400 IMS

HDD

MEM

IMG0

(LN2)

NEC

NEAX 2400 IMS

HDD

MEM

IMG0

(LN3)

Centralized MAT

(at NCN only)

HDD

FDD

Control Signal from the MAT Control Signal from the MAT Control Signal from the MAT Control Signal from the MAT

Ether

< MEM_HDD_N >

This command is used to save/verify a series of Office Data from the Memory of all Local Nodes to the HDD of the same nodes.

< HDD_MAT_N >

This command is used to install (overwrite) the updated Program data, which has been already saved on the HDD of the

centralized MAT, onto the HDD of all Local Nodes.

NDM

LDM

SPD

: Data Memory

: Network Data Memory

: Local Data Memory

: Number Display Data

: Call Forwarding Data

: Speed Calling-System Data

RCF

USK

CBK

: Wireless Call Forwarding Data

: User Assign Soft Key Data

: Number Sharing Data Note

: Call Block Data

(for Release 5 or later)

: Command

Updated

Program Data

Data Install

Data Load (overwriting)

The Number Sharing data load/back-up also affects the data load/back-up of Dual Station Calling Over-FCCS

(for Release 5 or later).

Note:

CHAPTER 6 NDA-24307

Page 500

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Service Conditions for MEM_HDD_N Command

This feature is made available by broadcasting the same back-up request signal toward all the nodes. If a failure

occurs in any of the process, the MEM<=>HDD back-ups on a network level cannot be executed any more.

(Retry of signal broadcasting is not made.)

Service Conditions for HDD_MAT_N Command

When an error occurs in the process of data transfer, the updated program data is no more installed onto the

HDD of the node(s) which is/are involved in the fault.

9.4 Call Forwarding Data/Individual Speed Calling Data Management

Call Forwarding Data and Individual Speed Calling Data are changed at any time because these services

are set/cancelled from the station involved. In the PBX, these data are backed up by FD.

Call Forwarding Data: HDD_MAT command

Individual Speed Calling Data: HDD_MAT command

9.5 One-Touch Speed Call Memory Data Management

One-Touch Speed Call Memory data of Dterm is destroyed when ELC circuit card has been replaced with

a spare or its mounting slot has been changed. The data can be backed up onto FD before replacement or

mounting slot change of ELC card.

Backup: BOSD command

9.6 Commands for Data Management

COMMAND COMMAND FULL NAME

BOSD Back Up One-Touch Speed Call Memory Data

HDD_FDD Data Control between HDD and FDD

HDD_MAT Data Control between HDD and MAT

HDD_MAT_N Data Control between HDD and MAT for NDM

MEM_HDD Data Control between Memory and HDD

MEM_HDD_N Data Control between Memory and HDD for NDM

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 6

Page 501

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

10. TEST OPERATIONS OF VARIOUS KINDS

This section explains the methods of test operations (shown in Figure 6-28) to be performed in case a fault

recovery occurs.

Figure 6-28 Test Operation Method Examples

COMMAND COMMAND FULL NAME

DCON Display of Connection Status

Display of connection status of designated station/trunk

Test connection by designating trunks, tones, and ringback tone from test station

10.1 Designated Connection Test (Station)

Test connection by designating trunks (outgoing only) from ATTCON/DESKCON

10.2 Designated Connection Test (ATTCON/DESKCON)

Display of line failure indication when faulty condition occurred while a call is in progress

10.3 Bad Call Notification

CHAPTER 6 NDA-24307

Page 502

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

10.1 Designated Connection Test (Station)

(1) General

The purpose of this test is to confirm the operations related to a trunk or tone that is designated from the

test station. Refer to Table 6-6. The test result displays on the MAT screen as system message [6-I].

(2) Precaution

Designated connection to a trunk—A designated connection to trunk is limited only to an individual line

of either 2nd DT system or sender system.

Table 6-6 Designated Connection Test (Station) Operations

ITEM TEST ITEM CONTENT OF CONFIRMATION REMARKS

1 Register (ORT/IRT) Whether the dialed numbers (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 0, *, #) can be

received correctly is to be confirmed.

2 Sender Whether the numbers (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 0, *, #) can all be sent out

is to be confirmed.

3 3-Party Conference

Trunk By connecting the test tone to each port of a 3-Party Conference Trunk,

whether the test tone can be heard is to be confirmed.

4 Tone Various kinds of tone are to be confirmed.

5 Interrupted Ringing

(IR) Interrupt ringing (IR) is to be confirmed.

6 Trunk Connections of trunks are to be confirmed.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 6

Page 503

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

(3) Designated Connection Test Procedure

(a) Register Test Procedure

Figure 6-29 Register Test Procedure/Connection Diagram

•Access code is assigned by ASPA command, CI=N,

SRV=SSC, SID=17

•Route numbers to be designated are as follows.:

•If any of the dialed numbers are not received correctly, a

Reorder Tone (ROT) is heard.

RT NUMBER

902

903

TRUNK NAME

Originating Register Trunk

Incoming Register Trunk

Hang Up

TRUNK DESIGNATION TEST IN PROGRESS

UNDER TEST

ORT

Note: If the Trunk Number of the next register is not assigned, the test ends.

Lift handset

(DT)

Dial access code for

designated connection

(DT)

Dial “1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,0” (*, #

in case of PB signal)

consecutively

Is next register to

be tested, too?

(NO)

(YES)

Make switch hook flash

Note

+“9xx”

RT No.

“xxx”

TRK No.

(SST)

CHAPTER 6 NDA-24307

Page 504

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

(b) Sender Test Procedure

Figure 6-30 Sender Test Procedure/Connection Diagram

•Access code is assigned by ASPA command, CI=N,

SRV=SSC, SID=17

•Route number to be designated is as follows:

•If any of the dialed numbers are received correctly, a Reorder

Tone (ROT) is heard.

RT NUMBER

905

TRUNK NAME

Sender Trunk DP/PB

Note 1: After the sender to be tested is connected to the register, the sender sends out 1 ~ 9, 0 by DP

signals and 1 ~ 9, 0, *, # by PB signals, thus checking to see if the dialed numbers are sent out

correctly.

Note 2: If the trunk number of the next sender is not assigned, the test ends.

+“9xx”

RT No.

“xxx”

TRK No.

Lift handset

Connection test is automatically

Is next

performed Note 1

tested, too?

Make switch hook flash

Note 2

(DT)

Dial access code for

designated connection

(Music On Hold)

(SST)

TRUNK DESIGNATION

MUSIC ON

HOLD

ORT SND

TEST IN PROGRESS

ORT

OR PB

YES

NO Hang Up

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 6

Page 505

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Figure 6-31 3-Party Conference Test Procedure

Note: If the trunk number of the next 3-Party Conference Trunk is not assigned, the test ends.

•Access code is assigned by ASPA command, CI=N,

SRV=SSC, SID=17

• Route numbers to be designated are as follows:

RT NUMBER

909

913

TRUNK NAME

3-party conference trunk

(for station, ATTCON, trunk)

3-party conference trunk

(only for ATTCON)

+“9xx”

RT No.

“xxx”

TRK No.

Lift handset

Is next

tested, too?

Make switch hook flash

Note

(DT)

Dial access code for

designated connection

(SST)

YES

NO Hang Up

As shown in Figure 6-32,

tone sending is repeated.

CHAPTER 6 NDA-24307

Page 506

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Figure 6-32 3-Party Conference Test Connection Diagram

TSTT TSTT TSTT

TSTTTSTTTSTT

ORT

SST

TRUNK DESIGNATION TEST IN PROGRESS

1 SEC. 1 SEC. 1 SEC. 1 SEC.

1 SEC.

(DT) (SST) (DT)

(SST) (DT) (SST)

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 6

Page 507

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

(d) Tone Test Procedure

Figure 6-33 Tone Test Procedure/Connection Diagram

•Access code is assigned by ASPA command, CI=N, SRV=SSC,

SID=17

• For Tone No. to be designated, refer to Table 6-7.

•Tone designated by Tone No. is heard.

Lift handset

(Tone)

Dial access code for

designated connection

Dial “x x”

Tone Number

Dial “000”

(DT)

Hang Up

(DT)

TRUNK DESIGNATION TEST IN PROGRESS

ORT

TONE

CHAPTER 6 NDA-24307

Page 508

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Table 6-7 Tone Numbers

Tone No. Kind Of Tone Remarks

00 Dial Tone (DT)

01 Special Dial Tone (SPDT)

02 Ring Back Tone (RBT)

03 Continuous Ring Back Tone (CRBT)

04 Busy Tone (BT)

05 Reorder Tone (ROT)

06 Service Set Tone (SST)

07 Second Dial Tone (SDT)

08 No Tone

09 Sender Transmitting Tone (SDTT)

10 Call Waiting Ring Back Tone (CWRBT)

11 No Tone

12 No Tone

13 Test Tone (TSTT)

14 Music On Hold (MSC)

15 No Tone

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 6

Page 509

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

(e) Interrupt Ringing (IR) Test Procedure

Figure 6-34 Interrupt Ringing (IR) Test Procedure/Connection Diagram

AAAA

ORT

SST

•Access code is assigned by ASPA command, CI=N, SRV=SSC,

SID=17

Lift handset

Dial access code for

designated connection

(SST)

(DT)

TEST IN PROGRESSDESIGNATION

Dial “999”

Hang Up

Bell Rings

Lift handset and answer

(SST)

Hang Up

HANGUP

SST

ANSWER

CHAPTER 6 NDA-24307

Page 510

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

(f) Trunk Test Procedure

Figure 6-35 Trunk Test Procedure

Note: If the trunk number of the next trunk is not assigned, the test ends.

• Access code is assigned by ASPA command, CI=N,

SRV=SSC, SID=17

+“9xx”

RT No.

“xxx”

TRK No.

Lift handset

Is next

tested, too?

Make switch hook flash

Note

(DT)

Dial access code for

designated connection

(RBT)

YES

Dial the called party

number

The called party at the

distant office answers

and talks

Hang Up

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 6

Page 511

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Figure 6-36 Trunk Test Connection Diagram

ORT

TRUNK DESIGNATION CALLED PARTY DIALING CALLED PARTY DIALING

NUMBER SENDING

CALLED PARTY DIALING

TRK

AAA 2nd DT SYSTEM

CHARGING SERVICE

PROVIDED

SENDER

SYSTEM

SND

TRK

ORT

TRK

CHAPTER 6 NDA-24307

Page 512

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

10.2 Designated Connection Test (DESKCON/ATTCON)

(1) General

The purpose of this test is to confirm the operations related to a trunk which has been designated from the

DESKCON/ATTCON.

(2) Test Procedure

(a) Trunk seizure with TKSL key

•Whether dialing RT No. + TRK No.

•Dialing C.O. Line NO. is determined per ASYD

command, SYS1. INDEX68. b1.

C.O. Line No. is assigned by ACOC command.

Press TKSL or TRKSL key

(RBT)

+“xxx”

RT No.

“xxx”

TRK No.

“xxxx”

C.O. Line NO.

Dial the called party

number

Press CANCEL key

The called party at the

and talks

distant office answers

(DT from Distant Office)

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 6

Page 513

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

(b) Trunk seizure by access code dialing

•Special Code is assigned by ASPA command.

•CI=N, SRV=SSC, SID-17

•C.O. Line No. is assigned by ACOC command.

Press LOOP key or LX (L1-L6) key

(RBT)

Dial “xxxx”

C.O. Line No.

Dial called party number

Press CANCEL key

Called party at the distant

office answers and talks

(DT from distant office)

Dial access code

for designated connection

CHAPTER 6 NDA-24307

Page 514

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

10.3 Bad Call Notification

(1) General

When a station user has trouble because of hearing noise during a call, or has other difficulty having a

normal call, the line involved is recorded as a bad call notification.

The record displays on the MAT screen as system message [6-H], which indicates the recording source

(Station Number), Called Station Number or Trunk Number, etc.

(2) Operating Procedure

•SFC of the station user who can perform this operation must

be allowed ASFC, SFI=46

•Access code is assigned by ASPA command, CI=H,

SRV=SSC, SID=46

Switch hook flash

(SST)

Station user returns

to talking state

(SPDT)

Dial access code for

bad call notification

Talking

System message [6-H] displays

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 6

Page 515

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

11. ROUTINE DIAGNOSIS

For confirming its own servicing status, the system automatically executes self diagnosis every day, and

displays the result of the diagnosis on a system message. By this function, possible causes for trouble can be

discovered in an early stage and possible trouble can be prevented from remaining undetected.

11.1 Related System Data

•ASYD, INDEX62 b6, b7 - Routine Diagnosis ACT/STBY Changeover

b7 b6

00 = Every time

0 1 = Once a week (on Sunday)

1 0 = Once a month (on the 1st Sunday of the month)

Note: When Routine Diagnosis is simultaneously executed at all nodes (see SYS1, INDEX87, 88), all nodes

execute ACT/STBY changeover according to the data assigned in ISW.

•ASYD, SYS1, INDEX86,

b0 –When routine diagnosis starts, and the result of the routine diagnosis is normal, the result

displays as system message [7-O].

0/1: Not displayed/To display

b1 –When the result of the routine diagnosis is abnormal, it displays as system message [7-P].

0/1: Not displayed/To display

b3, b2 –Processing at the time when Trunk Ineffective Hold is detected. Note 1

Note 1: Trunk Ineffective Hold is a continuous state other than idle state within a predetermined duration

while routine diagnosis is in progress. Whether it is to be detected/not detected is assigned by ASYD,

SYS1, INDEX89.

Note 2: When Routine Diagnosis is simultaneously executed at all nodes (see SYS1, INDEX87, 88), all nodes

execute ACT/STBY changeover according to the data assigned in ISW.

Bit Except the trunks being held on two-way calls

(station-to-station call, station-to-trunk, trunk-

to-trunk call), the trunks being held at present

are forcibly released

All trunks being held at

present are forcibly

released

LENS of the trunk detected

display as system message

[7-P]

b3 b2

—

CHAPTER 6 NDA-24307

Page 516

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

•SYS1, INDEX87, 88 - Routine Diagnosis Start Time: Assign Routine Diagnosis Start Time only in

ISW. Regarding LNs, set indexes to FF so that all nodes simultaneously start/stop Routine Diagnosis.

Note

Start time should be such a time at which the traffic of the office is the lowest.

To stop the routine diagnosis, set FF respectively to INDEX87, 88.

Note: If the data other than FF is assigned in a LN, Routing Diagnosis is independently activated in the LN.

•SYS1, INDEX89, 90 — Routine Diagnosis Items: The item corresponding to each bit is to execute

once a day.

Note: When Routine Diagnosis is simultaneously executed at all nodes (see SYS1, INDEX87, 88), all nodes

execute the same Routine Diagnosis Items according to the data assigned in ISW. However, when Call

Forwarding Data Clear/Save is to be executed, the corresponding data (Index 232 b0-b3/INDEX304,

b0, b1, b3-b5) must be assigned on a LN basis

•INDEX89 b0 — Main Memory Check (MM Program Memory)

0/1 = No/Yes

b1 — DM Check (DM = Data Memory)

0/1 = No/Yes

b2 — TSW ACT/STBY Changeover (for Dual Systems)

0/1= No/Yes Note

Note: This data fixed to 0 in LNs.

b3 — CPU ACT/STBY Changeover (for Dual Systems)

0/1= No/Yes

b4 — Trunk Ineffective Hold Check

0/1= No/Yes

b5 — Trunk Ineffective Hold Detection

0/1 = No/Yes

b6 — Call Forwarding Data Clear (See Index 232)

0/1 = No/Yes

•INDEX90 b1 — Backup of Call Forwarding, Individual Speed Data, Name Display Data, User

Assign Soft Key Data and Number Sharing Data to HDD (see Index 304)

0/1 = No/Yes

b3 — Residual Link Detection

0/1 = No/Yes

INDEX 87 0 2 (Hour) 2:00 a.m. is the start time.

INDEX 88 0 0 (Minute)

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 6

Page 517

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

•INDEX232 b0 — Call Forwarding - All Calls Data Clear

0/1 = No/Yes (This data is valid when SYS1, INDEX232, b6=1)

b1 — Call Forwarding - Busy Line Data Clear

0/1 = No/Yes (This data is valid when SYS1, INDEX232, b6=1)

b3 — Call Forwarding - Don’t Answer Data Clear

0/1 = No/Yes (This data is valid when SYS1, INDEX232, b6=1)

•INDEX304 b0 — Individual Speed Calling Data Saving

0/1 = Out/In Service (This data is valid when SYS1, INDEX90, b1=1)

b1 — Call Forwarding Data Saving

0/1 = Out/In Service (This data is valid when SYS1, INDEX90, b1=1)

b3 — Name Display Data Saving

0/1 = Out/In Service (This data is valid when SYS1, INDEX90, b1=1)

b4 — User Assign Soft Key Data Saving

0/1 = Out/In Service (This data is valid when SYS1, INDEX90, b1=1)

b5 — Number Sharing Data Saving

0/1 = Out/In Service (This data is valid when SYS1, INDEX90, b1=1)

11.2 Routine Diagnosis Result

The result of routine diagnosis displays as a system message.

Normally ended: [7-O]

Abnormality detected [7-P] Refer to Chapter 3 for more details.

In case an abnormality is detected, initiate necessary processing explained in Chapter 5.

CHAPTER 6 NDA-24307

Page 518

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

12. SYSTEM CONTROL PROCEDURES

Although the system is remarkably maintenance free, maintenance technicians occasionally may confront a

situation in which they have to manually control the system. This chapter describes system control procedures

focusing on the following four items.

•Changeover/Make-busy/Make-busy Cancel of Equipment

•Initialization

•How to Turn ON/OFF the Whole System

•System Start-up

Note: Changeover of equipment is available for common control equipment, which is provided in a dual

configuration.

12.1 Changeover/Make-Busy/Make-Busy Cancel of Equipment

12.1.1 General

This section explains system operations which are necessary for Changeover/Make-Busy/Make-Busy

Cancel of equipment dividing them into the following two blocks.

•CPU Block

•Switching Block (TSW/HSW/DLKC/MUX, PLO/CLK)

Prior to performing these operations, see Figure 6-37 through Figure 6-44 to obtain general

understanding on the system configuration.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 6

Page 519

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

This figure shows a system block diagram of ISW, which adopts a dual configuration. As seen in the

figure, ISW has the following terminals for the ACT/STBY changeover of dual system equipment:

CPU: If the ACT/STBY of CPU (ISW) is once changed over, the whole controlling block (including

CPU, ISAGT, LANI in ISW) are also changed over.

IOGT: If the ACT/STBY of IOGT (ISW) is once changed over, the whole switching block within the

system (IOGT, TSW, HSW in ISW and TSW, MUX, DLKC in all LNs) are also changed over.

However, PLO (in both ISW and each LN) is not affected.

PLO: If the ACT/STBY of PLO in ISW is once changed over, only the PLOs in ISW are solely

changed over.

Figure 6-37 System Block Diagram for ISW Switching Network

Note: Even though the ACT/STBY of PLO in ISW is once changed over, the PLO/CLK in each LN are not changed over.

This is because the PLOs in ISW and each LN (TSWM0) have multiple connections, respectively, via the backboard

bus. For more details, refer to the “Circuit Card Manual.”

HSW 01

HSW 00

TSW 03

TSW 02

TSW 01

PLO 1

PLO 0

IOGT 0 IOGT 1

CPR 1

CPR 0 ISAGT

ISAGT: PZ-GT13 LANI : PZ-PC19 IOGT: PH-GT10 TSW : PU-SW00

HSW : PU-SW01 PLO : PH-CK16/17-A EMA : PH-PC40 IOC : PH-IO24

CPU 0

LANI LANI

MISC BUS

LANI LANI

IOC/

MISC

EMA

CPU 1

ISAGT

TSW 00

To TSW of LN3

External Cables

(ISW-LN TSW CA-n)

External Cables

(ISW-LN TSW CA-n)

External Cables

(ISW-LN PLO CA-n)

To PLO1 (TSWM0)

of each LN

To PLO0 (TSWM0)

of each LN

TSW I/O BUS

Note

To TSW of LN2

To TSW of LN1

To TSW of LN0

To TSW of LN3

To TSW of LN2

To TSW of LN1

To TSW of LN0

HSW 11

HSW 10

TSW 13

TSW 12

TSW11

TSW 10

Fusion Link

CHAPTER 6 NDA-24307

Page 520

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

This figure shows a system block diagram of LN, which adopts a dual configuration. As seen in the

figure, each LN has following terminals for the ACT/STBY changeover of dual system equipment:

CPU : If the ACT/STBY of CPU is once changed over, the whole controlling block in the

same node (including CPU, ISAGT, LANI) and GT in both TSWM0 and TSWM1

are also changed over.

GT (TSWM0) : If the MBR key is flipped on the active GT (PH-GT09) card in TSWM0, the whole

switching block in IMG0/1 (TSW, MUX, DLKC) and IMG2/3 (TSW, MUX) are to-

tally changed over. However, PLO (in TSWM0) and CLK (in TSWM1) are not af-

fected.

PLO (TSWM0): If the MB key is flipped on the active PLO (PH-CK16-A) card (in TSWM0), the

ACT/STBY of both PLO (in TSWM0) and CLK (in TSWM1) are totally changed

over.

Figure 6-38 System Block Diagram for LN Switching Network (1/2)

Note: See “Note” on the previous page.

ISAGT-A: PZ-GT13 ISAGT-B: PZ-GT20 LANI: PZ-PC19 GT: PH-GT09 TSW: PH-SW12

MUX: PH-PC36 DLKC: PH-PC20 PLO: PH-CK16-A EMA: PH-PC40 IOC: PH-IO24

LANI LANI

GT 0

TSW 00 TSW 10 TSW 01 TSW 11

GT 1

EMA IOC/

MISC

DLKC 0

DLKC 1

PLO 0

PLO 1

CPR 0

LANILANI

CPR 1

MISC BUS

TSW I/O BUS

Note

TSW I/O BUS

Line/Trunk PM

IMG 0

PM BUS

PCM HW

MUXMUXMUXMUX

ISAGT-B

To TSWM1

Line/Trunk PM

IMG 1

PCM HW

PM BUS

PCM HW

MUXMUXMUXMUX

TSWM0

To TSWM1

From PLO

of ISWM To CLK of

TSWM1

ISAGT-A ISAGT-A

TSW 02 TSW 03

TSW 12 TSW 13

External Cables

(ISW-LN TSW CA-n)

External Cables

(ISW-LN PLO CA-n)

External Cables

(PLO-CLK CA-n)

To/From TSW of ISWM

LN0/1/2/3

Fusion Link

CPU 0 CPU 1

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 6

Page 521

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Figure 6-38 System Block Diagram for LN Switching Network (2/2)

ISAGT-A: PZ-GT13 ISAGT-B: PZ-GT20 LANI: PZ-PC19 GT: PH-GT09 TSW: PH-SW12

MUX: PH-PC36 CLK: PH-CK18 EMA: PH-PC40 IOC: PH-IO24

LANI LANI

GT 0

TSW 00 TSW 10 TSW 01 TSW 11

GT 1

EMA IOC/

MISC

CLK 0

CLK 1

CPR 0

LANILANI CPR 1

MISC BUS

TSW I/O BUS

Line/Trunk PM

IMG 2

PCM HW

PM BUS

PCM HW

PM BUS

MUXMUXMUXMUX

ISAGT-B

To TSWM0

Line/Trunk PM

IMG 3

MUXMUXMUXMUX

TSWM1

To TSWM0

From PLO

of ISWM

CPU 0

ISAGT-A ISAGT-A

CPU 1

TSW 02 TSW 03

TSW 12 TSW 13

External Cables

(ISW-LN TSW CA-n)

To /From TSW of ISWM

External Cable

(PLO-CLK CA-n)

LN0/1/2/3

Fusion Link

CHAPTER 6 NDA-24307

Page 522

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

To perform the ACT/STBY system changeover, check the lamp indicators shown in Figure 6-39, and

then operate the related key.

Note 1: LED indications cited in Figure 6-39 are only an example. The indicating pattern (ON/Flash/OFF)

can differ, depending on each system setting.

Note 2: STATUS 7-seg. LED provides information on ACT/STBY status of the belonging CPU. For details on

the LED’s checking method, refer Figure 6-44.

Figure 6-39 How to Check the LEDs and SW Keys for System Changeover (ISW)

02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

HSW00 (PU-SW01)

TSW01 (PU-SW00)

TSW02 (PU-SW00)

TSW03 (PU-SW00)

TSW00 (PU-SW00)

TSW10 (PU-SW00)

TSW11 (PU-SW00)

TSW12 (PU-SW00)

TSW13 (PU-SW00)

HSW01 (PU-SW01)

HSW11 (PU-SW01)

HSW10 (PU-SW01)

(PH-CK16-A/17-A)

IOGT0 (PH-GT10)

IOGT1 (PH-GT10)

BASEU

LPM

TOPU

CPU 0 -> ACT

TSW 0 -> ACT

PLO 0 -> ACT

System State

Lamp is ON Lamp is Flashing Lamp is OFF

Legend

FRONT VIEW

ISW

ISWM

PLO0

PLO1

IOGT

FRONT

MBR

TSW ACT

TSW

FRONT

TSW MB

TSW MBR

TSW ACT

HSW

FRONT

HSW ACT

PLO

FRONT

OPE

03 04

IOC(PH-IO24)

EMA (PH-PC49)

OPE

..........

DSP 0 (PZ-DK224)

DSP 1 (PZ-DK224)

OPE/MB

12345678

OFF

1234

OFF

12345678

OFF

12345678

OFF

1234

OFF

12345678

OFF

IMG1 IMG2 IMG3

STATUS

Note 2

CPUOPE WDT IMG0

12345678

OFF

1234

OFF

12345678

OFF

MBR

PZ-DK224

FRONT

MMC(PH-M22)

OPE

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 6

Page 523

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

To perform the ACT/STBY system changeover, check the lamp indicators shown in Figure 6-40, and

then operate the related key.

Note 1: LED indications cited in Figure 6-40 are only an example. The indicating pattern (ON/Flash/OFF)

can differ, depending on each system setting.

Note 2: STATUS 7-seg. LED provides information on ACT/STBY status of the belonging CPU. For details on

the LED’s checking method, refer Figure 6-44.

Figure 6-40 How to Check the LEDs and SW Keys for System Changeover (IMG0)

13 14

MUX ACT

MUX(PH-PC36)

13 14

MUX ACT

MUX(PH-PC36)

13 14

MUX ACT

MUX(PH-PC36)

MUX ACT

MUX(PH-PC36)

13 14

TOPU

PIM3

PIM2

PIM1

PIM0

LPM

BASEU

FANU

FRONT VIEW

: Lamp is ON : Lamp is OFF: Lamp is Flashing

Legend

CPU 0 -> ACT

TSW 0 -> ACT

System State

IMG0

MUX

FRONT

MUX ACT

03 04

IOC(PH-IO24)

EMA (PH-PC49)

OPE

..........

DSP 0 (PZ-DK224)

DSP 1 (PZ-DK224)

OPE/MB

12345678

OFF

1234

OFF

12345678

OFF

12345678

OFF

1234

OFF

12345678

OFF

IMG1 IMG2 IMG3

STATUS

Note 2

CPUOPE WDT IMG0

12345678

OFF

1234

OFF

12345678

OFF

MBR

PZ-DK224

FRONT

CHAPTER 6 NDA-24307

Page 524

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

To perform ACT/STBY system changeover, check the lamp indicators shown in Figure 6-41, and then

operate the related key.

Note: LED indications cited in Figure 6-41 are only an example. The indicating pattern (ON/Flash/OFF) can

differ, depending on each system setting.

Figure 6-41 How to Check the LEDs and SW Keys for System Changeover (IMG1)

13 14

MUX(PH-PC36)

13 14

MUX(PH-PC36)

13 14

MUX(PH-PC36)

13 14

08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

DLKC (PH-PC20)

GT (PH-GT09)

TSW 00 (PH-SW12)

TSW 01 (PH-SW12)

TSW 02 (PH-SW12)

TSW 03 (PH-SW12)

TSW 10 (PH-SW12)

TSW 11 (PH-SW12)

TSW 12 (PH-SW12)

TSW 13 (PH-SW12)

PLO Note 1

(RES)

GT (PH-GT09)

TOPU

PIM3

PIM2

PIM1

PIM0

TSWM

BASEU

FANU

FRONT VIEW

: Lamp is ON : Lamp is OFF

Legend

IMG1

System State

TSW 0 -> ACT

PLO 0 -> ACT

DLKC 0

-> ACT

MUX

FRONT

MUX ACT

DLKC

FRONT

OPE/MB

PLO

FRONT

TSW

FRONT

TSW ACT

TSW MBR

FRONT

OPE/MB

MBR

ACT

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 6

Page 525

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

To perform the ACT/STBY system changeover, check the lamp indicators shown in Figure 6-42, and

then operate the related key.

Note: LED indications cited in Figure 6-42 are only an example. The indicating pattern (ON/Flash/OFF) can

differ, depending on each system setting.

Figure 6-42 How to Check LEDs and SW Keys for System Changeover (IMG2)

13 14

MUX(PH-PC36)

13 14

MUX(PH-PC36)

13 14

MUX(PH-PC36)

13 14

08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

GT (PH-GT09)

TSW 00 (PH-SW12)

TSW 01 (PH-SW12)

TSW 02 (PH-SW12)

TSW 03 (PH-SW12)

TSW 10 (PH-SW12)

TSW 11 (PH-SW12)

TSW 12 (PH-SW12)

TSW 13 (PH-SW12)

CLK (PH-CK18)

(RES)

GT (PH-GT09)

TOPU

PIM3

PIM2

PIM1

PIM0

TSWM1

BASEU

FANU

FRONT VIEW

: Lamp is ON : Lamp is OFF

Legend

IMG2

System State

TSW 0 -> ACT

CLK 0 -> ACT

MUX

FRONT

MUX ACT

CLK

FRONT

TSW

FRONT

TSW ACT

TSW MBR

FRONT

OPE/MB

MBR

OPE

CHAPTER 6 NDA-24307

Page 526

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

To perform the ACT/STBY system changeover, check the lamp indicators shown in Figure 6-43, and

then operate the related key.

Note: LED indications cited in Figure 6-43 are only an example. The indicating pattern (ON/Flash/OFF) can

differ, depending on each system setting.

Figure 6-43 How to Check LEDs and SW Keys for System Changeover (IMG3)

13 14

MUX(PH-PC36)

13 14

MUX(PH-PC36)

13 14

MUX(PH-PC36)

13 14

TOPU

PIM3

PIM2

PIM1

PIM0

DUMMY

BASEU

FANU

FRONT VIEW

: Lamp is ON : Lamp is OFF

Legend

TSW 0 -> ACT

System State

IMG 3

MUX

FRONT

MUX ACT

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 6

Page 527

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

•How to check the STATUS 7-seg. LEDs

The ACT/STBY status of CPU can be confirmed by viewing the STATUS 7-seg. LEDs. Visually

check the LED indications and confirm which CPU is active in your system.

When the STATUS LEDs display any of the two-digit numbers (00 - 99), the belonging CPU is

active. If the LEDs display the three letters (S, B and Y) in rotation, the CPU system is in STBY

mode. Note that the numbers (00 - 99), displayed on the active CPU front panel (DSP), conform

to the percentage points showing CPU occupancy rate.

Figure 6-44 How to Check STATUS LEDs

Legend

Lamp is ON

:Lamp is OFF

Lamp is Flashing

Active

IMG1 IMG2 IMG3

CPUOPE

STATUS

WDT IMG0

12345678

OFF

1234

OFF

12345678

OFF

12345678

OFF

1234

OFF

12345678

OFF

MBR

STATUS

ST-BY

IMG1 IMG2 IMG3

CPUOPE WDT IMG0

MBR

DSP (Front View) DSP (Front View)

If the CPU is active, the

LEDs here indicate CPU

occupancy rate.

If the CPU is in ST-BY mode,

the left-side LED here goes

OFF and the right side beams

S, b and y in rotation.

Note 1: The figure above shows an example of lamp indications on the DSP mounted in the ISW.

Note 2: In addition to the indication of “STATUS” 7-seg. LEDs, the ACT/ST-BY of the CPU also can be

confirmed via the “CPU OPE” and “IMGn” lamps. Lamp indications on CPR for the fully

expanded system (one ISW and four LNs) are shown below:

LED NAME ISW LN (IMG0)

ACT STBY ACT STBY

CPU OPE Steady-green OFF Steady-green OFF

IMG0 Steady-green Flash green Flash green Flash green

IMG1 Steady-green OFF Flash green OFF

IMG2 Steady-green OFF Flash green OFF

IMG3 Steady-green OFF Flash green OFF

CHAPTER 6 NDA-24307

Page 528

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

12.1.2 How to Control CPU Block

The ACT/STBY of CPU, when it is provided in a dual configuration, can be

switched over by one of the operations shown in Table 6-8. If the system of CPU

in the LN is changed over, the ACT/STBY of GT (in TSWM) also changes over.

See Figure 6-45.

Note 1: While changeover of the CPU is in progress, any call attempt is rejected. Already established calls,

however, will not be affected.

Note 2: When the forced changeover is executed, the entire system is initialized. For this reason, do not use

this operation except in unavoidable circumstances.

Note 3: Except in the case of ISW, the CPU mode change (in LN) affects the ACT/STBY of GT (PH-GT09)

card. See Figure 6-45.

Figure 6-45 shows a system block diagram centering upon the CPU and its controlling GT in a LN.

Though the two sides have a complicated cable connection, the controlling route of CPU 0 directly

goes to GT 0, and that of CPU 1 to GT 1. Therefore, if the system of CPU is changed over, the ACT/

STBY of GT also changes over (for LN only: IOGT is not changed over in the the case of ISW.)

Table 6-8 Changeover of CPU Block

TYPE OPERATIONS REMARKS

Changeover by

CMODI/CMOD

Note 1

Use the CMODI/CMOD command.

See Chapter 8.

CPU OPE lamp

lights steady green

on the DSP of the

CPU, which is

placed into ACT-

mode by this

operation. OPE/MB

lamp of GT

(PH-GT09) card,

which is in the

controlling route,

lights green.

Note 3

Changeover by key

operation Note 1

Turn ON the MBR key on the DSP of the active CPU. After a few seconds,

return the MBR key to the previous position.

See Section 12.1.3, Manual System Changeover of CPU.

Forced Changeover

Note 2 ACT/STBY mode of CPU can be controlled by CPU SEL key operation on the

EMA (PH-PC40) card.

UP- No. 0 system (ACT)

DOWN- No. 1 system (ACT)

Normally, this key must be placed in the center position when the CPU is

provided in a dual configuration.

See Section 12.1.4, Forced Changeover of CPU.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 6

Page 529

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Figure 6-45 System Block Diagram in LN (Switching Network Between CPU and GT)

ISAGT: PZ-GT13/PZ-GT20 LANI: PZ-PC19 GT : PH-GT09 TSW: PH-SW12 MUX: PH-PC36

DLKC : PH-PC20 PLO : PH-CK16-A/17-A CLK : PH-CK18 EMA: PH-PC40 IOC : PH-IO24

TSW 00 TSW 10 TSW 01 TSW 11 TSW 02 TSW 12 TSW 03 TSW 13

DLKC 0

IMG 0/2 IMG 1/3

To/From TSW of ISWM

MUXMUXMUX MUX MUXMUX MUXMUXMUXMUX MUXMUX

MUXMUXMUXMUX

TSW I/O BUS

DLKC 1

LANI LANI

ISAGT

CPU 0

GT 1

EMA IOC/

MISC

CPR 0

LANILANI

ISAGT

CPU 1

CPR 1

MISC BUS

GT 0

PLO 1/

CLK 1

PLO 0/

CLK 0

As shown below, though an external cable is

physically connected between ISAGT 0 and

GT 1, the actual control signal is sent/

received only between ISAGT 0 and GT 0 via

the backboard bus.

GT 1

GT 0

ISAGT0

CPU

IOP0

Backboard

Backboard Bus T

External Cable

Note : As for the ISW, although the cable

connection is the same as above, the

control signal is sent from ISAGT0 to

both IOGT0/1.

Note 3

Note 2 Note 2

Note 1: This figure shows the Switching Network diagram only related to the LNs. For the diagram

regarding the ISW. See Figure 6-37.

Note 2: This card is mounted in TSWM0 only.

Note 3: PLO card is mounted in TSWM0 and CLK card is mounted in TSWM1.

CHAPTER 6 NDA-24307

Page 530

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

12.1.3 Manual System Changeover of CPU

To change over the CPU system, the CMODI/CMOD command is normally used. However, if the com-

mand cannot be used for some reason, use the key operations listed below:

Note: For system changeover via the command, see Chapter 8.

Changeover Procedure for CPU of ISW

STEP 1 Determine which CPU is active.

(1) Check the lamp indications on the CPU Display Panel (DSP).

Figure 6-46 CPU in ACT/STBY Mode (ISW)

(2) Check the mate CPU’s STBY mode.

Improper key operations may result in a system down. Operate the related keys, applying

extreme care.

WARNING

Legend

Lamp is ON

:Lamp is OFF

Lamp is Flashing

Active

IMG1 IMG2

STATUS STATUS

IMG3

CPUOPE WDT IMG0

MBR

STBY

IMG1 IMG2 IMG3

CPUOPE WDT IMG0

MBR

DSP (Front View)

12345678

OFF

1234

OFF

12345678

OFF

12345678

OFF

1234

OFF

12345678

OFF

The system changeover of CPU can be done only when the mate CPU is in STBY mode. Do

not attempt the changeover if the mate CPU is closed.

WARNING

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 6

Page 531

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

STEP 2 Flip the MBR key on the DSP of the active CPU.

Figure 6-47 CPU Changeover via MBR Key (ISW)

Note: If the MBR key remains in the UP position, the CPU stays in its make-busy status. Be sure to return the

key to the DOWN position except in the case of a special purpose.

STEP 3 Confirm the changed lamp indications.

To confirm the CPU changeover, check the lamps on both DSPs. LED indications must change

as shown when the CPU system has been correctly changed over.

Figure 6-48 LED Indications Before and After CPU Changeover (ISW)

STEP 4 Analyze the displayed system messages.

After STEPs 1 through 3 are performed, the system messages [7-C] and [7-D] automatically

display. Confirm that no errors occurred during the CPU changeover process.

Note: When the CPU mode change executes, the MAT (TCP/IP) is once disconnected. Then, log in to the

system again.

After the above steps, set the MBR key as shown below.

The system changeover starts automatically.

12345678

OFF

12345678

OFF

1234

OFF

1 2

DSP (Active)

STATUS

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

CPU Formerly Active After Changeover

CPU Formerly in STBY Mode

CPU OPE

IMG0

IMG1-3

MB/OPE (GT Card)

After Changeover

OFF

Flash (green)

OFF

: Steady-ON (green)

: Flash (green)

: Steady-ON (green)

CPU OPE

IMG0

IMG1-3

MB/OPE (GT Card)

Steady-ON (green)

Flash (green)

Steady-ON (green)

: OFF

: Flash (green)

: OFF

CHAPTER 6 NDA-24307

Page 532

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Changeover Procedure for CPU of LN

STEP 1 Determine which CPU is active.

(1) Check the lamp indications on the CPU Display Panel (DSP).

Figure 6-49 CPU in ACT/STBY Mode (LN)

The CPU changeover also affects the ACT/ST-BY of GT(s) in the TSWM(0/1). Referring to

Figure 6-50, check the lamp indications on the GT (PH-GT09) card(s).

Figure 6-50 GT in ACT / STBY Mode (LN)

Legend

Lamp is ON

:Lamp is OFF

Lamp is Flashing

Active

IMG1 IMG2

STATUS STATUS

IMG3

CPUOPE WDT IMG0

MBR

STBY

IMG1 IMG2 IMG3

CPUOPE WDT IMG0

MBR

DSP (Front View)

12345678

OFF

1234

OFF

12345678

OFF

12345678

OFF

1234

OFF

12345678

OFF

Note: IMG1 through IMG3 lamp indication may differ depending on the system configuration.

MBR

OPE/MB

GT: Active

green

Legend

FRONT VIEW

GT (PH-GT09)

GT: ST-BY

MBR

OPE/MB

Lamp is ON

:Lamp is OFF

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 6

Page 533

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

(2) Check the mate CPU’s STBY mode. Also check the mate GT’s STBY mode. Refer to

Figure 6-50.

STEP 2 Flip the MBR key on the DSP of the active CPU.

Figure 6-51 CPU Changeover via MBR Key (LN)

Note: If the MBR key remains in the UP position, the CPU stays in its make-busy status. Be sure to return the

key to the DOWN position except in the case of a special purpose.

STEP 3 Confirm the changed lamp indications.

To confirm the CPU changeover, check the lamps on both DSPs. LED indications must change

as shown when the CPU system has been correctly changed over.

Figure 6-52 LED Indications Before and After CPU Changeover (LN)

STEP 4 Analyze the displayed system messages.

After STEPs 1 through 3 are performed, the system messages [7-C] and [7-D] automatically

display. Confirm that no errors occurred during the CPU changeover process.

Note: When the CPU mode change executes, the MAT (TCP/IP) is once disconnected. Then, log in to the

system again.

The system changeover of CPU can be done only when the mate CPU is in STBY mode. Do

not attempt the changeover if the mate CPU is closed.

WARNING

After the above steps, set the MBR key as shown below.

The system changeover starts automatically.

12345678

OFF

12345678

OFF

1234

OFF

1 2

DSP (Active)

STATUS

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

CPU Formerly Active After Changeover

CPU Formerly in STBY Mode

CPU OPE

IMG0

IMG1-3

MB/OPE (GT Card)

After Changeover

OFF

Flash (green)

OFF

: Steady-ON (green)

: Flash (green)

: Steady-ON (green)

CPU OPE

IMG0

IMG1-3

MB/OPE (GT Card)

Steady-ON (green)

Flash (green)

Steady-ON (green)

: OFF

: Flash (green)

: OFF

CHAPTER 6 NDA-24307

Page 534

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

12.1.4 Forced Changeover of CPU

Figure 6-53 shows how to perform the forced changeover of CPU by key oper-

ation on the EMA (PH-PC40) card. Because the key operation will cause the en-

tire system to initialize, do not rely on this method except as a last resort. The

LPM is mounted in the LN as as example.

Figure 6-53 Forced CPU Changeover

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

12345678

OFF

12345678

OFF

1234

OFF

MBR

FDD

OFF

OUT PWR

IN PWR

HDD

SW MB

SYSTEM SELECT0

SENSE

SYSTEM SELECT1

SYSTEM SELECT2 CPURST

SLOT No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6

STATUS

IMG1 IMG2 IMG3

CPUOPEWDT IMG0

12345678

OFF

12345678

OFF

1234

OFF

MBR

FDD

OFF

OUT PWR

IN PWR

HDD

SW MB

SYSTEM SELECT0

SENSE

SYSTEM SELECT1

SYSTEM SELECT2 CPURST

SLOT No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6

STATUS

IMG1 IMG2 IMG3

CPUOPEWDT IMG0

00 01 02 03 04

MISC

MISC/IOC

IOC(PH-IO24)

EMA(PH-PC40)

MISC

LPM

CPR

LANI(PZ-PC19) ISAGT(PZ-GT13)

For the forced system changeover, set the CPU-SEL

switch from middle to "Up" or "Down." Note this operation

also leads to system initialization.

1) UP

2) MIDDLE

3) DOWN

For more information, see the "Circuit Card Manual."

: The CPU#1 is placed into the ACT-side.

: Normal setting for dual CPU configuration.

: The CPU#0 is placed into the ACT-side.

(This setting is mandatory for single CPU

system.)

MIDDLE

DOWN

CPU-SEL Key

SW A0

SW92

SW73

SW70

SW62

SW65

OPE/MB

ACT1

CKERR1

ACT0

CKERR0

EMASUP

CPU SEL

NMI SEL

CPU-SEL

EMA(PH-PC40) FACE LAYOUT

ISAGT(PZ-GT20)

PZ-PW92 PZ-IO27

Note 2 Note 1

Note 1: PZ-GT20 card is mounted in the CPR of LN only.

Note 2: In place of PZ-IO27, the CPR may be quipped with PZ-IO28, which does not have the MB key.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 6

Page 535

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

12.1.5 How to Control Switching Block

The Switching Block denoted here includes the following system equipment:

In LN In ISW

TSW (PH-SW12) IOGT (PH-GT10)

MUX (PH-PC36) TSW (PU-SW00)

DLKC (PH-PC20) HSW (PU-SW01)

PLO (PH-CK16-A) PLO (PH-CK16-A/17-A)

CLK (PH-CK18)

GT (PH-GT09)

Perform the required system changeover by using the CMODI/CMOD command or by operating the

relevant key on the IOGT/PLO card. Refer to Table 6-9.

Note: The changeover of IOGT completely affects the whole system denoted in this section, except for the GT,

PLO, and CLK. If the Speech Path System is changed over, be sure to make a follow-up check to see if

the whole related systems (TSW, HSW, MUX, DLKC) are securely changed over. (The check can be

made by a simple glimpse at the OPE or ACT lamps on each circuit card)

Table 6-9 Changeover of Switching Block

Type Operations Remarks

•Speech Path Changeover by the

CMODI command

Note 1

Use the CMODI command (for the changeover

on both system/node basis by logging in to ISW)

Use CMOD (for the changeover only on a node

basis)

See Chapter 8.

All the OPE or ACT lamps on the

Speech Path System, except the

GT, PLO and CLK cards, which

were formerly active, go OFF.

All the OPE or ACT lamps on the

Speech Path System, except the

GT, PLO and CLK cards, which

were formerly STBY, light steady-

green.

•Speech Path System Changeover

by Key Operation on the active

IOGT card

Note 1

On the active IOGT card, turn the MBR key UP.

Note 2

Return the MBR key to the original position

(DOWN) after the TSW ACT lamp goes OFF on

the IOGT card.

See Section 12.1.6, Manual System Changeover

of Speech Path System.

All the OPE or ACT lamps on the

Speech Path system, except GT,

PLO and CLK cards, which were

formerly active, go OFF.

All the OPE or ACT lamps on the

other side Speech Path System,

except the GT, PLO and CLK

cards light steady-green.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

CHAPTER 6 NDA-24307

Page 536

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Note 1: These operations cause a momentary interruption in speech paths. It can be ignored as far as ordinary

telephone calls are concerned. Since interruption might cause bit errors, care should be take when

data communications are involved.

Note 2: When changing over the Speech Path System on a node basis, flip the MBR key on that node’s GT (PH-

GT09) card. Refer to Figure 6-38.

•PLO and CLK Changeover in the

ISW/LN by Key Operation

Note 1

On the active PLO card in ISW/LN, turn the

MBR key UP.

Return the MB key to the original position

(DOWN) after the OPE lamp goes OFF on the

PLO card.

See Section 12.1.7, Manual System Changeover

of PLO/CLK.

The OPE lamp on the PLO/CLK

card, which was formerly active,

goes OFF.

The OPE lamp on the PLO/CLK

card, which was formerly STBY,

goes steady-green.

Table 6-9 Changeover of Switching Block (Continued)

Type Operations Remarks

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 6

Page 537

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

12.1.6 Manual System Changeover of Speech Path System

To changeover the ACT/STBY of Speech Path System, the CMODI/CMOD command is normally

used. However, if for some reason the command cannot be used, use the key operations listed below.

Note 1: The command CMOD cannot be used to change over the Speech Path mode on a system basis. This

command is only for the changeover on each node basis.

Note 2: This section gives a detail on how to change the Speech Path mode on a system basis. When the mode

change is necessary on a node basis, flip the MBR key on the GT (PH-GT09) card in that node’s

TSWM0. For more information, refer to Figure 6-38 or the Installation Manual.

Figure 6-54 System Block Diagram (Switching Network for Speech Path System)

< ISW (Inter-node Switch) >

ISAGT: PZ-GT13 LANI: PZ-PC19 IOGT: PH-GT10 TSW: PU-SW00

HSW: PU-SW01 PLO: PH-CK16-A/17-A EMA: PH-PC40 IOC: PH-IO24

< LN (Local Node) >

ISAGT-A: PZ-GT13 ISAGT-B: PZ-GT20 LANI: PZ-PC19 GT: PH-GT09 TSW: PH-SW12 MUX: PH-PC36

DLKC: PH-PC20 PLO: PH-CK16-A CLK: PH-CK18 EMA: PH-PC40 IOC: PH-IO24

TSWM0 TSWM1

MISC IOC EMA

PLO

TSW00 TSW01 TSW02 TSW03

ISAGT-A

CPU

LANI

Fusion Link

ISW LN0

To PLO of

LN1 through 3

DLKC

PLO

IOGT

ISAGT

CPU

LANI

To MUX

(IMG1)

To MUX

(IMG2)

To MUX

(IMG3)

CLK

TSW01 TSW02 TSW03 HSW00

To TSW

of LN3

To TSW

of LN1 To TSW

of LN2

To LANI of

LN1 through 3

HSW01

TSW00

Line/Trunk PM

IMG 0

PM BUS

PCM HW

PM BUS

PCM HW

PM BUS

PCM HW

PM BUS

PCM HW

MUX MUX MUX MUX

MISC IOC EMA

TSW00 TSW01 TSW02 TSW03

ISAGT-B

Note: If the MBR key is once flipped on the active IOGT card, all the Speech Path related systems (TSW,

HSW, DLKC and MUX) in the same switching block are totally changed over. However, the ACT/

STBY of GT (PH-GT09 in LN) and PLO/CLK in both ISW and LNs are not affected.

CHAPTER 6 NDA-24307

Page 538

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

STEP 1 Confirm the active Speech Path System.

(1) Check all the lamp indications below, which are in the same switching block.

Figure 6-55 IOGT/TSW/HSW/DLKC/MUX in ACT Mode

(2) Confirm the STBY mode of mate Speech Path System. Check all the lamp indications be-

low, which are in the same switching block.

Figure 6-56 IOGT/TSW/HSW/DLKC/MUX in STBY Mode

TSW: Active

TSW MB

TSW MBR

TSW ACT

green

HSW: Active

HSW ACT

green

IOGT: Active

MBR

TSW ACT

green

MUX: Active

MUX ACT

green

TSW: Active

TSW MBR

TSW ACT

green

DLKC: Active

PU-SW00 PU-SW01 PH-GT10 PH-PC36 PH-SW12 PH-PC20

OPE/MB

green

Circuit Cards in ISW Circuit Cards in LN

Legend

Lamp is ON

:Lamp is ON

Note: Be sure to check all the circuit cards in the same Switching Block referring to the lamp indications

above.

The ACT/STBY of Speech Path System can be changed over only when the mate system is

in STBY mode. Do not attempt the changeover if the mate Speech Path System is closed.

WARNING

TSW: ST-BY

TSW MB

TSW MBR

TSW ACT

HSW: ST-BY

HSW ACT

IOGT: ST-BY

MBR

TSW ACT

MUX: ST-BY

MUX ACT

TSW: ST-BY

TSW MBR

TSW ACT

DLKC: ST-BY

OPE/MB

Legend

Lamp is OFF

:Lamp is OFF

ISW LN

PU-SW00 PU-SW01 PH-GT10 PH-PC36 PH-SW12 PH-PC20

Note: Be sure to check all the circuit cards in the same Switching Block referring to the lamp indications

above.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 6

Page 539

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

STEP 2 Flip the MBR key on the active IOGT card in ISW.

Figure 6-57 Speech Path System Changeover via Active IOGT MBR Key

Note: If the MB key is turned ON (UP), the IOGT card is forcibly placed in a make-busy status. Therefore, do

not operate the MB key by mistake. Also, after the MBR key is flipped, be sure to return the key to the

original position (DOWN).

STEP 3 Confirm the changed lamp indications.

(1) To confirm the imposed Speech Path System changeover, check all the lamps on the cards

shown in Figure 6-58, which are in the relevant switching blocks.

Improper key operations may result in a system down. Operate the related keys, using extreme

care.

WARNING

After the above steps, set the MBR key as shown below.

The system changeover starts automatically.

1 2

IOGT (Active)

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

MBR

OPE/MB

Steady-green

CHAPTER 6 NDA-24307

Page 540

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Figure 6-58 LED Indications Before and After Speech Path System Changeover

STEP 4 Analyze the displayed system messages.

After STEPs 1 through 3 are performed, the system messages [7-E], [7-F], and [1-T] will

automatically display. Confirm that no errors occurred during the Speech Path System

changeover process.

Note: When the Speech Path System changeover is executed in each LN independently, the system messages

to be displayed at this time are 7-E, 7-F, and 1-T.

Switching Block Formerly Active After Changeover

TSW ACT (IOGT card): Steady-ON (green) OFF

TSW ACT (TSW card) : Steady-ON (green) OFF

HSW ACT (HSW card): Steady-ON (green) OFF

Switching Block Formerly stby After Changeover

TSW ACT (IOGT card): OFF Steady-ON (green)

TSW ACT (TSW card) : OFF Steady-ON (green)

HSW ACT (HSW card): OFF Steady-ON (green)

LED Indications at the ISW

Switching Block Formerly Active After Changeover

TSW ACT (TSW card) : Steady-ON (green) OFF

MUX ACT (MUX card) : Steady-ON (green) OFF

OPE/MB (DLKC card) : Steady-ON (green) OFF

Switching Block Formerly stby After Changeover

TSW ACT (TSW card) : OFF Steady-ON (green)

MUX ACT (MUX card) : OFF Steady-ON (green)

OPE/MB (DLKC card) : OFF Steady-ON (green)

LED Indications at the LNs

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 6

Page 541

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

12.1.7 Manual System Changeover of PLO

To change over the system of Phase Lock Oscillator (PLO)/Clock (CLK), use the key operations listed

below at a specific LN/ISW.

Note: Though the PLO/CLK belongs to the Switching Block as explained in Section 12.1.5, its ACT/STBY

Switching Network is separate from that of the Speech Path System. Therefore, the changeover of the

PLO/CLK must be independently performed at each LN/ISW.

STEP 1 Confirm the active PLO. When performing the changeover at the LN, also check the active

CLK.

(1) Check the lamp indications.

Figure 6-59 PLO/CLK in ACT/STBY Mode

(2) Check the mate PLO’s STBY mode. When performing the changeover at the LN, check the

mate’s CLK’s STBY mode.

Improper key operations may result in a system down. Operate the related keys, using extreme

care.

WARNING

PH-CK16-A/17-A, PH-CK18 (Front View)

PLO/CLK: Active PLO/CLK: ST-BY

PLO (PH-CK16-A/17-A)

CLK (PH-CK18) PLO (PH-CK16-A/17-A)

CLK (PH-CK18)

green

Legend

Lamp is ON

:Lamp is OFF

OPE OPE

Note: ACT/STBY of PLO can be changed over on a node basis, not on a network/system basis. Therefore,

check the PLO/CLK cards only in that specific LN/ISW. Refer to Figure 6-37 and Figure 6-38.

The changeover of PLO/CLK system can be done only when the mate PLO/CLK is in STBY

mode. Do not attempt the changeover if the mate PLO/CLK is closed.

WARNING

CHAPTER 6 NDA-24307

Page 542

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

STEP 2 Flip the MB key on the PLO card.

Figure 6-60 PLO Changeover via MB Key

Note: If the MB key remains in the UP position, the PLO system also stays in its make-busy status. Be sure to

return the key DOWN except in the case of a special purpose.

STEP 3 Confirm the changed lamp indications.

(1) To affirm the imposed PLO changeover, check the following lamps on both PLO cards. The

LED indications must change as follows when the PLO system has been correctly changed

over. When performing the changeover at the LN, check the CLK’s lamps.

Figure 6-61 LED Indications Before and After PLO/CLK Changeover

STEP 4 Analyze the displayed system messages.

After STEPs 1 through 3 are performed, the system messages [7-U] and [7-V] will

automatically display. Make sure that no errors occurred during the PLO changeover process.

After the above steps, set the MB key as shown below.

Then, the system changeover starts automatically.

1 2

PLO: ActiveMB key

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

OPE

PLO/CLK Formerly Active After Changeover

PLOCLK Formerly in STBY Mode After Changeover

OPE: Steady-ON (green) OFF

OPE: OFF Steady-ON (green)

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 6

Page 543

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

12.2 Initialization

12.2.1 General

This section explains the initialization types:

System Initialization

•System Initialization by turning ON the Power Supply, Section 12.2.2

•System Initialization by Key Operations on the TOPU, Section 12.2.3

Procedure #1 through Procedure #5

•System Initialization by the keys on the CPU Front Panel, Section 12.2.4

•System Initialization by the SINZ/SINZ1 Command, Section 12.2.5

Peripheral Equipment Initialization (Line/Trunk Initialization), Section 12.2.6

CHAPTER 6 NDA-24307

Page 544

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

12.2.2 System Initialization by Turning ON the Power Supply

This initialization executes when the power supply to a node (ISW/LN) has

stopped. Follow the procedure in Figure 6-62.

Figure 6-62 System Initialization by Turning ON the Power Supply

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

Confirm all switches in the node are turned “OFF”

on PWR cards.

START

Confirm input source power to the node is normal.

Turn “ON” the power supply at PWR cards.

Confirm lamp indications on the DSP of CPR.

Clear the alarm by pressing the ALM RST key on the TOPU.

Use the ATIM/ATIMN command to adjust the date and time.

MODULE

LPM:

PIM:

ISWM/TSWM:

Check the INPUT voltage is

normal at the power terminals.

Turn ON the power supply referring to

Section 12.3.

Refer to 1 or 3 of Table 6-10 for DSP 0,

and 2 or 4 of the table for DSP 1.

CIRCUIT CARDS

PWRU 0/PWRU 1 (PZ-PW92)

PWR 0(PA-PW55-A)/

PWR 1(PA-PW54-A)

PWR SW 0/ 1(PH-PW14)

END

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 6

Page 545

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Table 6-10 Lamp Indications on DSP of CPR

NODE ACT/

ST-BY LAMP ON DSP STATE

ISW ACT CPU OPE Lights Green

IMG 0 Lights Green

IMG 1 Lights Green

IMG 2 Lights Green (when LN 2 exists)

IMG 3 Lights Green (when LN 3 exists)

STBY CPU OPE OFF

IMG 0 Flashes Green

IMG 1 OFF

IMG 2 OFF

IMG 3 OFF

LN ACT CPU OPE Lights Green

IMG 0 Flashes Green

IMG 1 Flashes Green

IMG 2 Flashes Green (when IMG 2 exists)

IMG 3 Flashes Green (when IMG 3 exists)

STBY CPU OPE OFF

IMG 0 Flashes Green

IMG 1 OFF

IMG 2 OFF

IMG 3 OFF

CHAPTER 6 NDA-24307

Page 546

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

12.2.3 System Initialization by Key Operations on TOPU

Table 6-11 shows the system initialization procedure. Figure 6-63 shows the initial program load

conceptional diagram.

Table 6-11 System Initialization Procedure Types

TYPE DESCRIPTION

Procedure 1

(Table 6-12)System Initialization without Loading The whole system or a specific node (ISW/LN) is

initialized. All communications are forcibly released.

System restarts with current Main Memory Files and

Office Data Files that exist on DRAM.

Procedure 2

(Table 6-13)System Initialization with Office Data Loading The whole system or a specific node (ISW/LN) is

initialized. All communications are forcibly released.

System transfers Office Data Files from HDD to DRAM.

System restarts with the transferred Office Data Files and

the current Main Memory Files.

Procedure 3

(Table 6-14)System Initialization with Program Loading The whole system or a specific node (ISW/LN) is

initialized. All communications are forcibly released.

System transfers Main Memory Files from HDD to

DRAM. System restarts with the transferred Main

Memory Files and the current Office Data Files.

Procedure 4

(Table 6-15)System Initialization with Office Data and

Program Loading The whole system or a specific node (ISW/LN) is

initialized. All communications are forcibly released.

System transfers both Main Memory Files and Office

Data Files from HDD to DRAM. System restarts with the

transferred Main Memory Files and the transferred Office

Data Files.

Procedure 5

(Table 6-16)System Initialization by Phase 1 Restart The whole system or a specific node (ISW/LN) is

initialized. All communications, except for the following

two-way connections that have already been established,

are forcibly released:

•Basic two-way connections (STN-STN, STN-TRK,

TRK-TRK)

•Fixed connections

•Two-way connections established on a Fusion Link

Note 1: STN-ATT connection is not included in

the two-way connection list cited

above. These kind of calls are forcibly

released once the initialization

executes.

Note 2: When a calling party hears the Ring

Back Tone, the ORT is additionally

provided, and the call is placed into the

Dial Tone (DT) connection.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 6

Page 547

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Figure 6-63 Conceptional Diagram of Initial Program Load

Figure 6-64 Keys on the TOPU (ISW)

Figure 6-65 Keys on the TOPU (LN)

<DRAM>

<CPU>

<HDD>

Main Memory Files Basic Software (#2~#11)

(=PROGRAM) Standard Service Software

IMAT Software (#1~#2)

TCP/IP Software (#1)

Office Data Files Data Memory (ASYD, AUNT,

(=SYSTEM DATA) ANPD, ASPA,

ASDT, etc.)

Call Forwarding Data

Speed Calling Data

Name Display Data

User Assign Soft Key Data

Number Sharing Data

RCF

NDM

LDM

Call Block Data

PBX

Initial Program Load

ALM

RST ON

OFF

PFT

START

INITIAL

OFF

EFFECT

SYSTEM

SELF

INITIAL

SELECT

LOAD

NON LOAD

PROGRAM

NON LOAD

SYSTEM DATA

LOAD

< PZ-DK227 >

ALM

RST ON

OFF

PFT

START

INITIAL

OFF

EFFECT

LOAD

NON LOAD

PROGRAM

NON LOAD

SYSTEM DATA

LOAD

<PZ-DK222>

CHAPTER 6 NDA-24307

Page 548

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

To initialize the system, check the lamp indications in Figure 6-66, and operate the keys on the TOPU.

Figure 6-66 Related Keys and LEDs for System Initialization

LOAD

NON LOAD

PROGRM NON LOAD

SYSTEM DATA

LOAD

12345678

OFF

12345678

OFF

1234

OFF

MBR

FDD

OFF

OUT PWR

IN PWR

HDD

SW MB

SYSTEM SELECT2 CPURST

Note 2

Note 3

SLOT No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6

ALM

RST ON

OFF

PFT

OFF

START

INITIAL EFFECT

03 04

FRONT VIEW

Ex. ISW

..........

12345678

OFF

1234

OFF

12345678

OFF

12345678

OFF

1234

OFF

12345678

OFF

SENSE

SYSTEM SELECT0

SYSTEM SELECT1

STATUS

IMG1 IMG2 IMG3

CPUOPE WDT IMG0

EX. <PZ-DK227: Face Layout>

<CPR: Face Layout>

SYSTEM

SELF

INITIAL

SELECT

Note 1

To initialize the system, operate the shaded

keys.

To confirm the imposed system initialization,

check the shaded lamp indicators .

Note 1: The Initial Select key exists only on the TOPU of ISW (PZ-DK227). Refer to Figure 6-64

and Figure 6-65.

Note 2: The LED indication cited above is only an example. The actual indicating patterns (ON/

Flash/OFF) may vary, depending on the system configuration.

Note 3: This figure assumes the CPR is equipped with PZ-I027 (HDD/FDD), in place of PZ-IO28.

If PZ-IO28 is used, the MB key is not furnished on the card.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 6

Page 549

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Table 6-12 System Initialization Without Loading Procedure

ACTION 7SEG LED/OPE LAMP/KEY

SETTINGS

Note: The TOPU used for intialization varies depending on the type of

initialization.

Initialization of Whole System: TOPU of ISW

Initialization of ISW: TOPU of ISW

Initialization of LN: TOPU of IMG0 (each LN)

START

For lamp indication on DSP,

refer to Table 6-10.

For the face layout of TOPU,

refer to for ISW and for LN.

ISW: Figure 6-64

LN: Figure 6-65

CPU OPE and IMGn lamps on

both DSP go OFF.

STATUS LED (right) on

the CPU is ON.

STATUS LED (right) on

the DSP of CPU is ON.

For lamp indication on DSP,

refer to Table 6-10.

STATUS LED (right) on

the DSP of active CPU is

ON. (ON LINE)

Set the keys on the TOPU as follows.

•PROGRAM KEY →NON LOAD

•SYSTEM DATA KEY →NON LOAD

END

•HD Initial

•System Initialization

•System starts up again.

Turn ON the EFFECT key on the TOPU.

Press the INITIAL START button on the TOPU.

Set the INITIAL SELECT keys as follows.

•Initialization of Whole System→ Set the key to SYSTEM side

•Initialization of ISW → Set the key to SELF side

•Initialization of LN → Skip this step

Confirm the system is operating normally.

CHAPTER 6 NDA-24307

Page 550

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Table 6-13 System Initialization With Office Data Loading Procedure

ACTION 7SEG LED/OPE LAMP/KEY

SETTINGS

Note: The TOPU used for intialization varies depending on the type of

initialization.

Initialization of Whole System: TOPU of ISW

Initialization of ISW: TOPU of ISW

Initialization of LN: TOPU of IMG0 (each LN)

START

For lamp indication on DSP,

refer to Table 6-10.

For the face layout of TOPU,

refer to for ISW and for LN.

ISW: Figure 6-64

LN: Figure 6-65

CPU OPE and IMGn lamps on

both DSP go OFF.

STATUS LED (right) on

the CPU is ON.

STATUS LED (right) on

the DSP of CPU is ON.

STATUS LED (right) on

the DSP of active CPU is

ON.

For lamp indication on DSP,

refer to Table 6-10.

STATUS LED (right) on

the DSP of active CPU is

ON. (ON LINE)

Set the keys on the TOPU as follows.

•PROGRAM KEY →NON LOAD

•SYSTEM DATA KEY →NON LOAD

END

•HD Initial

•Office Data LOAD

•System Initialization

•System starts up again.

Turn ON the EFFECT key on the TOPU.

Press the INITIAL START button on the TOPU.

Set the INITIAL SELECT keys as follows.

•Initialization of Whole System→ Set the key to SYSTEM side

•Initialization of ISW → Set the key to SELF side

•Initialization of LN → Skip this step

Confirm the system is operating normally.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 6

Page 551

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Table 6-14 System Initialization with Program Loading Procedure

ACTION 7SEG LED/OPE LAMP/KEY

SETTINGS

Note: The TOPU used for intialization varies depending on the type of

initialization.

Initialization of Whole System: TOPU of ISW

Initialization of ISW: TOPU of ISW

Initialization of LN: TOPU of IMG0 (each LN)

START

For lamp indication on DSP,

refer to Table 6-10.

For the face layout of TOPU,

refer to for ISW and for LN.

ISW: Figure 6-64

LN: Figure 6-65

CPU OPE and IMGn lamps on

both DSP go OFF.

STATUS LED (right) on

the DSP of CPU is ON.

STATUS LED (right) on

the DSP of CPU is ON.

STATUS LED (right) on

the DSP of active CPU

is ON.

For lamp indications on DSP,

refer to Table 6-10.

STATUS LED (right) on

the DSP of active CPU

is ON. (ON LINE)

Set the keys on the TOPU as follows.

•PROGRAM KEY →NON LOAD

•SYSTEM DATA KEY →NON LOAD

END

•HD Initial

•Program LOAD

•System Initialization

•System starts up again.

Turn ON the EFFECT key on the TOPU.

Press the INITIAL START button on the TOPU.

Set the INITIAL SELECT keys as follows.

•Initialization of Whole System→ Set the key to SYSTEM side

•Initialization of ISW → Set the key to SELF side

•Initialization of LN → Skip this step

Confirm the system is operating normally.

CHAPTER 6 NDA-24307

Page 552

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Table 6-15 System Initialization With Office Data And Program Loading Procedure

ACTION 7SEG LED/OPE LAMP/KEY

SETTINGS

Note: The TOPU used for intialization varies depending on the type of

initialization.

Initialization of Whole System: TOPU of ISW

Initialization of ISW: TOPU of ISW

Initialization of LN: TOPU of IMG0 (each LN)

START

For lamp indication on DSP,

refer to Table 6-10.

For the face layout of TOPU,

refer to for ISW and for LN.

ISW: Figure 6-64

LN: Figure 6-65

CPU OPE and IMGn lamps on

both DSP go OFF.

STATUS LED (right) on

the DSP of CPU is ON.

STATUS LED (right) on

the DSP of CPU is ON.

STATUS LED (right) on

the DSP of CPU is ON.

STATUS LED (right) on

the DSP of active CPU

is ON.

For lamp indications on DSP,

refer Table 6-10.

STATUS LED (right) on

the DSP of active CPU

is ON. (ON LINE)

Set the keys on the TOPU as follows.

•PROGRAM KEY →NON LOAD

•SYSTEM DATA KEY →NON LOAD

END

•HD Initial

•Program LOAD

•Office Data LOAD

•System Initialization

•System starts up again.

Turn ON the EFFECT key on the TOPU.

Press the INITIAL START button on the TOPU.

Set the INITIAL SELECT keys as follows.

•Initialization of Whole System→ Set the key to SYSTEM side

•Initialization of ISW → Set the key to SELF side

•Initialization of LN → Skip this step

Confirm the system is operating normally.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 6

Page 553

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Table 6-16 System Initialization by Phase 1 Restart Procedure

ACTION 7SEG LED/OPE LAMP/KEY

SETTINGS

Note: The TOPU used for intialization varies depending on the type of

initialization.

Initialization of Whole System: TOPU of ISW

Initialization of ISW: TOPU of ISW

Initialization of LN: TOPU of IMG0 (each LN)

START

For lamp indication on DSP,

refer to Table 6-10.

For the face layout of TOPU,

refer to for ISW and for LN.

ISW: Figure 6-64

LN: Figure 6-65

CPU OPE and IMGn lamps on

both DSP go OFF.

STATUS LED (right) on

the CPU is ON.

STATUS LED (right) on

the DSP of CPU is ON.

For lamp indications on DSP,

refer to Table 6-10.

STATUS LED (right) on

the DSP of active CPU

is ON. (ON LINE)

Set the keys on the TOPU as follows.

•PROGRAM KEY →NON LOAD

•SYSTEM DATA KEY →NON LOAD

END

•HD Initial

•System Initialization

•System starts up again.

Turn ON the EFFECT key on the TOPU.

Press the INITIAL START button on the TOPU.

Set the INITIAL SELECT keys as follows.

•Initialization of Whole System→ Set the key to SYSTEM side

•Initialization of ISW → Set the key to SELF side

•Initialization of LN → Skip this step

Confirm the system is operating normally.

Set SENSE Switch on the DSP of CPR to 3.

CHAPTER 6 NDA-24307

Page 554

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

12.2.4 System Initialization by Keys on CPU Front Panel

This initialization executes on a node (ISW/LN) basis when the keys on the

TOPU cannot be used. The CPU’s active status must be confirmed before

executing this type of initialization.

Figure 6-67 System Initialization by Keys on CPU Front Panel

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

Use ATIM/ATIMN command to adjust

date and time.

Confirm ACT 0 lamp

lights green again. Confirm ACT 1 lamp

lights green again.

Press CPU RST key on the

DSP of CPU 0.

Press CPU RST key on the

DSP of CPU 1.

Confirm SENSE switch on the

DSP of CPU 1 is 2 (DM Load

Restart).

Confirm SENSE switch on the

DSP of CPU 0 is 2 (DM Load

Restart).

(ACT0 lights green.) (ACT1 lights green.)

Check ACT0/ACT1

lamps on the EMA

card.

START

(CPU 0 is being initialized.) (CPU 1 is being initialized.)

END

EMA: PH-PC40

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 6

Page 555

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

12.2.5 System Initialization by SINZ/SINZ1 Command

The entire system can be initialized by execution of the SINZ/SINZ1 command from the MAT, which

is useful for maintenance technicians who have to control the system from a distant location. When

initializing the system on a node (ISW/LN) basis, use SINZ command. When initializing the whole

system, use SINZI command.

Figure 6-68 System Initialization by SINZ Command

START

END

For more information about the SINZ/SINZI

command, see CHAPTER 8:

“MAINTENANCE COMMANDS.”

Refer to 1 or 3 of Table 6-9 for DSP#0,

and 2 or 4 of the table for DSP#1.

Use the SINZ/SINZI command

to execute initialization.

Use the ATIM/ATIMN com-

mand to adjust the date and time.

Confirm lamp indications on

the DSP of CPR.

Note: When the system is initialized, the MAT is once disconnected. Then, log in to the

system again.

CHAPTER 6 NDA-24307

Page 556

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

12.2.6 Peripheral Equipment Initialization (Line/Trunk Initialization)

Line/trunk initialization can be divided into two types: initialization on an

individual channel basis and initialization on a circuit card basis. Follow the

procedure in Table 6-17.

Table 6-17 Line/Trunk Initialization Procedure

ACTION REMARKS

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

Return MB switch to the

previous position after the

MB lamp has turned ON.

Turn the MB switch UP on

the circuit card.

Use RLST command.

(Refer to Chapter 8)

START

END

Is initialization on

individual channel basis or on

circuit card basis?

Circuit card basis

Individual channel basis

Note: When initializa-

tion executes on a

circuit card basis, all

channels on the cir-

cuit card are placed

into make-busy state.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 6

Page 557

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

12.3 How to Turn ON/OFF Whole System

A switching system, once put into service, is seldom stopped. However, there may

be a case when a switching system, while in service, must be stopped due to module

expansion work, etc. In preparation for such a case, this Section explains the

procedure for turning ON the power supply.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

CHAPTER 6 NDA-24307

Page 558

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

12.3.1 How to Turn ON a LN

Figure 6-69 How to Turn ON a LN

START

Make sure the SENSE switch

on the DSP of Active CPU is

set at Ò2Ó (DM Load Restart).

Turn ON the power supply at

PIMs of IM G3.

PIM0 PIM1 PIM2 PIM3

Turn ON the power supply at

TSWM1.

Turn ON the power supply at

PIMs of IM G2.

PIM0 PIM1 PIM2 PIM3

Turn ON the power supply at

PIMs of IM G1.

PIM0 PIM1 PIM2 PIM3

END

Turn ON the -48V SW on the PWR card in PIM0.

Turn ON the -48V SW on the DPWR card in PIM0.

Repeat (1) and (2) for PIM1,2,3 in turn (depending on

the system configuration).

Turn ON the -48V SW on the PH-PW14 (PWR SW#0).

Turn ON the -48V SW on the PH-PW14 (PWR SW#1).

Turn ON the -48V SW on the PWR card in PIM0.

Turn ON the -48V SW on the DPWR card in PIM0.

Repeat (1) and (2) for PIM1,2,3 in turn (depending on

the system configuration).

Turn ON the -48V SW on the PWR card in PIM0.

Turn ON the -48V SW on the DPWR card in PIM0.

Repeat (1) and (2) for PIM1,2,3 in turn (depending on

the system configuration).

(1)

(2)

(3)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(1)

(2)

Turn ON the power supply at

TSWM0.

Turn ON the -48V SW on the PH-PW14 (PWR SW#0).

Turn ON the -48V SW on the PH-PW14 (PWR SW#1).

(1)

(2)

Turn ON the power supply at

PIMs of IMG0.

PIM 0 PIM 1 PIM2 PIM3

Turn ON the -48V SW on the PWR card in PIM0.

Turn ON the -48V SW on the DPWR card in PIM0.

Repeat (1) and (2) for PIM1,2,3 in turn (depending on

the system configuration).

(1)

(2)

(3)

Turn ON the power supply at

LPM.

Turn ON the SW on the PZ-PW92 of CPU#0.

Turn ON the SW on the PZ-PW92 of CPU#1.

(1)

(2)

Note: Start from bigger number IMG stack (i.e. IMG3 IMG2 IMG1 IMG0).

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 6

Page 559

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

12.3.2 How to Turn ON the ISW

Figure 6-70 How to Turn ON the ISW

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

START

Make sure the SENSE switch

on the DSP of Active CPU is

set at "2"(DM Load Restart).

Turn ON the power supply at

the LPM.

Turn ON the power supply at

the ISWM.

END

Turn ON the SW on the PZ-PW92 of CPU 0.

Turn ON the SW on the PZ-PW92 of CPU 1.

Turn ON the -48V SW on the PH-PW14 (PWR SW 0).

Turn ON the -48V SW on the PH-PW14 (PWR SW 1).

(1)

(2)

(1)

(2)

CHAPTER 6 NDA-24307

Page 560

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

12.4 How to Turn OFF Whole System

Be sure to confirm the memory data has been backed up on the HD before turning

OFF the system power. When turning OFF the power supply, follow the procedure

shown below.

12.4.1 How to Turn OFF a LN

Figure 6-71 How to Turn OFF a LN

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

(1) Turn OFF the -48V SW on the DPWR (first) and PWR (next) cards in PIM3 of IMG3.

(2) Repeat (1) for PIM2, PIM1, PIM0 (IMG3) in turn.

(3) Turn OFF the -48V SW on the DPWR (first) and PWR (next) cards in PIM3 of IMG2.

(4) Repeat (3) for PIM2, PIM1, PIM0 (IMG2) in turn.

(5) Turn OFF the SW on the PH-PW14 (both PWR SW #1 and #0) in TSWM1.

(6) Turn OFF the -48V SW on the DPWR (first) and PWR (next) cards in PIM3 of IMG1.

(7) Repeat (6) for PIM2, PIM1, PIM0 (IMG1) in turn.

(8) Turn OFF the SW on the PH-PW14 (both PWR SW #1 and #0) in TSWM0.

(9) Turn OFF the -48V SW on the DPWR (first) and PWR (next) cards in PIM3 of IMG0.

(10)Repeat (9) for PIM2, PIM1, PIM0 (IMG0) in turn.

(11)Turn OFF the SW on the PZ-PW92 of CPU#1.

(12)Turn OFF the SW on the PZ-PW92 of CPU#0.

As shown in the figure, turn OFF the power supply first in the uppermost

PIM of the IMG stack whose number is bigger.Then, move on to the

bottommost PIM and repeat it for the smaller IMGs.

IMG0 IMG3IMG2IMG1

PIM3

PIM2

PIM1

PIM0

LPM

PIM3

PIM2

PIM1

PIM0

TSWM0

PIM3

PIM2

PIM1

PIM0

TSWM1

PIM3

PIM2

PIM1

PIM0

DUMMY

[Procedure]

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 6

Page 561

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Table 6-18 How to Turn OFF the ISW Procedure

ACTION REMARKS

(1) Turn OFF -48V SW on PA-PW14 (both PWR SW 1 and PWR SW 0) in

ISWM.

(2) Turn OFF SW on the PZ-PW92 of CPU 1.

(3) Turn OFF SW on the PZ-PW92 of CPU 0.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

ISW

ISWM

LPM

CHAPTER 6 NDA-24307

Page 562

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

12.5 System Start-Up

12.5.1 System Start-Up Procedures

The system start-up procedures consist of the following types.

Procedure 1 (see Table 6-19)

Executes when the Basic Software and Application Software are already installed in the HD. Office

Data is not installed.

Procedure 2 (see Table 6-20)

Executes when the Basic Software, Application Software and Office Data are already installed in the

HD.

Note: For the start-up procedure in case any Basic Software, Application Software and Office Data have not

been installed in the HD, refer to the Installation Manual (IPX-U Type).

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 6

Page 563

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Table 6-19 Start-Up Procedure When Basic and Application Software is Installed

ACTION 7SEG LED/OPE LAMP/KEY

SETTINGS

STATUS LED (right) on

the DSP of CPU is ON.

STATUS LED (right) on

the DSP of CPU is ON.

STATUS LED (right) on

the DSP of CPU is ON.

CPU OPE lamp on the

DSP of active CPU

lights steady green. IMG0-3

lamps flash.

For lamp indications, refer to

Table 6-10.

STATUS LED (right) on

the DSP of CPU is ON

(ON LINE).

Press the CPU RST button

on the DSP of active CPU.

Turn OFF the SW on the PZ-

PW92 of active CPU and

turn it ON again.

Set the SENSE switch at “1”

(DM Clear Restart) on the DSP

of CPU 0.

Set the SENSE switch at “1”

(DM Clear Restart) on the DSP

of active CPU.

Turn ON the SW on the PZ-

PW92 of CPU 0.

STARTSTART

When Power is OFF and OFF LINE

When Power is ON

➀➁

• HD Initialization

• Program Load

• System Initial

The system starts up, clearing the Office Data on the HD.

•The system starts up again

➂when Power is ON and ON

LINE

START

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

CHAPTER 6 NDA-24307

Page 564

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Table 6-19 Start-Up Procedure When Basic and Application Software is Installed (Continued)

ACTION 7SEG LED/OPE LAMP/KEY

SETTINGS

Back up your Office Data using the MEM_HDD/MEM_HDD_N

command.

To perform necessary system intialization, refer to Table 6-13,

System Initialization with Office Data Loading.

Set the SENSE switch at “2” (DM Load Restart) on the DSP of

active CPU.

Enter your Office Data.

END

If necessary, repeat the above steps for all remaining nodes.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 6

Page 565

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Table 6-20 Start-Up Procedure When Basic, Application Software and Office Data is Installed

ACTION 7SEG LED/OPE LAMP/KEY

SETTINGS

STATUS LED (right) on

the DSP of CPU is ON.

STATUS LED (right) on

the DSP of CPU is ON.

STATUS LED (right) on

the DSP of CPU is ON.

STATUS LED (right) on

the DSP of CPU is ON.

Press the CPU RST button

on the DSP of active CPU.

Turn OFF the SW on the

PZ-PW92 of active CPU and

turn it ON again.

Set the SENSE switch at “2”

(DM Load Restart) on the DSP

of CPU 0.

Set the SENSE switch at “2”

(DM Load Restart) on the DSP

of active CPU.

• HD Initial

• Program Load

• Office Data Load

• System Initial

Turn ON the SW on the

PZ-PW92 of CPU 0.

STARTSTART

When Power is OFF and OFF LINE

When Power is ON

➀➁

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

CHAPTER 6 NDA-24307

Page 566

Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

For lamp indications, refer to

Table 6-10.

STATUS LED (right) on

the DSP of CPU is ON.

(ON LINE)

Table 6-20 Start-Up Procedure When Basic, Application Software and Office Data is Installed (Continued)

ACTION 7SEG LED/OPE LAMP/KEY

SETTINGS

• The system starts up again.

END

If necessary, repeat the previous steps for all remaining nodes.

ATTENTION

Contents

Static Sensitive

Handling

Precautions Required

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 7

Page 567

Issue 1

CHAPTER 7 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

1. GENERAL

When a fault has occurred in the system, (for example when a fault has occurred to No. 1 circuit on the 16LC

card), the stations connected to No. 1 circuit become unserviceable. When the 16LC card has been replaced with

a spare to analyze the cause of the fault or to repair the fault, other normal lines also become unserviceable. As

in this example, even when the fault is restricted to a single component, it very often harms the system operations

as a whole.

Even if the system is operating normally, it is necessary to perform a routine check to prevent a fault occurrence

before it is too late to discover any latent cause of a fault.

This chapter categorizes the routine maintenance procedures of the PBX into the following three types, and ex-

plains the minimum required work steps and precautions pertaining to each of the three procedures.

•Daily Maintenance Procedure

•Monthly Maintenance Procedure

•Quarterly Maintenance Procedure

1.1 Flow of Procedures

The scheduling of routine maintenance (daily, monthly, quarterly) will vary with each installation and

organization. Figure 7-1 shows the flow of the routine maintenance procedures.

CHAPTER 7 NDA-24307

Page 568

Issue 1

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

Figure 7-1 Flow of Procedures

1.2 Required Test Equipment and Tools

Table 7-1 shows the tools and equipment required for test procedures.

Table 7-1 Test Equipment and Tools

NO. TEST EQUIPMENT/TOOLS PURPOSE REMARKS

1 Telephone Set A telephone set is used when performing connection tests

on trunks, etc.

2 Blown Fuse A blown fuse is used when performing alarm tests.

3 VOM Digital Meter VOM digital meter is used when checking output voltages

of the rectifier and the battery.

4 Phillips Screwdriver A screwdriver is used when replacing the fan with a spare.

Section 2.8, Explanation of Terms

in Chapter 2

Chapter 5, Fault Repair Procedures

Chapter 6, System Operations

Chapter 4, Unit/Circuit Card

Replacement Procedure

Section 2, Routine Maintenance Procedures

•Daily Maintenance Procedures

•Monthly Maintenance Procedures

•Quarterly Maintenance Procedures

Note: Perform procedure performance

per each divided section

Section 3, Routine Maintenance Procedures-

Detailed Explanations

•Work performance as per each

divided section

Section 4, Routine Maintenance Check Lists

•Recording of checked items

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 7

Page 569

Issue 1

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

2. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

This section explains general routine maintenance procedures to be performed on a daily, monthly, and

quarterly basis. Table 7-2 lists each procedure according to the time each procedure is to be performed. Use

the Reference Section to locate the detailed procedure.

Table 7-2 List of Routine Maintenance Procedures

TIME PROCEDURE REFERENCE SECTION REMARKS

Daily Check the temperature and relative humidity in

the switch room. Section 3.1, Check of Ambient

Conditions in Switch Room

Check to see if any of the alarm indicator lamps

on the TOPU are lit. Section 3.2, Alarm Check

Check the operating status of the MAT and the

printer, remaining quantity of paper, etc. Section 3.3, MAT/Printer Check

Check to see if a system message indicating a

fault is displayed. Section 3.4, Collection of

System Messages

Check whether any station is in lockout state. Section 3.5, Display of Locked-

out Station

Check whether the FANU is operating normally. Section 3.6, Fan Unit Check

Monthly Generate an alarm and check whether an indica-

tion appears on the TOPU. Section 3.7, Alarm Tests

Check the conditions of the rectifier and batteries. Section 3.8, Main Power System

Check

Check trunk circuits individually. Also check the

RGU circuit in the PWR Supply of each

Module.

Section 3.9, Trunk RGU Check

Check each operation and lamps of ATTCON/

DESKCON. Section 3.10, ATTCON/

DESKCON Check

Quarterly Check the CPU, TSW, and line/trunk Port

Microprocessors (PMs). Section 3.11, System Check

CHAPTER 7 NDA-24307

Page 570

Issue 1

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

3. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES-DETAILED EXPLANATIONS

This Section provides detailed explanations of the routine maintenance procedures.

Table 7-3 List of Routine Maintenance Procedures

SECTION NO. CONTENTS OF WORK REMARKS

3.1 Check of Ambient Conditions in the Switch Room

3.2 Alarm Check

3.3 MAT/Printer Check

3.4 Collection of System Messages

3.5 Display of Locked-out Station

3.6 FAN Unit Check

3.7 Alarm Tests

3.8 Main Power System Check

3.9 Trunk/RGU Check

3.10 ATTCON/DESKCON Check

3.11 System Check

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 7

Page 571

Issue 1

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

3.1 Check of Ambient Conditions in Switch Room

Check the room temperature.

Check the humidity in the room.

If the temperature or the humidity is

outside the allowable range, adjust the air

conditioner.

Check whether the room temperature is within

the range of 5°C (41°F) to 30°C (86°F).

Check whether the relative humidity in the

room is within the 15% to 65% range.

START

END

CHAPTER 7 NDA-24307

Page 572

Issue 1

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

3.2 Alarm Check

Check alarm indications on the TOPU.

If an alarm is indicated Check whether the alarm lamp on the power

supply of any module is lit.

Check whether an alarm lamp is lit on any

circuit card(s).

Alarm recovery Refer to Chapter 5, diagnose the alarm and

perform the indicated recovery procedures.

START

END

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 7

Page 573

Issue 1

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

3.3 MAT/Printer Check

Check the MAT.

System messages are automatically sent to

the MAT HD for output.

System messages are automatically sent to

the external printer for output.

Turn ON the MAT’s power.

Confirm that the menu appears on the screen.

Leave the MAT power ON continuously (lower

the CRT brightness when not in use).

Confirm that printer power is ON and that the

SEL lamp is lit.

Check the remaining quantity of printer paper.

START

END

CHAPTER 7 NDA-24307

Page 574

Issue 1

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

3.4 Collection of System Messages

Cause system messages to be displayed.

When a system message is displayed.

Check the results of routine diagnosis.

When the system is operating normally or

after a fault has been restored

Refer to Chapter 3, System Messages.

If the system message indicates a fault,

diagnose the fault by referring to Chapter 5,

and perform fault recovery.

System message [7-O] indicates that the

system is normal.

System message [7-P] indicates that the system

is abnormal. Perform fault recovery by

referring to Chapter 3 or Chapter 5.

Use the RALM/RALMN command to clear the

alarm indication and registered system

message.

START

END

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 7

Page 575

Issue 1

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

3.5 Display of Locked-out Station

Check the displays of relevant commands

to locate any locked-out stations. Check the displays of the following

commands:

• DLSL: Display in the order of LENS.

• DLSS: Display in the order of Station

Numbers

When any station in locked-out

state is displayed Recover the locked-out station(s) referring to

Section 3, Indication of Lockout Stations,

Chapter 6.

START

END

CHAPTER 7 NDA-24307

Page 576

Issue 1

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

3.6 Fan Unit Check

When the fan is set for automatic start

When the fan is set for constant operation

When the fan is out of order

Pull the FAN START switch toward the front

and set it to ON (UP) position.

Confirm that the fan has started running.

Pull the FAN START switch toward the front

and set it to AUTO (DOWN) position.

Confirm that the fan is running.

Refer to Section 10, Fan Unit Fault, Chapter 5.

Replace the fan with a spare by referring to

Section 5, Fan Unit Replacement, Chapter 4.

START

END

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 7

Page 577

Issue 1

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

3.7 Alarm Tests

An alarm is to be generated which will be displayed at the DESKCON/ATTCON. Be sure to inform

the attendant of the test in advance.

Replace the –48V fuse in the FANU with a blown fuse.

Confirm that an alarm is indicated on the TOPU.

Replace the blown fuse with the original –48V fuse.

Using the RALM/RALMN command, reset all alarm indications.

START

END

CHAPTER 7 NDA-24307

Page 578

Issue 1

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

3.8 Main Power System Check

Note: For a longer battery life, observe the following items:

•Place the batteries in a dark, cool place.

•Keep the room temperature within the range of 10°C to 35°C (40°F to 85°F).

•Floating voltage must be kept within the range of the battery specification at all times.

•After discharging, perform equalized charging as per the battery specification.

Check the load voltage (DC –48V ±5 V) of the rectifier.

Check the batteries. Check the forced-charge voltage and floating

voltage.

Check the specific gravity, liquid level and

rated capacity of each battery.

START

END

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 7

Page 579

Issue 1

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

3.9 Trunk RGU Check

Check alarm lamps on the line/trunk circuit cards.

Check to see if a system message pertaining to a circuit card has been output.

Check the speech path for each PIM and also check ringing signal.

START

END

CHAPTER 7 NDA-24307

Page 580

Issue 1

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

3.10 ATTCON/DESKCON Check

(1) Attendant Console Check

Note: Adjusting Time Method

•If the Hour (H) button is pushed once, the time will advance one hour. (To push the button, use a thin

object, such as a toothpick.)

•If the H button is held continuously, the time will advance one hour each second.

•If the Minute (M) button is pushed once, the time will advance one minute.

•If the M button is held continuously, the time will advance one minute each second.

Figure 7-2 Adjusting Time on ATTCON

Ask the operator at each ATTCON if the ATTCON is operating normally.

Each operator presses the LCHK button on the ATTCON and confirms that all the lamps on the

control panel light up.

When the ATTCON is equipped with a Time Indicator Section, the operator also checks the displayed

time.

START

END

STATION/TRUNK NUMBER

AM PM

TIME

ADJUST.

H M

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 7

Page 581

Issue 1

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

(2) Desk Console Check

Note 1: The lamp checks can be suspended any time when the * key on the control panel is pressed.

Note 2: The DESKCON obtains time information only from the PBX side. Therefore, adjust the time and date

using the MAT command.

Figure 7-3 Desk Console

Ask the operator at each DESKCON if the DESKCON is operating normally.

On the DESKCON control panel, each operator presses the L3, SRC, and Release keys simultaneously

and confirms that all the lamps on the control panel light red.

Operator presses the # key and confirms that all the lamps on the same transverse line between the

EMG and Mute lamps light green. Refer to the figure below.

Operator presses the # key and confirms that all the green lamps (in the step above) go OFF and the

LCD on the DESKCON displays black.

Operator presses the # key and confirms the black LCD display is cleared and a ringing tone is heard.

Operator presses the # key and confirms the provided ringing tone has suspended.

Operator presses the keys on the DESKCON one by one and confirms that each lamp, corresponding

to the pressed key, emits a light and the name of the key displays on the LCD, respectively.

Operator presses the * button and completes the lamp checks. Note1

Operator checks the displayed time on the right part of LCD. Note 2

START

END

Hold

Release

SRC DEST

Talk

Cancel

Answer

BUSYLDN

Alarm Position

Available Position

Busy Night

ATND NANS RECALL PAGETIE

TRKSLEMG Call Park SC SVC Start

REC

MuteBV

3:25 PM WED 1

CHAPTER 7 NDA-24307

Page 582

Issue 1

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

3.11 System Check

Check the OPE lamps (green) on all circuit cards.

Check whether a system message pertaining to the CPU/TSW has been output.

Check speech conditions by establishing a station-to-station connection at each PIM.

If the condition is abnormal, determine the nature of the problem (dial tone cannot be heard,

no speech can be established, etc.)

Does the condition occur in No. 0 TSW or in No. 1 TSW?

Does the condition occur in No. 0 CPU or in No. 1 CPU?

Using MEM_HDD/MEM_HDD_N command, check the data memory.

START

END

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 7

Page 583

Issue 1

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

4. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE CHECK LISTS

This section provides check lists (Maintenance Procedure Reports) to be used when performing routine

maintenance. The Routine Maintenance Check Lists consists of the following items:

•Maintenance Procedure Report

•C.O. Trunk/Tie Line

•Register/Sender Trunk (RST)

•Digital Conference Function (8 CFT)

•Speech Path for each PIM, and Ringing Generator Unit

•Attendant/Desk Console

CHAPTER 7 NDA-24307

Page 584

Issue 1

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

USER NAME SIGNATURE OF

SUPERVISOR WORK TIME

(FROM - )

Name of User (Company) Date: Maintenance

Classification Routine/

Non-routine

Control No. Maintenance

Company

Name of Equipment Room Temperature - °C

°F & humidity % Name of Worker

Reference

Section Item Detail Check Reference

Section Item Detail Check

3.1 Check of Ambient

Conditions in the

Switch Room

Ambient

Temperature

3.9 Trunk RGU Check SND Trunk

Relative humidity DCF Function

3.2 Alarm Check TOPU Tone

3.3 MAT/Printer Check MAT MAT

Printer 3.10 ATTCON Check Ringing Signal

3.4 Collection of

System Messages

Related to Fault 3.11 System Check

Result of Routine

Diagnosis

CPU

3.5 Display of Locked-

out Station

Locked out

Stations

TSW

3.6 Fan Unit Check PM

3.7 Alarm Tests TOPU

3.8 Main Power

System Check

Rectifier

Battery

3.9 Trunk RGU Check C.O. Trunk

Tie Trunk

ORT

IRT

Condition And Cause

Procedure and Parts Used

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 7

Page 585

Issue 1

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

C.O. Trunk Tie Line

TEST TYPE TEST ITEM CONNECTION DIAGRAM

C.O. Trunk/Tie Line

Speech Path Test •Set up a speech path test by

seizing a trunk using the

Station or ATTCON/DESKCON

connection test diagrammed to

the right.

•Connection Test-Station

•Connection Test-ATTCON/DESKCON

C.O. Trunk/Tie Line

NAME OF TRUNK ROUTE ACCESS

NUMBER ROUTE

NUMBER TRUNK

NUMBER CHECK REMARKS

LC TRK

C.O./Tie

Line

ATI TRK

C.O./Tie

Line

ATTCON/

DESKCON

CHAPTER 7 NDA-24307

Page 586

Issue 1

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

TEST TYPE TEST ITEM CONNECTION DIAGRAM

ORT Function • Perform the test by specifying

an ORT using the Connection

Test-Station.

• Confirm that [6-I] system

message displays as a result of

the test.

DP/PB

SENDER Function • Perform the test by specifying

an ORT using the Connection

Test-Station.

• Confirm that [6-I] system

message displays as a result of

the test.

ORT

LC ~

SND

ORT

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 7

Page 587

Issue 1

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

RST (/)

FUNCTION

TRUNK NO.

ORT SENDER REMARKS

PB RECEIVING DP RECEIVING

RST No.

ORT0 SND0

RST No.

CHAPTER 7 NDA-24307

Page 588

Issue 1

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

Digital Conference Function

TEST TYPE TEST ITEM CONNECTION DIAGRAM

Three-way

Conversation • Perform the test by specifying

an 8CFT using the Connection

Test-Station.

• Confirm that [6-I] system

message displays as a result of

the test.

FUNCTION

TRUNK NO. SPEECH RELEASE REMARKS

CFT0

TSTT

MUX

8CFT

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 7

Page 589

Issue 1

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

Speech Path for Each PIM, and Ringing Generator Unit

NO. TEST TYPE TEST ITEM CONNECTION DIAGRAM

1 The ATTCON/

DESKCON is called

from one station in

each PIM.

Normal speech path is confirmed

by calling the attendant from a

station located in each PIM.

2 The operator calls

the station back. After normal speech path has

been confirmed, the attendant

calls the station back. Confirm

that the station rings.

ATI

ATTCON/

DESKCON

ATI

ATTCON/

PWR0, 1

(RINGING)

DESKCON

CHAPTER 7 NDA-24307

Page 590

Issue 1

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

MOUNTING LOCATION CHECK REMARKS

MODULE NAME UNIT NAME

PIM0

PIM1

PIM2

PIM3

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 7

Page 591

Issue 1

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

Attendant/Desk Console (ATTCON/DESKCON)

TEST TYPE TEST ITEM CONNECTION DIAGRAM

Call Termination Test • A station dials the operator

access code and confirm that

the call termination is

indicated at all the ATTCON/

DESKCON.

• A station dials the operator

access code. An attendant

answers and speaks with the

caller. This process is repeated

at all the ATTCON/

DESKCON.

Call Origination Test • The attendant originates a call

to the station by pressing

LOOP keys one after another.

ATI

ATTCON/

DESKCON

ATTCON/

~RG

(RINGING)

ATI

DESKCON

CHAPTER 7 NDA-24307

Page 592

Issue 1

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

FUNCTION

ATTCON/

DESKCON NO.

CALL TERMINATION CALL ORIGINATION REMARKS

INCOMING CALL

INDICATION SPEECH RELEASE SPEECH RELEASE

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 8

Page 593

Issue 1

CHAPTER 8 MAINTENANCE COMMANDS

This chapter explains various commands used in the system administrative management procedure. Table 8-1

shows a list of maintenance commands.

Table 8-1 Command Lis t

COMMAND COMMAND FULL NAME

ALLC Assignment of Line Load Control

ALMG Assignment of Alarm Grade Data

ATRF Assignment of Traffic Measurement Order

ATRFN Assignment of Traffic Measurement Order for Fusion Network

BOSD Back Up One-Touch Speed Call Memory Data

CADSD Continuous Assignment of Station Data

CATK Continuous Assignment of Trunk Data

CBCN Control of Broadcasting for NDM

CCSE Change of Common Signaling Channel Equipment

CDBU Change of Dch Backup

CMOD Change of System Mode

CMODI Change of System Mode for ISW

CMWL Control Message Waiting Lamp

CMWL_T Control Message Waiting Lamps - Telephone Number

CPRS Controlled Alternate PRSCs

CSCL Continuous Change of Station Class

CSTN Continuous Change of Station Number

DCBD Display of Call Block Entry Data

DCEN Display of Connection Trunk LENS Data for LDM

DCON Display of Connection Status

DFTD Display of System Message Details

DISS Display of Program Issue

DLEN Display of LENS Data

DLSL Display of Lock Out Station - LENS

DLSS Display of Lockout Station - Number

DLSS_T Display of Lock Out Station - Number- Telephone Number

CHAPTER 8 NDA-24307

Page 594

Issue 1

MAINTENANCE COMMANDS

DLTEL Display of Telephone Number from LENS for LDM

DNTEL Display of Telephone Number from LENS for NDM

DPKG Display of Setting Port Package

DPSW Display Package Switch Status

DSTN Display of Station Data

DTELN Display of Telephone Number Data for NDM

DTF101 Display of Terminal Traffic Data

DTF102 Display of Route Traffic Data

DTF103 Display of Station Peg Count Data

DTF104 Display of Attendant Peg Count Data

DTF105 Display of Route Peg Count Data

DTF201 Display of Service Peg Count Data

DTF301 Display of UCD Route Peg Count Data

DTF302 Display of UCD Group Peg Count Data

DTF303 Display of Station Peg Count Data

DTF501 Display of Attendant Answering Peg Count Data

DTF601 Display of Connection Route Peg Count Data

DTF602 Display of Connection Route Traffic Data

DTF101N Display of Terminal Traffic Data for Fusion Network

DTF102N Display of Route Traffic Data for Fusion Network

DTF103N Display of Station Peg Count Data for Fusion Network

DTF104N Display of Attendant Peg Count Data for Fusion Network

DTF105N Display of Route Peg Count Data for Fusion Network

DTF201N Display of Service Peg Count Data for Fusion Network

DTF301N Display of UCD Route Peg Count Data for Fusion Network

DTF302N Display of UCD Group Peg Count Data for Fusion Network

DTF303N Display of Station Peg Count Data for Fusion Network

DTF501N Display of Attendant Answering Peg Count Data for Fusion Network

DTF601N Display of Connection Route Peg Count Data for Fusion Network

DTF602N Display of Connection Route Traffic Data for Fusion Network

Table 8-1 Command List (Continued)

COMMAND COMMAND FULL NAME

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 8

Page 595

Issue 1

MAINTENANCE COMMANDS

FLINST File Install

HDD_FDD Data Control Between HDD and FDD

HDD_MAT Data Control Between HDD and MAT

HDD_MAT_N Data Control Between HDD and MAT for NDM

HDFP HDD Format of PBX

MBCT Make Busy of Connection Trunk for LDM

MBLE Make Busy of LENS

MBPM Make Busy of Port Microprocessor

MBRT Make Busy of Route

MBSM Make Busy of System Message Printout

MBST Make Busy of Station

MBST_T Make Busy of Station - Telephone Number

MBTC Make Busy of Trunk-Continuous

MBTK Make Busy of Trunk

MEM_HDD Data Control Between Memory and HDD

MEM_HDD_N Data Control Between Memory and HDD for NDM

MFCH Make Busy of FCCH

PMBU Port Microprocessor Back Up

RALM Release Alarm

RALMN Release Alarm for NDM

RLST Release Station/Trunk

RLST_T Release Station/Trunk - Telephone Number

SINZ System Initialization

SINZI System Initialization for ISW

SPTS Scanning of Port Status

SRTS Scanning of Route Status

XHFD X-RAY HD or FDD Diagnosis

Table 8-1 Command List (Continued)

COMMAND COMMAND FULL NAME

CHAPTER 8 NDA-24307

Page 596

Issue 1

ALLC: Assignment of Line Load Control

1. Functional Outline

This command designates the start and stop of line load control.

2. Parameters

Input Data

ALL/ONE: Operation Mode Selection (1,2)

O/A=Only One LP/All LPs

LP: Local Partition (LP) Number Note

STATUS: Line Load Control Status (0-3)

0=Stop Line Load Control

1=Start Line Load Control

2=Automatic Line Load Control is in effect (display only)

3=Status of all LPs do not match (display only)

Note: This parameter appears when 0 (only one LP) is set in ALL/ONE input data.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 8

Page 597

Issue 1

ALMG: Assignment of Alarm Grade Data

1. Functional Outline

This command makes a flexible change of system message output grades. Thus, the PBX user can give a proper

alarm grade to each system message according to their requirements. When no data is assigned, the default

alarm grades are automatically adopted.

Note: This command cannot change the alarm grade for [6-A] system message.

2. Parameters

Input data

FK: Fault Message Kind (0-7, 10-17, 20-27, 30-37)

FI: Fault Message Index (A-Z)

LMP: Fault Message Lamp Data (0-3)

0=Lamp OFF

1=SUP Lamp ON

2=MN Lamp ON

3=MJ Lamp ON

GRD: Printout Grade (0-3)

TYPE: List-up Type)

1=All Data

2=Changed Data

3=Default Data

SYSM GRD: System Message Output Grade

0=All Messages

1=Not Used

2=MN/MJ Grade Massages

3=MJ Grade Massages

CHAPTER 8 NDA-24307

Page 598

Issue 1

ATRF: Assignment of Traffic Measurement Order

1. Functional Outline

This command is used to assign and delete node-level traffic measurement programs. A request for traffic

measurement is performed on each node basis when a traffic measurement instruction has been assigned by

this command. The collected traffic measurement data can be stored on the HD of the MAT, which can be

designated on the basis of traffic measurement type.

2. Parameters

Input Data

TYPE: Type of Traffic Measurement (1-19)

PORT: Traffic Information Output Terminal Number (0-7: IOC, 8: LAN, 9: NMS)

INTERVAL: Output interval (0, 30-120)

Assign the data (30-120) in 10 minute increments. When assigning 0 (available when any

of TYPE 3-18 is selected), instead specify your desired output time in the OUTPUT

HOUR/MINUTE parameters below.

START HOUR Note

START MINUTE Note

END HOUR Note

END MINUTE Note

OUTPUT HOUR: This data is valid only when “INTERVAL”=0.

OUTPUT MINUTE: This data is valid only when “INTERVAL”=0.

START RT: Start External Route Number (available when TYPE 2/5/8 is selected)

END RT: End External Route Number (available when TYPE 2/5/8 is selected)

DATA MEANING DATA MEANING

1 Terminal Traffic 2 Route Traffic

3 Station Peg Count 4 ATT Peg Count

5 Route Peg Count 6 Service Peg Count

8 UCD Route Peg Count 9 UCD Group Peg Count

10 UCD Station Peg Count 15 ATT Answering Peg Count

18 Connection Route Peg Count 19 Connection Route Traffic

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 8

Page 599

Issue 1

ATRF: Assignment of Traffic Measurement Order

START C_RT: Start Connection Route Number (available when TYPE 18/19 is selected)

END C_RT: End Connection Route Number (available when TYPE 18/19 is selected)

Note: Assign the traffic measurement time period between START HOUR/MINUTE and END HOUR/

MINUTE longer than an hour. Also, if the measurement should be executed throughout a day, assign

the same data in both START HOUR/MINUTE and END HOUR/MINUTE parameter

CHAPTER 8 NDA-24307

Page 600

Issue 1

ATRFN: Assignment of Traffic Measurement Order for Fusion Network

1. Functional Outline

This command is used to assign and delete traffic measurement programs available on the Ethernet. A request

for traffic measurement is performed on a network basis when a traffic measurement instruction has been

assigned by this command. The collected traffic measurement data can be stored on the HD of the MAT

(connected to the NCN: Network Control Node), which can be designated on the basis of traffic measurement

type. Note that this command can be used at the NCN only.

2. Parameters

Input Data

TYPE: Type of Traffic Measurement (1-19) Note 1

PORT: Traffic Information Output Terminal Number (0-7: IOC, 8: LAN, 9: NMS)

INTERVAL: Output interval (0, 30-120)

Assign the data (30-120) in 10 minute increments. When assigning 0 (avail-

able when any of TYPE 3-18 is selected), instead specify your desired output

time in the “OUTPUT HOUR/MINUTE” parameters below.

START HOUR Note 2, Note 3

START MINUTE Note 2, Note 3

END HOUR Note 2, Note 3

END MINUTE Note 2, Note 3

OUTPUT HOUR: This data is valid only when “INTERVAL”=0.

OUTPUT MINUTE: This data is valid only when “INTERVAL”=0.

START LGRT: Start Logical Route Number (available when TYPE 2/5/8 is selected)

DATA MEANING DATA MEANING

1 Terminal Traffic 2 Route Traffic

3 Station Peg Count 4 ATT Peg Count

5 Route Peg Count 6 Service Peg Count

8 UCD Route Peg Count 9 UCD Group Peg Count

10 UCD Station Peg Count 15 ATT Answering Peg Count

18 Connection Route Peg Count 19 Connection Route Traffic

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 8

Page 601

Issue 1

ATRFN: Assignment of Traffic Measurement Order for Fusion Network

END LGRT: End Logical Route Number (available when TYPE 2/5/8 is selected)

START C_RT: Start Connection Route Number (available when TYPE 18/19 is selected)

END C_RT: End Connection Route Number (available when TYPE 18/19 is selected)

Note 1: The selected traffic measurement data, except for TYPE 1 (Terminal Traffic), is collected with the

whole network systems as a single unit.

Note 2: When time difference exists between the nodes, confirm that the related time difference data, based on

the UCT (Universal Coordinated Time) standard, has been assigned at each node via the ATDF com-

mand.

Note 3: Assign the traffic measurement time period between START HOUR/MINUTE and END HOUR/

MINUTE longer than an hour. Also, if the measurement should be executed throughout a day, assign

the same data in both START HOUR/MINUTE and END HOUR/MINUTE parameters.

Note 4: If the data for this command is once assigned, the node-level data by the ATRF command is not

cleared, but loses its validity (the network-level data takes precedence).

CHAPTER 8 NDA-24307

Page 602

Issue 1

BOSD: Back Up One-Touch Speed Call Memory Data

1. Functional Outline

•Save Function

Saves the data residing in the One-Touch Speed Call Memory of ELC card onto a floppy disk.

•Verify Function

Verifies the One-Touch Speed Call Memory data saved on the floppy disk with the data residing in the

One-Touch Speed Call Memory of ELC card.

•Load Function

Loads the One-Touch Speed Call Memory data saved in the floppy disk into the One-Touch Speed Call

Memory of ELC card.

2. Parameters

Input data

Direction Select: PBX Memory to MAT/MAT to PBX Memory / Verify MAT against MEM

Data Type Selection: by Station / by LEN

Begin TN: Note 1

End TN: Note 1

Begin STN: Note 1

End STN: Note 1

Begin LEN: Note 2

End LEN: Note 2

Auto Verify Afterward: Click ON/OFF=Checked/Unchecked

File Name and Path

Note 1: When “by Station” is designated

Note 2: When “by LEN” is designated

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 8

Page 603

Issue 1

CADSD: Continuous Assignment of Station Data

1. Functional Outline

This command can assign/delete many station data simultaneously which have consecutive numbers.

2. Parameters

Type: Assign/Delete

[When “Assign” is selected in the “Type” selection list box]

Input data

TN(START): Start Tenant Number

TN(END): End Tenant Number

STN(START): Start Station Number [Max. 6 digits] Note 1

STN(END): End Station Number [Max. 6 digits] Note 1

STEP: Station Count-up Step Note 2

If using “*” and “#” → [1-12]

If not using “*” and “#” → [1-10]

LENS(START): First Line Equipment Number [6 digits]

LENS(END): Last Line Equipment Number [6 digits]

GROUP(START): First Group Number [0-31]

GROUP(END): Last Group Number [0-31]

LEVEL(START): First Level Number [0-7]

LEVEL(END): Last Level Number [0-7]

Note 1: In the bottom part of the display, a check box is provided to determine whether to use “*” and “#” as

a part of the Station Number. If necessary, check the box.

Note 2: In the parameter here, specify the size of increment between the consecutive station numbers to be

assigned. See the example below:

Example: [Input data] [Result]

STN(START)=100

STN(END)=200

STEP=10 →Station Number is assigned by 10 increments:

∇ When * and # are not used as part of STN

100 110 120 130 ... 190 200

∇ When * and # are used as part of STN

10* 118 126 134 ... 1** 1#8

CHAPTER 8 NDA-24307

Page 604

Issue 1

CADSD: Continuous Assignment of Station Data

TEC: Telephone Equipment Class [1-31]

1=DP (10pps) 2=PB

3=DP/PB 4=DP (20pps)

5-11=Not used 12=Dterm

13=Data Terminal via Dterm 14=Hot Line

15=CAS Line 16=Data Terminal via Data Module

17=Not used 18=Virtual Line Appearance (for Dterm Multi-Line)

19-22=Not used 23=ISDN Terminal

24-26=Not used 27=8 Conference Equipment

28-31=Not used

RSC: Route Restriction Class [0-15]

SFC: Service Feature Class [0-15]

Buttons

Execute: Click to make the input data valid.

Cancel: Click to cancel the input data.

Exit: Click to exit this command.

Display data (after “Execute” button is pressed)

TN: Tenant Number

STN: Assigned Station Number

LENS: Line Equipment Number

STATUS: Data Entry Result

OK=Data Assignment Is Successful Note

Note: If not OK (i.e. the data entry is not successful), related error message is displayed here.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 8

Page 605

Issue 1

CADSD: Continuous Assignment of Station Data

[When “Delete” is selected in the “Type” selection list box]

Input data

TN(START): First Tenant Number

TN(END): Last Tenant Number

STN(START): First Station Number [Max. 6 digits]

STN(END): Last Station Number [Max. 6 digits]

STEP: :Station Count-up Step Note 1

If using “*” and “#” → [1-12]

If not using “*” and “#” → [1-10]

Note 1: In the parameter here, specify the size of increment between the consecutive station numbers to be

deleted. See the example below:

Example: [Input data] [Result]

STN(START)=100

STN(END)=200

STEP=10

Buttons

Execute: Click to delete the input data.

Cancel: Click to cancel the deletion.

Exit: Click to exit this command.

Display data

TN: Tenant Number

STN: Station Number

STATUS: Result of Deletion Note 2

Note 2: When the deletion is successful, “OK” is displayed here. Otherwise (i.e. the deletion is rejected), re-

lated error message is displayed.

→Station Number is deleted by 10 increments:

∇ When * and # are not used as part of STN

100 110 120 130 ... 190 200

∇ When * and # are used as part of STN

10* 118 126 134 ... 1** 1#8

CHAPTER 8 NDA-24307

Page 606

Issue 1

CATK: Continuous Assignment of Trunk Data

1. Functional Outline

This command can assign/delete many trunk data simultaneously which have consecutive numbers.

2. Parameters

Type/KIND (Note): Assign/Delete

Note: Type

KIND

[When “Assign” is selected in the “Type/KIND” selection list box]

Input data

RT: Route Number

TK (START): First Trunk Number [1-768]

TK (END): Last Trunk Number [1-768]

STEP: Trunk Count-up Step [1-10] Note 1

LENS (START): First Line Equipment Number [6 digits]

LENS (END): Last Line Equipment Number [6 digits]

TN: Tenant Number

RSC: Route Restriction Class [0-15] Note 2

SFC: Service Feature Class [0-15] Note 2

GROUP (START): First Group Number [0-31]

GROUP (END): Last Group Number [0-31]

LEVEL (START): First Level Number [0-7]

LEVEL (END): Last Level Number [0-7]

TYPE: Count-up Type [1-6] Note 3

1 = LEVEL→GROUP→UNIT

2 = LEVEL→UNIT →GROUP

3 = GROUP→UNIT →LEVEL

4 = GROUP→LEVEL→UNIT

5 = UNIT →LEVEL→GROUP

6 = UNIT →GROUP→LEVEL

Note 1: In the parameter here, specify the size of increment between the consecutive trunk numbers to be

assigned. See the example below:

Example: [Input data] [Result]

TN(START)=1

TN(END)=21

STEP=2

Note 2: Data entry for this parameter is necessary when “RT” is “901” or “915.”

Note 3: “TYPE” parameter here determines how to arrange the trunk data. See [Details on Trunk

Arrangement “TYPE”] (later pages) for details.

→Trunk Number is assigned by 2 increments:

1357911...1921

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 8

Page 607

Issue 1

CATK: Continuous Assignment of Trunk Data

Buttons

Execute: Click to make the input data valid.

Cancel: Click to cancel the input data.

Exit: Click to exit this command.

Display data

TK: Assigned Trunk Number

LENS: Line Equipment Number

STATUS: Data Entry Result

OK=Data Assignment Is Successful Note 4

Note 4: If not OK (i.e. the data entry is not successful), related error message is displayed here.

CHAPTER 8 NDA-24307

Page 608

Issue 1

CATK: Continuous Assignment of Trunk Data

[When “Delete” is selected in the “Type/KIND” selection list box]

Input data

RT: Route Number

TK(START): First Trunk Number [1-768]

TK(END): Last Trunk Number [1-768]

STEP: Trunk Count-up Step [1-10] Note 1

Buttons

Execute: Click to delete the input data.

Cancel: Click to cancel the deletion.

Exit: Click to exit this command.

Display data

TK: Trunk Number

STATUS: Result of Deletion

OK=Deletion Success Note 2

Note 1: In the parameter here, specify the size of increment between the consecutive trunk numbers to be de-

leted. See the example below:

Example: [Input data] [Result]

TK(START)=1

TK(END)=21

STEP=2

Note 2: When the deletion is successful, “OK” is displayed here. Otherwise (i.e. the deletion is rejected), re-

lated error message is displayed.

→Trunk Number is deleted by 2 increments:

1357911...1921

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 8

Page 609

Issue 1

CATK: Continuous Assignment of Trunk Data

[Details on Trunk Arrangement “TYPE”]

When assigning the consecutive trunk data by using the CATK command, you must select the trunk arrange-

ment type (1-6) in the “TYPE” parameter. See the detailed examples below:

The following are the examples when the 16 COT circuit cards are accommodated as shown below.

•TYPE=1 (Level → Group → Unit)

Trunk data is arranged in the following numerical order.

U=2

PIM C/E

U=3

05 10 15 20

PIM C/E

U=0 U=1

TTT

LV7

LV6

LV5

LV4

LV3

LV2

LV1

LV0

LV1

LV2

LV3

LV4

LV5

LV6

LV7

05 06

U=2

U=0

0302

1615

U=3

U=1

Group No.

Level No.

1MG

Slot No.

CHAPTER 8 NDA-24307

Page 610

Issue 1

CATK: Continuous Assignment of Trunk Data

•TYPE=2 (Level → Unit → Group)

Trunk data is arranged in the following numerical order.

•TYPE=3 (Group → Level → Unit)

Trunk data is arranged in the following numerical order.

LV7

LV6

LV5

LV4

LV3

LV2

LV1

LV0

LV1

LV2

LV3

LV4

LV5

LV6

LV7

05 06

U=2

U=0

0302

1615

U=3

U=1

Group No.

Level No.

1MG

Slot No.

LV7

LV6

LV5

LV4

LV3

LV2

LV1

LV0

LV1

LV2

LV3

LV4

LV5

LV6

LV7

05 06

U=2

U=0

0302

1615

U=3

U=1

Group No.

Level No.

1MG

Slot No.

83536

51 52 69 72

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 8

Page 611

Issue 1

CATK: Continuous Assignment of Trunk Data

•TYPE=4 (Group → Unit → Level)

Trunk data is arranged in the following numerical order.

•TYPE=5 (Unit → Level → Group)

Trunk data is arranged in the following numerical order.

LV7

LV6

LV5

LV4

LV3

LV2

LV1

LV0

LV1

LV2

LV3

LV4

LV5

LV6

LV7

05 06

U=2

U=0

0302

1615

U=3

U=1

Group No.

Level No.

1MG

Slot No.

16 17 18

19 20 21 24

LV7

LV6

LV5

LV4

LV3

LV2

LV1

LV0

LV1

LV2

LV3

LV4

LV5

LV6

LV7

05 06

U=2

U=0

0302

1615

U=3

U=1

Group No.

Level No.

1MG

Slot No.

83 6 38

739 8 84

64 80

40 68

36 66

37 67

61 79

CHAPTER 8 NDA-24307

Page 612

Issue 1

CATK: Continuous Assignment of Trunk Data

•TYPE=6 (Unit → Group → Level)

Trunk data is arranged in the following numerical order.

LV7

LV6

LV5

LV4

LV3

LV2

LV1

LV0

LV1

LV2

LV3

LV4

LV5

LV6

LV7

05 06

U=2

U=0

0302

1615

U=3

U=1

Group No.

Level No.

1MG

Slot No.

23 14 18

15 19 16 24

92 94

20 22

810

17 21

89 93

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 8

Page 613

Issue 1

CBCN: Control of Broadcasting for NDM

1. Functional Outline

This command specifies the destination of NDM data broadcast from the NCN. This command is available

only at the NCN (Network Control Node).

2. Parameters

Input data

TYPE: ALL (All the Nodes)/ONE (One designated Node)

FPC: FPC of the designated Node Note

Interval: Broadcasting Interval

Note: This parameter appears when one node is selected.

CHAPTER 8 NDA-24307

Page 614

Issue 1

CCSE: Change of Common Signaling Channel Equipment

1. Functional Outline

This command is used to set/reset the make busy state of CCH circuit card.

2. Parameters

CCH LENS: Line Equipment Number of CCH circuit card [5 digits]

MG=XX, UNIT=X, GROUP=XX

LINK: Link Status [0-2]

0=Link Open

1=Link Close

2=Not Available

MB: Make Busy Information [0-2]

0=Make Idle

1=Make Busy

2=Not Available

Note: This command cannot be used for the ISDN-related circuit card (such as PRT, DCH card).

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 8

Page 615

Issue 1

CDBU: Change of Dch Backup

1. Functional Outline

This command is used to execute the D-channel route changeover, associated with the D-CHANNEL BACK-

UP-PRI feature (for AT&T/NT/N-ISDN2).

2. Parameters

Input data

MG: Module Group Number [00-07] Note

CNT: Number of Dch Backup Route [1-32] Note

Buttons

Get: Click to get information on the Dch Routes.

Change: Click to execute the Dch route changeover.

Stop: Click to cancel the Dch route changeover.

Exit: Click to exit this command.

Display data

RT: External Route Number

STS0: Primary-side DCH Status [ACT/ST-BY/OOS (out of service)]

STS1: Backup-side DCH Status [ACT/ST-BY/OOS (out of service)]

P-LENS: Primary DCH LENS (6 digits)

B-LENS: Backup DCH LENS (6 digits)

CHG-STS: Change Status [Completed/Executing]

Note: Data entry procedure by this command is as follows:

1. Specify the Module Group No. in the “MG” parameter.

2. Click the “Get” button. Then, the related Dch data appears in the display data field.

3. Referring to the display data, enter the “CNT” No. attached to the Dch to be changed over.

4. Click the “Change” button.

→Now, the Dch changeover starts automatically.

CHAPTER 8 NDA-24307

Page 616

Issue 1

CMOD: Change of System Mode

1. Functional Outline

This command is used to execute ACT/ST-BY change of the processor (CPU) / TSW and display the status of

CPU/CLK/TSW/PLO.

2. Parameters

Input data

TYPE: Type of Process (1,2)

1/2=Change Operating Mode/Make Busy of TSW

DEVICE: Device to be changed (1,2) Note 1

1=CPU Note 2

2=TSW

SW: Type of Switch Note 3

1=TSW(fixed)

SYSTEM: System of Switch (0,1) Note 3

0/1=System 0/System 1

Note 1: This parameter appears only when “TYPE”=1.

Note 2: When the CPU mode change is executed, the MAT (TCP/IP) is once disconnected. Then, log in to the

system again.

Note 3: This parameter appears only when “TYPE”=2.

Display data

Status: CPU 0/1, TSW 0/1, PLO 0/1(0-3)

0=Not Mounted

1=Stand By

2=ACT

3=Make Busy

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 8

Page 617

Issue 1

CMODI: Change of System Mode for ISW

1. Functional Outline

This command is used to execute ACT/ST-BY change of the CPU/TSW and display the status of CPU/TSW/

PLO. To use this command, the MAT must be connected to ISW.

2. Parameters

Input data

FPC: FPC of designated Node

Note: When TSW changeover is executed, be sure to assign FPC of ISW.

TYPE SELECT: 1=ACT/ST-BY change of CPU/TSW

2=MB Control of TSW

[When TYPE 1 is selected]

DEVICE: 1=CPU Note

2=TSW

Execution Button: ACT/ST-BY change to be executed

[When TYPE 2 is selected]

SYSTEM: 0/1=TSW No.0 System/TSW No.1 System

Execution Button: MB ON/MB OFF

Note: When the CPU mode change is executed, the MAT (TCP/IP) is once disconnected. Then, log in to the

system again.

Display data

FPC: FPC of each Node

STATUS: Result of ACT/ST-BY change

SYSTEM: No.0 System/No.1 System

CPU: ACT/ST-BY state of CPU No.0/1

TSW: MB ON/MB OFF state of TSW No.0/1

PLO: ACT/ST-BY state of PLO No.0/1

CHAPTER 8 NDA-24307

Page 618

Issue 1

CMWL: Control Message Waiting Lamp

1. Functional Outline

This command indicates ON/OFF status and controls the Message Waiting Lamp ON/OFF (MW Lamp) at the

station. If the station is a Dterm, this command can also control Message Waiting Display on the Dterm.

2. Parameters

Input Data

TYPE: Type of Input (1,2)

1/2=Designation by Station Number/Designation by LEN

TN: Note 1

STN: Maximum 5 digits for Business system, and 6 digits for Hotel system. Note 1

LENS: Note 2

MCI: Message Center MW Status (0,1)

0/1=OFF/ON

ATT: Attendant Console MW Status (0,1) See the parameter MCI.

STA: Station MW Status (0,1) See the parameter MCI.

VMM: Voice Mail Module MW Status (0,1)See the parameter MCI.

Note 1: This parameter appears when TYPE= 1.

Note 2: This parameter appears when TYPE= 2.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 8

Page 619

Issue 1

CMWL_T: Control Message Waiting Lamps - Telephone Number

1. Functional Outline

This command is used to control/display the Message Waiting Lamp’s ON/OFF status, by using Telephone

Numbers. When the station is a Dterm, this command can also be used to control the Message Waiting Lamp

Display. This command is available at NCN (for Fusion network) only. Note

Note: This command is available for PBX program software.

2. Parameters

Input Data

TYPE: Designation by Telephone Number/Designation by LEN

UGN: User Group Number Note 1

TELN: Telephone Number (max. 16 digits) Note 1

LENS: Line Equipment Number Note 2

MWLAMP: MW Lamp Status OFF/ON

MCI: Message Center MW Status OFF/ON

ATT: Attendant Console MW Status OFF/ON

STA: Station MW Status OFF/ON

VMM: Voice Mail Module MW Status OFF/ON

Note 1: This parameter is valid when “Type = 1” is selected.

Note 2: This parameter is valid when “Type = 2” is selected.

Display Data

FPC: Fusion Point Code (1-253) Note 3

TN: Tenant Number Note 3

STN: Physical Station Number (max. 5 digits for Business/max. 6 digits for Hotel

system) Note 3

Note 3: These parameters are for display only.

Buttons

Get: Click to get information on the MW status.

Set: Click to execute the assigned MW lamp control.

Exit: Click to exit this command.

CHAPTER 8 NDA-24307

Page 620

Issue 1

CPRS: Controlled Alternate PRSCs

1. Functional Outline

This command is necessary for the Controlled Alternate PRSCs function. It either selects the class used be-

tween two priority restriction classes (Normal or Urgent), or indicates the class used. This command is allowed

only when bit1 of SYS 1, INDEX 59 is “1” (Controlled Alternate PRSCs in service).

2. Parameters

N/U: Priority Restriction Class [N/U]

N=Normal

U=Urgent

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 8

Page 621

Issue 1

CSCL: Continuous Change of Station Class

1. Functional Outline

This command can change the station class information (RSC, SFC) continuously by designating the

consecutive range of the station numbers.

2. Parameters

Input data

TN: Tenant Number

STN(START): First Station Number [0-9, #, * (Max. 6 digits)] Note 1

STN(END): Last Station Number [0-9, #, * (Max. 6 digits)] Note 1

TEC(OLD): Telephone Equipment Class before change [1-31] Note 2, Note 3

TEC(NEW): Telephone Equipment Class after change [1-31] Note 2

RSC(OLD): Route Restriction Class before change [0-15] Note 3

RSC(NEW): Route Restriction Class after change [0-15]

SFC(OLD): Service Feature Class before change [0-15] Note 3

SFC(NEW): Service Feature Class after change [0-15]

Note 1: In the bottom part of the display, a check box is provided to determine whether to use “*” and “#” as

a part of the Station Number. If necessary, check the box.

Note 2: Details on TEC (Telephone Equipment Class) are shown below:

1=DP (10pps) 2=PB

3=DP/PB 4=DP (20pps)

5-11=Not used 12=Dterm

13=Data Terminal via Dterm 14=Hot Line

15=CAS Line 16=Data Terminal via Data Module

17=Not used 18=Virtual Line Appearance (for Dterm Multi-Line)

19-22=Not used 23=ISDN Terminal

24-26=Not used 27=8 Conference Equipment

28-31=Not used

Note 3: If you want to change all classes of all specified stations, enter “**” for this parameter.

Buttons

Execute: Click to make the input data valid.

Cancel: Click to cancel the input data.

Exit: Click to exit this command.

Display data

STN: Station Number

STATUS: Data Entry Result

OK=Data Assignment is successful Note

Note: If not OK (i.e. the data entry is not successful), related error message is displayed here.

CHAPTER 8 NDA-24307

Page 622

Issue 1

CSTN: Continuous Change of Station Number

1. Functional Outline

This command can change a consecutive range of physical station numbers.

2. Parameters

Input data

TN: Tenant Number

OLD STN(START): First Station Number before change [0-9, #, * (Max. 6 digits)] Note

OLD STN(END): Last Station Number before change [0-9, #, * (Max. 6 digits)] Note

NEW STN(START): First Station Number after change [0-9, #, * (Max. 6 digits)] Note

NEW STN(END): Last Station Number after change [0-9, #, * (Max. 6 digits)] Note

Note: In the bottom part of the display, a check box is provided to determine whether to use “*” and “#” as

a part of the Station Number. If necessary, check the box.

Buttons

Execute: Click to make the input data valid.

Cancel: Click to cancel the input data

Exit: Click to exit this command.

Display data

OLD STN: Station Number before change

NEW STN: Station Number after change

STATUS: Data Entry Result

OK=Data Assignment is successful Note

Note: If not OK (i.e. the data entry is not successful), related error message is displayed here.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 8

Page 623

Issue 1

DCBD: Display of Call Block Entry Data

1. Functional Outline

This command is used to display the following Call Block data, assigned to a station:

•Number of station/trunk whose call is to be blocked (in the remainder of this page, denoted as “Restriction

Number”)

•Registered “Restriction Numbers” in total

These data can be obtained by entering any of the station’s Telephone Number (TYPE 1), Physical Station

Number (TYPE 2) or LENS (TYPE 3) in the parameters below:

2. Parameters

Input Data

TYPE: Selection of Input Data Type

TYPE 1 (Input Data = UGN, TELN) Note

TYPE 2 (Input Data = FPC, TN, STN) Note

TYPE 3 (Input Data = FPC, LENS) Note

READ (button to view the Display Data)

EXIT (button to exit)

Note: When using this command, first choose the input data type (Type 1 - 3) in the “TYPE” selection list box.

Then the following parameters appear, according to the selected data type.

•When TYPE 1 is selected: UGN (User Group Number)

TELN (Telephone Number [Max.16 digits])

•When TYPE 2 is selected: FPC (Fusion Point Code [1-253])

TN (Tenant Number [Max.3 digits])

STN (Physical Station Number [Max.6 digits])

•When TYPE 3 is selected: FPC (Fusion Point Code [1-253])

LENS (Line Equipment Number)

CHAPTER 8 NDA-24307

Page 624

Issue 1

DCBD: Display of Call Block Entry Data

Display Data

CNT: Registered “Restriction Numbers” in total (1-5)

DC: Each “Restriction Number”

•When Physical Station Number is registered – Max.6 digits

•When Telephone Number is registered – Max.16 digits

•When Trunk Call Number is registered – Max.32 digits

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 8

Page 625

Issue 1

DCEN: Display of Connection Trunk LENS Data for LDM

1. Functional Outline

This command is used to display the registered connection trunk/route data by designating LENS.

2. Parameters

Input data

C_LENS: Line Equipment Number [6 digits]

Display data

C_RT: Connection Route Number [1-1023]

C_TK: Connection Trunk Number [1-4095]

RT: External Route Number

TK: Trunk Number [1-255]

TN: Tenant Number

CHAPTER 8 NDA-24307

Page 626

Issue 1

DCON: Display of Connection Status

1. Functional Outline

This command displays the connection status of the station and trunks. If the specified station or trunk is busy,

the connected party is displayed.

2. Parameters

Input data

TYPE: Kind of Connection Status (1-4)

1=Station of Connection Status

2=Trunk of Connection Status

3=LENS of Connection Status

4=Connection Trunk of Connection Status (Fusion Network)

TN: Note 1

STN: Maximum number of digits is 5 for Business system, and 6 for Hotel system. Note 1

RT: Note 2

TK: Note 2

LEN: Note 3

C_RT: Connection Route Number (1-1023) Note 4

C_TK: Connection Trunk Number (1-4095) Note 4

Note 1: This data is valid when Type= 1.

Note 2: This data is valid when Type= 2.

Note 3: This data is valid when Type= 3.

Note 4: This data is valid when Type= 4.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 8

Page 627

Issue 1

DFTD: Display of System Message Details

1. Functional Outline

This command is necessary to print the system messages detected by the Fault Diagnostic programs.

When the fault scanning (Scanning PBX) is effective, the MAT can scan the PBX status by polling every 20

sec, (default setting is Effective.)

If the PBX has faults, this command executes automatically.

2. Parameters

Input data

New/Old

Show Details: YES/NO

CHAPTER 8 NDA-24307

Page 628

Issue 1

DISS: Display of Program Issue

1. Functional Outline

This command outputs to the printer and displays at the MAT, the program information (version, issue No. and

date) in the main memory, and the program information (SP No.and issue No.) in the port microprocessor

memory mounted in each circuit card in the PBX.

2. Parameters

Input data

Type of Issue: Main Memory/Port Microprocessor

Module Group: Note 1

Unit: Note 1

Display data

Type: Main Memory/Boot ROM/IP/ACDP Note 2

Version: Note 2

Issue: Note 2

Date: Note 2

Group: 00-23 Note 1

SP No.: 4 digits Note 1

Issue: ASCII 2 digits Note 1

Note 1: This data is valid when Port Microprocessor is designated.

Note 2: This data is valid when Main Memory is designated.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 8

Page 629

Issue 1

DLEN: Display of LENS Data

1. Functional Outline

This command displays the data (station data or trunk data) assigned for a designated LEN. For Hotel system,

Room Class and Floor Service Data [Annex (ANX), Ground/Underground (G), Floor (FLR)] displays also.

2. Parameters

Input data

LENS

Display data

STN: Maximum 6 digits

TEC: Telephone Equipment Number (1-31)

RSC: Route Restriction Class (0-15)

SFC: Service Feature Class (0-15)

ROOM CLASS: (0-15)

ANX: Annex (0-3)

G: 0/1=Ground/Underground

FLR: Floor (1-127)

RT: The Internal Route Number

DATA MEANING DATA MEANING

1 DP (10pps) 2 PB

3 DP/PB 4 DP (20 pps)

5-11 Not used 12 Dterm

13 Data Terminal via Dterm 14 Hot Line

15 CAS Line 16 Data Terminal via Data Module

17 Not used 23 ISDN Terminal

18 Virtual Line Appearance (for Dterm

Multi-Line) 19-22 Not used

24-26 Not used 27 Eight Conference Equipment

28-31 Not used

CHAPTER 8 NDA-24307

Page 630

Issue 1

DLEN: Display of LENS Data

C_RT: Connection Route Number (1-1023)

C_TK: Connection Trunk Number (1-4095)

DATA MEANING DATA MEANING

901 Attendant Console 902 Originating Register Trunk

903 Incoming Register Trunk 904 MF Receiver

905 Sender Trunk DP/PB 906 PB Receiver for Automated Attendant Service

907AMP 908Not used

909 Three-Way Conference Trunk 910-912 Not used

913 Three-Way Conference Trunk for ATTCON 914 Not Used

915 Night Attendant Console 916 MFC Register

917 MFC Sender 918 Not used

919-926 Modem 927, 928 Not used

929 Data Signaling Trunk-Option 930 Rate Adapter Conversion Trunk

931-947 Not used

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 8

Page 631

Issue 1

DLSL: Display of Lock Out Station - LENS

1. Functional Outline

This command prints the LENS of stations in lockout state.

2. Parameters

Input data

TYPE: Type of Printout (1-3)

1=Printout of all LEN in lockout

2=Printout of locked out LEN in the designated Module Group

3=Printout of locked out LEN in the designated Unit

MG: Note 1, Note 2

UNIT: Note 2

Note 1: The parameter is valid only when Type= 2.

Note 2: The parameter is valid only when Type= 3.

Display data

LENS

CHAPTER 8 NDA-24307

Page 632

Issue 1

DLSS: Display of Lockout Station - Number

1. Functional Outline

This command prints the stations in lockout state by station number.

2. Parameters

Input data

TYPE: Type of Printout (1-3)

1=Printout of all lockout stations

2=Printout of lockout stations by tenant

3=Printout of lockout stations within a specified range of station number.

TN: Note 1, Note 2

START STN: Maximum 6 digits Note 2

END STN: Maximum 6 digits Note 2

Note 1: The parameter is valid only when Type= 2.

Note 2: The parameter is valid only when Type= 3.

Display data

CNT: Count

STN

LENS

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 8

Page 633

Issue 1

DLSS_T: Display of Lock Out Station - Number- Telephone Number

1. Functional Outline

This command is used to print out stations in lockout state, by using Telephone Numbers. This command is

available at NCN (for Fusion network) only. Note

Note: This command is available for PBX program software.

2. Parameters

Input data

Type: Printout of all lockout stations

Printout of lockout stations by tenant

Printout of lockout stations within a specified range of station number

UGN: User Group Number Note 1, Note 2

Start TELN: First Telephone Number (max. 16 digits) Note 2

End TELN: End Telephone Number (max. 16 digits) Note 2

Note 1: This parameter is valid when “Type = Printout of lockout stations by tenant” is selected.

Note 2: This parameter is valid when “Type = Printout of lockout stations within a specified range of station

number” is selected.

Display data

FPC: Fusion Point Code (1-253)

TN: Tenant Number

Start STN: First Physical Station Number (max. 5 digits for Business/max. 6 digits for Hotel

system)

End STN: End Physical Station Number (max. 5 digits for Business/max. 6 digits for Hotel

system)

CNT: Count

UGN: User Group Number

TELN: Telephone Number (max. 16 digits)

LENS: Line Equipment Number

Buttons

Get: Click to get information on the lockout station

Exit: Click to exit this command.

CHAPTER 8 NDA-24307

Page 634

Issue 1

DLTEL: Display of Telephone Number from LENS for LDM

1. Functional Outline

This command, available at each Local Node (LN), is used to display the Telephone Number or other station

data by designating a specific LEN.

2. Parameters

Input data

LENS: Line Equipment Number [6 digits]

Display data

UGN: User Group Number

TELN: Telephone Number [Max. 16 digits]

TN: Tenant Number

STN: Station Number [Max. 6 digits]

TEC: Telephone Equipment Class [1-31]

RSC: Route Restriction Class [0-15]

SFC: Service Feature Class [0-15]

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 8

Page 635

Issue 1

DNTEL: Display of Telephone Number from LENS for NDM

1. Functional Outline

This command, available at Network Control Node (NCN) only, is used to display the Telephone Number or

other station data by designating a specific FPC and LEN.

2. Parameters

Input data

FPC: Fusion Point Code [1-253]

LENS: Line Equipment Number [6 digits]

Display data

UGN: User Group Number

TELN: Telephone Number [Max. 16 digits]

NID: Network ID Note

TN: Tenant Number

STN: Station Number [Max. 6 digits]

TEC: Telephone Equipment Number [1-31]

RSC: Route Restriction Class [0-15]

SFC: Service Feature Class [0-15]

Note: Network ID (NID) is allocated automatically when the Module Group/Unit data is assigned by the

AFMU command. Refer to the “Fusion Network System Manual” for more information.

CHAPTER 8 NDA-24307

Page 636

Issue 1

DPKG: Display of Setting Port Package

1. Functional Outline

This command is used to display the circuit card name accommodated in each Group of a specific UNIT.

Note 1: When using this command, make sure that each circuit card related database files have already been

installed to your MAT. (See FLINST command for more information.)

2. Parameters

Input data

MG: Module Group (MG) number [00-07]

UNIT: Unit (U) number [0-3]

Buttons

Get: Click to get information on mounted circuit cards.

Close: Click to exit this command.

Note: When the Input Data above is entered and the “Get” button is pressed, the related circuit card name is

displayed on a Group basis. However, if the name is not found for some reasons, the following mark

may appear in the relevant display field.

•#→Unidentifiable firm ware type.

•## →Data not found in the FMID (database).

•### →Group data not assigned.

•*→Circuit card name not found (for the card is in make-busy state, etc.).

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 8

Page 637

Issue 1

DPSW: Display Package Switch Status

1. Functional Outline

This command is used to display the following information on a Line/Trunk or Control circuit card:

[When MAT is in On-Line Mode (=connected to the system)]

•Current status of each switch

•Explanation of each switch function

[When MAT is in Off-Line Mode (= not connected to the system)]

•Explanation of each switch function

Note 1: When using this command, make sure that each circuit card related database files have already been

installed to your MAT. (See FLINST command for more information.)

2. Parameters

Input data

KIND: Display Kind (selection)

•(MAT=) On-Line Mode

•(MAT=) Off-Line Mode

TYPE: Circuit Card Type (selection)

•Line Trunk Package

•Control Package

PMN: Port Micro Processor Number

PKG NAME: Circuit Card Name

LP/ISW: Local Partition Number [00-06 (Even Number only)] or ISW Number Note

SYSTEM: System Note

0=No.0 System

1=No.1 System

MG: Module Group Number [00-07] Note

UNIT: Unit Number [0-3] Note

ACT/ST-BY: ACT/ST-BY information Note

0=ACT

1=ST-BY

2=Not used

NODE: Node Number [0-3]

CLINE: Collection Line Note

0=Out of Service

1=In Service

No: IOC Card Number [0/1] Note

Note: This parameter may appear when “Control Package” is selected in the “TYPE” parameter.

CHAPTER 8 NDA-24307

Page 638

Issue 1

DPSW: Display Package Switch Status

Buttons

Get: Click to view the display data

Page Up: Click to view the next page data (when next page exists).

Page Down: Click to return to the previous page data.

Exit: Click to exit this command.

Display data

PKG Name: Circuit Card Name

Firm Name/Issue: Firm Name/Issue of the circuit cardEach switch data is also displayed on the dedicated

display page.

Each switch data is also displayed on the dedicated display page.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 8

Page 639

Issue 1

DSTN: Display of Station Data

1. Functional Outline

This command is used to display the registered Station Data corresponding to the designated Tenant and Sta-

tion Number. In addition, the information of Hot Line, Dterm Key Layout, Hunting, and Call Pickup, etc., can

also be displayed as the data related to the designated stations.

2. Parameters

Input data

TN: Tenant Number

STN: Station Number [0-9, #, * (Max. 6 digits)]

Buttons

[For display data selection]

SHP: Station Hunting Group-Pilot Note

KYD: Key Data for Dterm Note

CPG: Call Pickup Group Note

CPE: Call Pickup Expand Group Note

PHN: Phantom Station Number Note

SHC: Station Hunting-Circular Note

SHU: Station Hunting-UCD Note

HLS: Hot Line Station Note

Note: When the designated station has any of these data, the corresponding button(s) can be selected. If the

data is necessary, click the button(s).

[For execution order]

Get: Click to view the display data.

Close: Click to exit this command.

Display data (by Parameters)

ETN: Effective Tenant Number

LENS: Line Equipment Number (6 digits)

TEC: Telephone Equipment Class [1-31]

1=DP (10pps) 2=PB

3=DP/PB 4=DP (20pps)

5-11=Not used 12=Dterm

13=Data Terminal via Dterm 14=Hot Line

15=CAS Line 16=Data Terminal via Data Module

17=Not used 18=Virtual Line Appearance (for Dterm Multi-Line)

19-22=Not used 23=ISDN Terminal

24-26=Not used 27=8 Conference Equipment

28-31=Not used

RSC: Route Restriction Class [0-15]

SFC: Service Feature Class [0-15]

CHAPTER 8 NDA-24307

Page 640

Issue 1

DTELN: Display of Telephone Number Data for NDM

1. Functional Outline

This command is used to display the registered station data corresponding to specified User Group Number

(UGN) and Telephone Number (TELN). The following data related to Number Group can be displayed by

clicking the selection button for each data. This command can be used only when logging in to Network

Control Node (NCN).

•ACPGN: Call Pickup Group (NDM)

•ACPEN: Call Pickup Expand Group (NDM)

•ASHUN: Station Hunting Group-UCD (NDM)

•ASHCN: Station Hunting Group-Circular (NDM)

•AHLSN: Hot Line Station (NDM)

•ASHPN: Station Hunting Group-Pilot (NDM)

•AKYD: Key Data for Dterm

2. Parameters

Input Data

UGN: User Group Number

TELN: Telephone Number

Display Data

FPC: Fusion Point Code (1-253)

TN: Tenant Number

STN: Station Number

LENS: Line Equipment Number (6 digits)

MG: Module Group Number

UNIT: Unit Number

G: Group Number

LV: Level Number

TEC: Telephone Class (1-31)

RSC: Route Restriction Class (0-15)

SFC: Service Feature Restriction Class (0-15)

Selection Button

CPGN :Call Pickup Group (NDM)

CPEN :Call Pickup Expand Group (NDM)

SHUN :Station Hunting Group-UCD (NDM)

SHCN :Station Hunting Group-Circular (NDM)

HLSN :Hot Line Station (NDM)

SHPN :Station Hunting Group-Pilot (NDM)

KYD :Key Data for Dterm

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 8

Page 641

Issue 1

DTF101: Display of Terminal Traffic Data

1. Functional Outline

This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for Type= 1 (Terminal Traffic) assigned by the

ATRF command.

2. Parameters

Traffic Data 1: Terminal Traffic-DTF101

Route Traffic-DTF102

Station Peg Count-DTF103

Attendant Peg Count-DTF104

Route Peg Count-DTF105

Traffic Data 2: Service Peg Count-DTF201

Traffic Data 3: UCD Route Peg Count-DTF301

UCD Group Peg Count-DTF302

UCD Station Peg Count-DTF303

Traffic Data 5: Attendant Answering Peg Count-DTF501

Traffic Data 6: Connection Route Peg Count-DTF601

Connection Route Traffic-DTF602

CHAPTER 8 NDA-24307

Page 642

Issue 1

DTF102: Display of Route Traffic Data

1. Functional Outline

This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for Type= 2 (Route Traffic) assigned by the

ATRF command.

2. Parameters

Traffic Data 1: Terminal Traffic-DTF101

Route Traffic-DTF102

Station Peg Count-DTF103

Attendant Peg Count-DTF104

Route Peg Count-DTF105

Traffic Data 2: Service Peg Count-DTF201

Traffic Data 3: UCD Route Peg Count-DTF301

UCD Group Peg Count-DTF302

UCD Station Peg Count-DTF303

Traffic Data 5: Attendant Answering Peg Count-DTF501

Traffic Data 6: Connection Route Peg Count-DTF601

Connection Route Traffic-DTF602

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 8

Page 643

Issue 1

DTF103: Display of Station Peg Count Data

1. Functional Outline

This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for Type= 3 (Station Peg Count) assigned by the

ATRF command.

2. Parameters

Traffic Data 1: Terminal Traffic-DTF101

Route Traffic-DTF102

Station Peg Count-DTF103

Attendant Peg Count-DTF104

Route Peg Count-DTF105

Traffic Data 2: Service Peg Count-DTF201

Traffic Data 3: UCD Route Peg Count-DTF301

UCD Group Peg Count-DTF302

UCD Station Peg Count-DTF303

Traffic Data 5: Attendant Answering Peg Count-DTF501

Traffic Data 6: Connection Route Peg Count-DTF601

Connection Route Traffic-DTF602

CHAPTER 8 NDA-24307

Page 644

Issue 1

DTF104: Display of Attendant Peg Count Data

1. Functional Outline

This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for Type= 4 (ATT Peg Count) assigned by the

ATRF command.

2. Parameters

Traffic Data 1: Terminal Traffic-DTF101

Route Traffic-DTF102

Station Peg Count-DTF103

Attendant Peg Count-DTF104

Route Peg Count-DTF105

Traffic Data 2: Service Peg Count-DTF201

Traffic Data 3: UCD Route Peg Count-DTF301

UCD Group Peg Count-DTF302

UCD Station Peg Count-DTF303

Traffic Data 5: Attendant Answering Peg Count-DTF501

Traffic Data 6: Connection Route Peg Count-DTF601

Connection Route Traffic-DTF602

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 8

Page 645

Issue 1

DTF105: Display of Route Peg Count Data

1. Functional Outline

This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for Type= 5 (Route Peg Count) assigned by the

ATRF command.

2. Parameters

Traffic Data 1: Terminal Traffic-DTF101

Route Traffic-DTF102

Station Peg Count-DTF103

Attendant Peg Count-DTF104

Route Peg Count-DTF105

Traffic Data 2: Service Peg Count-DTF201

Traffic Data 3: UCD Route Peg Count-DTF301

UCD Group Peg Count-DTF302

UCD Station Peg Count-DTF303

Traffic Data 5: Attendant Answering Peg Count-DTF501

Traffic Data 6: Connection Route Peg Count-DTF601

Connection Route Traffic-DTF602

CHAPTER 8 NDA-24307

Page 646

Issue 1

DTF201: Display of Service Peg Count Data

1. Functional Outline

This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for Type= 6 (Service Peg Count) assigned by

the ATRF command.

2. Parameters

Traffic Data 1: Terminal Traffic-DTF101

Route Traffic-DTF102

Station Peg Count-DTF103

Attendant Peg Count-DTF104

Route Peg Count-DTF105

Traffic Data 2: Service Peg Count-DTF201

Traffic Data 3: UCD Route Peg Count-DTF301

UCD Group Peg Count-DTF302

UCD Station Peg Count-DTF303

Traffic Data 5: Attendant Answering Peg Count-DTF501

Traffic Data 6: Connection Route Peg Count-DTF601

Connection Route Traffic-DTF602

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 8

Page 647

Issue 1

DTF301: Display of UCD Route Peg Count Data

1. Functional Outline

This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for Type= 8 (UCD Route Peg Count) assigned

by the ATRF command.

2. Parameters

Traffic Data 1: Terminal Traffic-DTF101

Route Traffic-DTF102

Station Peg Count-DTF103

Attendant Peg Count-DTF104

Route Peg Count-DTF105

Traffic Data 2: Service Peg Count-DTF201

Traffic Data 3: UCD Route Peg Count-DTF301

UCD Group Peg Count-DTF302

UCD Station Peg Count-DTF303

Traffic Data 5: Attendant Answering Peg Count-DTF501

Traffic Data 6: Connection Route Peg Count-DTF601

Connection Route Traffic-DTF602

CHAPTER 8 NDA-24307

Page 648

Issue 1

DTF302: Display of UCD Group Peg Count Data

1. Functional Outline

This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for Type= 9 (UCD Group Peg Count) assigned

by the ATRF command.

2. Parameters

Traffic Data 1: Terminal Traffic-DTF101

Route Traffic-DTF102

Station Peg Count-DTF103

Attendant Peg Count-DTF104

Route Peg Count-DTF105

Traffic Data 2: Service Peg Count-DTF201

Traffic Data 3: UCD Route Peg Count-DTF301

UCD Group Peg Count-DTF302

UCD Station Peg Count-DTF303

Traffic Data 5: Attendant Answering Peg Count-DTF501

Traffic Data 6: Connection Route Peg Count-DTF601

Connection Route Traffic-DTF602

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 8

Page 649

Issue 1

DTF303: Display of Station Peg Count Data

1. Functional Outline

This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for Type= 10 (UCD Station Peg Count) assigned

by the ATRF command.

2. Parameters

Traffic Data 1: Terminal Traffic-DTF101

Route Traffic-DTF102

Station Peg Count-DTF103

Attendant Peg Count-DTF104

Route Peg Count-DTF105

Traffic Data 2: Service Peg Count-DTF201

Traffic Data 3: UCD Route Peg Count-DTF301

UCD Group Peg Count-DTF302

UCD Station Peg Count-DTF303

Traffic Data 5: Attendant Answering Peg Count-DTF501

Traffic Data 6: Connection Route Peg Count-DTF601

Connection Route Traffic-DTF602

CHAPTER 8 NDA-24307

Page 650

Issue 1

DTF501: Display of Attendant Answering Peg Count Data

1. Functional Outline

This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for Type= 15 (ATT Answering Peg Count)

assigned by the ATRF command.

2. Parameters

Traffic Data 1: Terminal Traffic-DTF101

Route Traffic-DTF102

Station Peg Count-DTF103

Attendant Peg Count-DTF104

Route Peg Count-DTF105

Traffic Data 2: Service Peg Count-DTF201

Traffic Data 3: UCD Route Peg Count-DTF301

UCD Group Peg Count-DTF302

UCD Station Peg Count-DTF303

Traffic Data 5: Attendant Answering Peg Count-DTF501

Traffic Data 6: Connection Route Peg Count-DTF601

Connection Route Traffic-DTF602

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 8

Page 651

Issue 1

DTF601: Display of Connection Route Peg Count Data

1. Functional Outline

This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for Type=18 (Connection Route Peg Count)

assigned by the ATRF command.

2. Parameters

Traffic Data 1: Terminal Traffic-DTF101

Route Traffic-DTF102

Station Peg Count-DTF103

Attendant Peg Count-DTF104

Route Peg Count-DTF105

Traffic Data 2: Service Peg Count-DTF201

Traffic Data 3: UCD Route Peg Count-DTF301

UCD Group Peg Count-DTF302

UCD Station Peg Count-DTF303

Traffic Data 5: Attendant Answering Peg Count-DTF501

Traffic Data 6: Connection Route Peg Count-DTF601

Connection Route Traffic-DTF602

CHAPTER 8 NDA-24307

Page 652

Issue 1

DTF602: Display of Connection Route Traffic Data

1. Functional Outline

This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for Type=19 (Connection Route Traffic)

assigned by the ATRF command.

2. Parameters

Traffic Data 1: Terminal Traffic-DTF101

Route Traffic-DTF102

Station Peg Count-DTF103

Attendant Peg Count-DTF104

Route Peg Count-DTF105

Traffic Data 2: Service Peg Count-DTF201

Traffic Data 3: UCD Route Peg Count-DTF301

UCD Group Peg Count-DTF302

UCD Station Peg Count-DTF303

Traffic Data 5: Attendant Answering Peg Count-DTF501

Traffic Data 6: Connection Route Peg Count-DTF601

Connection Route Traffic-DTF602

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 8

Page 653

Issue 1

DTF101N: Display of Terminal Traffic Data for Fusion Network

1. Functional Outline

This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for Type= 1 (Terminal Traffic) assigned by the

ATRFN command.

2. Parameters

Traffic Data 1: Terminal Traffic-DTF101N

Route Traffic-DTF102N

Station Peg Count-DTF103N

Attendant Peg Count-DTF104N

Route Peg Count-DTF105N

Traffic Data 2: Service Peg Count-DTF201N

Traffic Data 3: UCD Route Peg Count-DTF301N

UCD Group Peg Count-DTF302N

UCD Station Peg Count-DTF303N

Traffic Data 5: Attendant Answering Peg Count-DTF501N

Traffic Data 6: Connection Route Peg Count-DTF601N

Connection Route Traffic-DTF602N

CHAPTER 8 NDA-24307

Page 654

Issue 1

DTF102N: Display of Route Traffic Data for Fusion Network

1. Functional Outline

This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for Type= 2 (Route Traffic) assigned by the

ATRFN command.

2. Parameters

Traffic Data 1: Terminal Traffic-DTF101N

Route Traffic-DTF102N

Station Peg Count-DTF103N

Attendant Peg Count-DTF104N

Route Peg Count-DTF105N

Traffic Data 2: Service Peg Count-DTF201N

Traffic Data 3: UCD Route Peg Count-DTF301N

UCD Group Peg Count-DTF302N

UCD Station Peg Count-DTF303N

Traffic Data 5: Attendant Answering Peg Count-DTF501N

Traffic Data 6: Connection Route Peg Count-DTF601N

Connection Route Traffic-DTF602N

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 8

Page 655

Issue 1

DTF103N: Display of Station Peg Count Data for Fusion Network

1. Functional Outline

This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for Type= 3 (Station Peg Count) assigned by the

ATRFN command.

2. Parameters

Traffic Data 1: Terminal Traffic-DTF101N

Route Traffic-DTF102N

Station Peg Count-DTF103N

Attendant Peg Count-DTF104N

Route Peg Count-DTF105N

Traffic Data 2: Service Peg Count-DTF201N

Traffic Data 3: UCD Route Peg Count-DTF301N

UCD Group Peg Count-DTF302N

UCD Station Peg Count-DTF303N

Traffic Data 5: Attendant Answering Peg Count-DTF501N

Traffic Data 6: Connection Route Peg Count-DTF601N

Connection Route Traffic-DTF602N

CHAPTER 8 NDA-24307

Page 656

Issue 1

DTF104N: Display of Attendant Peg Count Data for Fusion Network

1. Functional Outline

This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for Type= 4 (ATT Peg Count) assigned by the

ATRFN command.

2. Parameters

Traffic Data 1: Terminal Traffic-DTF101N

Route Traffic-DTF102N

Station Peg Count-DTF103N

Attendant Peg Count-DTF104N

Route Peg Count-DTF105N

Traffic Data 2: Service Peg Count-DTF201N

Traffic Data 3: UCD Route Peg Count-DTF301N

UCD Group Peg Count-DTF302N

UCD Station Peg Count-DTF303N

Traffic Data 5: Attendant Answering Peg Count-DTF501N

Traffic Data 6: Connection Route Peg Count-DTF601N

Connection Route Traffic-DTF602N

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 8

Page 657

Issue 1

DTF105N: Display of Route Peg Count Data for Fusion Network

1. Functional Outline

This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for Type= 5 (Route Peg Count) assigned by the

ATRFN command.

2. Parameters

Traffic Data 1: Terminal Traffic-DTF101

Route Traffic-DTF102

Station Peg Count-DTF103

Attendant Peg Count-DTF104

Route Peg Count-DTF105

Traffic Data 2: Service Peg Count-DTF201

Traffic Data 3: UCD Route Peg Count-DTF301

UCD Group Peg Count-DTF302

UCD Station Peg Count-DTF303

Traffic Data 5: Attendant Answering Peg Count-DTF501

Traffic Data 6: Connection Route Peg Count-DTF601

Connection Route Traffic-DTF602

CHAPTER 8 NDA-24307

Page 658

Issue 1

DTF201N: Display of Service Peg Count Data for Fusion Network

1. Functional Outline

This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for Type= 6 (Service Peg Count) assigned by

the ATRFN command.

2. Parameters

Traffic Data 1: Terminal Traffic-DTF101N

Route Traffic-DTF102N

Station Peg Count-DTF103N

Attendant Peg Count-DTF104N

Route Peg Count-DTF105N

Traffic Data 2: Service Peg Count-DTF201N

Traffic Data 3: UCD Route Peg Count-DTF301N

UCD Group Peg Count-DTF302N

UCD Station Peg Count-DTF303N

Traffic Data 5: Attendant Answering Peg Count-DTF501N

Traffic Data 6: Connection Route Peg Count-DTF601N

Connection Route Traffic-DTF602N

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 8

Page 659

Issue 1

DTF301N: Display of UCD Route Peg Count Data for Fusion Network

1. Functional Outline

This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for Type= 8 (UCD Route Peg Count) assigned

by the ATRFN command.

2. Parameters

Traffic Data 1: Terminal Traffic-DTF101N

Route Traffic-DTF102N

Station Peg Count-DTF103N

Attendant Peg Count-DTF104N

Route Peg Count-DTF105N

Traffic Data 2: Service Peg Count-DTF201N

Traffic Data 3: UCD Route Peg Count-DTF301N

UCD Group Peg Count-DTF302N

UCD Station Peg Count-DTF303N

Traffic Data 5: Attendant Answering Peg Count-DTF501N

Traffic Data 6: Connection Route Peg Count-DTF601N

Connection Route Traffic-DTF602N

CHAPTER 8 NDA-24307

Page 660

Issue 1

DTF302N: Display of UCD Group Peg Count Data for Fusion Network

1. Functional Outline

This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for Type= 9 (UCD Group Peg Count) assigned

by the ATRFN command.

2. Parameters

Traffic Data 1: Terminal Traffic-DTF101N

Route Traffic-DTF102N

Station Peg Count-DTF103N

Attendant Peg Count-DTF104N

Route Peg Count-DTF105N

Traffic Data 2: Service Peg Count-DTF201N

Traffic Data 3: UCD Route Peg Count-DTF301N

UCD Group Peg Count-DTF302N

UCD Station Peg Count-DTF303N

Traffic Data 5: Attendant Answering Peg Count-DTF501N

Traffic Data 6: Connection Route Peg Count-DTF601N

Connection Route Traffic-DTF602N

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 8

Page 661

Issue 1

DTF303N: Display of Station Peg Count Data for Fusion Network

1. Functional Outline

This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for Type= 10 (UCD Station Peg Count) assigned

by the ATRFN command.

2. Parameters

Traffic Data 1: Terminal Traffic-DTF101N

Route Traffic-DTF102N

Station Peg Count-DTF103N

Attendant Peg Count-DTF104N

Route Peg Count-DTF105N

Traffic Data 2: Service Peg Count-DTF201N

Traffic Data 3: UCD Route Peg Count-DTF301N

UCD Group Peg Count-DTF302N

UCD Station Peg Count-DTF303N

Traffic Data 5: Attendant Answering Peg Count-DTF501N

Traffic Data 6: Connection Route Peg Count-DTF601N

Connection Route Traffic-DTF602N

CHAPTER 8 NDA-24307

Page 662

Issue 1

DTF501N: Display of Attendant Answering Peg Count Data for Fusion Network

1. Functional Outline

This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for Type= 15 (ATT Answering Peg Count)

assigned by the ATRFN command.

2. Parameters

Traffic Data 1: Terminal Traffic-DTF101N

Route Traffic-DTF102N

Station Peg Count-DTF103N

Attendant Peg Count-DTF104N

Route Peg Count-DTF105N

Traffic Data 2: Service Peg Count-DTF201N

Traffic Data 3: UCD Route Peg Count-DTF301N

UCD Group Peg Count-DTF302N

UCD Station Peg Count-DTF303N

Traffic Data 5: Attendant Answering Peg Count-DTF501N

Traffic Data 6: Connection Route Peg Count-DTF601N

Connection Route Traffic-DTF602N

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 8

Page 663

Issue 1

DTF601N: Display of Connection Route Peg Count Data for Fusion Network

1. Functional Outline

This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for Type=18 (Connection Route Peg Count)

assigned by the ATRFN command.

2. Parameters

Traffic Data 1: Terminal Traffic-DTF101N

Route Traffic-DTF102N

Station Peg Count-DTF103N

Attendant Peg Count-DTF104N

Route Peg Count-DTF105N

Traffic Data 2: Service Peg Count-DTF201N

Traffic Data 3: UCD Route Peg Count-DTF301N

UCD Group Peg Count-DTF302N

UCD Station Peg Count-DTF303N

Traffic Data 5: Attendant Answering Peg Count-DTF501N

Traffic Data 6: Connection Route Peg Count-DTF601N

Connection Route Traffic-DTF602N

CHAPTER 8 NDA-24307

Page 664

Issue 1

DTF602N: Display of Connection Route Traffic Data for Fusion Network

1. Functional Outline

This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for Type=19 (Connection Route Traffic)

assigned by the ATRFN command.

2. Parameters

Traffic Data 1: Terminal Traffic-DTF101N

Route Traffic-DTF102N

Station Peg Count-DTF103N

Attendant Peg Count-DTF104N

Route Peg Count-DTF105N

Traffic Data 2: Service Peg Count-DTF201N

Traffic Data 3: UCD Route Peg Count-DTF301N

UCD Group Peg Count-DTF302N

UCD Station Peg Count-DTF303N

Traffic Data 5: Attendant Answering Peg Count-DTF501N

Traffic Data 6: Connection Route Peg Count-DTF601N

Connection Route Traffic-DTF602N

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 8

Page 665

Issue 1

FLINST: File Install

1. Functional Outline

This command is used to install the DPSW-dedicated database files to your MAT. This command is necessary

to provide each circuit card’s various information (such as circuit card name, equipped switch names, etc.)

when your system uses the DPSW/DPKG command.

2. Parameters

Input data

None

Buttons

Copy: Click to start the data file install.

Exit: Click to exit this command.

(1) Start up the FLINST command from the Start menu.

(2) Initial Display of the FLINST command appears. Make sure the proper FD drive name is selected in the

“FDD” parameter.

(3) Click the “Copy” button. Then, a message, requiring to insert the first FD into the FDD drive, appears.

(4) Insert the first FD into the FDD of the MAT. Then, click OK.

(5) File copy starts automatically, and the “Copy End” message appears upon completion.

(6) Click OK. Then, another message asks you whether the next FD is to be installed or not.

(7) Click OK.

(8) A message, requiring to insert the second FD into the FDD drive, appears. Insert the second FD into the

FDD, and click OK.

(9) File copy starts automatically, and the “Copy End” message appears upon completion.

(10) Click OK. Then, a message asks you whether the next (fourth) FD is to be installed or not.

(11) Click Cancel.

CHAPTER 8 NDA-24307

Page 666

Issue 1

HDD_FDD: Data Control Between HDD and FDD

1. Functional Outline

This command is used to install the program data from FDD of PBX to HDD of PBX, and to verify the program

data between FDD of PBX and HDD of PBX.

2. Parameters

Input data

System Select: HFD 0/HFD 1

Direction Select: Floppy Disk to Hard Disk/Verify HDD against FDD/Hard Disk to Floppy Disk

Data Type Selection: Data Memory Note 1

Name Display

Wireless Call Forwarding

Program data Note 2

Call Forwarding

Speed Calling

User Assign Soft Key

Number Sharing Note 3

Call Block

ACD Data Memory

LP Select: This data appears when Call Forwarding, Speed Calling, User Assign Soft Key,

Number Sharing, or Call Block data is designated.

File Name Select

Auto Verify Afterward

Note 1: When “Data Memory” is selected, Local Data Memory (LDM) and Network Data Memory (NDM)

are also saved/verifed simultaneously.

Note 2: “Program data” can be valid when you select “Floppy Disk to Hard Disk” or Verify HDD against

FDD” in the “Direction Select” list box.

Note 3: By saving the Number Sharing data, the data concering “Dual Station Calling Over-FCCS” is also

saved/verifed automatically.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 8

Page 667

Issue 1

HDD_MAT: Data Control Between HDD and MAT

1. Functional Outline

This command is used to save the following data from HDD of PBX to MAT.

2. Parameters

Input data

Direction Select: PBX Hard Disk to MAT/MAT to PBX Hard Disk/Verify HDD against MAT

Data Type Selection: Data Memory Note 1

Name display

Wireless Call Forwarding

Program data Note 2

Call Forwarding

Speed Calling

User Assign Soft Key

Number Sharing Note 3

Call Block

ACD Data Memory

LP Select: This data appears only when Call Forwarding, Speed Calling, User Assign Soft

Key, Number Sharing, or Call Block data is designated.

Auto Verify Afterward

Note 1: When “Data Memory” is selected, Local Data Memory (LDM) and Network Data Memory (NDM)

are also saved/verifed simultaneously.

Note 2: “Program data” can be valid when you select “MAT to PBX Hard Disk” in the “Direction Select”

list box.

Note 3: By saving the Number Sharing data, the data concering “Dual Station Calling Over-FCCS” is also

saved/verifed automatically.

CHAPTER 8 NDA-24307

Page 668

Issue 1

HDD_MAT_N: Data Control Between HDD and MAT for NDM

1. Functional Outline

This command, available at the NCN only, installs (overwrites) the updated Program data from the centralized

MAT onto the HDD of all local nodes. To use this command, first install the updated program data on the HDD

of the MAT and then execute the program installing onto the HDD of each LN.

2. Parameters

Input data

Data Type Selection: Select all the listed program data

Execution Button: Installing of program data is to be executed

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 8

Page 669

Issue 1

HDFP: HDD Format of PBX

1. Functional Outline

This command is used to execute the formatting of the HDD of PBX.

2. Parameters

Input data (Selection by check)

0 System: HDD of No.0 System

1 System: HDD of No.1 System

Buttons

Execute: Click to execute the formatting.

Close: Click to exit this command.

CHAPTER 8 NDA-24307

Page 670

Issue 1

MBCT: Make Busy of Connection Trunk for LDM

1. Functional Outline

This command is used to set/reset the make busy state of the connection trunk.

2. Parameters

Input data

C_RT: Connection Route Number [1-1023]

C_TK: Trunk Number [1-4095]

MB: Make Busy Information [0/1]

0=Make Idle

1=Make Busy (Outgoing)

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 8

Page 671

Issue 1

MBLE: Make Busy of LENS

1. Functional Outline

This command assigns the Idle/Busy status of Line Equipment Numbers (LENS).

2. Parameters

Input data

LENS

MB: 0/1=Make Idle/Make Busy

CHAPTER 8 NDA-24307

Page 672

Issue 1

MBPM: Make Busy of Port Microprocessor

1. Functional Outline

This command sets or resets the make-busy state of the circuit card that contains the port microprocessor. This

setting and resetting is performed individually for each circuit card. If the location of the circuit card containing

the port microprocessor is specified in this command, the operating state of all circuit cards mounted in the

associated unit is displayed.

2. Parameters

Input data

Unit

Group

Display data

MB: (0-1)

0=Make Idle

1=Make Busy

Note: The Idle/Busy status can be displayed and assigned by the MB parameter.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 8

Page 673

Issue 1

MBRT: Make Busy of Route

1. Functional Outline

This command assigns Idle/Busy status for all the trunks in the route designated.

2. Parameters

Input data

RT: Route Number of the external route/internal route. The Internal Route Number and its

meaning is shown in the table below.

MB: 0/1=Make Idle/Make Busy

DATA MEANING DATA MEANING

901 Attendant/Desk Console 902 Originating Register Trunk

903 Incoming Register Trunk 904 MF Receiver

905 Sender Trunk DP/PB 906 PB Receiver for Automated Attendant Service

907 AMP 908 Not used

909 Three-Way Conference Trunk 910-912 Not used

913 Three-Way Conference Trunk for ATTCON 914 Not used

915 Night Attendant Console 916 MFC Register

917 MFC Sender 918 Not used

919-926 Modem 927, 928 Not used

929 Data Signaling Trunk-Option 930 Rate Adapter Conversion Trunk

931-947 Not used

CHAPTER 8 NDA-24307

Page 674

Issue 1

MBSM: Make Busy of System Message Printout

1. Functional Outline

This command allows or inhibits the system message printer to output system messages.

2. Parameters

Input data

PORT NO.: Port Number of the printer

MB: 0/1=Make Idle/Busy

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 8

Page 675

Issue 1

MBST: Make Busy of Station

1. Functional Outline

This command assigns the Idle/Busy status of stations.

2. Parameters

Input data

STN: Maximum 5 digits for Business system/maximum 6 digits for Hotel system.

MB: 0/1=Make Idle/Make Busy

CHAPTER 8 NDA-24307

Page 676

Issue 1

MBST_T: Make Busy of Station - Telephone Number

1. Functional Outline

This command is used to assign the IDLE/BUSY status of stations, by using Telephone Numbers. This com-

mand is available at NCN (for Fusion network) only. Note 1

Note 1: This command is available for PBX program software.

2. Parameters

Input Data

UGN: User Group Number

TELN: Telephone Number (max. 16 digits)

MB: Make Busy/Make Idle

Display Data

FPC: Fusion Point Code (1-253) Note 2

TN: Tenant Number Note 2

STN: Physical Station Number (max. 5 digits for Business system/max. 6 digits for Hotel

system) Note 2

Note 2: This data is for display only.

Buttons

Get: Click to get information on the station

Set: Click to execute the BUSY/IDLE performance.

Exit: Click to exit this command.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 8

Page 677

Issue 1

MBTC: Make Busy of Trunk-Continuous

1. Functional Description

This command is used to assign the IDLE/BUSY status of trunks. By using this command, plural trunks can

be placed into IDLE/BUSY state simultaneously per a route designated in “RT” parameter.

2. Parameters

RT: Route Number

TK: Trunk Number Note 1

MB: 0=Make Idle

1=Make Busy(Outgoing)

2=Make Busy (Bothway) Note 2

Note 1: Plural trunks can be assigned simultaneously per a route designated in “RT” parameter.

Note 2: 2=Make Busy (Bothway) is not used.

CHAPTER 8 NDA-24307

Page 678

Issue 1

MBTK: Make Busy of Trunk

1. Functional Outline

This command assigns the Idle/Busy status of trunks.

2. Parameters

RT: Route Number

TK: Trunk Number

MB: 0=Make Idle

1=Make Busy (Outgoing)

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 8

Page 679

Issue 1

MEM_HDD: Data Control Between Memory and HDD

1. Functional Outline

This command is used to save the following data from MEM of PBX to HDD of PBX, and vice versa.

2. Parameters

Input data

Direction Select: Memory to Hard Disk/Hard Disk to Memory/Verify HDD against MEM

Data Type Selection: Data Memory Note 1

Name Display

Wireless Call Forwarding

Call Forwarding

Speed Calling

User Assign Soft Key

Number Sharing Note 2

Call Block

ACD Data Memory

LP Select: This data is valid when Call Forwarding, Speed Calling, User Assign Soft Key,

Number Sharing or Call Block data is designated.

Auto Verify Afterward

Note 1: When “Data Memory” is selected, Local Data Memory (LDM) and Network Data Memory (NDM)

are also saved/verified simultaneously.

Note 2: By saving the Number Sharing data, the data concerning “Dual Station Calling Over-FCCS is also

saved/verified automatically.

CHAPTER 8 NDA-24307

Page 680

Issue 1

MEM_HDD_N: Data Control Between Memory and HDD for NDM

1. Functional Outline

This command, available at the NCN only, is used to save/verify a series of Office Data from the Memory of

all Local Nodes to the HDD of the same node.

2. Parameters

Input data

Direction Select: MEM to HDD/Verify HDD against MEM

Data Type Selection: Data Memory Note 1

Name Display

Wireless Call Forwarding

Call Forwarding

Speed Calling

User Assign Soft Key

Number Sharing Note 2

Call Block

ACD Data Memory

LP Select: The parameter is valid when Call Forwarding, Speed Calling, User Assign Soft

Key, Number Sharing, or Call Block data is designated.

Auto Verify Afterward

Note 1: When “Data Memory” is selected, Local Data Memory (LDM) and Network Data Memory (NDM)

are also saved/verified simultaneously.

Note 2: By saving the Number Sharing data, the data concerning “Dual Station Calling Over-FCCS is also

saved/verified automatically.

Display data

Information: FPC of Node in which saving/verifying is executed

Result of the execution

Direction: MEM to HDD/Verify HDD against MEM

Data Type: Selected Data Type

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 8

Page 681

Issue 1

MFCH: Make Busy of FCCH

1. Functional Outline

This command is used to set or reset the make busy state of the FCH card.

2. Parameters

Input data

FCHN: FCH Number [1-255]

MB: Make Busy Information [0/1]

0=Make Idle

1=Make Busy

CHAPTER 8 NDA-24307

Page 682

Issue 1

PMBU: Port Microprocessor Back Up

1. Functional Outline

This command saves the contents of Port Microprocessor (PM) onto Floppy Disk (FD) or verifies them.

Information of firmware (Program Code) also appears on the screen.

2. Parameters

Input data

Direction Select: Port Microprocessor to MAT/Verify Port Microprocessor/Verify PM with Error

List Auto Verify Afterward can be performed when designating Port

Microprocessor to MAT.

PM Information: Module Group/Unit/Group/Data Size(1-6) See the following data:

1=2 Kbytes

2=4 Kbytes

3=8 Kbytes

4=16Kbytes

5=32Kbytes

6=64Kbytes

Display data

Office

SP Number: Information of firmware (Program Code)

SP Issue: Information of firmware (Program Code)

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 8

Page 683

Issue 1

RALM: Release Alarm

1. Functional Outline

This command clears the fault indications.

2. Parameters

Input data

WRT: Y/N=Alarm is released/Not released

RETURN TO MENU?: Y/N=Return to MENU/Start operation again

Display data

Alarms Released

CHAPTER 8 NDA-24307

Page 684

Issue 1

RALMN: Release Alarm for NDM

1. Functional Outline

This command, available at the NCN only, clears the fault indications of all the nodes by clicking the release

button on the display.

2. Parameters

Display data

FPC: FPC of alarm released nodes

Status: Result of releasing the alarm

OK/NG

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 8

Page 685

Issue 1

RLST: Release Station/Trunk

1. Functional Outline

This command releases a station or trunk.

2. Parameters

Input data

TYPE: Type of Select (1-4)

1=Stations

2=Trunk

3=LENS

4=Connection Trunk

TN: Note 1

STN: Maximum 6 digits Note 1

RT: Note 2

TK: Note 2

LENS: Note 3

Connection RT: (1-1023) Note 4

Connection TK: (1-4095) Note 4

Note 1: This parameter is valid only when TYPE= 1.

Note 2: This parameter is valid only when TYPE= 2.

Note 3: This parameter is valid only when TYPE= 3.

Note 4: This parameter is valid only when TYPE= 4.

Display data

STATUS: Status of Station/Trunk(1-4)

1=Idle

2=Busy

3=Lockout

4=Make Busy

FPC: Fusion Point Code (1-253)

INFORMATION: Information of the connected party Note

Note: This parameter appears only when STATUS= 2.

CHAPTER 8 NDA-24307

Page 686

Issue 1

RLST_T: Release Station/Trunk - Telephone Number

1. Functional Outline

This command is used to release a station/trunk, by using Telephone Numbers. This command is available at

NCN (for Fusion network) only. Note

Note: This command is available for PBX program software.

2. Parameters

Input Data

TYPE: Telephone Number

Trunk

LENS

Connection Trunk

UGN: User Group Number Note 1

TELN: Telephone Number (max. 16 digits) Note 1

RT: External/Internal Route Number Note 2

TK: Trunk Number Note 2

LENS: Line Equipment Number Note 3

C_RT: Connection Route Number (1-1023) Note 4

C_TK: Connection Trunk Number (1-4095) Note 4

Note 1: This parameter is valid when “Telephone Number” is designated in the “TYPE” selection list box.

Note 2: This parameter is valid when “Trunk” is designated in the “TYPE” selection list box.

Note 3: This parameter is valid when “LENS” is designated in the “TYPE” selection list box.

Note 4: This parameter is valid when “Connection Trunk” is designated in the “TYPE” selection list box.

Display Data

FPC: Fusion Point Code (1-253)

TN: Tenant Number Note 5

STN: Physical Station Number (max. 5 digits for Business/max. 6 digits for Hotel system)

Note 5

STATUS: Status of Station/Trunk (1-5)

1 = Idle

2 = Busy

3 = Lockout

4 = Make Busy

5 = Now Calling

INFORMATION: Information on the connected party Note 6

ERN: Area Number (1-32) Note 7

GRN: Group Number (1-8) Note 7

CSN/ZTN: CS/ZT Number (1-32) Note 7

PCN: PHS Community Number (1-1024) Note 7

Note 5: This data is displayed when “Telephone Number” is designated in the “TYPE” selection list box.

Note 6: This data is displayed when “STATUS” = 2 (Busy).

Note 7: This data is for Wireless system only.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 8

Page 687

Issue 1

RLST_T: Release Station/Trunk - Telephone Number

Buttons

Get: Click to get information on the station/trunk

Release: Click to execute the station/trunk release.

Exit: Click to exit this command

CHAPTER 8 NDA-24307

Page 688

Issue 1

SINZ: System Initialization

1. Functional Outline

This command initializes the PBX from the MAT. At the time of system initialization, this command allows

the programs and the office data to be loaded from a Hard Disk of PBX into the RAM of PBX.

2. Parameters

Input data

TYPE: Kind of Initialization (1-4)

1=System Initialize

2=System Initialize Office Data Load & System Initialize

3=System Initialize Program Load & System Initialize

4=System Initialize Program & Office Data Load & System Initialize

Note: When the system is intialized, the MAT is disconnnected. Then, log in to the system again.

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 8

Page 689

Issue 1

SINZI: System Initialization for ISW

1. Functional Outline

This command is used to initialize ISW and all the LNs in IPX-U system from the MAT. Also, at the time of

system initialization, this command allows the programs and the office data to be loaded from a Hard Disk of

PBX into the RAM of PBX. To use this command, the MAT must be connected to ISW.

2. Parameters

Input data

TYPE SELECT: Kind of Initialization(1-4)

1=Non Load

2=Program Load

3=DM Load

4=Program Load & DM Load

EXECUTION BUTTON : Initialization is to be executed

Display data

FPC: FPC of executed Node

RESPONSE: Result of initialization

OK/NG

Note: When the system is initialized, the MAT is once disconnected. Then, log in to the system again.

CHAPTER 8 NDA-24307

Page 690

Issue 1

SPTS: Scanning of Port Status

1. Functional Outline

This command displays momentarily the working status of Port Microprocessor (PM) on Module Group (MG),

Unit and Group basis.

2. Parameters

Input data

Unit

Group

Interval: The unit for this parameter is second

Display data

PKG TYPE: (0-255)

PKG Status: 1/2=On Line/Make Busy

SP No.: Program information (1-3999)

ISSUE: Firmware Issue (0-4)

LEVEL STATUS

DATA MEANING DATA MEANING DATA MEANING DATA MEANING

0LC 1TRK 2RST 3ATI

4DLC 5Not used 6CFT 7MASTER T

8 SMI 9 MODEM T 10-15 Not used 16 DATA LC

17 DTI 18 HDT 19 GWT 20 DST

21-254 Not used 255 Not assigned

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 8

Page 691

Issue 1

SPTS: Scanning of Port Status

PORT STATUS: when TYPE= “1”

0=circuit card is not mounted or Make Busy

1=More than one port in a group is Idle

2=All port in a group is busy

3=All port in a group is Hard Make Busy or Soft Make Busy

when TYPE= “2”/“3”

0=Not assigned

1=Line Idle

2=Line Busy

3=Make Busy

4=Lockout

PORT DATA

KIND: Type of Port (1,2)

1/2=Station/Trunk

TN: Note 1

STN: Maximum 6 digits Note 1

TEC: Telephone Equipment Number (1-31) Note 1

CHAPTER 8 NDA-24307

Page 692

Issue 1

SPTS: Scanning of Port Status

RT: Note 2

TK: Note 2

TCL: Trunk Class (1-31) Note 2

RT: Route Number

DATA MEANING DATA MEANING

1 DP (10pps) 2 PB

3 DP/PB 4 DP (20pps)

5-11 Not used 12 Dterm

13 Data Terminal via Dterm 14 Hot Line

15 CAS Line 16 Data Terminal via Data Module

17 Not used 18 Virtual Line Appearance (for Dterm

Multi-Line)

19-20 Not used 21 ACD (MIS)

22 Not used 23 ISDN Terminal

24-26 Not used 27 Eight Conference Equipment

28-31 Not used

DATA MEANING DATA MEANING

1DDD Line 2FX

3WATS 4Tie Line

5 CCSA 6 Toll Terminal

7CAS Line 8Paging

9 Code Call Trunk 10 Dictation Trunk

11 Radio Paging Trunk 12-31 Not used

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 8

Page 693

Issue 1

SPTS: Scanning of Port Status

Note 1: The parameter is only for KIND = 1.

Note 2: The parameter is only for KIND= 2.

DATA MEANING DATA MEANING

901 Attendant Console 902 Originating Register Trunk

903 Incoming Register Trunk 904 MF Receiver

905 Sender Trunk DP/PB 906 PB Receiver for Automated Attendant Service

907AMP 908Not used

909 Three-Way Conference Trunk 910-912 Not used

913 Three-Way Conference Trunk for ATTCON 914 Not used

915 Night Attendant 916 MFC Register

917 MFC Sender 918 Not used

919-926 Modem 927, 928 Not used

929 MFC Sender 930 Rate Adapter Conversion Trunk

931 Not used 932-947 Not used

CHAPTER 8 NDA-24307

Page 694

Issue 1

SRTS: Scanning of Route Status

1. Functional Outline

This command displays the designated trunk status (Busy/Idle) at predetermined intervals. A maximum of 15

routes can be scanned.

2. Parameters

Input data

RT: Route Number

Interval Time

Display data

Number of Idle TK

Number of Busy

NDA-24307 CHAPTER 8

Page 695

Issue 1

XHFD: X-RAY HD or FDD Diagnosis

1. Functional Outline

This command is used to execute the following diagnoses.

•Hard Disk Diagnosis

By executing read/write check on the files in the hard disk of the PBX, this command diagnoses the hard

disk for its normality.

If an error has been found as a result of the diagnosis, this command displays the information on the faulty

logical drive and the number of faulty sectors on the MAT screen. The information can also be output by

the printer.

•Floppy Disk Diagnosis

By executing cleaning of the floppy disk drive in the PBX, this command diagnoses the floppy disk drive

for its normality.

If the cleaning has not finished normally, a diagnosis error has been found as a result of the diagnosis. The

result message may be displayed on the MAT screen or printed out by the printer.

2. Parameters

Input data

FUNCTION: HD/FDD Designation [1/2]

1=Diagnosis of HD (Hard Disk)

2=Diagnosis of FDD (Floppy Disk Drive)

AREA: Area Designation [0/l] Note

0=All Files

1=Program Files

SYSTEM: System (0/1)

0=No.0 System

1=No.1 System

Note: “AREA” parameter appears only when “1(=HD)” is selected in the “FUNCTION” parameter.

Buttons

Exe: Click to execute the diagnosis.

Close: Click to exist this command.

CHAPTER 8 NDA-24307

Page 696

Issue 1

XHFD: X-RAY HD or FDD Diagnosis

Display data

FAULT DRIVE: Fault Drive Number [0-4]

0=-

1=#0

2=#1

3=#2

4=#3

FAULT SECTOR: Number of Fault Sector [0-65535]

MESSAGE: Result of diagnosis [0-255]

0=Normal End

1=Hard disk read test practice error

2=Floppy disk drive cleaning practice error

3=Common part parameter error (Data length error)

4=FDD cleaning abnormal end (FD not in drive)

5=Individual part parameter error (Function error)

6=Individual part parameter error (Sub function error)

7=Individual part parameter error (Device error)

8=Individual part parameter error (Drive selection error)

9=Individual part parameter error (Data ID error)

10=Individual part parameter error (Processor ID error)

11=Individual part parameter error (File ID error)

12=Individual part parameter error (File name error)

13=Request order error (Health check send error)

14=Request order error (Data send signal error)

15=Internal error (File open error)

16=Internal error (File read error)

17=Internal error (File close error)

18=Internal error (FAT error)

19=Internal error (SCSIC error)

20=Internal error (other)

21=Hard interface abnormal end

22-255=-

NEAX2400 IPX System Operations And Maintenance Manual (IPX U Type) PDF NEC Op Maint Type

IPX System Op and Maint (IPX-U Type)(2430710w) IPX System Op and Maint (IPX-U Type)(2430710w)

NEC IPX System Op and Maint IPX U Type NEC_IPX_System_Op_and_Maint_IPX_U_Type www.TelecomUserGuides.com Access User Guides, Manuals and Brochures

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation